Tag Archives: Conspiracies

The CIA’s Presidents

Some presidents backed up CIA pretty good and some of them tried to tell the Truth and got bullet to the head…

The CIA’s Presidents

Any unmasking of the shadow forces that pull the strings that often determine events requires a time frame context. Historical study can go back to antiquity for classic examples of surreptitious intrigue, but in an age of distorted and diachronic mind control, the creation of the CIA by President Truman was our modern day and literal water shed monument. Coming out of the Office of Strategic Services, the brainchild of Wild Bill Donovan developed into the playpen of Allen Dulles.

The OSS origins on their face are clandestine by nature. Spooks and spies might be a trendy name for a board game, but when the pieces on the squares are pushed in direction of liquidation and oblivion, the uninitiated are truly the uneducated, for not grasping their significance. Being one of those pieces requires the responsibility of every citizen to wake up out of their lethargy.

Research material is so extensive that penning another account on the hidden secrets behind the throne may just confuse the public even more. One needs to take off the blinders and face the consequences of the big picture. Presidents have seldom been autonomous leaders. Those who demonstrated independence, integrity and courage were either marginalized and banished from positions of influence or killed.

The CIA is not just a standalone organization. The “Agency” is more of a euphemism than a society of black bag hit squads. The underlying ethos that underpins the operations and missions of the “Intelligence Community” has a distinct purpose. Never let an administration, much less a President, gain the actual power to rule the country or the global empire.

Until people accept and admit that the “SYSTEM’ is the ultimate crime syndicate, no one can liberate their minds or their circumstances.

Few remember the black and white culture that existed in the United States forty years ago. John Chuckman writes in the Foreign Policy Journal, The CIA and America’s Presidents.

“The 1975 Church Senate Committee looking into earlier illegality came into being because a number of sources were suggesting the CIA had been engaged in assassination and other dark practices, matters which at that time quite upset the general public and some decent politicians.”

Two things are totally different all these years later. Only a grub living under a rock would be shocked by reports that the government continues a policy of “dark practices”. But they would be genuinely surprised if someone could find and prove there is a single descent politician.

Examine the record. George H. W. Bush, was a CIA director, his successor William Jefferson Clinton was a CIA asset during his years avoiding his Rhode Scholar classes, George W. Bush another Skull and Bones diabolist followed in the family’s footsteps and who could forget the current POTUS, Barack Hussein Obama II the son of a CIA recruit and a 3D printed prototype of a mystery man with a false identity. The manufactured indoctrination of these anointed commanders in chief is the true definition of “The Good Shepherd” movie account.

The Great Man theory of history has been relegated to the most efficient synthesis organization that is based upon the official version of elitism “Political Correctness”.

Presidents must surrender their contrary visions, objections and actions against the established order. However, that power embodied by the supra elites, requires a silhouette caricature of subversion as their instrument of coercion, while bearing the focal image of blame.

No balanced observance of sincere national interest would dispute that the function of gathering information and analysis of its significance is out of bounds in a civilized society. The bounds, extent and intrusive methods are fair game for debate; however, the need to know is valid.

Deciding who should have access to that information is a core concern. When Hillary Clinton is allowed to violate even the most rudimentary security practices, one has to wonder why she is so special to get away with her treason.

In the book, Compromised: Clinton, Bush and the CIA by Terry Reed, critic John Cummings looks at the definitive book on the Mena connection that bonds the Clinton’s and the Bush’s with their CIA overseers. A short video that interviews a Former C I A Agent Chip Tatum On George H W Bush Bill Clinton’s Cocaine Smuggling Connect, provides first hand testimony.

The point of going over a decades old record that was a bomb shell at the time, but never gaining the critical political mass support within the government is that nothing has really changed in all these passing years.

Looking at this experience from the vantage of a conspiracy perspective misses the very essence of how power is imposed on the planet. The question is not does the CIA control American Presidents, but the proper perspective is to embrace has the psychopathic globalist implement their sociopathic system of command and control on humanity, using organizations like the CIA to foster the sinister strategy of enslavement that every President promotes.

Taylor Caldwell’s master work in her book, Captains and the Kings, is not just the story of an American Dynasty; it is a template of the way the world actually operates.

The forbidden reality that is suppressed is that any President may order men and women to their deaths for trivial jingoistic reasons, but none of these fearless leaders can tame the hidden cabals that keep the Nefarious Warrior Organism growing and destroying humanity. The NWO is served by intelligence organizations, even when they jockey with their foreign counterparts for a perceived advantage.

The CIA conducts their cloak-and-dagger wars in plain sight. If U.S. Dollars cannot buy loyalty, a hellfire strike from a drone will kill you. Such a foreign interventionism is not a beneficial policy protecting our country.

Managing the poppy field in Afghanistan to keep the opium trade profitable is far more important to the boys from Yale, than defending our own borders from the mujahideen terrorists, who were trained and taught many tricks of the trade under the tutelage of Agency contract mercenaries.

Eating one’s own is not taboo when the political powers on high deem a sacrifice is needed. Former Director David Petraeus is no General George S. Patton, but he was thrown under the bus quicker than in a New York minute.

The irony that the former NY Senator, Hillary Clinton can get another pass to her much more grave violations of security and law, only goes to prove that being the CIA top spy does not provide enough protection, when the ‘Arkancide” mafia family is threatened.

Now you know the substantial value of all those J. Edgar Hoover secret files when it comes down to the blackmail game.

Avid history buffs always ask the question. Who are behind and actually controls the puppets that are selected to win elections? This is no connivance experiment to out the most unlikable villain that a Hollywood CIA script writer can pen. No, the film industry has always been an integral part of a dream machine to spoof the public with subtle reminders of who is really in control.

The flick, ‘Spectre’ Is The Worst 007 Movie In 30 Years, reveals an important lesson.

“Pretty much everything Spectre has to offer amounts to something that a previous Bond movie did better. And that’s the trap of doing a Bond movie in the “generational nostalgia” sandbox. You end up replaying the best parts of other films and reminding audiences that prior 007 adventures did it better. The notion of 007 doing generational nostalgia is interesting and timely, but the end result is merely an example of it rather than a dissection or deconstruction.”

The message about replaying the best parts from other operations should not go unnoticed. How else can an immortal demonic enterprise continue their dissection and deconstruction of civilization?

There is no hero coming, who will mix shaken elixirs that will stir the public to go cold turkey and jump on the wagon of political sobriety. The CIA is meant to distract the television addicts to become and remain junkies of false reality propaganda. The “so called” threats of the last sixty plus years were necessary to divert the public away from the consolidation of power under NWO governance that is totally visible for everyone to see.

Another Bay of Pigs looms. This time it will be nuclear, and there in no JFK in the oval office. Nor will it take place in Cuba. Obama awaits the development of condos on the shores of Guantanamo Bay. CIA agents reserved their slot and are on the waiting list.

The synergistic and comingling of mutual interests drives the interdependency among different factions within the family structure of government mob enterprise. Ideological deviations are mostly for populace amusement.

When the professional assassin bureau engages in plausible deniability, they are really contracting out the assignment to an expendable fall guy. Can anyone shout out Oswald?

The figure head position of the most powerful person in the free world is less mighty than the corpse of E. Howard Hunt. Those magic bullets always hit the wrong victims.

>> Video


Read more from Auricmedia:


The world’s real puppetmasters

It’s a monstrous agenda behind our reality, which everyone must solve out by themselves. I have been done it since 2001.

>> Video

The Illuminati are portrayed by conspiracy theorists and Christian and Muslim Fundamentalists as the puppetmasters of the world. The world’s real puppetmasters are self-evident: they are the 80 individuals who own more wealth than half the world’s population. The 80 are the Archons of free-market capitalism, and are propped up by the vast capitalist infrastructure that exists solely to serve their private, selfish interests. They are mired in privilege, cronyism and nepotism. The governments and nation states of the world are fully in their service and never under any circumstances do they take any action against them.

This is the most unequal period in human history. By next year, 1% of the world’s population will own more wealth than the other 99%. Winnie Byanyima, executive director of Oxfam International, asked, “Do we really want to live in a world where the 1% own more than the rest of us combined? The scale of global inequality is quite simply staggering and despite the issues shooting up the global agenda, the gap between the richest and the rest is widening fast.”

The wealth of the richest 80 doubled in cash terms between 2009 and 2014. Increasingly, wealth is inherited and used to finance lobbyists who are paid to further their wealthy clients’ own interests, and not those of the people … of private wealth, not the Commonwealth. All elected politicians are puppets of the Old World Order of dynastic wealth and power.

The true Bible of the Power Elite is Ayn Rand’s toxic Atlas Shrugged, her sickenening hymn to selfishness. Nearly all conspiracy theorists are fanatical Randroids, and they are absolutely right that we are their Nemesis. Our mission is to bring to a permanent end the anti-democratic and anti-meritocratic rule of the privileged, dynastic elites that run the world and create a false consciousness in the sheeple that blindly support them.

Conspiracy theories are used by the Elite to promote the agenda of unrestrained free-market capitalist globalism. Conspiracy theories are all about calling into question the inherent legitimacy of governments and nation states, so that they can be replaced by capitalist markets, wholly controlled by the rich Elite … by the 80.

The 80 are unelected and unaccountable to the people, and that’s exactly what Elitism – supported by legions of right-wing anarcho-capitalist libertarians and anti-Jacobin conspiracy theorists – is all about. The right wingers of the world are all about promoting private interest over the public interest, self-service over public service, selfishness over altruism, irrationalism over Reason, greed over need, narcissism over respect for others. Right wingers are on the psychopathic spectrum. They invariably love themselves and rail against anyone or any group that seeks to stand up to them and stop the hawk predators from feeding on the innocent, harmless doves.

“If it were necessary to give the briefest possible definition of imperialism, we should have to say that imperialism is the monopoly stage of capitalism.”
– Lenin

Capitalist Globalism – making the whole world dance to the Old World Order’s economic rule in perpetuity – is the supreme expression of imperialism. Capitalist Globalism is the One World Government that the rich Elite are implementing to ensure that they rule every corner of the globe.

“Capitalism is the astounding belief that the most wickedest of men will do the most wickedest of things for the greatest good of everyone.”
– John Maynard Keynes

“Under capitalism, man exploits man. Under communism, it’s just the opposite.”
– John Kenneth Galbraith

“Capitalism is an organized system to guarantee that greed becomes the primary force of our economic system and allows the few at the top to get very wealthy and has the rest of us riding around thinking we can be that way, too – if we just work hard enough, sell enough Tupperware and Amway products, we can get a pink Cadillac.”
– Michael Moore

“Capitalism is against the things that we say we believe in – democracy, freedom of choice, fairness. It’s not about any of those things now. It’s about protecting the wealthy and legalizing greed.”
– Michael Moore

“The decadent international but individualistic capitalism in the hands of which we found ourselves after the war is not a success. It is not intelligent. It is not beautiful. It is not just. It is not virtuous. And it doesn’t deliver the goods.”
– John Maynard Keynes

“The great nations have always acted like gangsters, and the small nations like prostitutes.”
– Stanley Kubrick

The biggest “nation” of all … the One World system of Global Capitalism, which rules everything … is the ultimate gangster, and all the rest of us are the prostitutes, begging for money from the Elite while they fuck us up the ass.

Just as Judaism, Christianity and Islam have always been terrorist religions – terrorising people with the threat of the wrath of “God” and eternal pain and suffering in hell – so free-market capitalism has never been anything other than gangsterism, where those with capital point a gun at the head of those without. It’s time to stop being the slaves of the Elite. It’s time for the people to rule.

“For all men being originally equal, no one by birth could have a right to set up his own family in perpetual preference to all others for ever, and though himself might deserve some decent degree of honour of his contemporaries, yet his descendants might be far too unworthy to inherit them. One of the strongest natural proofs of the folly of the hereditary right in kings, is, that nature disapproves it, otherwise she would not so frequently turn it into ridicule by giving mankind an ass for a lion.”
– Thomas Paine

“The aristocracy are not the farmers who work the land, and raise the produce, but are the mere consumers of the rent; and when compared with the active world are the drones, a seraglio of males, who neither collect the honey nor form the hive, but exist only for lazy enjoyment.”
– Thomas Paine

“Every age and generation must be as free to act for itself, in all cases, as the ages and generation which preceded it. The vanity and presumptions of governing beyond the grave is the most ridiculous and insolent of all tyrannies.”
– Thomas Paine

Inheritance is the precise mechanism by which the dead tyrannically rule over the living. When you’re dead, you’re dead. Your wealth does not live on to be inherited by nepotistic scroungers who did nothing to earn it. Inheritance is welfare for rich folk, and no decent person would ever accept it. Inheritance is how the rich control the poor and keep them in their “place”. It’s how the dead rule from beyond the grave. The dead have no legal rights and no stake in the world of the living. Post mortem transfers of wealth, power and influence must be made illegal via Pro Life legislation, i.e. legislation designed to ensure that corpses cannot dictate the future of the human race via selectively handing on decisive financial advantage to the chosen few (the “Chosen People”).

The mission of the rich elites is to set up their families to rule over the rest of us in perpetuity. They call for zero percent inheritance tax, and inheritance is of course the means by which they transmit overwhelming advantage across the generations, how they rig the system, and how they establish the all-powerful cartel from which all the rest of us are excluded if we are fools and cowards enough to go along with it. What is the antidote to dynastic rule, and what is it that the rich elites hate and fear more than anything else? … it’s one hundred percent inheritance tax. Anyone who opposes this tax – the tax that ensures that no dynasty can rule the world via inherited wealth (parasitical wealth, unearned by the deadbeats and dead heads who pathetically grab it because they are incapable of standing on their own two feet and earning their own money by their own sweat and effort) – opposes human progress and freedom. Anyone who resists total inheritance tax supports anti-meritocracy and the dynastic rule of rich elites. We note that all the cretinous conspiracy theorists rage against inheritance tax, and call it “communism” – exactly as required by their rich puppetmasters. Here’s the simple truth of the world:

1) Thesis: Free-market Capitalism … unequal opportunities and unequal outcomes.

2) Antithesis: Communism … equal opportunities and equal outcomes.

3) Synthesis: Meritocracy … equal opportunities and unequal outcomes.

Meritocracy is about the smartest, most talented people … from any background, no matter how humble or disadvantaged … getting to the top so that the rest of us can benefit from their expertise, intelligence and merit. It’s not a question of a rising tide of money raising all boats, but of a rising tide of intelligence and talent.

The proper function of the State is to optimise itself through optimising each and every one of its citizens. It has to maximise the potential of everyone, from any background. The optimal State is the one governed by its smartest and most meritorious citizens – Plato’s Philosopher Kings, who are not allowed to accumulate any private wealth and must be devoted entirely to the public good, the opposite of today’s rulers of the world.

Every person must be allowed to go as far as their talents take them, and that means they must not be up against a rigged system of privilege, cronyism and nepotism, designed to favour the children of the Elite and to obstruct the progress of everyone else.

Free-market capitalism exists to free the capitalists and enslave everyone else. Aren’t you sick of being a slave? Then do something about it. Get off your fucking ass.

No Taxation Without Representation

The American rebels against British imperial tyranny rightly demanded representation in Parliament. Nowadays, you routinely find American “patriots” demanding the end of government, and its replacement by the market. So, here’s a question for all the “patriots” … given that the markets are run by and for global banks, global corporations, and the global super rich, in what way are the markets accountable to the people? Can we vote the “market” or its controllers out of office? Can we fire any of the big market makers and players? Are we represented on the boards of any of the big market makers and players? Do the ordinary people have any say at all over the market? And, if they don’t, isn’t that tyranny? The market is tyranny without a face, or the face of the rich carefully hidden behind a faceless abstraction so that we can’t see the tyrant stamping on our face

The Divine Conspiracy

What is the Armageddon Conspiracy? It’s the Plot to Kill “God” … the Abrahamic Torture God, the Abrahamic Terrorist God … The Devil God who orders fathers to murder their own children as a test of slavish, blind obedience.

Illuminati Coded Fiction

“The Armageddon Conspiracy” by Mike Hockney – the ancient Solomonic plot to kill the Abrahamic God, brought into the twenty-first century.

“The Millionaires’ Death Club” by Mike Hockney – no one is safe from the world’s smartest, most glamorous, most stylish elite who will go to any lengths, even murder, to have their “fun”.

“Prohibition A” by Mike Hockney – Dante’s nine circles of hell are transported to Manhattan for the ultimate game of life and death.

“The Last Bling King” by Mike Hockney – the plot of the elite to own the whole world in perpetuity, and the ingenious counterplot to overthrow them.

You are the change in the world. If you don’t change, the world won’t change.

It’s time to undergo your appointed metamorphosis … from grub to hero, from worm to God.
Change is the basis of everything, and the thing most in need of change isn’t the world but always yourself. When you change, you will see the world with brand new eyes, you will see that all things are possible, and you will see a thousand new beginnings.
Step up your game, motherfuckers. Bring your “A” game or don’t bother showing up. Who wants the second best, the second rate, the half-hearted, the mediocre?
The Movement wants only the achievers, the talented, those who can make things happen rather than just talking about it or moaning about it.

The Most Forsaken Place in the Universe

In Dante’s vision of hell, a vestibule stands between the gates of hell and the river Acheron (the river of woe) where Charon the Boatman ferries the damned across the fast-moving river of pitch-black water to the First Circle of Hell, Hell proper.

As they pass through the vestibule, the souls of the damned encounter a strange sight – the Lost Souls. While the damned don’t linger in the vestibule for long – they’re just passing through – the group of Lost Souls is trapped there … forever! These are the souls rejected by both heaven and hell. Heaven shut its gates to them, and hell doesn’t want them, so they have nowhere to go. They have no home. They are lost in No Man’s Land.

What did they do to suffer this fate? These were the souls that refused to support one side or the other in life – they were the neutrals, the uncommitted, those who lived for themselves, those who joined no cause except their own. They did not choose either good or evil but lived their lives without making any conscious moral choices whatsoever. They were cynical and skeptical, always calculating their personal advantage.

In Christian mythology, when Lucifer’s angels rebelled against God, and Michael the Archangel led the loyal angels against them, many angels remained neutral, standing on the sidelines, waiting to see who would win. When God cast down the rebel angels into hell, he made sure he cast down these neutrals too, but they were no more wanted by Satan than by God, so they remained permanently on the near side of hell’s river, banned from ever crossing, and equally banned from ever leaving.

Such is the destiny of those who refuse to choose a cause, who refuse to commit, refuse to follow a banner. They are called the Ignavi, and they are the most pathetic and ignoble of all creatures. They are the Last Men, the opposite of the Supermen. They are the feeble, laughable creatures that remain when heaven and hell have received all of the souls they are willing to take.

The Ignavi are the selfish, the self-obsessed, always looking for their own benefit, and never willing to choose a side, never willing to fight, to risk themselves, to make any sacrifices. Their calculation is always the same: let others fight it out and then see how the land lies at the end when the smoke clears. See what opportunities there are to gain profit for themselves … you know, like free-market capitalists. They are the cowardly “neutrals” who refuse to side with any cause until it’s obvious who’s winning (i.e. they have no ideological commitment and would support whoever won, thus maximizing their self-interest). Most of humanity belong to the Ignavi, not to the Damned or the Saved. Neither God nor the Devil has anything but contempt for them.

The fate of the Ignavi is a terrible one. They are condemned to run naked forever behind a blank banner (the flag of all those with no cause except themselves), fluttering one way and then another (i.e. never settling into a definite position reflecting a definite cause), and which they can never catch (just as they could never catch a cause in life).

As they chase the flag, they are ceaselessly stung by hornets and wasps. With each sting, blood and putrid matter leak from them, feeding the writhing mass of worms and maggots that they are forced to run across. In life, they refused to be stung by any cause, and now they are stung without end. The worms write bloody, insulting messages in the soil in an unknown script.

The Ignavi’s cries of woe are unremitting. The air is continually rent with their shrieks, shouts, screams, and lamentations. Their torment has no end.

“This miserable state [Dante is informed by his guide Virgil] is endured by the dreary souls of those who lived without blame and without praise. They are mixed with the cowardly choir of angels who were not rebellious, nor were loyal to God, but were for themselves. Heaven drove them forth to keep its splendour from being sullied; and the depths of hell receives them not, for the wicked would thus have some glory over them…The world allows no report of them to exist. Mercy and justice disdain them. Do not speak of them, but look and pass on.”

“I looked and saw a whirling banner that went by so quickly that it seemed it would never pause; and behind it came so long a train of people that I should never have believed death had undone so many … These wretches, who were never truly alive, were naked and viciously stung by wasps and hornets that made their faces stream with blood, which, mixed with their tears, dripped to their feet, and disgusting maggots collected in the pus.” – Dante

Well, will Heaven and Hell alike deny you entry? What is your sacred cause? What moral decisions have you taken? How have you ever served anyone or anything other than yourself? Are you fated to reside in the Ante-Inferno for all time? This barren, hopeless place is within the perimeter of hell, yet not truly part of it. It’s Neverland.

Being pious, Dante tells us, is more than a matter of simply not sinning. Unlike the non-committal souls, you must actively practise virtue and side with the righteous. You have to be on the right side, not the wrong one, and not in the neutral, agnostic middle. You must make a leap. You must choose and commit.

The Great Refusal

“I hate journalists. There is nothing in them but tittering jeering emptiness. They have all made what Dante calls the Great Refusal. The shallowest people on the ridge of the earth.” – W.B. Yeats

Are you one of the great refusers, one of the cynical, sneering trolls – the utterly empty, blank, pointless people who have nothing constructive to offer the world?

The Falsehood

“That which has always been accepted by everyone, everywhere, is almost certain to be false.” – Paul Valery

The Blank Banner

Are you a follower of the blank banner of the Ignavi, the most pathetic flag there can possibly be? The blank banner is for all empty, non-committal souls. It’s for those who backed no clear side, supported no clear leader, and simply ran back and forth with no direction, other than their own comfort and advantage. There is nothing worse and more dismal than to be a follower of this banner.
If you have chosen no sacred cause in life, if you haven’t chosen sides, the blank banner is YOUR banner.

Since they were neither good nor evil, the Ignavi have no place in the afterlife. They might as well never have existed. They were pointless people who made no impression. Is that you too?

Ante-hell, the vestibule of hell, is also called “Nowhere”. It’s the eternal home of the Ignavi, the most pathetic souls of all, the souls that ought never to have existed, those that made no choices in life, “who lived a life but lived it with no blame and no praise”. It includes those agnostics too self-absorbed to make choices, those who were neither hot nor cold on important matters. They neither believed nor disbelieved, neither knew nor didn’t know, neither blasphemed nor opposed the blasphemers, neither stood for free speech nor against it.

Now, they run about the hills of Ante-Hell forever, having no hope of dying to end their misery, doing nothing but chasing banners (causes) they will never catch.

You are not saved because you have done nothing wrong. You must do something right. You must choose. You must leap one way or another. You must commit.

The worst places in hell are reserved for those who, in times of great moral crisis, maintained their neutrality, who sat on the face and refused to take part. Are you one of those who will dwell permanently on the edge of hell?

Life isn’t a spectator sport. You must be involved.


Read more from Auricmedia:


Shut Up Conspiracy Theorist

It’s time to clear the facts…

Shut Up Conspiracy Theorist

>> Video

We exist within extraordinary times. The proliferation of technology has ushered in an age of information and never before has humanity had the ability to gather information so easily, at least in the technologically advanced nations. Essentially, the knowledge of mankind lies at the fingertips of people in much of the world and curiously, a high percentage of people, especially in the west, instead utilize the tools available, not for self education or expansion of ones knowledge base, but as a means of distraction. I mean, really, why educate oneself when you can watch video clips of monkeys hurling feces at tourists? Why expand your knowledge base when you can upload to social networking sites, pictures of your kitty-cat or what you ate for lunch?

The internet is a linking of billions of minds; this technology has moved us forward and has brought the world closer. It has revolutionized the way we communicate, conduct business, gather information and connect with the world. It has also created a global platform for alternative media, which has been the bane of corporate, mainstream controlled, bought-and-paid-for media.

It seems as though whenever information is presented that conflicts with the official, consensus, mainstream version of events, it is immediately attacked and discounted as “conspiracy theory.” It’s amazing to me the way that words get thrown around and often times, their true meaning is lost to the ones using them. Etymology or the derivation of words, can teach us an awful lot. The word “conspiracy,” derives from the Latin word, conspirationem, which simply means: “agreement, union, unanimity.”

The modern dictionary definitions of the word conspiracy are:

1. The act of conspiring.
2. An evil, unlawful, or surreptitious plan formulated in secret by two or more persons; plot.
3. A combination of persons for a secret, unlawful or evil purpose.
4. Law: an agreement by two or more persons to commit a crime, fraud or other wrongful act.
5. Any concurrence in action; combination in bringing about a given result.

To simplify, the word “conspiracy” simply means: “to breathe together.” I’ve actually heard those among the I believe everything I’m told crowd, with such certainty; claim that there is no such thing as conspiracies. Obviously, when the etymology and definition is understood, that statement is seen for the ill-informed and absurd nonsense that it is. Two or more people plotting to rob a bank would be “conspiring” to do so.

The first use of the phrase “conspiracy theorist” apparently occurred in 1909; in an article published by the American Historical review.Later, in 1967, the CIA adopted the term in a psychological operation to discredit researchers and actual journalists whose findings deviated from the official claims, particularly, with those who were investigating the JFK assassination, and the ridiculous assertions and conclusions of the whitewash known as the Warren Commission Report.

In 1976, the New York Times acquired a CIA dispatch thorough the Freedom of Information Act, which outlined the CIA’s tactics to discredit those whose research and investigations conflicted with official propaganda. The document spells out the CIA’s tactics of psychological manipulation and disinformation. The dispatch outlines certain tactics:

Claim that it would be impossible that so many people would keep quiet about such a big conspiracy.
Claim that eyewitness testimony is unreliable [unless it is in line with the official version of events].
Accuse theorists of being wedded to and infatuated with their theories.
Accuse theorists of having financial interests in promoting conspiracy theories.

In part, the document reads:

To discuss the publicity problem with and friendly elite contacts (especially politicians and editors) , pointing out that the [official investigation] made as thorough an investigation as humanly possible, that the charges of the critics are without serious foundation, and that further speculative discussion only plays into the hands of the opposition. Point out also that parts of the conspiracy talk appear to be deliberately generated by propagandists. Urge them to use their influence to discourage unfounded and irresponsible speculation.
To employ propaganda assets to and refute the attacks of the critics. Book reviews and feature articles are particularly appropriate for this purpose. The unclassified attachments to this guidance should provide useful background material for passing to assets. Our ploy should point out, as applicable, that the critics are (I) wedded to theories adopted before the evidence was in, (II) politically interested, (III) financially interested, (IV) hasty and inaccurate in their research, or (V) infatuated with their own theories.

I’ve been on the receiving end of the label “conspiracy theorist” more times than I can count, and I would estimate that 99.9% of the time, the person using the term has not even bothered to look at any of my work or even engage in intelligent discussion regarding the particular topic at hand; they simply repeat the label as if by rote, and so few of them would ever bother to look at information that just may challenge what they think they know, or their TV educated mindset. They never seem to engage in any investigation of their own, apart from glancing at a “news” snippet or simply adopting the consensus view as their own. In fact, if I had a dollar for every time that label, or other such nonsense was thrown at me, without even considering what I was saying, I’d be writing this right now from my private yacht, off the coast of Maui!

Critical thinking has become all but extinct; it seems to have been bred out of most people, and the ones that question are at once considered “crazy conspiracy theorists,” often on knee jerk reaction with outright rejection of any information that contradicts their consensus mindset. Author Jack trout summed it up perfectly when he stated:

“The sane person constantly analyzes the world of reality and then changes what’s inside his or her head to fit the facts. That’s an awful lot of trouble for most people. Besides, how many people want to constantly change their opinions to fit the facts? It’s a whole lot easier to change the facts to fit your opinions. Unsane people make up their minds and they find the facts to ‘verify’ their opinions. Or even more commonly, they accept the opinion of the nearest ‘expert’ and then they don’t have to bother about the facts at all.”

After the attacks of September 11, 2001, the media, in a lockstep with the corporate apparatus that funds and controls it, engaged in massive smear campaigns against anyone who dared to question the official story. Now, I cannot pretend to know exactly what happened on that tragic day, but I can say emphatically, after investigating the event for years, that the official story is a steaming pile of crap from start to finish, filled with more holes than a Swiss cheese factory.

The laws of physics were somehow suspended on that day. Kerosene fuel burned over 1,000 degrees hotter than its maximum temperature and was somehow able to melt steel. Small, contained fires brought down a 47-story skyscraper that was not even hit by aircraft (building 7). The 200-ton, metal aircraft that allegedly hit the pentagon somehow disappeared upon impact and the public was told that it vaporized. The public was told that a passport of one of the hijackers somehow miraculously survived an explosion of fuel and metal, only to be found neatly amidst the rubble, intact! There are so many anomalies to the official story that it boggles the mind. Even more mind boggling, is the fact that when these events occur, droves of people buy into the official story and immediately adopt it into their beLIEf systems without question.

Here’s a great example of what I’m talking about:

At the time that the Obama administration announced that troops had killed Bin Laden (the CIA asset) I was working in the food service industry. Newspapers were sold there, and of course, when the govt. announced that they killed their former ally, the story was blasted all over mainstream media, on every front page and every news network. No evidence, photographic or otherwise was presented to the public, but of course, this didn’t matter. The “news” was broadcast on every TV network and printed in every major newspaper so it must be true.

I watched a man walk over to the newspaper rack, pick up a copy of the propaganda rag, and claim with glee: “we got em! We got the son of a bitch!” No investigation, no critical thought, hell, he didn’t even read the article! The front page headline was enough to convince him and this is exactly what I’m talking about.

I know osama’s dead because tv tells me so

I wonder if those who simply believe what they are told ever even consider where the information comes from. Do they ever ask who benefits by them believing the official story? Do they ever ask who owns the media, and whether or not those owners have a vested interest in the public believing what is presented to them? Alternative researchers are attacked all of the time, even if their information is credible and true; it wasn’t on CNN or Faux news so therefore, it must not be true or credible. Interestingly, alternative journalists, or “conspiracy nuts” have been very accurate as the passage of time and unfolding of events has shown.

media consolidationWhen one challenges the system or steps out of line, they are at once considered a threat. Swinging the sword of truth at mainstream lies does not exactly win you many friends. When the consensus trance is challenged, people are naturally resistant because their very identity is often built around what they’ve been conditioned to believe. Besides, so many seem to have real trouble entertaining the notion that they may have been wrong about something. The ego doesn’t like that idea very much! Those who question their reality, and what is presented as truth, and report their findings, are viewed as a threat, even if their information is true and valid; if it flies in the face of the mainstream consensus, it must be false, crazy, unfounded, “conspiracy theory.” No investigation required! A talking head in a five-thousand-dollar business suit, with a thousand-dollar haircut has slavishly repeated the official line, so who am I to question? Not thinking is just so much more hassle-free!

Fortunately, due to the efforts of some very brave researchers/presenters, film makers, real journalists, authors and the like, the tide is turning. People actually are beginning to shake off the spell that has been woven around their very consciousness and wake up to the fact that they have been sold lie upon lie and have willingly bought into them. Unfortunately though, there still does appear to be a rather high percentage of those whose minds are guided by the corporate apparatus, the mainstream media and the gatekeeper voice pieces that serve the spin machine.

Taking into consideration the actual meaning of the word conspiracy, and the etymology, the statement that “conspiracies don’t exist,” is simply absurd and nonsensical. Have you noticed that when the word conspiracy is used, it is so often followed by the word “theory?” That immediately discredits the information as per the CIA’s very succesful psy-op.

Was it not a “conspiracy” that hatched the plot to kill Caesar? Do corporate CEOs not “conspire” to figure out how to maximize profits? Don’t war profiteers “conspire” to sell unjustified wars to the masses to gain public approval? Whatever truly happened on 9/11, wouldn’t the perpetrators have had to “conspire” to pull that off? Crazy talk, crazy talk, tin-foil-hat-wearer, shut that person up! It’s making my cognitive dissonance hurt!

I sum it up like this:

“The greatest threat to the establishment today is the person who can think independently and maintains the ability to continuously scrutinize what they think they know. The challenger of conventional thought, the critical thinker, the man or woman of ideas is the enemy, the one who walks alone. She will not join, she will not conform; she will not waver. She has detached from the herd. The free thinker is perceived as the dangerous one. His ideas are a danger to the system, to his peers and to the rigid confines of ego- centered consciousness. He is a rebel in the truest sense. He/she is the sane amongst the unsane, the one whose guidance comes only from within. Think for yourself and watch the lie become dust beneath your feet!”

I’m not sure who came up with this phrase, but it’s perfect:

“I’ll call myself a conspiracy theorist if you call yourself a coincidence theorist.”


Read more from Auricmedia:


UFOs, Conspiracies, Government Black Ops

Now something about UFO’s, conspiracies and government black ops.

UFOs, Conspiracies, Government Black Ops – Full Documentary

UFOs, government black ops, and the ongoing conspiracy of secrecy that drains the world of treasure and sucks vital energy from the planet is explored with Dr. Sean David Morton. The distinction between technocrats and autocrats is illuminated, as the shadow government is explored. Spooky examinations at Area 51, hidden financial motivations behind 9/11, the Pleiadians and how Earth is a magnet school for the universe is discussed in an uncensored Buzzsaw, hosted by Sean Stone.GUEST BIO:
Dr. Sean David Morton attended Stanford University and received a Bachelor of Fine Arts and a Political Science degree, with minors in Organic Chemistry and Astronomy from the University of Southern California. He received his PhD. in clinical psychology, specializing in therapeutic counseling, from the International Institute of Alternative Medicine. He has also studied Astrology at the famed Exeter College at Oxford University.
Sean’s adventures at Area 51, his pioneering work in REMOTE VIEWING and his stunning predictions of the future brought him international recognition as the #1 guest on Coast to Coast AM where host ART BELL called him “America’s Prophet” and “My all time favorite guest!”
Sean is a multi-award winning independent filmmaker and has been a reporter/writer/producer/director for HARD COPY, SIGHTINGS, STRANGE UNIVERSE, UNSOLVED MYSTERIES, ANCIENT ALIENS, PARANORMAL BORDERLINE and has appeared on countless radio and TV shows.
He is the author of BLACK SERAPH and THE DARK PROPHET, spy thrillers about the inner workings of the Vatican and the Jesuits. His latest books, SANDS OF TIME Vol. I and II, the true memoir of a MAN IN BLACK, describes 40 years of the adventures of a top level director of the Shadow Government. He has authored over a dozen screenplays and is currently working on the funding for a film and media distribution company.


Read more from Auricmedia:


Conspiracy Theorists by Jolly Roger

Have you been called a “Conspiracy theorist”? It’s just a tool to ridicule people who think with their own brains instead of just believing every rubbish story, that mainstream media tries to stuff down with their throats. Here’s a nice little article about this situation:

 Conspiracy Theorists

by Jolly Roger  slicingthroats@yahoo.com

Everyone has heard, and has probably used the term “conspiracy theorist,” and the fact of the term being in common use, also indicates that we generally agree on what it means. I saw a movie by that name, and the title character was a raving lunatic who kept his food in thermoses with combination locks to reduce his chances of being poisoned by imaginary enemies.

Regardless of how the stupid movie turned out, what’s important here is the common perception people have of someone to whom that label is applied, and just as important, is who it is that applies the label. The common perception is that someone who is labeled a “conspiracy theorist” is suffering from some type of psychological disorder, and that label is usually applied to people by our government, and our news media. The next thing to consider, is that the label is applied to anyone who questions our government’s version of events in any matter. Doesn’t it logically follow that the media are teaching us to assume that anyone who questions the government is insane? When that label is applied to a person, doesn’t it become easy to dismiss everything they say without even hearing it? How convenient for them.

I think the label first became widely used to slander people who questioned the details surrounding the JFK assassination, and forty years later, there aren’t too many thinking people who still believe the Warren Commission’s “lone gunman” explanation. That explanation is doubted by everyone who has taken the time to look into the details, and believed only by people who refuse to.

Which is “theory” and which is fact? In the absence of a full confession, this can only be decided by a preponderance of evidence, and it would be silly to come to a conclusion on any matter without looking at all the evidence available. This is only common sense, just as it is safe to assume some degree of guilt or complicity on the part of anyone who lies about an event, or tries to hide, plant, or destroy any type of evidence.

Conspiracy theories arise from evidence. After the government releases an explanation of a particular event, a conspiracy theory is only born because evidence exists to disprove their explanation, or at least call it into question. There’s nothing insane about it, unless you define sanity as believing whatever the government tells you. In light of the fact that our government lies to us regularly, I would define believing everything they tell you as utter stupidity.

In July of 1996, flight 800 exploded over Long Island. Shortly after their terrorist explanation failed scrutiny, our government then explained the event by claiming that a faulty electrical system caused a spark that ignited a fuel tank, and the people who doubted this explanation were quickly labeled “conspiracy theorists.” More than a hundred witnesses saw a missile travel from the ground up to the plane just prior to its explosion, but rather than being treated as eyewitnesses to an event, they were labeled “conspiracy theorists,” which label allowed all subsequent investigation to ignore the strongest evidence in the matter.

Our “investigative” news agencies decided to accept and disseminate the official story, and they helped us forget the U.S. naval station nearby, the fact that missiles were regularly test fired there, and naturally, they paid no heed to more than a hundred “conspiracy theorists” who saw the plane get blown out of the sky by a missile. I believe that the U.S. Navy accidentally shot down flight 800, and that’s my belief because it’s the most sensible explanation that can be drawn from the available evidence. I’m not theorizing about conspiracies, but there are conflicting explanations of the event, and if the Navy did accidentally blow a passenger plane out of the sky, who would have a motive to lie about it? The U.S. government, or a hundred witnesses?

Then of course, there were the “crazy conspiracy theories” arising from the bombing of the Alfred Murrah federal building in Oklahoma City. In that matter, audio tapes and witnesses agree that there were two explosions, the first of which occurred inside the building between eight and ten seconds before the truck bomb exploded. Explosive experts agree that Timothy McVeigh’s fertilizer bomb could not have destroyed the building, and the FBI’s counter terrorism chief, and members of BATF lied about their whereabouts during and prior to the catastrophe. The evening news decided not to tell you any of this, and they will label anyone who tries to a “paranoid conspiracy theorist.” In light of the evidence, we would be complete fools if a conspiracy theory didn’t exist.

There were no conspiracy theories arising from the explosion of flight 103 over Lockerbie, Scotland, and there were no conspiracy theories arising from the work of the uni-bomber, so the newly invented psycho-babble that tries to explain the malady of conspiracy theorists, also needs to explain why millions of conspiracy theorists all decided not to theorize about those events. There is no psychological malady. There was simply no evidence to indicate a conspiracy.

The real question is not why people theorize about conspiracies, but why people choose to believe the government’s version of events when it’s obvious that they’re lying. One reason is that most people never see the evidence because our “news” industry hides it, and another reason is that the same news industry will quickly associate anyone who questions the government with the people who see Elvis, Bigfoot, and UFO’s.

But sadly, I think the main reason people choose to believe the government’s version of events despite overwhelming evidence to the contrary, is because it’s easier, and safer. If you ignore most of the evidence, and accept as plausible whatever ridiculous explanation the T.V. provides, your life remains simple, and you get to sit on your ass and watch more T.V. If on the other hand, you pluck your head from that same ass and realize you’ve been lied to, as a citizen in a democratic society, you’re instantly burdened with being responsible for doing something about it. Every citizen of the United States has a civic duty to participate in their government, and keep themselves informed of its actions, or government “of the people, by the people, and for the people” isn’t possible. You were warned that “eternal vigilance is the price of freedom, ” but you chose to ignore your government, and believe whatever they told you, and because of this, Americans have lost their freedom. Although presidents and senators are public servants, unlike the dog catcher and mailman, they wield a lot of power over people’s lives, and that’s why they have to be watched, and scrutinized.

Statistical analysts from UCLA and Rutgers University believe that John Kerry won the 2004 presidential election by an estimated 1.3 million votes, and despite the fact that these learned scholars are probably the most qualified people alive to forward such an opinion, our news madia dismisses this as “conspiracy theory.” George W. Bush lost the 2000 election, and he lost the 2004 election, but he’s occupying the White House, shredding our constitution, and stealing our wealth and freedom in a “war on terror” that’s as fraudulent as his presidency because many Americans are too stupid to see it, too lazy to do anything about it, or both.

I’m sorry if I sound angry, but the fact of the matter is that I am angry. While you were staring into the television like an idiot, our freedom, wealth, and constitutional protections have been stolen from us, and because you’re stupid enough to believe the manure being shoveled by our government, you’ve allowed them to commit bigger and more heinous crimes. Because you were too lazy to research their nonsensical economic policies, and see them for the scams that they are, we’ll all soon be living in poverty. And because you’re so lazy, apathetic, and easily lied to, millions have died for the profits of a few. I have every right to be angry, and only a fool wouldn’t be.

Only a small portion of my anger is reserved for the government of the United States, because they only did what can be expected of any government. They grabbed money, power and control where it was easy to do so. Most of my anger is directed toward my fellow American citizens, because they allowed it to happen by believing whatever they’re told, and not doing what’s expected of them. Patriotism in America does not mean waving the flag in blind loyalty to the government. As an American citizen, you have a civic duty to question your government, and hold them accountable for their actions, not use the flag as a blindfold. The American people have been duped once again, and it doesn’t seem like it’s a difficult thing to accomplish.

America’s latest “conspiracy nuts” are better known as the 9-11 truth movement. The news media are doing their usual job of slandering them with their usual childish name calling, but for more than three years, they have refused to show you the documented fact, scientific data, expert testimony, photographic evidence, or the credible eyewitness accounts that prove U.S. government complicity in the events of September, 11, 2001. If this were just a “crazy conspiracy theory,” I don’t think people in our government would have worked so hard to destroy, hide, and lie about the evidence. The White House tried to derail every investigation into the matter. If we had an honest government, we wouldn’t have conspiracy theories. We would have honest investigations, and fair trials, but these things are disappearing from America.

There are disturbing facts regarding the events of September 11 that every American needs to be aware of , but naturally, none of it will be on T.V. I’ve met a lot of people in the 9-11 truth movement, and I can assure you that none of them are crazy, paranoid, or even “conspiracy theorists.” One generalization I can make about them is that they all seem to be very intelligent. Maybe the smartest thing you could do would be to start listening to them. The Arabs don’t “hate your freedom.” The White House hates your freedom, because it’s the only thing that stands between them, and unlimited power. – Jolly Roger

“Eternal Vigilance is the Price of Freedom” – Thomas Jefferson

911truth.org 911review.org 911review.com physics911.org wtc7.net

Anything written by “Jolly Roger” is the property of the American Resistance Movement, and the author hereby grants permission to anyone who so desires to post, print, copy, or distribute this letter as they see fit, and in fact, the author encourages you to do so.


Read more from Auricmedia:


The Titanic Sinking – Rothschild and Rockefeller Conspiracy

Some interesting info about Titanic and how it all could have been staged like 911:

In October 1910, a group of seven men, all senior players in the Rothschild and Rockefeller financial dynasties, met in strict secrecy on a private island off the coast of Georgia, USA. Their brief was to create an organisation to usurp the power to create and print money, until then solely a function of the US government. This organisation was to be named ‘The Federal Reserve Bank’. This plan however, had several extremely powerful, high-profile opponents who stood in the way of these banker’s goals.

In the meantime, John Pierpoint (JP) Morgan, another American high-financier, involved in the Federal Reserve scheme, who also happened to own the British-based White Star shipping line, had commissioned a series of ‘super-liners’, the Olympic class, in an attempt to gain the lion’s share of the highly lucrative Atlantic-crossing market. The speculative investment involved in this project was immense.

However, in September 1911, before the second one of the planned three ‘sisters’, RMS Titanic had been completed, Morgan’s plans were dealt a massive financial blow when RMS Olympic, the first of the ‘sister’ ships off the production line was involved in a disastrous collision with a Royal Navy cruiser, HMS Hawke.

And so, the scene was set for one of the greatest deceptions ever perpetrated… in the 100th anniversary year, John presents information and evidence that seriously questions the official account in the history books.


Audio letter No. 24

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC., Box 16428, Ft.
Worth, Texas 76133.

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is May 28, 1977
and this is my monthly Audioletter No. 24.  This issue concludes
the second year of the Audio-letter.  But only if we are blessed
by a true miracle, will the third year ever be completed, because
as I speak to you today a tragedy has already been set in motion
that is beyond human comprehension.  Not since last July and
August, 1976 when the Soviet Union began planting underwater
bombs and missiles in our own territorial waters has the
situation been so grave and urgent as it is now.  For that reason
I will dispense with any further introduction today in order to
discuss these three topics: Topic #1--The Fall of Babylon
Revisited; Topic #2--The Handwriting On The Wall For America; and

Topic #1--We live today in a world that grows more complex and
more confusing with each passing day, but in spite of that we
Americans are fond of praising ourselves for the great man-made
wonders of our age.  And whenever the obvious dangers to our
continued existence as a nation prey on our minds, we are always
reminded that we, the great United States, have already survived
fully two centuries since our Republic was founded.  And scarcely
a day goes by that we are not reassured by our rulers, elected
and otherwise, that we are the mightiest nation on earth.  Our
technology, we are told day in and day out, is so wonderful that
it is impossible that any other nation on earth, especially the
poor, backward Soviet Union, might surpass us in any important
way.  In other words, we are technologically impregnable.  And
lest we become prematurely concerned over the impact of the
recent radical changes in our weather, certain news reports
recently have told incredible lies to the effect that the United
States has a two-year surplus of grains in our storage bins.  In
all of this, the behavior of the United States today is like that
of countless civilizations before us--just before they perished. 
And in some respects the greatest similarity of all is with that
of ancient Babylon just before its abrupt fall from power.  The
origins of the United States, unlike Babylon, were strongly moral
and spiritual in content, and the system of government set forth
in the United States Constitution, which freed men in a way
unparalleled in human history, was conceived by men who
understood man's place within God's creation.  This heritage
still lives today in the hearts of many Americans, but it's
rapidly being snuffed out under the bondage of rulers who are
superimposing the pattern of ancient Babylon on our beloved land. 
The Babylonian pattern is totally evil, and those who choose to
bow down to such Satanic rule thereby make themselves part of it. 
The origins of ancient Babylon are lost in the midst of time,
perhaps 5,000 years ago, but it reached its peak around 600 B.C.,
at which time it was undisputed as the most powerful empire the
world had ever seen.  The City of Babylon was the Rome of its
day, the most important trading center, the most powerful
military force, the greatest cultural influence, and even a
center of tourism because of its remarkable hanging gardens and
other man-made wonders.  The huge city of Babylon was surrounded
by city walls so high and so thick that they were impregnable by
any military technology of that day; and inside the city there
was a two-year supply of food, making any attempted siege against
Babylon unattractive.  And there was no lack of water either,
because no less than the mighty river Euphrates ran through the
city.  Yes, Babylon was powerful, wealthy, and so secure in
material terms that potential adversaries were hardly even taken
seriously.  Even when it became clear that the increasingly
powerful joint empire of the Medes and the Persians had designs
on Babylon, there was no real concern.  With all their means of
protection against invasion and their unrivaled prosperity, the
Babylonian attitude was simply "It couldn't happen here."  And so
when the Medo-Persian army of Cyrus and Darius laid siege to
Babylon, the only response of the ruler of Babylon was
debauchery, feasting, drunkenness, and mocking any real power
greater than himself.  At this point, we're told, the Babylonian
feast was interrupted by the appearance of a hand in midair
writing words on the wall that said Babylon's rule was at an end,
that its ruler had been weighed in the balances and found
wanting, and that the kingdom would be divided and given to the
Medes and Persians.  The handwriting on the wall said the
impossible was about to happen--Babylon, the impregnable city,
was about to fall--How could this be?  No one in Babylon had ever
had experience with invasion and so could not imagine such a
thing; and yet, within a few short hours, before the drunken
feast even ended, the impossible happened.  First, the water
level in the mighty Euphrates river, flowing through the middle
of Babylon, started dropping rapidly.  It dwindled to a trickle,
and soon stopped altogether.  Cyrus, the Persian, had worked out
of sight of Babylon and had diverted the Euphrates out of its
normal channel.  Now the great impregnable walls of Babylon were
left with huge openings--namely, the river bed no longer filled
with water, and in marched the Medo-Persian army, conquering
Babylon without resistance.  And today, the United States is
under siege by the Soviet Union with the cooperation from within
of quislings.  We are threatened by the joint Rockefeller/ Soviet
empire just as Babylon was besieged by the joint Medo-Persian
empire.  And now, as then, we are told there is nothing to worry
about, "It just couldn't happen here."  But, my friends, just as
happened in ancient Babylon, the handwriting is now on the wall
for America.  The America we know today is a perversion of the
pattern originally laid down for our beloved land, and America as
we know it is about to come to an end.  And as with ancient
Babylon, WATER is our Achilles heel and the means by which we are
to be reduced to surrender without a fight.

Topic #2--Not long ago the Carter administration's Ambassador to
the United Nations, Andy Young, made the remarkable statement
that: "Communism has never been a threat to me."  He also has a
habit of patting Cuba on the back for the so-called 'stabilizing
influence' of Cuban troops in Africa, and otherwise has
repeatedly shown a very amiable attitude toward World Communism. 
Many Americans have wondered why Andy Young is allowed to go on
saying such things without being restrained in any way by Jimmy
Carter.  But Carter has now answered that, in a major foreign
policy speech given at the University of Notre Dame on May 22,
1977.  This speech is as important as the famous Iron Curtain
Speech of Sir Winston Churchill a generation ago at Fulton,
Missouri.  White House aides stated that the Carter speech at
Notre Dame was specifically intended to "send some messages to
foreign governments"--and it did.  The foreign press is filled
with headlines about the major turn that has just been taken in
American foreign policy.  Yet, here at home, many Americans have
not grasped what has happened.  The most basic theme of that
Carter speech is an elaborate echo of Andy Young's statement,
that is: "We are no longer afraid of Communism."  Is this because
Communism is withering and dying?  One need only look at a map to
see how fast Communism is eating up the world.  What Jimmy Carter
is telling us and the world, is 'We can get along with
Communism'; and just to prove it, one of America's most
important, efficient intelligence operations to keep an eye on
Soviet naval movements and other important matters is being
closed down.  This intelligence unit, known as Task Force 157 and
run by the United States Navy, has a budget of well under 1/10 of
1% of that of the CIA, and yet it is being shut down--supposedly
for budgetary reason.  Meanwhile the signs of war to come are all
around us.  So great are the dangers facing us that military men
are speaking up in increasing numbers in an effort to warn
America before disaster arrives.  Since they are subject to
military law and subordinate to civilians who do not want them to
speak up, it's no small thing to speak out in this way.  So,
consider what Major General John K. Singlaub said in an interview
on May 19, 1977.  General Singlaub, the third-ranking U.S. Army
General in Korea said: "If we withdraw our ground forces on the
schedule suggested, it will lead to war."  And why did General
Singlaub speak up?  His answer was: "The question asked after
United States setbacks in Korea and Vietnam was: 'Did the
military people in the know express themselves loudly and clearly
enough that the decision-makers understood?'  We want to make
sure."  In speaking this way, General Singlaub was doing no more
than expressing the consensus of practically every knowledgeable
military man about the Korean situation.  For example, the same
Washington Post article that quoted General Singlaub also quoted
another headquarters Army officer in Korea as saying about the
Carter plan to withdraw our troops: "I don't know anybody who is
not staggered by it.  There's no military or strategic logic for
withdrawal."  The plan to withdraw from South Korea, in other
words, is strictly political--in line with the newly-announced
American foreign policy that it is no longer afraid of Communism. 
The reason General Singlaub's words had such an impact in this
country is that his name was attached to his warnings.  The words
I just quoted from the other anonymous Army Officer are just as
startling as what General Singlaub said.  But people will just
read those words once, frown, and then forget about it.  But
everyone knows about General Singlaub's warnings because,
deliberately or otherwise, he allowed himself to be identified as
the source of the warnings; and, for daring to warn us, he was
promptly relieved of his Korean command by Jimmy Carter.  The
situation in Korea illustrates the direction in which events are
now moving, but other events are due to occur long before the
pullout of our troops from South Korea.  The real threat to our
security is no longer in Korea or in Europe but right here in our
own backyard.

   Another military man who is actively trying to warn America is
Major General George Keegan, who retired at the beginning of this
year as Chief of Air Force Intelligence.  General Keegan is one
of the West's greatest intelligence analysts, and the story he
has to tell should be continuous headline news throughout our
nation.  General Keegan has been speaking on radio and television
talk shows, giving speeches, accepting interviews--in short,
using every channel open to him in an effort to wake up America
before it is too late.  One of his most comprehensive and
important speeches was the one delivered on March 11, 1977, at a
press conference sponsored by the American Security Council here
in Washington, D.C.  To find out in more detail what General
Keegan had to say, I would urge every American to obtain a copy
of that speech.  Write to the American Security Council, Boston,
Va., 22713 for information.  It was published as the April 1977
Washington Report of the American Security Council.

   We're frequently told by syndicated columnists that the CIA is
our first line of defense, but General Keegan said in his speech:
"The ultimate function of a nation's intelligence is to render
carefully assessed judgments and forecasts regarding the threat. 
When I look back upon my experience with this nation's highest
estimating body, I have the impression of having taken part in a
Charles Dickens novel.  The sense of make-believe and unreality
has to be experienced to be believed."  Further on he says: "The
intelligence estimators, heavily dominated by the CIA and the
State Department, have been wrong about Soviet purposes in
pursuing detente.  They have been shockingly deficient in their
estimates of the risks and the advantages to the United States
and the free world of the so-called technology exchange with the
Soviet Union."  And he adds: "If there has been a Watergate in
this country, and there has been, but ignored, it has been in the
monumentally incompetent judgmental processes of this government
regarding the nature, character, and growth of the Soviet threat
as it has evolved from year to year."  General Keegan goes on to
make crystal clear that the deficiencies in our intelligence
estimates are not due to any lack of our ability to collect
information or to analyze it technically.  The problem, instead,
has to do with what is done with that information.  To begin
with, the intelligence estimation process at the highest levels
in America today is not objective, but is manipulated to fit
political purposes.  In General Keegan's words, and I quote: "The
United States intelligence estimative process cannot be
understood unless it is first appreciated that national
intelligence estimates must perform three functions.  First, they
must support the decisions of the President, both for the record
of history and for the avoidance of impeachment.  Second, they
must substantiate or help to justify the decisions of the White
House 'Office of Management and Budget.'  Finally, the
intelligence estimates must, whatever other purpose they may
serve, rationalize the foreign security policy initiatives of the
Secretary of State."  Continuing, General Keegan says: "I
appreciate that those are extremely important allegations to
make, but I submit to you today that it is not possible to
understand the workings of the United States intelligence
community unless one is willing to open his mind to the influence
of those three factors."  This situation is illustrated vividly
by General Keegan's discussion of the controversy over the Soviet
Back-Fire Bomber.  As I've told you for many months, the
Supersonic Back-Fire is an inter-continental strategic bomber,
capable of striking the United States with nuclear weapons. 
General Keegan says: "The central issue all along has been
whether this bomber posed a threat to the United States.  The
Soviets argued that it did not, and the CIA and State Department
rather consistently accepted the Soviet point of view."  General
Keegan proceeded to acquire analysis of the Back-Fire's
capability from "the most competent analysts in the free world." 
The available intelligence information was provided to three
American aircraft companies with experience building strategic
bombers--plus, for good measure, the Royal Air Force and the
Royal Aircraft establishment in England--and the results: "every
single one of these organizations independently agreed that the
Back-Fire had an intercontinental capability.  Yet my word was
not good enough, nor was that of the American and British
heavy-bomber designers and builders.  CIA and State chose to
believe the Soviets."  General Keegan is not in a position to
express it this way, my friends, but his description of the
Back-Fire controversy illustrates what I've been trying to tell
you over the months--that the Rockefeller cartel has more faith
in the Soviet Union than in our own United States.  Finally,
General Keegan explains, the sheer weight of analysis made it
more and more apparent that the Back-Fire was truly
intercontinental: "however, CIA and State now judged that the
Soviet Union had no intention of using the Back-Fire as an
intercontinental bomber"--this in spite of the fact that the
second model of the Back-Fire has been given even greater range. 
The history of the Back-Fire controversy up to this point is very
disgraceful, and still generally unknown to the American people. 
But listen now to the final chapter in General Keegan's words,
and I quote: "Seemingly undaunted by the most extensive analysis
of a foreign bomber ever performed in the United States, the CIA,
in one final, super-secret, uncoordinated effort, proceeded over
a period of 18 months to undertake an analysis designed to prove
that the Back-Fire Bomber could not reach the United States. 
This effort, in which small bits and pieces of controlled
information were provided to McDonnell-Douglas Aircraft, designer
and builder of fighters, represents one of the most artful
contrivances I have ever observed.  It is one which I suspect may
have been designed to salvage a SALT accord.  Finally, when the
CIA surprised everyone by surfacing its new analysis, months of
painful and extensive analysis were required to show that the
books had been rigged.  Artificially high G-loadings had been
assigned to the design of the Back-Fire along with excessive
engine-drag and other factors which were designed to reduce
range."  And this, my friends, is how our so-called first line of
defense, the CIA, looks after America's national security to the
tune of over twenty billion dollars a year.

   Elsewhere in his talk General Keegan also spells out the
dangerous manner in which our military intelligence capabilities
have been progressively over-centralized, compartmentalized, and
taken over by civilians "who understand little about the horrors
of war--and these are people who understand even less about
military doctrine, strategy, and weapons."  The product of all
these trends described by General Keegan is the very intelligence
gap that I discussed with General George S. Brown, Chairman of
the Joint Chiefs of Staff, when I met with him last September
(1976).  For years General Keegan has tried in vain to obtain a
series of post-mortem audits on the predictive and estimative
record of the United States intelligence community.  The audit
would be performed by qualified but disinterested outsiders with
no links to the intelligence community so that their work would
be unbiased.  Quoting General Keegan again: "Such audits would
record scrupulously where we had been wrong, where we had been
right, where we had fallen short of the mark or where we had
exaggerated.  Yet, every such suggestion had been met with
disdain and has been resisted in the most resounding vocal and
emotional way."  He might as well have asked for an honest audit
of Fort Knox.

   General Keegan's speech contains many more things than there
is time to discuss in this tape, and they're all important.  He
reveals many things about the military capabilities of both the
Soviet Union and the United States that you will never hear
through the usual news channels, but they all boil down to just
two major conclusions, backed up by many, many facts.  One
conclusion is that Soviet military capabilities vastly exceed
what we are being led to believe, both in terms of quantity and
quality.  The other conclusion is that the Soviet Union is firmly
convinced that a nation can fight a nuclear war and continue
afterward as a functioning society; and based on that conclusion
from a Soviet study undertaken after World War II, the Soviet
Union has for more than 20 years been preparing militarily to
fight and win a nuclear war.  The American approach, on the other
hand, is only to deter such a war, even though General Keegan
says: "I am unaware of a single definitive effort ever conducted
by the United States to determine precisely and in great detail
what it would take to deter."

   General Keegan also explains another very important
principle--it has to do with official judgments of the strategic
balance and carries over into public pronouncements by the
Pentagon.  This is the tacit rule requiring the use of so-called
'agreed national intelligence.'  Says General Keegan: "Agreed
national intelligence is derived by committee, contains little
that is controversial except in some footnote or dissent; and it
rarely contains meaningful reference to the dynamics of strategic
competition in terms of the new weapons, new forces, and new
capabilities being evolved by the Soviet Union."  Thus, whatever
new threats are involved, whether it be the awesome particle beam
weapon warned about by General Keegan or the Soviet underwater
missiles I've been warning about for nearly a year, Pentagon
disclaimers dare not be accepted at face value today without
challenge.  Those who accept these denials are playing straight
into the hands of our nation's deadliest enemies.

   Meanwhile the build-up toward the start of Nuclear War One is
gaining momentum.  Two months ago Nelson Rockefeller visited
Israel to help speed up the preparations for a Middle East war. 
By mid April, Israeli troops had begun massive maneuvers in the
Sinai with live ammunition, Reserves had been called up, and
Egyptian maneuvers were soon underway as well in the western
Sinai.  These maneuvers, headline news in Europe and Britain,
have gone unmentioned in the United States except for the crash
in the Sinai of a huge helicopter killing 56 Israeli soldiers. 
Then just a few days ago the extremists came to power by way of
the recent Israeli elections.  The Middle East is now a powder
keg as a result, and the Carter administration is rapidly
disengaging and disassociating itself from Israel.  So, when the
nuclear strike from the Sinai against Arab oil wells takes place,
it will not be recognized by the world or by most Americans for
what it really is.  Perhaps General Keegan was also right about
one other thing he said in his speech: "We have reached a point
in America where I believe we are almost incapable, culturally,
of being warned."  If so, my friends, it is we, the United States
of America, who will have been weighed in the balances and found
wanting, like ancient Babylon.

Topic #3--When the sun came up on southeastern Idaho one day
almost a year ago, it looked like the start of just another
beautiful late spring day.  It was Saturday, and two fishermen
were looking forward to a relaxing day in the shadow of the new
Teton Dam.  The Dam, over 300 feet high, had been completed the
previous fall except for a few finishing touches that remained,
and had been gradually filling up with water during the winter. 
Now, due to the run-off of melting snow in the mountains, it was
almost full.  Further down stream from the dam, tens of thousands
of people were going about their business.  Some puttered around
their houses doing weekend chores, while others were at work at
businesses or on farms; but for the construction crew who arrived
for work on the Teton Dam site that morning of June 5, 1976, it
was a different story.  At about 7:30 A.M. it was discovered that
a sizeable leak had sprung, not through the dam itself but
through the section of mountain on one side where the dam was
anchored.  This was reported immediately to the proper
authorities, who directed that steps be taken immediately to
start lowering the water level behind the Dam.  Why the leak had
appeared so suddenly was a puzzle, since inspection of the Dam by
personnel around nine o'clock the previous evening had turned up
nothing wrong.  But there was no time to solve this puzzle,
because soon a second leak developed.  Like the first, this
second leak also appeared to break through the anchoring mountain
side rather than the Dam itself.  Now the situation began to
deteriorate at an alarming rate.  Soon a leak found its way
through the earthen dam itself, and a growing torrent of water
gushed from it.  Two bulldozers raced to that location to try to
stop the flow by moving more earth into position, but the leak
grew so fast that the bulldozers were lost, the operators leaping
and scrambling to safety barely in time to save themselves.  Like
a nightmare come true, the Teton Dam crumbled, collapsed, and
released tons of water into the valley below.  The day ended
abruptly in tragedy for the two fishermen, and others who lost
their lives as well.  For two days, flood waters from that ruined
dam continued to spread, ultimately covering an area of 300
square miles including several towns and 50,000 acres of farm
land.  One of the major purposes of the Teton Dam, like many
others around our country, had been flood control.  Now the
man-made flood unleashed by the collapsed dam had caused damage
estimated to be in the range of $350- to $500,000,000 in addition
to the loss of life.  The bursting of the Teton Dam provided
America with a preview, on a very small scale, of what the Soviet
Union plans to do to our entire country.

   Last month in Audioletter No. 23 I reported hard intelligence
I had received to the effect that 21 major lakes and dams in 10
western states have hydrogen Soviet bombs planted in them.  But
the information I gave you then, my friends, was only the
beginning.  Since recording Audioletter No. 23, I have been under
an avalanche of ongoing intelligence reports concerning the
ongoing Soviet program of planting nuclear weapons in our inland
lakes and reservoirs.  I can now reveal that this Soviet program
began at a relatively slow, careful pace as much as 18 months
ago.  For example, a Soviet nuclear device was planted over a
year ago at a dam known as the Dalles on the Columbia River east
of Portland, Oregon, and it is still there now.  The Teton Dam
disaster appeared to be just a great big accident, but it brought
to everyone's attention the fact that dams can be made to
collapse under certain conditions and that the consequences are
devastating.  Meanwhile the border of Idaho with Canada has
become an important entry point for Soviet agents who are
bringing nuclear bombs into this country.  On Monday May 16, I
received an alert from my intelligence sources that Soviet agents
were at that time in the process of transporting nuclear weapons
into the northern United States by truck through several entry
portals along the Canadian border.  The greatest focus of that
activity was at the Idaho entry points of Porthill and Eastport. 
For the next several days I was in frequent contact with my
intelligence contacts in Canada who were taking very definite
action to find and stop these Soviet intruders; but here in the
United States our attention is being focused on our border with
Mexico by the manufactured distraction of illegal immigrants.  At
the same time, we are undergoing a wholesale invasion along our
border with Canada by the Soviet Union and not one thing is being
done about it by the United States.  By late that first day, May
16, at least 16 Soviet vehicles carrying nuclear weapons were
known to have crossed into the United States from Canada through
entry portals into Idaho and Montana; meanwhile 7 more were on
Canadian Highway 3 from Vancouver, British Columbia, Canada,
heading toward Porthill and Eastport, Idaho, to enter the United
States.  By that time the origination point in the Vancouver area
had been narrowed down to a barge in Horseshoe Bay.  The
Canadians took care of the situation on their side of the border
by stopping and inspecting trucks in the appropriate area, and by
early May 18 all seven trucks driven by Soviet agents had been
stopped and rounded up just short of the border.  At that point,
however, their next step was to wait for further instructions
from Ottawa, and I have not yet been informed as to what further
action was taken.  Meanwhile the only public hint of what was
going on was contained in a short item printed in Vancouver
newspapers on May 19.  It stated that trucks were being stopped
and searched along Route 3, but did not give the reason.  For my
Canadian friends, now you know!  But it was a different and sad
story here in the United States.

   The Federal government is taking no action whatsoever, proving
that there is a continuing collusion between the Rockefeller
empire and the Soviet empire.  At the State level, one would hope
that the chances of obtaining action would be a little better,
but so far that has not been the case.  Concerned citizens who
have tried to bring my warnings to the attention of their
Governors and other high State officials have encountered
basically two reactions--one is that "This is something for the
Federal government, so we'll refer it to them"; and of course
there it ends.  The other main response is to the effect:
"Naturally even if we did find a bomb in the lake next to the
dam, we would not make it public--after all, we don't want to
excite the people."  But, my friends, that is like an air raid
warden refusing to turn on the siren during an attack because it
might frighten people.  At the local level though, one would hope
that some action could still be expected, but No; during the
period of May 16 I tried in every possible way to get local and
state police in northern Idaho to simply check out some very
specific reports I had been given, but to no avail.  Several
Soviet trucks were known to be heading southward in northern
Idaho toward the town of Sandpoint, and I was informed of the
approximate positions where it should have been possible to
intercept them on the highway; but when I relayed these reports
to State and local police in the area, both directly and through
a brave local citizen in that area, it turned out to be
impossible to persuade them to take action.  As one police
sergeant told me, "We're wondering why the Federal government
hasn't stepped in on this."  And since they had not, even after
being notified, the assumption was that there must not be
anything to it, therefore it was not even going to be
investigated.  And so there, my friends, is a part of the
handwriting on the wall for America.

   Most all Americans have been tricked into accepting the idea
that only the Federal government counts or is able to do
anything, even though this idea is totally alien to our Republic
as originally founded.  All the Federal government has to do is
not act or to remain silent about a matter, such as Soviet
missiles in our waters, and people conveniently leap to the
conclusion that there must not be any missiles.  As General
Keegan says, we're becoming incapable of being warned; and, my
friends, if we don't snap out of it, we will suffer horribly. 
The fact that something was afoot in the area of our nation's
water supplies should have been realized four years ago when
Nelson Rockefeller started his "National Commission on Water
Quality."  This he started at the same time as his much better
known "Commission on Critical Choices for Americans."  And just
as the Commission on Critical Choices was absorbed into the
Federal government in everything but name, the same was done with
Rockefeller's Commission on Water Quality.  But even if it was
clear that water was to become a political tool in some way, I
doubt that anyone in his worst nightmares imagined what was
actually afoot.  Over the past several years, Federal and State
water quality control boards have built up a comprehensive and
up-to-date picture of our nation's water resources and
requirements--and all this data has been turned over to the
Soviet Union!  So now, the Soviets know exactly where and how to
strike at us through our Achilles' heel of water, just as the
Medes and Persians were able to calculate how to attack ancient
Babylon through its water source.

   In the alliance between the Rockefeller and the Soviet Union
empires, the Rockefeller brothers still want to rule the American
continent under complete dictatorship; and the Soviets still want
America to become their complete satellite--a nation of slaves. 
But the Rockefellers realized long ago that this country could
not be brought under the total control they desire without the
benefit of crushing disasters to force us into that mold.  And
the Soviets for their part realize that to extract the benefit
from America that they seek, it is not enough simply to conquer
us in war.  Afterward there must be a core of turncoat managers,
quislings, to run America for them.  Soon, the Rockefellers
expect to obtain the "Declaration of National Emergency" that
they want in response to events which can be triggered by the
Soviets.  The Declaration of National Emergency, they believe,
will make their dictatorship all but complete.  At the present
time the Soviet Union has at least 158 underwater missiles in our
territorial waters along our coastlines.  In addition, the Great
Lakes now bristle with smaller, single warhead Soviet underwater
missiles--a total of 53 as of my latest information.  The fact
that the Soviet Union has been able to invade the Great Lakes and
place missiles there is shocking; and it is even more shocking to
know that Soviet agents are fanning out all over the United
States, unhampered, to sow seeds of nuclear disaster throughout
our land.  It's hard for most people to imagine how such things
are possible; but as I know from my own sources, they are being
facilitated from within our country.  For example, one of the key
steps which has been taken by the Carter administration to permit
these things recently was publicly confirmed by former
Congressman John Rarick of Louisiana.  Congressman Rarick
publishes a very informative monthly newsletter entitled "You've
a Right to Know", about which you might write to him at: Drawer
E, Saint Francisville, La.  70775.  Quoting from his March 1977
issue, "The Soviets are hauling United States cargo in
intra-coastal shipping illegally against the provisions of the
Jones Act.  Russian vessels can be seen in the river loading from
barges, and also unloading on two barges, as if they constitute
an integral arm of the United States Maritime Service.  Barges
loaded by Soviets have been followed up the river through inland
waterways and small canals to where their cargoes have even
reached the Chicago market."  Congressman Rarick further reports
that the Soviets are able to get away with this because Secretary
of the Treasury Blumenthal waived the provisions of the Jones Act
as applied to Soviet vessels.  Thanks to such generous help from
within the United States has been thrown wide open to offensive
Soviet actions.  As a result the planting of nuclear devices in
our inland waters--rivers as well as lakes and reservoirs--is
mushrooming at a tremendous pace.  To begin with, additional
bombs have been planted in some of the huge dammed-up lakes that
I named last month.  For example, Hoover Dam had one bomb when I
recorded Audioletter No. 23, but now it has 3--one next to each
end of the Dam itself, the third upstream some distance from the
Dam.  Another example is Oroville Reservoir in California.  Last
month it had one bomb, now it has 4.  But more serious than this
overkill of a few dams is the vast number of targets throughout
America where Soviet bombs have been and are being planted.  City
water reservoirs of any significance throughout America are
targeted.  Many already contain bombs, while others are scheduled
to receive bombs from the many trucks fanning out across America
with Soviet agents at the wheel.  Flood control, irrigation, and
hydroelectric dams of all kinds are targets as well; and major
rivers are also being seeded with bombs at strategic points.

   To indicate the magnitude of the Soviet attack plan, I will
report the current status of just one state--Texas, which is a
major target.  As of my latest intelligence, over 100 bombs have
already been planted in Texas; and I have been provided so far
with a partial list that specifies 33 of the lakes involved. 
These are: Toledo Bend Reservoir, Sam Rayburn Reservoir,
Steinhillyers Reservoir, Lake Vernon, two lakes northeast of
Houston which provide water for the city, Conroe Lake, Somerville
Reservoir, Lake Waco, Lake Whitney, Malakoff Lake, Frankston
Lake, Lake Livingston, Millwood Reservoir, Lake Texarkana, Lake
O' the Pines, Cedar Lake, Lake Tawakoni, four water reservoirs
for Dallas and Fort Worth, Lake Texoma, Arbuckle Reservoir, Lake
Bridgeport, Hubbard Creek Reservoir, Lake Kemp, Lake Arrowhead,
O'Folla Reservoir, San Angelo Reservoir, Twin Buttes Reservoir,
Lake Thomas, and White River Reservoir.

   A number of rivers around the country are also known to be
involved already.  These include the Mississippi, the Missouri,
the Illinois, the Ohio, the Columbia, the Potomac, and the
Susquehanna.  In the Mississippi alone there are already 31 bombs
located near dams, and locks, and other strategic points.  The
farthest to the north is a bomb about 5 miles downstream of
Little Falls, Minnesota.  From there, they have all been planted
all the way down to New Orleans of Louisiana, where 2 bombs are
in the river.  There are also two other bombs near New Orleans at
the east end of Lake Pontchartrain.

   My friends, the Soviet Union is striving to be in a position
to suddenly, decisively rob America of our water resources. 
While we are distracted with arguments over weapons delivery
systems, such as bombers and missiles, the Soviet Union is
striving for the reliability of weapons that are already on site
at the target.  When war comes, the Soviet Union plans to be able
to just push a button, detonate nuclear weapons all over America,
devastate our country with floods and the pestilence that they
bring, and still have all their missiles and bombers still in
reserve.  But before war comes, the Rockefeller/ Soviet alliance
plan to lay the groundwork for a Declaration of National
Emergency in the United States.

   One option still available to them is war in the Middle East
causing a cutoff of Arab OPEC oil supplies.  But a horrendous new
capability is now in place as an alternate means for creating our
national emergency; and, my friends, there are ominous signs that
this capability is going to be used, very soon.  Lurking deep in
the waters around the Philippine Islands there are now 7
fission-fusion-fission bombs planted there by the Soviet Union. 
Such a bomb is essentially a hydrogen bomb with a jacket of
uranium 238.  When it's set off, the nuclear reaction converts
much of the jacket material to plutonium 239, which in turn
explodes as well.  The Soviet Union is the only nation that has
ever set off such a bomb--16 years ago on October 30, 1961.  In
doing so, they set an ugly record that still stands--the biggest
nuclear weapon ever fired in the atmosphere.  Its yield was
something over 50 megatons--that is 50 million tons of TNT, 2500
times as large as the atomic bomb dropped on Hiroshima. 
Theoretically, there's no limit to the yield of such a bomb, but
for 16 years it has been thought of in the West as unusable
because it produces such vast quantities of fall-out that it
would endanger the country that used it.  But the Soviet Union
has found a way to use it--deep under the ocean for geophysical
warfare in an environment where the radio-active products are
relatively confined, producing little fall-out.  The Philippines
sit like a keystone among a long arch of sub-sea trenches and
faults that comprise the most earthquake-prone areas on earth. 
Starting just north of New Zealand, a band of geological
instability runs northwestward toward the Philippines, then
northeastward past Japan to the Kamchatka Peninsula, eastward
along the Aleutians to Alaska, and then southward along the west
coast of the United States, Mexico, Central America, and onward
all the way to Chile.  This long, irregular zone around the
Pacific rim is often called the "Ring of Fire."  The 7 Soviet
bombs planted in Philippine waters are there for the purpose of
triggering major earthquakes, which, thanks to the peculiar
convergence of faults and trenches in that area, are intended to
work their way by chain reaction all around the Pacific rim,
devastating Washington State, Oregon, and California in the
process.  The 7 bombs in the Philippines are in the so-called
gigaton range--that is, each one is equivalent to a billion tons
of TNT--50,000 times more powerful than the Hiroshima bomb and
therefore big enough to trigger massive earthquakes.  And the
Soviets believe they can safely use such warfare, treaties or no
treaties, because most of the Soviet Union has no history of
earthquakes.  The Soviet gigaton bombs in the Philippines are
located at navigational coordinates which I will now reveal.  No.
1 is at 17-23-23 north, 117-7-23 east; No. 2 is at 14-48-48
north, 119-2-18 east; No. 3 is at 14-0-40 north, 118-23-53 east;
No. 4 is at 13-0-0 north, 117-42-8 east; No. 5 is at 12-0-54
north, 126-4-55 east; No. 6 is at 13-50-36 north, 125-21-45 east;
No. 7 is at 19-48-3 north, 123-51-57 east.  But to make sure that
our west coast is devastated by the effects of a seeming natural
disaster erupting in the Philippines, a series of 7 conventional
but large hydrogen bombs have been planted off our west coast by
the Soviet Union.  These can be set off in conjunction with those
in the Philippines, and at the right moment to produce tidal
waves which would sweep in from the Pacific with devastating
effect along our west coast.  Bomb No. 1 west of Seattle is at
48-0-0 north, 127-50-0 west; No. 2 west of Eugene, Oregon is at
43-29-18 north, 127-55-5 west; No. 3 west of San Francisco is at
37-8-45 north, 125-42-30 west; No. 4 west of Monterey is at
36-31-0 north, 125-26-30 west; No. 5, also west of Monterey, is
at 36-26-30 north, 124-56-0 west; No. 6 west of Los Angeles is at
33-25-15 north, 122-23-50 west; and No. 7 southwest of San Diego
is at 31-45-35 north, 120-36-0 west.  In my Audioletter No. 20
for January 1977, I referred to a warning document issued in
December 1975 by Mr. Tony Hodges of Hawaii.  In that document Mr.
Hodges presented evidence of the feasibility of underwater
missiles.  He also warned of the dangers of bombs on or in the
seabed designed to generate earthquakes or tidal waves. 
Unfortunately, it turns out that Mr. Hodges warnings were all

   The dictatorship and war plans are being speeded up now; the
world will be stunned by what will look like a massive, natural
disaster in the Philippines that also spreads around the Ring of
Fire to decimate our west coast.  And when it happens, Jimmy
Carter will have the excuse David Rockefeller wants him to have
to declare a National Emergency and in effect suspend the United
States Constitution.  The President's dictatorial emergency
powers spelled out in Executive Orders 11490 and 11921 will be
activated, and the complete bureaucracy of dictatorship set in
motion under circumstances designed to stifle all dissent; and
the elaborate prescriptions for complete governmental control of
all of our water resources spelled out in Executive Order 11921
will be activated under conditions which enable this to be sold
to the people as necessary for our best interest.  Soon
thereafter, with the Rockefeller dictatorship in place, Nuclear
War One itself is planned to come.  Dams and reservoirs all over
America are to be destroyed at one blow by the Soviet Union; and
the quislings from the Trilateral Commission, who now control the
Federal government, will use their control over what little
remains of our water supplies to make their domination of us
total.  The saddest thing about all of this is that only when it
happens will people believe.  By total exposure there is a chance
to prevent the West Coast disaster; but without exposure, there
is no chance whatsoever.

   My friends, it's only by the grace and power of our Lord Jesus
Christ that I've received the information I revealed over the
recent past; and it's my solemn duty to pass on this information
to you--it's not meant for me alone.  And in the same way, it's
not meant for you alone--it needs to be known by every one.  And
so, my friends, this completes two years of my monthly
Audioletters.  I want to thank you for all your words of
encouragement, your support, and especially your prayers.  Again,
thank you; and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 23

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


(This recording is a product of Audio Books, Inc., Box 16428,
Fort Worth, Texas  76133)

    Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is April 24,
1977, and this is my monthly Audioletter No. 23.

    Two months ago in Audioletter No. 21 for February 1977, I
explained how America had been turned into a nation-wide energy
addict over the course of two generations and more, and how this
energy addiction is to be used against us by the four Rockefeller
brothers in turning off our national security; and just four days
ago, on April 20, 1977, this process got under way in earnest by
way of David Rockefeller's revolutionary energy program announced
to the world by his employee, Jimmy Carter.  To the casual
observer it must seem incredible--a new administration under a
new President, with no previous experience in Washington, has in
only three short months done what no previous administration has
ever succeeded in doing: developed a comprehensive, detailed
energy program for the most complex economy on earth. 
Furthermore, Mr. Carter tells us that we must do as he tells us
in order to avoid "a national catastrophe"; and he says we must
act now.  Why the rush?  Why this sudden urgency?  And why does
he go out of his way to call his energy program "the moral
equivalent of war"?  The answer lies in what I warned you about
at the end of monthly Audioletter No. 22 just last month.

    The CIA is hard at work arranging what is to be the CIA's
crowning achievement--the staging of a horrendous act of
terrorism that is intended to cause war to erupt in the whole of
the Middle East.  This is to set in motion a modified, up-dated
version of the detailed war plan I revealed in monthly
Audioletter No. 6 for November 1975.  This plan includes a
limited nuclear strike from the Sinai to cap off Arab OPEC oil
wells except those in Libya, which is controlled by the CIA. 
This will lead immediately to very harsh energy rationing in the
United States, and the Federal government will at last get to
issue those precious gas rationing coupons that have been
awaiting use now for over three years.  So the Carter energy plan
with its underlying warlike atmosphere is actually the first step
in a gradual shift unto a war footing for the United States.  It
has the same purpose as the declaration of national emergency
which President Franklin D. Roosevelt proclaimed in May 1941, six
months before Pearl Harbor, to start getting America ready for
war he was helping to bring about.  The second major step in our
progressive shift onto war footing is intended to occur the time
of the cut-off of Middle East oil, by war.  This will provide a
perfect excuse for an actual Declaration of National Emergency,
and that in turn will activate all the dictatorial presidential
powers spelled out in Executive Order 11921 signed by President
Ford very quietly in June 1976, and described in my Audioletter
No. 14 for July 1976.

    Audioletter No. 14, of course, is also the issue in which I
first revealed the presence of Soviet underwater missiles and
bombs in our own territorial waters.  The terrible Middle East
incident now brewing, which I fervently hope and pray will
somehow be sidetracked by its advanced exposure, is to cause a
limited nuclear war in the Middle East.  That in turn is supposed
to initiate a chain of events, culminating in Nuclear War One
between the Soviet Union and the United States of America. 
Originally this was to have been a carefully programmed war for
the mutual benefit of the Rockefeller cartel and their Soviet
allies, with the Rockefellers and their intimates riding out the
war safely in the nuclear-safe zone across the northern United
States; but ever since the Soviet Union began its double cross of
the Rockefellers last summer 1976, the plans for war have been
undergoing frantic revisions.  Even the insane Rockefeller
concessions to the Soviets, embodied in the Red Friday agreement
of October 1, 1976 (which I revealed that month in Audioletter
No. 17) have failed to fully reinstate the Rockefeller/Soviet
alliance--so now anything can happen.  The Rockefeller brothers,
who for so long have tried to play God with their immense power,
are now finding out that they too are fallible and human, even if
they still refuse to consciously admit it.  Today, my friends,
the power of the Rockefeller empire is in the process of
destroying itself; but just as Samson pulled down the temple
around him, the Rockefeller brothers threaten to pull down modern
civilization around their heads as their power runs out of
control and collapses into the inferno of nuclear war.

    Earlier this month, on April 7, 1977, Prime Minister Rabin of
Israel resigned.  The press has played up his resignation as if
it were another Watergate, but actually it was only a
technicality having to do with a modest bank account held here in
Washington, D.C. by Rabin against government regulations. 
Overnight Rabin was out of office, and his public career has been
described as ruined; but the real reason for Rabin's lightning
exit from Israeli politics was that he learned of the CIA plot to
ignite war in the Middle East, and he wanted no part of it.  It's
almost a replay of Sir Harold Wilson's sudden unexplained
resignation as Prime Minister of Great Britain on March 16, 1976,
just over a year ago; and as I explained then in monthly
Audioletter No. 10, Wilson resigned because he had learned of the
coming war plan and wanted nothing to do with it.  And so the
build-up toward war continues, and our rulers know it.  But what
of the American public in general?  How many know what danger we
are in?  And especially, how many believe it enough to do
something about it?  My friends, most Americans today are on
vacation from reality, but reality will have to be faced one day
in the not too distant future.

    My three special topics for today are: Topic #1--THE PRE-WAR

Topic #1--In the early days of the 20th century the
Rockefeller/Standard Oil monopoly had already become supreme in
the United States, but abroad it faced two powerful competitors
in oil.  One was the British Empire, whose destruction by means
of two World Wars I've discussed in a number of my past talking
tapes.  The other foreign competitor was even bigger than the
British Empire in oil, and it was attacked and destroyed first. 
That competitor was Czarist Russia.  After the Bolshevik
Revolution took place in 1917, property owners and businessmen of
all kinds were dispossessed and liquidated in great numbers.  And
included in this, by design, was the utter destruction of the oil
fields, refineries, oil tankers, everything having to do with
oil.  The small band of revolutionaries under Lenin and Trotsky
who had been sent into Russia with the help of Rockefeller
financing had done their job well; and within a few years the new
Communist regime of the Soviet Union welcomed the
Rockefeller/Standard Oil interests with open arms to re-develop
the huge Russian oil reserves.  Ever since that day, right down
to the present, practically all of the oil leaving the Soviet
Union has been carried in oil tankers of the Rockefeller/Standard
Oil empire under various names, nominees, and national flags. 
For a thorough and most unusual expose of the oil competition
presented to the Rockefellers by Czarist Russia, I highly
recommend a new book by Robert V. Tolf, entitled THE RUSSIAN
INDUSTRY published by the Hoover Institution Press, Stanford
University, Stanford, Calif.  94305--the price is $15.95

    For decades following the Bolshevik Revolution, the Soviet
rulers were absolutely dependent upon an uninterrupted flow of
transfusions from the West of money, technical know-how, food,
and arms.  The Kremlin ruled a huge nation with an iron fist, and
the Rockefellers shared this rule with the Kremlin.  The Soviet
Union, therefore, appeared to be the perfect vehicle for bringing
the entire world under the control of the super-rich Rockefellers
and their intimates.  All that was necessary, or so they thought,
was to gradually build up the Soviet system while bleeding to
death the harder to control United States and the western world. 
This was the situation the four Rockefeller brothers inherited
long ago-they literally grew up with it, and could hardly imagine
things being any different.  But now things are different.  The
Soviet Union can now survive without continued outside help, and
now they have been double-crossing the Rockefellers and we the
people will have to suffer for it.  Now, both the Rockefellers
and the Soviets are maneuvering, playing a tricky game, and all
the while trying to emerge supreme from the conflict to come. 
But, just as it was planned before the Rockefeller/Soviet
alliance began coming apart, the main and prime battleground is
to be the United States of America.  The Soviet Union is busy at
work trying to weaken America here and abroad so that we can be
defeated in Nuclear War One; and the Rockefellers are trying to
turn our nation into a complete dictatorship under their
domination.  Both are trying to bend the weakening of America's
freedom to their own special advantage.

    The centerpiece of the Rockefeller program to completely take
over America right now is the so-called CARTER ENERGY PROGRAM. 
Recently the CIA s-u-d-d-e-n-l-y upgraded its estimates of Soviet
spending for new military equipment and installations to four
times the previous figure so as to alarm us.  In a similar vein,
the CIA has also provided Jimmy Carter with grist for his energy
mill to grind us into submission by issuing a report saying world
oil reserves are much lower than previously thought.  Both CIA
reports are rubbish, issued purely for propaganda purposes; so
the CIA under Admiral Turner, who is a Rockefeller man, is
continuing with the preparations for the limited nuclear strike
from the Sinai in order to get the war started.  American F-15
fighter bombers are now available in the Sinai and would hit all
of the five or more Arab target areas with ease; and the special
low-yield nuclear weapons for the job are already on the scene,
currently stored underground at the so-called American Monitoring
Station in the Sinai.  The bombs themselves are atomic, not
hydrogen, very clean, with primary blast effects confined to a
radius of only 300 to 400 yards--just right for a so-called
surgical attack to wipe out the oil wells in the target areas.

    As for America, even though the Alaskan oil is supposed to
start flowing through the pipeline this summer, it will not come
into the lower United States.  It happens to be high sulphur oil
of a type which west-coast refineries cannot handle even though
there have been ten years to get ready for Alaskan oil.  Instead,
the Rockefeller plan is to ship this oil to Japan at a handsome
profit, of course, and make up the difference with more imports
of, guess what--Arab oil.  When the Arab oil is cut off, there
will be some attempts to ship some of the otherwise useless
Alaskan oil to the Gulf Coast by small, inefficient tankers
through the Panama Canal, which is targeted both by underwater
missiles and by missiles in Guyana.  The sharp drop in our oil
supplies will also help to intensify the reduction in food
supplies, which is already resulting from drought here in
America.  Many factors are contributing to the drought situation,
including not only the Soviet weather modification activities
I've mentioned in the past, but also activities under Rockefeller
control.  For example, I mentioned in Audioletter No. 9 for
February 1976 that for years the Rockefeller oil companies have
been knowingly lowering the underground water table in many areas
of the Midwest and Great Plains by means of excessive pumping
from their oil wells; and now, in many of these very areas, the
problem of low ground water is adding to the drought crisis.

    Meanwhile, the Rockefellers never lose sight of their
objectives, no matter how much they are forced to change their
tactics along the way.  Their objective for America is
DICTATORSHIP, according to the pattern spelled out in their
secret New Constitution, which I revealed in my Audio Book
Talking Tape No. 4 released in July 1975.  Under the guise of
"governmental reorganization", the provisions of their
dictatorial new constitution are being imposed on the United
States piecemeal, gradually, while our real Constitution is
increasingly "interpreted" out of existence.

    But of all the things that determine whether a nation will
survive or succumb in time of crisis, the human spirit is still
the most important.  A strong spirit and deep resolve can
overcome seemingly insurmountable obstacles, and it can make a
people impossible to conquer; but a weak spirit, without
convictions or values, leaves a people defenseless--defenseless
no matter how much armor they may wear or what weapons they may
command.  This is why the human spirit has been the most
consistent target of all, both of the Rockefeller "One World"
group and of the rulers of the Soviet Union.

    Last month in Audioletter No. 22 I pointed out one of the
extremes in church philosophy that has been promoted wherever
possible for generations by the Rockefellers and their
collaborators.  This extreme is to divorce the moral and
spiritual lessons of religions from daily decisions and actions,
as if the two had no relationship to one another except for lip
service.  For whatever reasons, this extreme is personified today
by one Jimmy Carter.  The opposite extreme is equally deadly, if
not more so.  This is to dilute the spiritual teaching for which
churches originally existed and replace it with preaching about
economic, political, and social issues.  To do this is to play
with fire; but this is exactly what the National Council of
Churches and its sister organization the World Council of
Churches have been doing for decades.  Prior to November 28,
1950, the National Council was known as the Federal Council of
Churches.  For many years the Federal Council had been dominated
at the national level by the Rockefellers and their agent John
Foster Dulles, and was the recipient of several grants from the
Rockefeller Foundation.  But the Federal Council became so
totally identified with political activism in support of
socialist causes that it became an object of increasing distrust. 
Accordingly, the name was changed to the National Council of
Churches, and its tarnished halo was polished up with public
assurances that this was a new organization which would devote
itself to the real business of the church.  There were many
influential laymen in the churches under the umbrella of the
National Council who wanted to help insure that the supposedly
new organization would truly devote itself to proper areas of
church concern.  As a result, a National Lay Committee was
brought into being under the chairmanship of the late J. Howard
Pugh, a truly great American, who was the director and president
of the Sun Oil Co. when it was still free of the grasping
clutches of the Rockefellers.  The National Lay Committee existed
from March 28, 1951, until June 30, 1955.

    The whole story of what happened to the National Lay
Committee of the National Council of Churches is told in the
"Chairman's Final Report" by J. Howard Pugh.  Unfortunately this
important report has long been suppressed and buried.  I have in
my possession one of the very few copies still known to be in
existence; therefore I will read a few brief passages from the
Chairman's Explanatory Letter, which serves as a Foreword to the
Report as a whole.  These quotations are taken in sequence; and
although they do not do justice to Mr. Pugh's complete
explanatory letter, much less the entire 316-page Report, I
believe you will find them revealing:

   "In the failure of this most important effort to bring about
an enduring partnership between the clergy and laity, I feel a
very real responsibility to provide a comprehensive and factual
account of those steps which led to the Board's
action--discontinuing lay participation."

   "We lay people found ourselves not only deeply in the minority
but often poles apart from the clergy who invariably out-voted us
10 to 1 in these sessions."

   "The members of the Lay Committee were often misunderstood in
their urgency to keep the churches out of politics and their
insistence on the promisee evangelism.  Our premise was that
instead of appealing to government, the church should devote its
energies to the work of promoting the attributes of
Christianity--truth, honesty, fairness, generosity, justice, and
charity in the hearts and minds of men.  We attempted to
emphasize that Christ stressed not the expanded State, but the
dignity and responsibility of the individual."

   "Their philosophy, it seemed to the Lay Committee, looked to
an ever-expanding government."

   "With few exceptions, the members of the Lay Committee had
agreed to serve only because they had been assured that the new
National Council would avoid the political involvements and
controversies of the old Federal Council of Churches, which was
now superseded."

   "Most of the members of the Lay Committee came finally to the
realization that a wide chasm existed between the thinking of the
laity and the clergy and executives of the denominational bodies
which comprise the National Council."

   "Thus, on June 30, 1955, the Lay Committee ceased to exist as
a committee of the General Board."

   "The members of the Lay Committee believed, and so stated,
that the political adventures of the National Council in the
fields of economic and political controversy would seriously
hinder and not further Christian leadership in the pressing
fields of evangelism, fellowship, and education."

   "It appears from the record that the National Council could
find no room for opposition to the philosophies and practices
carried over from the old Federal Council.  Lacking the patience
to resolve the basic problem, it has sought to bury it."

Thus ended, my friends, more than 20 years ago the last major
effort to deflect the Rockefeller-dominated National Council of
Churches away from its political programs and toward concern for
spiritual matters.  After more than four years of frustrating
effort, the National Lay Committee was dissolved.  This signaled
the end of any influence of the general church population of
America on the policies of the National Council of Churches.  The
National Council proceeded on its way, proclaiming to the public
that it represented 34,000,000 Protestants, while using this
power base to help undermine our free Republic.  The National
Council has done much to help dull and weaken the spirit of
millions of Americans, softening our approach in opposition to
Communism.  Let us hope and pray that in these dangerous days
they will at last see the light and begin to work at last to
build up the American spirit, instead of destroying it.

Topic #2--In monthly Audioletter No. 15 for August 1976, I
explained that the planting of short-range underwater-launch
nuclear missiles in our territorial waters was part of the Soviet
naval strategy for the United States and world conquest.  The
same continues to be the case now.  Admiral Gorshkoff, who has
commanded the Soviet navy for more than 20 years, has built it
into a fighting force that is radically different from any other
navy the world has ever seen; and as we near the very threshold
of war, it is no accident that the Rockefeller insider who now
heads the CIA is also an Admiral--4-star Admiral Stansfield
Turner.  The CIA has become the most powerful military
organization in the United States, and Nuclear War One will
revolve around naval strategy.  Both the importance of the Soviet
Navy and its great difference from our own United States Navy can
be illustrated by just one fact: When the supersonic Backfire
long-range bomber entered operational service in the Soviet Union
late in 1974, it did so simultaneously with the Soviet Navy as
well as with the Soviet Air Force.  This is like giving our own
new supersonic bomber, the B-1, to our Navy to fly--or, since we
still do not have the B-1 to counter the Soviet Backfire, having
our navy fly B-52s.  Of course our own navy does not fly
strategic bombers.  The United States Navy, like the British Navy
and most of the other great navies of history, has as one of its
primary missions the protection of our sea lanes of commerce--a
war which is basically defensive in nature.  Since World War II
our navy has also acquired offensive missions which have
gradually assumed greater importance, including the ability to
attack an enemy from the sea with the submarine-launched
ballistic missiles.  But the traditional defensive mission of
protecting our sea lanes can never be neglected.  Admiral
Gorshkoff, however, has been able to concentrate on building a
navy which is almost totally offensive in character.  Soviet
fishing trawlers, some of them genuine, roam the world; but the
Soviet Union does not depend for its survival on the sea nearly
as much as the United States.  So the Soviet Navy is designed
first and foremost for offensive operations; and this not only
includes the ability to interdict enemy sea lanes and attack
enemy naval forces at sea, it also includes an unprecedented
emphasis on projecting naval power ashore.  This in turn means
not only the ability to carry out amphibious assaults and
tactical bombardment, but strategic attack--a role we usually
tend to think of only in terms of the Soviet Air Force with its
ICBMs and bombers.

    The new Soviet Navy of Admiral Gorshkoff also differs from
ours in another way.  Aside from missile submarines, the American
Navy is structured around the aircraft carrier; whereas the
Soviet Navy is built around the submarine.  American task forces
include all kinds of ships designed to coordinate with the needs
and capabilities of the aircraft carrier.  By the same token,
Soviet surface ships of all kinds are intended to support the
huge submarine force in various ways.  This applies even to the
new Soviet aircraft carriers which are now beginning to appear on
the scene since Soviet naval aviation is heavily oriented toward
anti-submarine warfare, although it has other capabilities as
well.  The relative naval capabilities of the Soviet Union and
the United States have never been considered in the Strategic
Arms Limitations Talks, the SALT talks, except with regard to
sea-launch ballistic missiles; and yet it is the coming naval
confrontation that could all by itself determine the outcome of
Nuclear War One.  It is often forgotten, for example, that the
North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) is primarily a naval
alliance.  We hear frequently about NATO in the controlled major
media of the United States as though the only problems were Army
problems--such as rusty tanks and lack of spare parts; and when
the Supreme Allied Commander, Europe, who is presently General
Alexander Haig, is mentioned in the news, he is often called the
head of NATO, or some such, but actually he's only one of three
co-equal Commanders in NATO.  The other two are Naval
Commanders--they are the Commander-in-Chief, Channel Command; and
the Supreme Allied Commander, Atlantic, the latter based at
Norfolk, Va.  NATO depends for its very life on its naval
strength, including the ability to keep open the vital North
Atlantic sea lanes.  But now, Soviet naval Backfire bombers with
air-to-surface, anti-ship missiles threaten to cut those North
Atlantic sea lanes in time of war; and the Mediterranean, which
was once dominated by the United States Navy, is now heavily
populated by the Soviet Navy as well.  While the Soviet Navy has
undergone explosive growth over the past decade to the formidable
armed force that it is today, the United States Navy has been
allowed to shrink to half its former size with more and more
ships aging and obsolescent.  When the Arab oil is cut off by war
soon, Europe will have to fall back on its meager reserves, which
will run out within 60 to 90 days.  Interdiction of NATO sea
lanes at that point by the Soviet Union could cause all of Europe
to fall like a plum into Soviet hands.  This is especially true
in light of the short-range Soviet underwater missiles in
European territorial waters, which I mentioned in Audioletter No.
22 last month.  So far only Great Britain shows signs of being
able to withstand such a course of events.  As I mentioned last
month, the British government had requested the latest missile
coordinates from me, and I had supplied them.  Of the 29 Soviet
missiles around the British Isles at that time, all but one had
been removed by the Royal Navy as of April 18--6 days ago. 
However, I have been informed of 3 newly planted missiles there,
and I have relayed these to the British for action.  Great
Britain also may have the benefit of her new North Sea oil fields
which, barring sabotage or the like, should make Britain
independent of foreign oil producers in the near future.

    Since I spoke to you last, action has been taken in another
area also.  Acting on information which I relayed, of the 8
missiles around southern Africa, seven have now been taken up. 
At last report, however, the missile lying off Mozambique
targeted on Rhodesia was still in place.  Such removals of
missiles are better than no action at all, but they are still no
more than holding actions.  What is needed, if war is to be
prevented, is for this deadly cat-and-mouse game to be stopped
altogether by revealing to the whole world what the Soviet Navy
is up to.  Late last September, as I revealed in monthly
Audioletter No. 16, the United States had a golden opportunity to
do just that, and to do so while the Soviet underwater missile
threat was only a small fraction of what it is now.  At that
time, a Soviet missile-laying mini-sub equipped with
sonar-defeating design features entered Chesapeake Bay and became
trapped there, due to a malfunction that ultimately killed the
crew.  It was a perfect opportunity for the United States to pick
up the sub, display it on television world-wide by satellite, and
tell the Soviet Union that the jig was up; but instead, as I
revealed in Audioletter No. 17 the following month, the Red
Friday agreement on October 1, 1976 reinstated a strained
alliance between the Rockefellers and the Soviets, and the Soviet
Navy was allowed to enter Chesapeake Bay under cover of darkness
and recover the mini-sub.  But now, a similar opportunity exists
once again--not in American waters but in those of Norway.  In
March 1977 a Soviet submarine entered the fjord of Folda on the
north coast of Norway.  The Norwegians detected its presence and
sealed off the exit to wait for the sub to surface.  On April 4,
1977, the story was broken in European press, although the
location was not mentioned.  To my knowledge, however, it has
received no mention anywhere in the United States.  I strongly
suggest to the Norwegian government that before the Soviet
submarine be allowed to escape, a search be made at the
navigational coordinates 64 35' 23" north, 10 23' 14" east.  This
location is not far from where the Soviet submarine is trapped
and is the site of one of the seven Soviet underwater missiles
that have been planted recently in Norwegian waters.  Should the
government of Norway so request, I will naturally provide the
other locations as well, through proper channels.

    As for the United States, there continues to be no effort at
all to clear our waters of the Soviet nuclear weapons which
threaten our country.  As of my latest report a few days ago, not
one of the 158 Soviet missiles and hydrogen bombs lurking in our
territorial waters has been removed, and I have not been
approached in any way by the United States government with
requests for their locations.  Meanwhile the Soviet plutonium
cloud attacks on the United States are still continuing by means
of the new canisters which are being deployed close to shore
along the West Coast, which I mentioned last month.  Of the 16
canisters which were deployed at the time I recorded Audioletter
No. 22 last month, 11 had been discharged as of April 15, but by
then there were 17 new ones.  At last report, these canisters are
being deployed along the entire West Coast from San Diego to
Seattle.  These are extremely easy and simple to deploy--for
example, they are dropped from aircraft flying under our radar
like the Soviet Bear bombers that we were told about by news
reports the other day.  They are also planted by Soviet trawlers,
since they are allowed to enter our new 200-mile fishing zone to
catch certain fish there.  The fact that this is being done was
proven by the arrested Soviet trawler Taras Shevchenko which was
carrying plutonium canisters in a compartment near the stern of
the ship.

    Thus the maneuvering in preparation for Nuclear War One
continues with a strong naval emphasis.  At one level,
Rockefeller agents in America appear to continue to cooperate in
the joint plan of conquest with the Soviets; but on the real
level the Soviets and the Rockefellers are both jockeying for a
decisive knock-out blow.  In this, time is on the side of the
Soviet Union, so they're trying to delay war slightly while the
Rockefeller brothers are trying to hurry it up; and to condition
us all for it, the Carter Administration is flexing its muscles
to show us how strong it is when it comes to the Soviets.  In
short order it has forcefully espoused Human Rights, handed the
Soviets an ultimatum on SALT talks, seized Soviet fishing
trawlers, chased Soviet Bear long-range turbo-prop bombers away
from the southeast coast of our country--and what's next?  A
photo of a Soviet submarine in our waters?  Already the
Rockefeller position has decayed further in the past several
months because of the further deterioration of their CIA undersea
super-missiles in the Atlantic and Pacific.  Of the fleet of 14
such missiles which I described in Audioletter No. 20, January
1977, all 5 in the Pacific have now sprung leaks and are no
longer usable.  Of the 9 in the Atlantic, 4 have now
failed--missiles #4, 6, 7, and 8.  That leaves only 5 of the
original fleet of 14 CIA missiles still available for Rockefeller
threats against their Soviet partners.  Meanwhile the Soviet
short-range missiles in our waters in the Atlantic and Pacific
Oceans and the Gulf of Mexico are now being used by the Soviets
to further weaken our position as a nation.

    But, my friends, that's not all.  For the very first time
Soviet missiles have now been planted in the Great Lakes.  From
there they now threaten Chicago, Racine, Milwaukee, Cleveland,
Bay City, Erie, Buffalo, Rochester, and other cities of our
industrial heartland.  At present there are exactly 50 such
missiles in the Great Lakes.  These, however, are single warhead,
short-range missiles, and are even smaller in size than the
multiple warhead missiles that have been planted along our East,
West, and Gulf Coasts.  As if this were not enough, I have just
been alerted that Soviet agents are now fanning out across
America planting small hydrogen bombs in selected inland lakes. 
The primary targets here are major dams, but some other targets
are also involved.  Since the Federal government refuses to take
action, it's imperative that State governments--especially those
in the West--take action now to protect their citizens.  Security
patrols around major dams and lakes should be beefed up
immediately and placed on full alert.  In addition, search
operations must be performed to locate those bombs that have
already been planted so that they can be removed.  Already,
Soviet underwater nuclear devices have been planted in 21 places
within the United States, and more are being planted.  Nineteen
(19) of the targets are dams, the other 2 are cities.  CALIFORNIA
has 4--Oroville Dam north of Sacramento, Castaic Dam north of Los
Angeles, Shasta Dam in north California, and Otay Reservoir Dam
near San Diego.  ARIZONA also has 4 bombs--Glen Canyon Dam,
Coolidge Dam, Theodore Roosevelt Dam, and Lake Pleasant Dam near
Phoenix.  NEW MEXICO has 3--the Navajo Dam, Blue Mesa Dam, and
Alfa Butte Dam.  MONTANA has 3--Fort Peck Dam, Yellow Tail Dam,
NEVADA, and WASHINGTON STATE so far have 1 bomb each, threatening
dams which are among the world's largest--these are respectively
Garrison Dam, Oahe Dam, Fort Randall Dam, Hoover Dam, and Grand
Coulee Dam.  IDAHO has 2 bombs, both threatening towns--one is in
the north end of Cour d'Alene Lake, threatening the town of that
name; the other is in the north end of Lake Pend Oreille near the
town of Sandpoint.  My friends, this would not have been possible
had it not been for the destruction of the FBI beginning with the
murder of J. Edgar Hoover.  God help us all.

Topic #3--With our military situation so serious, one would
naturally expect someone to come forward to take action against
the Soviet underwater missiles.  For example, General George S.
Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, brought about the
removal of many of these ocean and gulf missiles during August
and September 1976.  But where is he now?!!  My friends, here is
what has happened to General Brown.  No matter how much the
tactics of public manipulation change and shift, some things
never change.  I mentioned several months ago in connection with
the disgraceful Sputnik One episode that nowadays accolades and
awards go to the spoilers and traitors in our midst, while the
true heroes who dare to raise their heads are beaten down,
suppressed, and forgotten.  Today there is no more grim testimony
to this fact than the current predicament of General George S.

    As Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, General Brown is
the top military officer in the United States, and therefore in
some respects in the entire free world.  As I revealed in detail
in monthly Audioletter No. 16 for September 1976, it was he,
General Brown, who more than any other person in the United
States government, prevented a surprise Soviet nuclear attack on
America during August and September 1976.  Under extremely
adverse conditions, he obtained the go-ahead to remove Soviet
underwater missiles and hydrogen bombs then planted in our own
territorial waters and then ordered the United States Navy to do
the job, which it did quickly.  And on September 16, 1976, I met
for over an hour with General Brown in his office at the Pentagon
to discuss the continuing Soviet underwater missile crisis and to
relay new information to him which had been prevented from
reaching him through normal channels.  In meeting with me,
General Brown was accepting terrible personal risks, and he knew
it.  He had overruled his entire staff in order to meet with me,
and the meeting itself was completely free of interruptions of
any kind.  Nor was there any cut-off due to time; the meeting
simply continued without pressure until we finished the business
at hand.  Then I left, along with an associate who had
accompanied me to the meeting as a witness.  We drove away from
the Pentagon that day in a driving rainstorm; but the brave
patriot whose office we had just left now faced a far worse
personal storm--thanks to his efforts on our nation's behalf.  I
warned my listeners about this in monthly Audioletter No. 16 last
September, and asked that everyone strengthen his hand by
expressing their support for him.

    General Brown, alone among the top echelons of the United
States government, had stood by us and had saved millions of our
lives in the process.  Now he was depending on us to stand by him
in his continuing efforts to carry out his Constitutional duties
to the letter.  Some of us did so, my friends, but far too many
of us did not.  During August and early September 1976, the Joint
Chiefs of Staff were flooded with demands for action against the
Soviet underwater missiles; but after that action was taken,
there was no such massive outpouring of thanks for General
Brown's crucial leadership or support for the continued positive
efforts needed to save our country.  Far too many of us forget
that it is not enough just to complain about what is wrong; we
must also actively support that which is right, or it will wither
and die.  After the crucial actions taken under General Brown's
leadership late last summer, far too many of us just relaxed and
went back to sleep, leaving General Brown to fend for himself.

    Now I must tell you what has happened to General Brown as a
result.  For many months now I have been cut off from direct
contact with General Brown; and in recent months General Brown
has seemed like a completely different person than in the past
whenever he appears in public.  In place of the outgoing
personality which has been General Brown's trademark in the past,
there is nothing but resignation and acceptance of the dictates
of his civilian superiors.  The change has been so dramatic that
it has even been commented upon by syndicated columnists, who are
mystified.  What has happened to General Brown, my friends, is
known to very few.  I myself have been able to confirm it only
within the past few days.  General George S. Brown, the nation's
top military officer, is now virtually under house arrest.  This
is exactly the same kind of confinement that was meted out, for
example, to Army Lieutenant William Calley during his court
martial for the My Lai massacre in Vietnam.  But there are two
differences in General Brown's case.  First, there has been no
court martial.  Instead, he is living under the threat of a court
martial, for its twisted evidence and perjuring witnesses have
already been assembled.  Second, General Brown's isolation at the
Pentagon and confinement to his Fort Myer residence are not
absolute.  Instead, they are interspersed with very carefully
controlled appearances at official functions, since his absence
from these would quickly arouse suspicions that something was
terribly wrong.  Now, should General Brown attempt again to step
out of line and defy those in high places by giving orders to
remove the missiles, doing his Constitutional duty, the suspended
threat of court martial would instantly come crashing down upon
him.  By means of the elaborately doctored and falsified evidence
I've already mentioned, General Brown would be railroaded into
certain conviction for treason for doing his duty.  Already
alleged statements by General Brown have been published recently
to make him appear to be a dangerous man.  Were General Brown to
be courtmartialed with falsified evidence, it would destroy him
personally.  It would also prevent his efforts from producing any
benefits to America--such as a resumption of the removal of
Soviet nuclear missiles from our waters.  Any such orders of his
would be rescinded; and his courtmartial would be used to make
any attempts by him to warn America useless, by destroying his

    As long ago as October, 1976, just a month after my meeting
with him, General Brown was given a powerful demonstration of the
ability of his enemies to crucify him publicly.  As I discussed
that month in Audioletter No. 17, a six-month old interview of
General Brown was dredged up and used to subject him to intense
public embarrassment and criticism.  A few alleged statements of
his from the interview were made public and played up by the
controlled major media to such an extent that he was forced to
make a public apology on nationwide television.  Can you imagine? 
All of that for a few relatively insignificant comments which, if
he really made them at all, had attracted no attention six months
earlier.  This episode had just one purpose--to prove to General
Brown that if the falsified charges of treason should ever be
leveled at him, he would have no chance at all either to defend
himself or to do a service to America.  His only recourse now
would be to himself publicly demand a court-martial, but even
that would not be successful without a massive outpouring of
public support for him ahead of time--and that, my friends, has
so far been denied him to the everlasting shame of our entire
nation.  Should General Brown come to any physical harm, the
responsibility for it will rest squarely on the shoulders of
David, Nelson, Laurance, and John D. Rockefeller III; but
meanwhile, he's a secret captive, keeping millions of Americans
reassured that all is well merely by his presence on the scene. 
Whenever a public or official appearance or statement by General
Brown is called for, it's arranged and carried out under the
watchful eyes of a heavy escort, although this is not always
apparent.  Otherwise the openness, the accessibility, and warmth
that has always distinguished General Brown among newspaper
reporters is now gone.  He's a virtual prisoner at the Pentagon,
held practically incommunicado except for the carefully
controlled communications and appearances I have already
mentioned.  As soon as this Audioletter is released, you can
expect to see things happen that may seem to disprove what I am
telling you--for example, General Brown may become more visible
publicly for a while.  It is even conceivable, though highly
unlikely, that this might even be carried to the point of having
General Brown publicly deny that he has come under any new
restrictions in recent months as the result, say, of the
unfavorable publicity he received some months ago.  Should that
happen, keep in mind that General Brown is now a prisoner of war,
imprisoned by the enemies within our own midst; and we've already
seen many examples of the kinds of things American prisoners of
war are forced to say for propaganda purposes.

    Yes, my friends, General Brown stood up for all of us only to
have too many of us let him down by failing to follow through
with our thanks and our overwhelming support; but there is one
way that we can still keep General Brown's great personal
sacrifice on our behalf from being in vain, and that is for us,
each and every one of us as individuals, to begin right now to do
whatever we can to save our beloved country.  My friends, there's
no vacation from reality.  It's up to you to do what you
can--there's no one else; and even though you may not be able to
do more than write a letter or two, do it.  You never know how
far your few words may spread.  They may pass from one person to
another, finally reaching the ear of someone you don't even know,
someone with far more resources than you have who may play a
vital role in saving our nation, yet who may never hear and never
act if you fail to do your part.  If all you have to offer is 5
loaves and 2 fishes, offer it; you just might be amazed at the

    Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 22

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC.  (1980 current
address: 1629 K St., NW, Washington, D.C.  20006.)

Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is March 27, 1977,
and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 22.

   Few things are certain in life, but one thing we can depend
upon is that things are always changing.  Today a flower blooms
in all its glory; tomorrow it will be withered and forgotten,
leaving behind only a beautiful memory.  Today a child at play
scrapes a knee, and the whole world revolves around a mother's
tender care.  Tomorrow the knee will be healed, leaving behind
only a lesson of caution and comfort.  Today you and I pass
through this world for a little while; tomorrow we will not be
seen, leaving behind only the legacy of our choices for good or

   Last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 21 I alerted you to the
possibility that we may have already failed in our efforts to
prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE, which is drawing closer by the day.  My
question is not "Can the war be stopped?" but "Will it be
stopped?"  There is nothing in this whole world that would please
me so much as to be able to tell you: "Good news.  We have
prevented the war.  We have won."  And when I recorded monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 16 on September 25, 1976, it seemed as though I
might soon be able to give you such good news.  Public reaction
to my AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15 for July and August 1976 had
thwarted an attempted Soviet double-cross of the Rockefellers by
means of underwater missiles along our coast lines, and it had
produced a direct meeting between General George S. Brown,
Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, and myself.  But then came
the terrible reversals for America that I revealed the following
month in AUDIO LETTER No. 17; and far too many of those who had
pressed the government for action during August 1976 failed to
follow through and support General Brown in his efforts to
continue to protect our beloved country.  Now, as a result, we
have lost General Brown as an effective force for good.

   Now the job of stopping NUCLEAR WAR I is even harder.  It can
still be done, but WILL WE DO IT?  My deep hope is still that the
answer is YES, otherwise I would not be speaking these words.  I
am doing all in my power to bring the truth to you.  So long as I
continue to have access to vital information that bears on your
life and your well-being, I will feel a deep responsibility to
communicate it to you, but then it becomes your responsibility to
choose what you will do about it.

   I have made many suggestions of things you might do to help
save our country.  ln December 1975 I even recorded an entire
tape devoted to nothing else, entitled "WHAT WE CAN DO TO SAVE
AMERICA"; but all I can hope to do is open your mind as to what
you, as an individual, can do.  In this great nation of some
215,000,000 individuals, every person is different.  No two of us
have the same set of abilities, the same opportunities, or the
same avenues for possible action.  There is no way that I, just
one person, even with the help of my associates and information
sources, can provide a simple, cut-and-dried prescription for
what to do; but I am convinced that scattered throughout America
is all of the knowledge, all of the ability to organize, and all
the resources necessary to save our beloved land IF WE WILL BUT

   My three topics for today are:




Topic #1--For over four years now I have been trying by every
means at my disposal to alert the American people to the progress
of far-advanced plans to destroy our beloved country as we know
it.  We are seeing the final stages of a plan to create a
world-wide dictatorship acted out before our very eyes with
ourselves ensnared as the victims.  This commitment for a
ONE-WORLD GOVERNMENT under the control of a super wealthy elite
was set in motion in the early years of the 20th Century, using a
small group of powerful tax-exempt Foundations to coordinate and
direct the program.  This program of conquest long ago became so
massive, so powerful, and so complex that the average citizen had
no hope of grasping what was really going on.  And the ONE WORLD
plans were and are so evil that the normal person simply cannot
believe they are real without overwhelming proof.

   But how are things like this proven?  Such a long-range
commitment is a sophisticated form of conspiracy; so, how are
conspiracies exposed and proven?  Well known in legal circles,
and especially in the United States Department of Justice, are
the words of Special Judge Advocate John A. Bingham during the
trial of the conspirators involved in Abraham Lincoln's
assassination.  This trial took place in Washington, D.C. in
1865.  Listen to Judge Bingham's words, and I quote:

  "A conspiracy is rarely if ever proven by positive testimony. 
When a crime of high magnitude is about to be perpetrated by a
combination of individuals, they do not act openly, but covertly
and secretly.  The purpose formed is known only to those who
enter into it.  Unless one of the conspirators betrays his
companions and gives evidence against them, their guilt can be
proved only by circumstantial evidence.  It is said by some
writers on evidence that circumstances are stronger than positive
proof.  A witness swearing positively, it is said, may
misapprehend the facts or swear falsely, but that circumstances
cannot lie."

Judge Bingham's words may come as a surprise to you if you're not
a lawyer.  Contrary to the impression you may have received from
fictional detective stories, circumstantial evidence can be very
powerful indeed and has decided the outcome of vast numbers of
court cases.

   Furthermore, it is the incriminating power of circumstances
that makes any conspiracy most vulnerable to just one
thing--exposure.  If the plans of even the most powerful of
conspirators are made public and put on record before the plans
are executed, often the plans have to be abandoned; because even
if the conspirators succeed in carrying out their plans without
being caught in the act, the circumstances that result from their
criminal actions cannot be hidden, and the advance exposure of
their plan then causes the finger of guilt to point straight at
the conspirators.

   This is the principle I invoke every time I publicly reveal
anything about the plans or actions of those who are conspiring
to destroy America.  As I have always tried to make clear, my
purpose in exposing these criminal plans is to prevent them from
being carried out.  In this way I share a common goal with my
associates and the many sources who provide me with vital
confidential information.  The best achievements of Intelligence
gathering, like diplomacy, often lie in what did not happen--the
crisis quietly deflected.  And our efforts up to now have been
partially successful in that regard.

   But the commitment for world domination that was forged over
two generations ago has grown into an incredible monster with
countless tentacles and tremendous momentum.  As a result, the
four Rockefeller Brothers and their co-conspirators have found it
impossible to completely cover their tracks even though many
modifications in their detailed plans have been made.  So a brief
review of the circumstances that have been developing around us
over the past years is very, very revealing.

   First: Consider Nelson Rockefeller's unsuccessful attempt so
far to become our unelected President and Dictator by way of his
25th Amendment to the United States Constitution.  On October 11,
1974, I recorded my first AUDIO BOOK talking tape entitled: "HOW
WAR."  At that time Rockefeller still had two months to go being
confirmed as Vice-President; but I revealed that if confirmed,
Rockefeller intended to become President by June 1975.  In June
1975 during a trip to Europe, President Ford suddenly began
taking serious falls--once down an aircraft ramp, and persons
close to him said he also looked pale and unsteady.  The public
was quickly fed stories about the trouble being an old knee
injury from football, even though Ford's doctor stated flatly
that his falls had nothing to do with his knees.

   The following month in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 I relayed
information that I had been given to the effect that Ford's
troubles had been caused by a powerful virus of unknown origin
which had been arrested successfully.

   The next month I revealed in lectures and also in AUDIO BOOK
Special Tape No. 1 that by September or thereabouts we should
know whether Nelson Rockefeller was to be stopped in his drive to
seize the presidency.  And on September 5, 1975, an alleged
attempt on Ford's life was made by Lynette Fromme; but as I
warned in AUDIO LETTER No. 4 that month, this was only a dress
rehearsal intended to frighten Ford into resigning.  But Ford
refused to resign, and on September 22, 1975, a real attempt on
Ford's life took place.  During a visit to San Francisco, Ford
became the target of Sara Jane Moore, and it truly was only by
the grace of God that he escaped injury.  It had been planned for
Ford when he came out of the St. Francis Hotel to cross the
street and shake hands with people in the crowd.  And there
waited Sara Jane Moore, standing exactly where Ford was supposed
to enter the crowd, armed with a pistol she had bought with a
Treasury agent by her side the previous day, and with her mind
programmed for assassination by electronic programming
techniques!  But at the last moment the assassination plan fell
apart.  A Secret Service agent told the President not to cross
the street, so he headed straight for his limousine.  At that,
Sara Jane Moore raised her gun to fire across the street at Ford,
but her shot was deflected by another onlooker--a Vietnam veteran
in a wheel chair.

   As it turned out, this was indeed the real turning point in
Nelson Rockefeller's hopes for succeeding Jerry Ford as
President.  He ran through a series of additional back-up plans,
all of which my sources enabled me to reveal in advance in my
monthly AUDIO LETTERS--and he failed for the time being.  But he
recently whispered to reporters as he left a White House Award
ceremony, "I'll be back."

   And then there is Fort Knox.  I recorded my first AUDIO BOOK
tape in October 1974 less than three weeks after the so-called
Gold Inspection Visit to Fort Knox by 6 Congressmen, a Senator,
and about a hundred newsmen.  Here was a perfect example of a
case in which the true circumstances alone--namely, the absence
of the huge hoard of gold shown on Treasury and Federal Reserve
books--would have been sufficient all by themselves to prove the
existence of a tremendous financial conspiracy.  Therefore great
care was taken by the Treasury Department to prevent these
circumstances from being detected.  Instead of an objective,
honest inspection of the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox by
independent gold experts, the Treasury substituted a public
relations peep show involving people who had no way of knowing
what they should look for.  And while the public was loudly
promised an independent audit by the General Accounting Office of
Congress, the actual so-called Audit Committee consisted almost
entirely of Treasury personnel; and the tiny Audit Report that
was finally issued several months late presented no findings of
fact, concluding only, quote: "We believe" the gold is there!

   My associates and I have amassed mountains of evidence in
connection with the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL.  This twin scandal
involves not only the theft of America's monetary gold supply but
also the storage of leaking canisters of CIA super poison
processed from radioactive Plutonium 239.  From time to time I
have made portions of this evidence public, such as in monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975.  In that tape I was able to
reveal the sworn statement of former Congressman Frank Chelf
attesting to the constant flow of gold out of Fort Knox during
the mid 60's and the unsatisfactory answers he received from the
Treasury and the White House about what was going on.  I also
revealed that the official listing of gold shipments from Fort
Knox omits major shipments.  One example of which we had
photographs took place on January 20, 1965; and in response to
such a specific challenge, the Mint admitted the shipment had
taken place.

   But the most important item about Fort Knox that was revealed
in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 was the secret "Central Core Vault"--a huge
central gold storage vault whose existence was not revealed to
the September 1974 visitors and was later denied in writing by
then Treasury Secretary William Simon--another interesting
circumstance because the Central Core Vault was described and
confirmed for us and for Congressman Otis Pike by a former
Commanding Officer of Fort Knox, General John L. Ryan, Jr.  Both
Simon's lie and General Ryan's confirmation are quoted in monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 8, January 1976.  The Central Core Vault is the
key to the whole Fort Knox Scandal.

   The joint Rockefeller-Soviet program to conquer the world is
so all-encompassing that many other aspects of it have been
discussed too in the monthly AUDIO LETTER.  But the most
overriding issue of all now is the rapid approach of NUCLEAR WAR
ONE on American soil.  In my very first tape recorded in October
1974 I explained the basic purposes for which the Rockefeller
Brothers were betraying America into nuclear war.  I also
revealed the target schedule for the war to begin--mid 1977 to
mid 1978.  Today some of the details of the war plan have
changed, and the economic and political scenarios being planned
by the Rockefellers at that time, while still on track, are
behind schedule.  But of all Rockefeller plans, the one for
nuclear war on America is most crucial and, as of now, the time
schedule for war is still practically unchanged.  For reasons I
will explain in Topic #2, the Rockefeller Brothers are straining
all their resources to prevent a slippage in the timing of the

   In July 1975, Indira Gandhi clamped down on her own India in a
manner that stunned the world.  She was condemned most bitterly
of all by the Government of the United States!!  The following
month in AUDIO LETTER No. 3 I told you what had actually happened
in India.  Despite all appearances, Indira Gandhi was trying to
save India's freedom--not destroy it.  What she had done was to
smash a CIA project that had been under way for five years to
take over India.  In the same tape I went on to reveal that the
joint Rockefeller plans for war were being revised on India's
account.  The plan for nuclear war on American soil was put back
on a back burner until India could be taken over by war in Asia. 
The target date for India to be attacked under the revised war
plan was March 1977, this month.

   I also told you, quote:

  "The new plans do not involve hostilities on American soil as
they stand right now.  Keep in mind though that further changes
can and probably will occur.  In particular, should Indira Gandhi
be toppled from power any time soon, it may well enable the CIA
to put the original takeover plans back on track, and that would
restore the original plan for war on the United States."

   When I revealed these things 19 months ago, they probably
seemed remote and improbable to you; but by relaxing the
Emergency control she had imposed and holding election on March
21, six days ago, she lost--tragically for not only India but
America as well.  Once again things are not what they seem to be. 
The CIA succeeded in toppling Indira Gandhi by subverting the
free election she wanted for her people--and did so this very
month, March 1977.  This was the original target date for war on
India in the plans I revealed 19 months ago.

   With India taken care of, neutralized for the moment, NUCLEAR
WAR ONE on American soil no longer faces any delay on India's
account.  In monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 for November 1975, I
revealed the grand strategy for the huge Asian war that was to
precede nuclear war on America.  It called for hostilities to
begin in the Middle East with a severe provocation arranged to
justify a limited nuclear strike from the Sinai Desert at
Arab-OPEC oil wells.  This cut-off of oil supplies would cripple
the heart of Europe and Africa, disable Japan, and force
dictatorial measures such as gas rationing and other measures on
the American people by Executive Orders with all of these being
brought about more completely under the domination of the
Rockefeller-Soviet alliance.

   But now, India has been rendered easy prey for a complete
takeover and has therefore dropped in priority.  The war in the
Middle East has been delayed several times.  The most decisive
failure in this regard occurred late in December 1975 when OPEC
oil ministers were kidnapped in Vienna by terrorists in the pay
of the CIA.  Several were supposed to be killed, inflaming
passions and leading to war, but the job was botched and they all
escaped with their lives.  This caused a tremendous slippage in
the plans for war and conquest; and for bungling this top
priority assignment, the CIA station Chief in Athens, Richard
Welch, was executed by the CIA itself, as I revealed in monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 8 for January 1976.

   In that same tape I publicly revealed the super secret White
House Merge Directive.  This Directive requires that life in the
United States be so altered that it can be comfortably merged
with life in the Soviet Union, and it has been in existence since
the days of Stalin!  Such a way of life is totally alien to
America; but today, under the puppetized administration of Jimmy
Carter, the federal government is now openly run by aliens with
alien philosophies.  Our life is being merged with that of the
Soviet Union.  Even so, the greed and lust for power that
motivates both the Rulers of the Soviet Union and the real Rulers
of America today knows no bounds.  And as early as November 1975
in AUDIO LETTER No. 6, I began warning of the threat of a Soviet
double-cross of the Rockefellers and their Corporate Socialist
intimates here in America.  By the spring of 1976 I reported that
certain Trustees of the Rockefeller-controlled major Foundations
were increasingly concerned that such a double-cross was brewing. 
But not so the Rockefeller Brothers and their closest
collaborators, because they have more faith in the Soviet Union
than they do in America.

   Last summer, of course, the Soviet double-cross actually
began.  First, as I reported in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 13 for
June 1976, I received Intelligence information that a nuclear
weapon had been planted at Seal Harbor, Maine, between the summer
homes of David and Nelson Rockefeller.  Soon afterwards I was
notified that the Soviet Union was planting short-range nuclear
missiles within our own territorial waters ready for launch from
undersea resting places upon remote control.  We were in danger
of an immediate Soviet nuclear surprise attack, not only here but
world-wide, that would destroy all effective naval opposition to
the Soviet Union and thereby guarantee Soviet victory.  Thanks to
the Intelligence gap created by Henry Kissinger as Secretary of
State, the information reaching me about the missiles was not
reaching the Joint Chiefs of Staff.  Intelligence sources
informed me that the only way action could be brought about to
save the situation was by making it a public issue, so that is
what I did by means of AUDIO LETTERS 14 and 15 last summer--and
it worked as I recounted for you in AUDIO LETTER No. 16 for
September 1976.

   But the four Rockefeller Brothers long ago passed the point of
No Return.  In spite of what has happened last summer, they are
continuing with the joint program of conquest with the Soviet
Union, trying to convince themselves that their long-time
alliance is back on track.  But at the same time they are trying
to hurry up NUCLEAR WAR ONE because in the Soviet-Rockefeller
rivalry, time is now on the side of the Soviets.

   My friends, we are now surrounded by circumstances that prove
the existence of a grand conspiracy to rob us of our freedom and
even our very lives.  It is up to each one of us to open our eyes
and see these circumstances for what they really are before it is
too late.

Topic #2--Last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 21 I explained what the
words "NATIONAL SECURITY" really mean to those who control
America's government today.  To them National Security begins and
ends with the protection and the advancement of our unelected
Rulers themselves--not you and me.  Nowhere is this more vividly
proven than in the realm of war.  We are taxed to the breaking
point in order to support so-called National Security.  But when
in this Century has all of this prevented a war?  And for all our
vaunted Intelligence gathering and Early Warning Systems, when
have you and I ever benefitted by being warned in advance of an
imminent conflict by the Government?

   It has been proven beyond question, not only by circumstantial
evidence but by documentary evidence as well, that every single
major conflict in the 20th Century involving America has been
known about, in advance, by our Rulers.  But this advance
knowledge has never been communicated to us, the nation at large,
except once.  In 1962 President John F. Kennedy did notify
America of the warnings he had obtained of the imminent Cuban
missile threat.  It was a frightening experience for us all, but
the result was that a successful Soviet surprise attack was
rendered impossible.  Barely a year later, Jack Kennedy died at
the hands of the CIA for ruining this Rockefeller-Soviet gamble
by acting in the interest of true national security--our
security.  But in the cases of two World Wars, Korea, and
Vietnam, a different pattern has consistently applied.

   In 1916 Woodrow Wilson, the first American president to be a
total puppet of the Rockefeller empire, narrowly achieved
re-election with the peace-oriented slogan, "He kept us out of
war."  Meanwhile he was rapidly maneuvering America into war. 
Five months after his re-election on April 6, 1917, America
declared war on Germany, and soon American doughboys were off to
fight "The War to End All Wars."  There thousands died in
trenches while Trustees of the "Carnegie Endowment for
International Peace" encouraged Wilson to extend the war because
of the desirable changes it was producing in American lives!

   In 1940 with Europe once again aflame with war, President
Franklin D. Roosevelt, like Wilson before him, appealed to peace
sentiment in order to be re-elected.  Even now, my friends, I can
still hear those campaign words of F.D.R. ringing in my ears, and
I quote:

  "And while I am talking to you mothers and fathers, I give you
one more assurance.  I have said this before but I shall say it
again, and again, and again: 'Your boys are not going to be sent
into any foreign wars.'"

But even as he won an unprecedented third term in this way,
F.D.R. was moving the United States rapidly toward war.  On May
27, 1941, only six months after his re-election and with Pearl
Harbor still six months in the future, F.D.R. proclaimed an
"UNLIMITED NATIONAL EMERGENCY" to get ready for war!  In the
ensuing months everything possible was done to provoke a Japanese
attack on Pearl Harbor; and when this attack was known to be
imminent, most of the United States Pacific fleet was
conveniently bottled up in Pearl Harbor as a tempting target. 
Only our Aircraft Carriers were kept far away from danger, since
they would be indispensable for retaliation against Japan.

   Certain officials in the American government knew well in
advance that war with Japan was coming.  Proof of this can be
found in many places today, some of them quite unexpected.  One
example is the autobiography of the Rt. Reverend Edward Randolph
Welles II published by Learning, Inc., Manset, Maine  04656.  The
book entitled "THE HAPPY DISCIPLE" is not basically about
politics or economics at all but about the career and life of an
Episcopal minister.  But it so happens that in the fall of 1941,
Bishop Welles was the rector of Christ Church in Alexandria,
Virginia, the church of George Washington.  And on page 62 one
reads the following, and I quote:

  "Another of my friends was Norman H. Davis, President of the
American Red Cross, who was elected to our parish vestry.  He was
very close to President Franklin D. Roosevelt and saw him
frequently.  On November 6, 1941, I had lunch with Mr. Davis in
Washington and learned of the approaching war with Japan which
would begin within five weeks.  I was shaken, and asked Mr. Davis
to urge the President to appoint a national day of prayer, and
handed Mr. Davis a letter I had written to President Roosevelt on
the subject.  Mr. Davis did hand my letter to the President, who
did appoint the following New Year's Day as a 'National Day of

   I was so moved by the luncheon revelations that later that
very day I sent our mimeographed postal cards to the congregation

    'The rector is preaching a sermon at 11:00 A.M. service on
Sunday, November 9, which he feels is sufficiently important to
call to your attention.  The sermon will assess the desperate
situation that confronts America this Armistice Day, and suggests
basic Christian attitudes and actions.'

   On Sunday in the course of that sermon I said:

    'Few people realize how great is the possibility that we
shall actually be at war with Japan within thirty days.'

   The congregation was deeply shocked; and in response to many
requests, my booklet of sermons was reprinted with this sermon
added.  Twenty-eight days after that sermon came, December 7, the
Japanese attacked Pearl Harbor and the war was on."

(End of quotation from Bishop Welles' autobiography.)

   Bishop Welles, of course, had no way of knowing that President
Roosevelt's advance knowledge of the impending Japanese attack
was due to conspiracy to bring about that attack, but he did know
that people should be warned about it--and he did just that.  The
federal government, of course, could have warned all of America
of the impending Japanese attack, but then the attack would never
have taken place.  And F.D.R., doing the bidding of the
Rockefellers and their allies, wanted the attack to take place so
that America would go to war!

   In the two-volume AUDIO BOOK talking tape I recorded a year
ago with Colonel Curtis B. Dall, the detailed story of Pearl
Harbor is told by Colonel Dall--and Colonel Dall, who was the
son-in-law and close friend of F.D.R., knows what he is talking

   Next came Korea.  On June 21, 1950, Assistant Secretary of
State Dean Rusk testified before Congress to the effect that
there was no indication of any impending North Korean attack on
South Korea.  Several days later John Foster Dulles went to
Seoul, South Korea, to give reassurances that there was no danger
of invasion from the north.  Then he left quickly because the
North Korean invasion was already being launched!

   As for us, the American people, another nasty surprise. 
Vietnam, too, followed the old pattern.  The last thing the
American people wanted was yet another bloody war.  And during
the election campaign of 1964, Lyndon Johnson knocked down straw
man Barry Goldwater by playing on the Peace theme.  Goldwater was
portrayed as the dangerous man who would get America into a big
war; Johnson, as the 'great compromiser' who would keep us away
from any such danger.  But Johnson had already obtained the
Tonkin Gulf Resolution as the tool he needed, and within 3 months
after his landslide election, Johnson started turning Vietnam
into another big disastrous war.  By June 1965, the commitment of
American combat troops to the nightmare of Vietnam had begun
under the orders of one more president who had promised America
Peace and Prosperity.

   Today it is all happening again.  Jimmy Carter, the puppetized
president who works for David Rockefeller, is raising many
Americans' hope that this time it will be different.  This time
we have a president who wears sweaters and blue jeans and must
therefore be a man of the people.  He must be determined to have
peace since he is so aggressively seeking disarmament; and he has
promised us all that he will never lie.  Yet in a short space of
only two months, President Carter has succeeded in alienating and
angering governments the world over.  Under the guise of
folksiness, he is systematically insulting visiting ambassadors
with undignified receptions and by refusing to attend luncheons
given by the ambassadors.  He is preaching to the world about
"human rights", while doing nothing whatever about the violation
of our own human right to breathe clean air free of contamination
by Soviet plutonium attacks, among other things.

   In the case of the Soviet Union with whom he says he wants to
negotiate arms reduction to prevent war, he is breaching an
agreement not to interfere in one another's internal affairs that
was signed by President Nixon back in 1972.  He says he wants
peace; but the circumstances he is bringing about with great
speed are exactly those that could well lead to war.

   The fact is, my friends, that Jimmy Carter is sweeping us
along swiftly toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE--and the sooner the better,
according to his Rockefeller bosses.  Does he himself know where
he is taking America by following orders?  Bear in mind that he
is conspicuously trying to emulate F.D.R. in every respect right
down to launching his campaign last summer where F.D.R. did in
1932--Warm Springs, Georgia, and reviving the Fireside Chat as
president.  And listen to Carter's own words from a recent
Fireside Chat, and I quote:

  "I remember another difficult time in our nation's history when
we felt a different spirit.  During World War II we faced a
terrible crisis, but the challenge of fighting against Fascism
drew us together.  I believe we are ready for that same spirit

   The Rockefeller Brothers want very badly to have NUCLEAR WAR
ONE begin as soon as possible, for several reasons.  The military
balance is shifting ever more rapidly in favor of the Soviet
Union and away from the Rockefellers even in the realm of secret
super weapons.  As of now, according to all the information I
have been able to obtain, the CIA undersea super missiles in the
Atlantic and Pacific, which I revealed two months ago in AUDIO
LETTER No. 20, are still the most awesome nuclear missiles in the
world.  But as I revealed then, these CIA missiles which are to
protect the Rockefellers--not you and me--have become inoperative
in several cases, and there is no way to predict how long those
that remain will last before they, too, fail and start leaking.

   But there is another even more basic worry the Rockefellers
must think about.  As of now, the United States has no
anti-missile weapons at all, and the Soviet Union has only the
Galosh ABM, whose effectiveness against ICBMs is questionable;
but that situation is on the verge of changing drastically very
soon.  Major General George Keegan Jr.,  who retired on January
1, 1977 as head of Air Force Intelligence, is a man who has
repeatedly been first to detect major new developments bearing on
the military balance.  He has said recently, quote: "A global
conflict is in gestation."  And, my friends, he is right. 
Furthermore, he has been sounding the warning that the Soviet
Union is already testing a death ray type weapon called a
"Particle Beam."  Once this weapon is operationally deployed in
the very near future, it could destroy incoming missiles and
render the Soviet Union invulnerable to any ICBM attack,
including an attack by means of the Rockefeller CIA undersea
super missiles.

   Meanwhile the Soviet Union is continuing right now in a
relentless program of planting underwater missiles along the
coastlines of the United States and other countries around the
world.  And in spite of the "Red Friday Agreement" of October 1,
1976, which I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17, the Soviet
Union is not honoring the "Nuclear Safe Zone" in planting these
missiles.  The Rockefellers believe that the threat of their CIA
undersea missiles will prevent the Soviet missiles inside the
Nuclear Safe Zone from actually being launched in NUCLEAR WAR
ONE, but that is strictly a gamble on their part because the
threat is there.

   During the latter part of this month, I have been receiving
reports from my own Intelligence sources about the current status
of the world-wide Soviet program of planting short-range
underwater nuclear missiles.  When I recorded monthly AUDIO
LETTER No. 15 last August, I gave the coordinates for 64 missiles
and bombs around the world, including 16 in American and Canadian
waters.  That was sufficient to give the Soviet Union the
capability of a surprise knockout punch against all the naval
power in the world opposing the Soviet Union; but now, thanks to
the insane Red Friday policy of the Rockefellers, the situation
has been allowed to become far worse.  Now redundant targeting
insures that any such Soviet attack has a very high probability
of success.  And in addition to naval and other military targets
close to the sea, Soviet underwater missiles are now being aimed
as well at increasing numbers of non-military strategic targets.

   As of my latest tally, the Soviet Union has so far planted a
total of 372 nuclear weapons, mostly missiles but a few bombs, in
coastal waters of the world.  Of these nearly half, 158, are
planted in American waters.  This includes 130 around the
mainland 48 States, 9 more around Alaska, 15 in Hawaiian waters,
and 1 each at Midway Island, Guam, Christmas Island, and the
north approach to the Panama Canal.  The Soviet Union is also
preparing to be able to strike with additional plutonium cloud
attacks against America.  On March 1 America extended its
territorial limits to 200 miles, and Soviet submarines have moved
out beyond this new limit; but now remote control canisters are
being planted along our west coast within 3 to 5 miles of the
coastline.  So far 16 of these have been planted, and more are on
the way.

   There are 29 missiles around the British Isles and 11 in
Canadian waters.  Europe and the Mediterranean are currently
surrounded by 46 Soviet underwater missiles.  Ten of these are in
the Mediterranean.  Along the Atlantic and North Sea coasts,
Spain is targeted by one, France by 3, the Netherlands by 5, and
West Germany by 6.  Three Soviet missiles have been planted in
Danish waters, 7 near Norway, 6 near Sweden, and 5 near Finland. 
In addition, 7 Soviet underwater missiles surround Iceland. 
These are ready to decimate NATO Air Bases there, enabling the
new Soviet supersonic long-range Backfire Bomber in its naval
version to interdict all our vital sea lanes across the North

   The rest of the pattern world-wide is: First on the Pacific
and Indian Oceans--Australia 7, New Zealand 6, New Guinea 4,
Philippines 6, Indonesia 6, Malay Peninsula 2, Thailand 1, Burma
1, India 1, Taiwan 3, Red China 7, border between Red China and
Vietnam 1, Japan heavily targeted 19, South Korea 8.

   Around southwest Asia, Africa, and the Middle East--Caspian
Sea coast of Iran 3, Persian Gulf coast of Iran and Saudi Arabia
5, in the Oman Gulf 1 (target Iran), Red Sea coast of Saudi
Arabia 2, Black Sea coast of Turkey 1, southern Africa 8.

   And along the coast of Latin America--Mexico 11, Guatemala 1,
British Honduras 1, Honduras 1, Nicaragua 1 even though Nicaragua
itself is being used for certain naval purposes by the Soviet
Union, Costa Rica 3, Venezuela 4 including one in the Orinoco
River, Chile 5, Argentina 1.  The British possession of West
Falkland near southern Argentina is also targeted by 1 Soviet
missile as is the Island of Bermuda.

   The government of any country I have named may obtain the
navigational coordinates of the threatening Soviet underwater
missiles from me upon official request.  Up to now only one
government, that of Great Britain, has requested these latest
coordinates and I have gladly supplied them.  Great Britain is
quietly living up to her majestic name, because alone of all the
nations on earth, the British Government is fending off the
Soviet naval threat with grim determination.  I do not think it
would be in the best interest of the British people for me to
tell you all of the measures being taken in this regard beyond
the fact that the Soviet missiles are being removed from British
waters.  But I will tell you that the British are proving one
very important fact up to now.  Given the will to do so, the
Soviet war threat can be staved off.  For all their modern
weaponry, the Soviets are not supermen except in comparison to
the treasonous jellyfish who control America's government today. 
What is necessary is to recognize circumstances for what they
really are, and then to summon the spirit and determination to do
what must be done; and that, my friends, is exactly what the
British are doing right now.

Topic #3--A few days ago the Reverend Billy Graham was quoted in
newspapers as saying he likes, quote: "symbolic gestures made to
the American people" by President Carter.  He expressed
particular pleasure at the fact that Carter not only plans to go
to Sunday School but even to teach there.  But as for the
substance of the new administration, Dr. Graham said it is just
too early to assess that.

   Millions of Americans are placing their trust in Jimmy Carter,
an untried newcomer to national politics, mainly because of his
Sunday School teacher image.  In the rush, rush world of today,
Jimmy Carter's highly visible piety almost seems like something
out of the past.  A hundred years ago the following words might
have been written about him, and I quote:

  "He became a regular attendant at the Erie Street Baptist
Church, and vigorously did Jimmy give himself to his work.  Jimmy
was publicly baptized in the fall of 1854.  Not long after, Jimmy
was made Clerk of the church, an unusual responsibility for a
mere youth, and indicative of the impression of maturity and
responsibility that he gave to others.  Before many years passed,
he was teaching one of the largest classes in the Sunday School.
As a bright High School graduate, a faithful attendant, a most
staid and responsible young man, Jimmy soon took a prominent part
in all church activities.  He threw himself into them with
characteristic single-mindedness.  As we have said, the church
offered this unemotional youth an outlet; but it also offered his
mother, brothers and sisters the best part of what social life
they enjoyed."

   My friends, I did not just make up these words to fit Jimmy
Carter.  I have simply substituted the name "Jimmy" for the name
"John" in excerpts from the biography of John D. Rockefeller, Sr.
by Allan Nevins.  The striking thing about John D. Rockefeller
was that his vigorous church activities never throughout his
entire career translated into fair, honest, or ethical dealings
in business!  And in a similar vein today, Jimmy Carter, whether
he realizes it or not, is preaching good but doing evil.  How far
might some dictators, past and present, have gotten if they had
eliminated church opposition by themselves going to church?  It
may be that Jimmy Carter is being misled and is not knowingly
doing that which is evil; but either way, my friends, that is no
excuse for the rest of us to blindly follow along like sheep to
the slaughter.  If we do so, history shows clearly what will

   The end of the world came for the organized church in Russia
after the Bolshevik Revolution in 1917.  Within a few short years
more than 20,000,000 Russians met death at the hands of the
Soviet government.  And while a struggling underground of
believers has persisted to the present day, the church as an
organization that can influence events directly no longer exists. 
And it will not exist so long as Communism remains the official
religion of the Soviet Union.

   In mainland China, too, the same thing happened when Mao
Tse-tung took over.  The church in China was much smaller as a
percentage of the population than it had been in Russia, but its
fate was the same--the end of the world aside from a struggling
remnant of believers forced under ground.  After killing more
than 60,000,000 of his own people, Mao succeeded in turning
Communist China into perhaps the most rigidly regimented society
on earth.  And David Rockefeller, who made Jimmy Carter president
and calls the shots now, has expressed strong approval of this
state of affairs.  For example, several years ago he said, and I

  "The social experiment in China under Chairman Mao's leadership
is one of the most important and successful in human history."

   Now, my friends, if we allow it to happen, we are
next--America and the whole western world.  The elaborate plan
which I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 for November 1975,
is being revised and updated for application in the present
circumstances.  Certain of my sources have expressed great
concern to me recently that a provocation for war in the Middle
East is now being established that will be unlike anything we
have ever seen before.  I repeat, the Rockefellers are
increasingly desperate to get NUCLEAR WAR ONE under way before
they lose what control they still have over events.  To achieve
that purpose, plans are being seriously considered which, if
carried out, could instantly throw all three major religions of
the western world into turmoil in the course of igniting a Middle
East conflict.  My hope is that by warning you of the existence
of such plans, I am making them too dangerous for the
conspirators to carry out.  But in case they are carried out, I
hope that you will now be able to recognize it immediately when
it happens.  We must not allow ourselves to be tricked,
stampeded, or neutralized, my friends.  We have important work to

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.




Audio letter No. 21

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is February 27,
1977, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 21.

   For some time now I have been warning you of the dangers
facing America.  Now, time is fast running out.  When Jimmy
Carter was inaugurated President on January 20, 1977, a
contingency plan concocted in 1963 was set in motion, and it is
progressing very rapidly.  The key to this particular plan was to
be the placement of a completely puppetized president in office
at a time of rapidly-mounting war threats.  Under this plan,
inadequate performance by the puppet presidents in the face of
these dire threats is intended to enable a take-over of the
country by Rockefeller-controlled military and CIA inner circles. 
In this manner the total dictatorship sought by the four
Rockefeller Brothers is to be brought into being.

   We are now faced with the planned threat of NUCLEAR WAR ONE
with the puppet president now on the scene in the person of Jimmy
Carter.  Carter continually spouts the Rockefeller line as he
learned it from his participation in their TRILATERAL COMMISSION,
but he has no real grasp at all of what he is involved in.

   Meanwhile, the CIA is also being readied for its appointed
role.  Nelson Rockefeller has been busy packing key positions in
the CIA with his "new men"; and to facilitate the enlistment of
required military support for the coming Dictatorship, a military
man who is a member of the Rockefeller inner circle, Admiral
Stansfield Turner, has been selected to head the CIA.  That's why
the earlier nomination of Ted Sorenson ran into a brick wall--he
ran afoul of a game plan he didn't even know about.

   The plan calls for pre-war crisis measures to be used to
condition Americans to accept the elaborate transformation of
America into a total dictatorship, and this pre-war build-up is
going on right now.  Ultimately many millions of Americans are to
be annihilated in a Soviet nuclear attack, which is to be carried
out according to rules laid down in secret agreements negotiated
by former Secretary of State Henry Kissinger.

   As I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 for May 1976,
this joint Rockefeller-Soviet war plan includes a super-secret
"NUCLEAR SAFE ZONE" across the upper portion of the continental
United States within which the Rockefellers and their intimates
plan to ride out the war on Mount Desert and Bartlett Islands off
the coast of Maine, right in the heart of the Nuclear Safe Zone. 
This Nuclear Safe Zone is merely the nuclear-age equivalent of
the orders which were given to Allied Bombing Commands during
World War II not to damage Rockefeller-owned strategic targets in
Germany.  These orders caused such huge important installations
as the I. G. Farben Chemical plants to survive unscathed all the
way through World War II, while other targets and even whole
cities nearby were completely leveled.

   Last month in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 20 I was able to reveal
the club the Rockefeller Brothers believe they hold over the
heads of the Soviets to make sure the Soviet nuclear attack on
America goes as planned.  In this way the Rockefellers will have
used the Soviets to do their dirty work for them.  In any event,
this club consists of an undersea fleet of 14 super-missiles
targeted on the Soviet Union--five in the Pacific, 9 in the
Atlantic.  These missiles are not under the control of our
Defense Department, and have nothing whatever to do with the
defense of our country as a whole.  They're under the direct
control of the Rockefeller Brothers through their controlled CIA,
and their only purpose is to make sure that the Rockefeller inner
circles in America are not included in the holocaust that is
being arranged for the rest of us.  If all goes as planned, the
CIA super-missiles deep in the ocean will never be fired at all. 
Only if there should be a Soviet double-cross would there be an
attempt to fire them, and under those circumstances they would
act only as vengeance weapons.

   Yet as awesome as these CIA super-missiles are, they cannot
prevent a Soviet double-cross.  In fact, they have already
provoked one double-cross.  Last summer the Soviet Union sneaked
in under the CIA missile umbrella and began planting short-range
underwater-launch nuclear missiles in our own territorial waters,
hoping to achieve such total surprise that the CIA undersea
super-missiles would never be fired.  The limited exposure of
this threat, which I was able to achieve by means of AUDIO
LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15 for July and August 1976, was sufficient
to ruin the Soviet surprise, so an attack at that time was
averted.  The joint Rockefeller-Soviet war plan is back on track
for the time being, but now both sides are watching for a chance
to double-cross each other.  Meanwhile, as I reported last month,
the presence of the Soviet missiles in our waters are now being
incorporated into the joint war plan.

   For the first time in many years, Civil Defense, of which we
have none, has again become the subject of wide concern.  We are
again hearing radio test alerts on the Emergency Broadcasting
System which will be used in the event of war.  It has even been
hinted that we may soon experience unannounced air-raid drills, a
practice that could be especially effective in conditioning us
all to the idea that war is imminent.

   Only a few days ago, on February 11, 1977, President Carter
became the first president to fly with great publicity in a
special airplane now fitted as a flying Command Post to be used
in nuclear war.  The article above this in the New York Daily
News carried the headline, quote: "CARTER GETS A PREVIEW OF WORLD
WAR III."  Just a year ago such headlines would have been
unthinkable.  Now they are all around us.

   Because the plan now under way requires that military support
be arranged for the new Dictatorship, it was essential that
General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff,
be neutralized as I said he would be in monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
17.  General Brown played a pivotal role in preventing a Soviet
nuclear surprise attack on the United States during August and
September 1976; but that will not happen again, my friends.  The
campaign which began in October 1976 to render General Brown
ineffective in his efforts to protect America has now succeeded. 
He is no longer able to influence events to any significant
extent.  That is why when Carter demanded on January 12, 1977,
that studies be performed toward eliminating 75% to 80% of our
Intercontinental Missiles, General Brown simply agreed to have
the studies done.  Can you imagine?

   My friends, now that we have lost General Brown, there is no
one left in the entire United States Government to help us. 
There are still many patriotic individuals in the Government, of
course, but they are not the ones in positions of power.  Only
massive public pressure--informed, angry, and determined--now has
any chance of stopping the carefully-planned war to kill millions
of us and enslave the rest.  Every one of us must work to bring
about public awareness and pressure in whatever time we have
left.  But suppose we do not succeed--then what?!  I believe the
time has come to face that question squarely and honestly.

   It may well be that we have already failed in our efforts to
help prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE.  Only God can know, but we dare not
give up because the victory may yet be ours.  But the fact is
that many Americans do not want to listen.  They are not ready,
and some will not be ready to listen until catastrophe comes upon
their heads.

   If NUCLEAR WAR ONE does come here, my friends, millions will
die, but there will also be some survivors.  You owe it to
yourself, to your family, and to our whole society to do whatever
you can to be among the survivors.  The godless dictatorship
being fashioned by our unelected Rulers will collapse in the end;
and when it does, there must be people left who know what America
was all about, and what went wrong.  Because you are willing to
hear the truth now before disaster arrives, YOU are that people. 
And if we are all forced to pass through the dark tunnel of war
and bungling dictatorship, it will fall your lot to help lead our
people out of darkness and into the sunlight once again on the
other side.

   My three special topics for today are:

Topic #2--PRE-WAR AMERICA, 1977
Topic #3--THE END OF AN ERA.

Topic #1--For more than a generation, since the outbreak of World
War II in fact, Americans have been preoccupied with the idea of
national security.  But what is National Security?  One concept
of national security is the familiar one promoted day in and day
out by the federal government.  According to the Government,
national security is a matter that is just too complex for most
of us to understand and must always be wrapped in secrecy,
intrigue, and more secrecy.  When we see diplomatic maneuvers
which seem to help our enemies while harming our friends or even
ourselves, we're always told we simply don't understand the
so-called National Security considerations that are involved. 
The map of the free world shrinks ever smaller, our country grows
visibly weaker and weaker, yet the federal bureaucracy knows
best, we are assured, and will take care of it all for us.  But
while you and I are both forced to pay the bill for it all, we
are never, never let in on what it is really all about.

   What is called "National Security" today by the Government
would be better described as security for our Secret Rulers. 
They see themselves as the embodiment of our nation, just as
royalty did in times past.  Thus to them, so-called National
Security is nothing more than a king's "X" to prevent the public,
you and me, from learning things about governmental doings that
could endanger our Rulers' security.  Vital secrets that are
routinely betrayed to our deadliest enemies are kept hidden from
our view.

   The Government's version of National Security involves ever
greater centralization of all power and all decision-making into
just a few hands.  Increasingly it involves spying on the
citizens of our own nation, and now it even includes diplomatic
manipulations that have betrayed us straight down the road to
NUCLEAR WAR ONE.  This is what the words National Security really
mean to those who secretly control the United States
Government--a government that used to be ours, but is no more. 
What is called National Security obviously is not what most of us
naturally think of when we hear these words.  The Government's
version of National Security, in other words, is an illusion and
a fraud.  Real national security has to be rooted in the people,
who are the nation.

   When we think of national security we usually think of the
ability of the nation as a whole to protect itself from damage by
other nations--politically, economically, and if need be
militarily.  But there's another side to national security that
is actually more basic, yet we in America have been led to
gradually neglect it and finally lose it altogether over the past
100 years or so.  I refer to the internal stability that has been
destroyed by over-centralization.

   Gone are the days when America consisted of thousands of
communities which could, if need be, survive for indefinite
periods without supplies from distant sources.  And gone are the
days when consumers could choose from among a wide variety of
products produced by true competitors.  Instead, most of the
things we now have to have for life come from somewhere else,
often we know not where; and there is little competition or real
choice left.  The flow of essential commodities can now be turned
off at will by the corporate socialists and a few central spigots
in order to bring America to a grinding halt.  Most Americans
today never give this state of affairs a second thought.  The
young cannot imagine things being any different; and most of
those who are old enough to remember a different way of life are
willing to settle for what we have today with the comforts and
luxuries that have become commonplace.

   What has happened, my friends, is that we have all become
addicts.  There is an addiction that underlies our entire way of
life today, and this same addiction has made it possible for us
to be brought to the threshold of Totalitarian World Government
and nuclear holocaust.  My friends, we are addicts--addicts to
energy.  There's no precedent in history for the magnitude of the
suffering man can now bring about, because there is no precedent
in history for the energy addiction that now grips America and
the world.

   For thousands of years mankind got by on the ancient and
renewable forms of energy such as animal power, water power, wind
power, and the burning of wood.  Then came coal, and the
industrial revolution was spawned.  But it was petroleum, thanks
to its great convenience and high energy output, that was
destined to make true energy addicts of us all.

   It is typical of addictions that they take time to develop,
and that is true of our energy addiction of today.  It began very
gradually over 100 years ago, and has built up over several
generations.  During the early years after petroleum first made
its appearance, we were still in the take-it-or-leave-it stage;
but gradually it found more and more uses, and then whole
technologies were spawned which depend specifically on petroleum
energy, such as the automobile and the airplane.  These
technologies gradually took on the character of necessities,
rather than optional luxuries, and from that point onward we were
true addicts.

   The same way, our energy addiction expanded to include
dependence on natural gas and electricity.  Even our food
production became increasingly dependent upon uninterrupted
supplies of non-renewable energy.  The American farmer, blessed
already with a rich land, began to retire his ox-drawn plow in
favor of a gasoline-powered tractor, and soon expanded his
productivity still further with other farm machinery--all of it
run by petroleum energy.  It became possible for fewer farmers to
feed us all; and farmers who failed to keep up with these new
trends, whether for financial reasons or otherwise, gradually
disappeared from the scene.

   Then came high-yield hybrid crops, petroleum-derivative
insecticides and fungicides to protect these delicate hybrids
from damage, and fertilizers made with natural gas as a raw
material in order to make them grow better.  Farms became bigger,
fewer, and more expensive; huge agribusinesses, energy-intensive
and geared for high productivity, began to dominate American
agriculture, making it still harder for the small family farm to

   Meanwhile, petroleum energy made possible fast freight
transportation over long distances.  High-volume food
distributors have exploited this in such a way that nearby small
suppliers of many foods are by-passed in favor of a few
centralized huge supply sources far away.  This, of course, has
caused many of the nearby supplies that used to exist in many
areas to dry up and disappear.  For example, every town of any
size used to have access to one or more local dairies which
processed the milk produced by cows in that area.  But today many
of the familiar, dependable local dairies of the past are gone;
and if you can find anyone who can tell you where the milk you
buy comes from, you may well discover that it comes from a
central processing plant in another state.

   We have now reached the point where practically all the
necessities of life, including food and water, reach us only by
means of non-renewable, centrally-controlled energy.  The energy
pushers have done their job well, making it appear that nothing
more than natural trends were at work.  They have fed our
addiction beyond the point of no return, taking care not to allow
competing sources of energy to develop that could get out of
their control and ruin their grip on us.

   Our energy addiction is now to be used against us for their
own purposes.  When we're told now that we must conserve, it
means that we must knuckle under to sacrifices as we are
gradually ground under the heel of artificial shortages and
rising costs.

   My friends, the role of energy in our society is so
all-pervasive today that it is hard to describe, and it is the
Rockefellers who first realized how powerful a tool it could be
for their own ends.  John D. Rockefeller, Sr. built the giant
Standard Oil monopoly with ruthless determination to corner the
market on petroleum.  The trust-busting era merely caused him to
devise better ways to hide his control while his program
proceeded without letup, and soon the Rockefeller Standard Oil
empire became involved in international intrigue and wars to
overcome foreign competitors as well.  The process has continued
down to the present with wars, skirmishes, coups, and so forth,
enabling the Rockefeller empire to maintain a strangle hold on
most of the world's oil.  In recent years this has been made
virtually airtight through control of most of the free world's
refining capacity.  So today it is the four Rockefeller Brothers
who are in a position to turn off the vital energy supplies to
which we have become addicted for our very lives.  We have all
become so accustomed to the steady supply of electricity, natural
gas, and petroleum products that the illusion of reliability has
been created.

   Alternative means of surviving by means of local resources
have gradually fallen into the disuse and have disappeared, while
we all have been lulled into a life or death dependence on
centralized energy sources controlled by the Rockefeller
Brothers.  And they're not interested in your security or mine. 
Their horizon is the world and how to control it--not the mere
survival of America.  Therefore when they turn the energy spigots
off, as they are beginning to do now, they will be turning off
our national security with it--in other words, we have NO
national security.  So long as the necessities of life remain
under the centralized control of men who are determined to murder
our beloved country, we will never again have true national
security.  Only if we, the people, will rise up and take back the
government that has been stolen from us, will the many things be
done that are necessary to restore true national security to our

Topic #2--When I recorded my AUDIO BOOK tape on the coming
depression and war in October, 1974, I explained the real purpose
that caused World Wars I and II.  In both cases, Germany was
nothing more than a huge pawn in an ever bigger game of
international conquest.  Instead, as I said then, through two
World Wars America's Secret Rulers brought Great Britain to her

   The American people as a whole feel strong kinship to the
British, so it seems incredible that our Secret Rulers would have
deliberately smashed Britain through war.  But listen to what
former Prime Minister Sir Harold Wilson said last month on
January 22, 1977 on a television talk show.  When he was asked to
explain the economic crisis Britain is in, he said, quote:

  "Two world wars took all our investments; and the Lend-Lease
Agreement with the Americans not only took all our markets, which
was justified as we didn't want shipping going to Latin America,
but we had to give them all our inventions."

Thus the three decades from the beginning of World War I to the
end of World War II were used to concentrate the bulk of the
world's economic might into the hands of those who ruled America
secretly, behind the scenes--namely the ROCKEFELLERS.

   The technologies and markets of friend and foe alike were
stolen and poured into the coffers of the Corporate Socialist
empire controlled by the four Rockefeller Brothers.  But this
emergence of America into sudden world dominance was never
intended to be more than a temporary phenomenon by those who had
secretly caused it to happen.

   A dominant share of the economic and technological might of
the world had been centralized under American control so that we
could then serve as an immense reservoir for transfusions to the
Soviet Union!  The godless dictatorship set up by the Bolsheviks
in Russia in 1917 with the help of Rockefeller financing was to
be the real wave of the future.  It represented the ultimate in
monopoly--total control over every aspect of peoples' lives.  But
the Soviet System which is intended as the pattern for TOTAL
WORLD DOMINATION is artificial and unnatural, and that is why the
Soviet Union had to be built up by massive transfusions from
outside--transfusions of money, food, economic and technological
know-how, everything.  Now the transfusions are virtually

   It took three decades to drain Britain and Europe to build up
America as a reservoir for the Soviet Union, and it has taken
three more decades to drain the American reservoir and make the
Soviet Union the world's most powerful nation in material terms. 
The United States is now following Great Britain down the road to
ruin, and for the same reasons.  The Rockefeller Brothers and
their intimates now arrogantly believe they can no longer be
stopped in their plan of world conquest.  They are convinced
there is no power greater than themselves, and they are becoming
more brazen by the day.

   Jimmy Carter has been programmed to proceed with all possible
speed in dismembering what remains of our nation's defenses while
at the same time promoting public awareness of war tensions here
and abroad.  He is making the terrible mistake of thinking he is
actually President.

   Meanwhile long-time Rockefeller agent, Walter Mondale, stands
ready and waiting for the moment IF and WHEN Jimmy Carter is
erased from the scene.  Mondale is by far the most powerful
Vice-President in history next to Nelson Rockefeller, and he's in
a position to pick up the reins of presidential power at a
moment's notice.

   As for Nelson Rockefeller, he hasn't given up either.  After a
recent White House ceremony at which he was given an award,
Rockefeller whispered to reporters as he left: "I'll be back."

   Jimmy Carter is functioning with a skeleton government at the
present time here in Washington.  Huge gaps remain deliberately
unfilled in the Carter Administration--such as the Chairmanship
of the United States Export-Import Bank.  Normally positions at
Eximbank are among the most coveted plums in all of Washington,
and yet up to now they remain unfilled.  Why?  Because, my
friends, the Export-Import Bank is a peacetime operation, and it
will be shut down when war comes as it is planned to do.

   The Carter Cabinet is a war cabinet, and the unprecedented
measure was taken of rushing their confirmation hearings through
Congress even before Carter took office.  On hand to preside over
America's final destruction in NUCLEAR WAR ONE are men of
unchallenged qualifications for that task--such as Secretary of
State Vance, Secretary of Defense Brown, and National Security
Advisor Brzezinski, among others.  These men were in the
forefront of those who argued in favor of America's involvement
in the disaster called Vietnam, and helped guide the conduct of
the war in such a way as to guarantee our defeat!  Now all they
have to say about Vietnam is, quote: "We made a mistake."  And
with that, our country has been placed in their hands once again.

   We hear continually about "government reorganization", but
what does this really mean?  For one hint, consider the fact that
Brzezinski is on record as saying, quote:

  "The reality of our times is such that a modern society, such
as the United States, needs a central, coordinating, and
renovating organ which cannot be made up of 600 people."

In other words, the United States Congress in its present form is
obsolete and should be replaced by something else!!  Brzezinski,
by the way, is a close neighbor and associate of David and Nelson
Rockefeller's at Seal Harbor, Maine.

   And then there are the words of Andrew Young, appointed United
States Ambassador to the U.N. by Carter.  In that position, Young
is charged with speaking for everyone in the United States, yet
he has said, quote: "Communism has never been a threat to me." 
Do words like that speak for you, my friends?  Or for your
neighbors?  Or for any real American?  But those words have been
allowed to stand, and the man who said them is still the United
Nations Ambassador.

   We are moving rapidly toward the introduction of the secret
new Rockefeller Constitution for America which I revealed and
described in AUDIO BOOK tape released in July 1975.  The plan is
now to accomplish this as part of the scenario now under way to
take over the country under threat of war.  Even Carter's new CIA
Director, Admiral Turner, has been in contact with Carter for
over five years--not about military matters but governmental

   And so our unelected Rulers continue to plan and scheme to
take full advantage of the threat of war and even NUCLEAR WAR ONE
itself to destroy our way of life for their own purposes.  The
orchestrated pre-war build-up of tensions continues.  In recent
weeks, western Europe has suddenly been highlighted as our
nuclear-age Dunkirk because doubts are now being expressed that
NATO forces there could withstand a surprise attack by the Warsaw
Pact forces.

   And here at home it is now officially acknowledged that the
Soviet Union is shooting for military superiority over the West. 
Unofficially, some say they already have it.  Worse yet, the
Rockefeller-controlled CIA just 'happens' to have been grossly
underestimating the Soviet military build-up for a decade or
more.  Can you imagine?  Suddenly now we are told that the Soviet
Union has been spending four times the previous CIA estimates for
new weapons and military installations.  The deliberate
underestimates, which were arranged for years by Rockefeller
insiders in the CIA, had just one purpose: To undermine any
arguments about a serious Soviet threat and thereby to insure a
decline in American military might.

   But now that NUCLEAR WAR ONE is imminent, the CIA estimates
can no longer make any difference in our preparedness, so now the
estimates have suddenly been raised in order to demoralize us and
convince us that defeat at Soviet hands is all but inevitable. 
Having arranged for our Constitutional military forces to be
weakened as much as possible, the CIA itself has become the most
powerful military organization in the United States--a fact
symbolized by the fact that the CIA will now be headed by Four
Star Admiral Turner, a Rockefeller insider who will retain his
military rank.

   The CIA has been transformed into a combined super-Military
and Secret Police controlled by persons loyal only to the
Rockefeller Brothers instead of the country as a whole.  This is
in complete violation of the original charter of the CIA and of
the CONSTITUTION of the United States.

   Sixteen years after the establishment of the CIA at the
instigation of David Rockefeller, former President Harry S.
Truman expressed public regrets over having done so.  On December
21, 1963, he wrote for the Washington Post, quote:

  "For some time I've been disturbed by the way the CIA has been
diverted from its original assignment.  It has become an
operational and at times a policy-making arm of the government."

Saying that he had never visualized, quote, "peacetime cloak and
dagger operations" for the CIA, he added, and I quote:

  "This quiet Intelligence arm of the President has been so
removed from its intended role that it is being interpreted as a
symbol of sinister and mysterious foreign intrigue, and a subject
for cold war enemy propaganda."

   These words of President Truman were published just a month
after an American president, John F. Kennedy, had been brutally
removed from office by a successful CIA operation, as I revealed
in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 3 for August 1975.  Already the CIA
had broken free of presidential control, and a decade later a CIA
operation called "WATERGATE" replaced an elected President and
Vice-President with appointees for the very first time in
American history!

   Today the United States is surrounded by 90 short-range
underwater-launch nuclear missiles planted by the Soviet Union
within our own territorial waters.  Our Constitutional military
services have been under presidential orders since October 1,
1976 NOT to remove them; and now that General Brown has been
neutralized, no effort whatever is being made to do so.  And the
only real counter-threat to these Soviet underwater missiles is
the fleet of 14 awesome super-missiles targeted on the Soviet
Union from resting places deep in the Atlantic and Pacific
Oceans.  These undersea super-missiles, as I revealed last month
in AUDIO LETTER No. 20, are not under normal military control but
are under direct Rockefeller command through their controlled
CIA.  Their purpose, as I have already explained, is not to
prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE or even to retaliate when it comes. 
Their purpose is only to insure that the Soviet Union abides by
the joint Rockefeller-Soviet war plan to spare the Rockefeller
Brothers and their intimates while incinerating the rest of us.

   But as I revealed last month, the super-secret CIA missiles
have begun deteriorating and leaking.  One missile in the Pacific
is totally disabled, and several others are leaking plutonium
from their warheads into the surrounding waters, and probably are
useless also.

   One of the leaking missiles which I mentioned last month is
Atlantic Missile No. 8, which is located in the ocean about 290
miles east-southeast of Jacksonville, Florida.  On February 7,
1977, just two weeks after I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
20, the beach near Jacksonville, Florida became the scene of a
mystifying phenomenon.  For no apparent reason, whales suddenly
began beaching themselves in large numbers.  Within a short time
over 120 whales beached themselves only to die there.  That
evening NBC News reported that no autopsies were being performed
on the whales, that this was to be left to the Smithsonian here
in Washington.  The next day that story was retracted, but
meanwhile I know from my own sources that a high-ranking
Smithsonian official who is a covert CIA agent went to Florida
immediately to investigate and to make sure that the real cause
of the whales beaching themselves did not become publicly known.

   One story the Smithsonian circulated as a possible explanation
for the strange behavior of the whales was that some sort of
parasites, caused perhaps by pollution, had caused the whales to
lose their senses of depth and direction.  But that, of course,
does not explain why they would all have come ashore out of their
natural habitat, rather than wandering aimlessly at sea.  And it
explains even less what happened when some of the whales were
towed off the beach and into the sea.  In most cases they
unerringly headed straight for shore and beached themselves
again.  Even though death awaited them on the beach, they
preferred that to their natural habitat of the sea.

   What you have not been told, my friends, is that a number of
the whales were dissected, and in practically every case their
stomachs were completely empty--they were sick.  But the real
problem was not in their stomachs but in their lungs, which were
heavily contaminated with plutonium.  A few days after the whales
began beaching themselves, I was informed by my Intelligence
sources that the plutonium leakage from Atlantic Missile No. 8
had accelerated so rapidly that plutonium was now contaminating
the Atlantic in a fan that touches the east coast all the way
from about half way between Savannah and Brunswick, Georgia,
southward almost to Daytona Beach, Florida.  It was strongest in
the middle, right where the whales came ashore near Jacksonville.

   My friends, I am not a marine biologist, and I don't know
exactly how the whales got water-borne plutonium into their
lungs, but the facts speak for themselves, somehow it happened;
and once there, the plutonium produced a fungus-like infection
that interfered with their breathing.  Finally in desperation,
the whales (which are mammals like you and me) began casting
themselves onto the beach, gasping for air.

   By now the whales have been collected and buried in the Gerwin
Road landfill in Jacksonville, Florida, and forgotten by most as
yesterday's news.  But we would do well not to ignore the lesson
of the beached whales; because now, like the whales, our drinking
water in the United States now contains plutonium too.  The
Soviet injections of plutonium into our atmosphere which began
last October 1976 have continued and, in fact, are now
accelerating; and now fallout of this material has contaminated
our own drinking water nationwide.  It is invisible, it is
tasteless, but it is there.

   As I reported last month, a dramatic increase in flu-like
illness was to be expected all across America, thanks to the
Soviet plutonium attack No. 3 which took place in late December
and early January; and now it's happening.  Outbreaks of (quote)
"flu and flu-like illnesses" have been reported this month in at
least 23 states.  Perhaps you yourself have had a round of
something lately that seems like the flu, yet may have seemed
somehow different from flu you have had in the past, or perhaps
you have just noticed that something is "going around."  Even
this recording was delayed one week by flu-like illnesses which
hit myself and some of my associates very hard.

   I wish I could tell you that the flu-like illness season were
about over, but unfortunately the opposite is true.  A fourth
Soviet plutonium attack began this month on February 3 involving
25 Soviet submarines.  This time they were deployed along the
entire West coast from Seattle to San Diego, and they injected
plutonium into our atmosphere over a period of approximately two
weeks.  And now just three days ago on February 24 a fifth Soviet
plutonium attack on the United States has begun.  This time there
are 30 Soviet submarines, again deployed all the way from Seattle
to San Diego.  Furthermore, I am now able to confirm that there
is a weather-modification aspect to the Soviet plutonium attacks.

   In the past year or so the United States Environmental
Protection Agency, the EPA, has issued warnings, so-called, that
fluorocarbon propellants from household aerosol cans are damaging
the ozone layer far up into the atmosphere.  We have been warned
that this could have very dangerous effects on our environment;
and as a result, a trend away from aerosol spray cans is now
under way.  There may be some merit to that argument, but as
usual the EPA is merely seizing on a minor danger in order to
cover up a far more real immediate and major threat.

   The means by which the plutonium is being dispersed into our
atmosphere by the Soviet submarines is none other than by
fluorocarbon propellants discharging upward into the air at a
steep angle.  Each submarine in each attack exhausts huge
quantities of fluorocarbon propellant in such a way that it is
far more effective in damaging our ozone layer than millions of
ordinary household aerosol cans in normal use.  Even before the
plutonium attacks began last October, my Intelligence sources
believe that fluorocarbon injections like this into our
atmosphere were under way for some time.  The introduction of the
plutonium to these attacks last October was therefore an easy

   But by other means, also, weather-modification activities by
both the CIA and the Soviet KGB have been in progress for some
time now for use in warfare.  Because of these facts, I believe I
should warn you about one thing which, at this time, I must label
as conjecture.  Normally, as you know, my policy is to tell you
only those things which I have been able to confirm as
established fact; but this time I believe an exception is
warranted.  The timing, severity, and pattern of the huge winter
storm that struck the north and east portions of the United
States may well have been a massive pre-war weather-modification
experiment as a rehearsal for similar measures in NUCLEAR WAR
ONE.  Had war broken out while those weather patterns persisted,
large portions of the upper United States within the "Nuclear
Safe Zone" would have been immobilized by weather and therefore
could have been spared from attack--seemingly for natural

   It may be that weather control is the key to the riddle of the
"Nuclear Safe Zone", enabling it to escape attack while the
southern two-thirds of the United States along with Alaska and
Hawaii endure a nuclear holocaust.  If this is the case, then a
future storm pattern that immobilizes the part of the United
States above the 40th Parallel could be the signal that a Soviet
nuclear attack is imminent.  I emphasize again that, as of now,
this is conjecture on my part.  I have not been able to confirm
it, but there are so many facts that point in this direction that
I believe you should be warned of this possibility.  The
Rockefeller Brothers, in any case, are doing everything in their
power to hurry up NUCLEAR WAR ONE, so anything can happen.  They
are in a hurry because they want to make sure that the war takes
place while enough of their super CIA missiles are still
operational to provide an effective blackmail threat against the
Soviets.  But as for America's officially acknowledged fleet of
Intercontinental Missiles, that is another matter.

   I have never revealed what went on when I saw General George
S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, in his Pentagon
offices last September 16, 1976, but I think I should now mention
just one item which has now acquired urgent new significance.

   One of the things I discussed with General Brown was the
horrendous Intelligence gap created by then Secretary of State
Henry Kissinger.  Because of this deliberate Intelligence gap,
General Brown and the Joint Chiefs have been denied crucial
information needed to protect our country.  In this connection,
General Brown did not know about the super-secret "Nuclear Safe
Zone" negotiated for the private benefit of the Rockefeller
Brothers and their intimates by Kissinger.  In fact, it seemed
unbelievable because he pointed out the presence of several prime
targets--namely, ICBM installations inside the "Nuclear Safe
Zone."  But now Jimmy Carter is pushing for those very ICBM sites
to be shut down.  That is the meaning of Carter's incredible
order to General Brown at the Blair House meeting of January 12,
1977, and by that means the Rockefellers plan to make the
"Nuclear Safe Zone" off limits to NUCLEAR WAR ONE attack.

Topic #3--Whatever the future holds for us, my friends, one thing
is for sure.  We are witnessing the end of an era.  Politically,
economically, socially, and spiritually we are entering a time of
tumultuous change, but the question still remains: Change in what

   Will this be the end of the era of destructive Rockefeller
control over our lives?  Or will we just sit back wringing our
hands and let them succeed in their plans to snuff out the era of
human freedom?  Might we look forward to the new era of renewed
respect for nature as God in His wisdom created it?  Or will we
condemn ourselves by inaction to a suicidal era of ever
increasing destruction of our beautiful world under the greedy
exploitation of the Rockefeller cartel and their Soviet allies? 
Will the struggle that is being forced upon us lead us at last to
a new dawning of the day of the individual?  Or will we submit
without struggle to the perfect equality of slaves in the
Rockefeller-Soviet world empire?

   My friends, it will take organized, dedicated, selfless action
to sound the alarm and bring pressure to bear in time to turn
away from total disaster for our land.  But the hour is now so
late; where can we hope for this action to come from?  If history
is any guide, my friends, there is only one institution left.

   I have pointed out on previous occasions that what is
happening in America today is a ghastly replay of what happened
to Germany before World War II--with one difference.  Those who
brought Hitler to power as a pawn are themselves coming to power
here in America.

   With this in mind, I will now read a very rare letter to you. 
For reasons which will become apparent, it will be safely stored
away again under lock and key by the time you hear this
recording.  The letter, written by a distinguished churchman, is
dated October 16, 1945, and is addressed to Dr. Albert Einstein. 
I will now read directly from the letter:

  "My dear Dr. Einstein:

   I have seen you reported as having said, quote: 'Being a lover
of freedom, when the revolution came in Germany I looked to the
Universities to defend it, knowing that they had always boasted
of their devotion to the cause of truth; but NO, the Universities
immediately were silenced.  Then I looked to the great editors of
the newspapers whose flaming editorials in days gone by had
proclaimed their love of freedom; but they, like the
Universities, were silenced in a few short weeks.  Only the
Church stood squarely across the path of Hitler's campaign for
suppressing the truth.  I never had any special interest in the
church before, but now I feel a great affection and admiration,
because the church alone has had the courage and persistence to
stand for intellectual truth and moral freedom.  I am forced thus
to confess that what I once despised, I now praise

Still continuing with the letter:

  "Would you be kind enough to let me know whether this
represents your feeling now that hostilities have ceased?  I
should be very grateful to know how you feel about this now.

   With great admiration and every good wish, I am
                                          Yours faithfully,"

and there follows the signature of the writer.  Below there is a
postscript as follows, and I quote:

  "P.S. - The statement is reported to have been made by you
before the United States entered the war, and I thought possibly
you might have had some occasion to change your opinion in the
light of later developments.  I naturally hope that you haven't."

The writer of this letter received it back with the following
answer in longhand along the right-hand margin, and I quote:

  "The reproduction of my verbally given statement is essentially
correct, and I have not changed my opinion concerning this

There follows the signature:

"A. Einstein."

   My friends, the churches in Nazi Germany recognized the
onslaught of evil and stood up against it.  Today America faces
the same evil, multiplied a thousand times over.  But where?  oh
where are the churches today?

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 20

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of Audio Books, Inc., Box 16428, Ft.
Worth, Texas  76133

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is January 24,
1977, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 20.

   Just four days ago, on January 20, 1977, our nation witnessed
the crowning achievement of Rockefeller public relations
propaganda, the so-called People's Inaugural of Jimmy Carter. 
Through emotional appeals to the American Dream, millions of
Americans are being enticed to let their hopes soar based on
nothing but blind trust.  But the most crushing disappointments
are always those which follow the brightest hopes; and the false
hopes that are being raised by Jimmy Carter will come crashing to
the ground all too soon.

   Even so, there is something to be thankful for that deserves a
moment's reflection.  Nelson Rockefeller still has been denied
the goal he has sought for so long--seizure of the Presidency and
his establishment as America's first openly visible Dictator. 
Never before has a bright light been focused on the real plans
and actions of Nelson Rockefeller and his brothers; but now,
after developing a total of nine scenarios and back-up plans for
placing himself in the Oval Office through the back door of his
25th Amendment, he has run through them all, and for the moment
he has failed.

   Major factors that have upset and delayed the plans of the
Four Rockefeller Brothers for total control have included such
things as: the twin Gold and Plutonium Scandal at Fort Knox which
is still being covered up, Indira Gandhi's crackdown on the CIA
in the summer of 1975, and of course their double-cross by the
Soviet Union that began last summer with the planting of
underwater nuclear missiles along our shores.  And according to
my own Intelligence sources, the glare of the truth has played an
important role in keeping Nelson Rockefeller out of the
presidency, so far.  In recent weeks, support for the leadership
of the Four Rockefeller Brothers among their corporate socialist
allies has been weakened by the shock of the Soviet double-cross. 
Nelson finally abandoned his ninth take-over scenario involving
the Electoral College scheme under pressure from brother David. 
Thus, David Rockefeller, the most powerful of the Four Brothers,
is now playing the role that their late uncle, Winthrop Aldrich,
always used to play in seeing to it that Nelson never became

   What Nelson Rockefeller may do from this point onward remains
to be seen.  Only one thing is for sure: Like the Soviets, he
never gives up; and he has not given up on his dream of becoming
the President and Dictator of the United States--and ultimately
of the world.

   But for the time being it is his brother David who is now
President-by-proxy through his control of Jimmy Carter.  What we
are witnessing in the transition from the Ford to the Carter
Administration is nothing more than a changing of shifts in the
one real political party that runs America--the Rockefeller
Party.  The Soviet Union is run decade after decade by fewer than
one percent (1%), who belong to the ruling Communist Party; and
the United States of America is now run decade after decade by
fewer than 1%, who belong to the ruling Rockefeller
Party--whether they call themselves Republicans, Democrats,
Liberals, or Conservatives.

   Jimmy Carter, who campaigned as a Washington outsider, owes
his come-from-nowhere election to the fact that David Rockefeller
selected him some years ago as the ideal puppet for his purposes. 
Carter was invited to join David's TRILATERAL COMMISSION and was
then steeped in Trilateralist thinking--in other words, the
Rockefeller line.  With such powerful support, Carter has no idea
how dangerous a position he is now in.  Already a "Carter
Watergate" is brewing to cut him down; and, worst of all, the
threat of war hangs over everything he does.

   In his Inaugural Address, Carter expressed a preoccupation
with war; and for the past several weeks the American public has
been under an avalanche of warnings about the Soviet military
threat, including statements that the Soviets are now preparing
for war.  This is a complete turnabout from the virtual ban on
anti-Soviet news that was in force in the controlled major media
until very recently; and the excuse that has been provided for
all these new warnings is a new study of Intelligence information
that was launched last summer as soon as it was learned that the
Soviet Union was planting offensive missiles in our waters.  The
threat of war, my friends, is very real; but the intent of the
controlled major media in relaying these warnings to you now is
another matter.  We are now being psychologically conditioned to
accept a "Declaration of National Emergency" when the time is
ripe, and to submit to the dictatorial controls it will impose.

   The drive to merge the United States with the Soviet Union to
form an all-powerful World Government has already cost us two
World Wars plus Korea and Vietnam.  Now, we are once again in a
pre-war situation, on the brink of NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and for
reasons I can now reveal, the Four Rockefeller Brothers still
believe they can succeed in bending the coming nuclear war to
their own purposes.

   My three special topics for today are:




Topic #1--One year ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8, I publicly
revealed for the very first time the supersecret White House
merge directive.  Under this directive our lives in America are
to be so altered that we can be comfortably merged with the
Soviet Union.  And since last spring I have also been drawing
your attention to the little known but central role that the
major tax-free Foundations have played for two generations and
more to push our nation in the same direction.

   Last month I was able to reveal one of my sources of
information about the Foundations--my friend, Mr. Norman Dodd,
and to repeat for you his own words about the clandestine role
they have played in progressively destroying the America that was
created by our Founding Fathers.  Mr. Dodd's story is incredible,
but it is also based upon painstaking, carefully documented
research which he directed with the Congress of the United
States.  As one of America's foremost authorities on Foundations,
Norman Dodd is a man whose words carry a great deal of weight. 
But since last April I have also been informed anew that there is
a contingent among the present-day Trustees of these Foundations
who are becoming increasingly worried about the direction in
which they are taking us.  Even before the Soviet underwater
missile crisis materialized last summer, their fears of a Soviet
double-cross were mounting rapidly.  And now, no less than Henry
Ford II has resigned in dissatisfaction as a Trustee of the
biggest Foundation in the world--the Ford Foundation; and he has
warned in a criticizing letter that a change in direction would
be wise to consider.

   In his resignation letter of January 11, 1977, he said in
part, and I quote:

  "The Foundation exists and thrives on the fruits of our
economic system.  The dividends of competitive enterprise make it
all possible.  A significant portion of the abundance created by
United States business enables the Foundation and like
institutions to carry on their work.  In effect, the Foundation
is a creature of capitalism--a statement that I am sure would be
shocking to many professional staff people in the field of
philanthropy.  It is hard to discern recognition of this fact in
anything the Foundation does.  It is even more difficult to find
an understanding of this in many of the institutions,
particularly the universities, that are the beneficiaries of the
Foundation's grant programs."

Shortly thereafter he continues, and I quote:

  "I am just suggesting to the Trustees and the staff that the
system that makes the Foundation possible very probably is worth
preserving.  Perhaps it's time for the Trustees and staff to
examine the question of our obligations to our economic system;
and to consider how the Foundation, as one of the system's most
prominent offspring, might act most wisely to strengthen and
improve its progenitor."

   If you are not aware of the concerted drive toward
collectivism that has been promoted for decades by the major
Foundations, these words of Henry Ford II may surprise you.  Even
so, you may be even more surprised at the reactions of the major
Foundations to his criticisms.  Almost universally their
bitterest reactions had to do with Ford's defense of free
competitive enterprise.

   For example, consider the Carnegie Endowment for International
Peace.  In AUDIO LETTER No. 19 last month you heard of the
chilling role the Carnegie Endowment has played since 1909 in
altering America's national life through warfare and twisting our
education.  When a high official of the Carnegie Endowment was
asked for his comments on Henry Ford's letter of resignation, he
reacted in the scornful words, "Is that what the Ford Foundation
is set up for--to promote free enterprise?"  He was very upset at
the mention of free enterprise--the indispensable foundation of
Freedom itself.

   Henry Ford II is not alone.  Those Foundation trustees who
insist upon continuing the suicidal drive toward collectivism
under the long-time commitment for a One World Government are
trying to put down all dissent within their ranks.  But Henry
Ford II has courageously shown the way, and we can hope for
others to follow.

Topic #2--In all the major wars of this century involving the
United States, undeclared warfare has been a consistent pattern. 
In the cases of Korea and Vietnam, in fact, the entire wars were
undeclared.  In the cases of World Wars I and II, undeclared
warfare and provocations preceded the formal outbreak of war and
marked the time period in each case that has since been called

   In that sense, we are now living in the pre-war days that are
leading up to NUCLEAR WAR ONE here in America!  But as we are
living out the days of the pre-NUCLEAR WAR ONE period, undeclared
hostilities have reached a level unparalleled in the past.

   Consider first the repeated plutonium cloud attacks which have
been mounted on the United States by Soviet submarines in recent
months.  As I have related in previous monthly AUDIO LETTERS, the
first such attack was mounted in early October 1976 by Soviet
submarines deployed along the Atlantic, Pacific, and Gulf coasts
of the United States.  Based on the results from that first
full-scale experiment on our country, Soviet chemical warfare
specialists concluded that subsequent plutonium cloud attacks
could be mounted most efficiently from stations along the
Northwest Coast.

   In late November 1976, a second experimental attack was
mounted to test this out; and while it was not completely
successful from the Soviet viewpoint, it provided all the
additional data they needed.

   Both of these experimental plutonium cloud attacks by the
Soviet Union were accompanied by convenient cover announcements
by the United States Environmental Protection Agency, the EPA, to
the effect that radioactive clouds from Chinese nuclear blasts
would be passing over us.  Thus an explanation was readily
available should something unexpectedly severe happen--but it did

   And on December 13, 1976, as I reported last month, 21 Soviet
submarines loaded with plutonium poison to inject into our
atmosphere arrived on station along the Northwest Coast of the
United States.  This time, my friends, experimentation was no
longer the goal.  Certain individuals in the United States
Government knew they were there, and knew why, but did nothing
whatsoever to interfere with their mission.

   As of December 31, 1976, 13 of the 21 subs had emptied their
load into our atmosphere and headed out to sea, having timed
their attack to make optimum use of severe winter storm
conditions across the United States.  The other 8 subs remained
behind to reinforce the main plutonium cloud by continuing to
feed it periodically over a period of days.  Finally on January
3, 1977, these 8 Soviet subs also departed out to sea, having
emptied their loads into our atmosphere.

   According to my own Intelligence sources, this third and
latest plutonium cloud attack by the Soviet Union was very
effective.  The Soviets did achieve a very broad dispersal of the
plutonium poison throughout the continental United States.  This,
on top of the record cold weather blanketing most of the United
States lately, may well lead to an outbreak of flu-like
sicknesses in the near future, to which the Government has been
conditioning us now for nearly a year.

   Undeclared warfare by the Soviet Union is also continuing by
means of the short-range underwater-launch missiles which have
been planted in our waters by the Soviet Union ready for use in a
surprise attack.  Last month I revealed that 93 such missiles
were in place in American waters, and I gave the navigational
coordinates for nine of them which were surrounding the Island of
Oahu, where Pearl Harbor is located.

   I can now report that the United States Navy did remove all
nine of these missiles, completing the operation on December 31,
1976.  But four Soviet submarines were on hand to observe the
complete missile removal operation by our Navy; and as of January
17, just one week ago, two new Soviet missiles were already in
place, threatening Pearl Harbor again.  In addition, four other
Soviet missiles have been planted since I recorded monthly AUDIO
LETTER No. 19 last month--two in Alaskan waters, the other two on
the West Coast.  This brings the total back up to 90 as of now.

   My disclosures last month demonstrated to certain persons that
I am not bluffing, that the United States is indeed targeted by a
massive new round of Soviet underwater nuclear missiles.  But for
the reasons I gave two months ago in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
18 for November, 1976, I do not intend to reveal the rest of the
missile locations merely to have them wasted in the deadly
cat-and-mouse game now under way.  Instead, my own Intelligence
sources have made it crystal clear that only public exposure of
the truth about this whole deadly matter has any hope of stopping
the coming war.  For that reason I have already launched efforts
through a number of indirect channels which lie outside the
Rockefeller sphere of control in an attempt to bring about this
public exposure.

   If full-fledged war does come, my friends, America is in for a
wide range of nasty military surprises.  In certain areas Soviet
approaches to military technology are far different from our
own--such as in the field of anti-submarine warfare.

   One field in which they are literally decades ahead of the
United States is in the area of microwaves as they affect human
beings.  Since early December the Soviet Union has been
conducting a major experimental test program on a new
satellite-based system that uses microwaves to directly affect
the behavior of humans.  The test victims: the crews of selected
tankers and freighters in and near American waters.

   Soviet researchers discovered long ago that prolonged exposure
to microwaves, even at intensities considered "safe" in the
United States, can produce a long list of effects on people. 
These range from dizziness and irritability to emotional
instability and alteration of brain wave patterns, as well as
other effects.  Starting from these findings, Soviet scientists
have developed microwave bombardment techniques which have the
basic effect of greatly reducing a person's capacity for
exercising judgment and fully comprehending facts at his
disposal.  A person under such bombardment, in other words, is
very prone to make mistakes, serious mistakes.

   On December 15, 1976, the Liberian tanker Argo Merchant went
aground on the Nantucket shoals off Cape Cod, and the resulting
oil spill of 7-1/2 million gallons was the worst to date in
American history.  Many things were strange about the
incident--such as the fact that the Nantucket shoals are a very
well known navigational hazard, and the Argo Merchant was many
miles off course.  Hearings later revealed that the ship's
navigational gear was not in proper condition, but strange
behavior by the crew itself went unexplained.

   The Argo Merchant was then followed by a rash of tanker
incidents in and near American waters; and in almost every case,
errors of judgment were either primary or contributing factors.

   It was a bad month for the Coast Guard; but it was worst of
all for the 38 nationalist Chinese crewmen of the tanker Grand
Zenith, which was lost at sea off the New England coast with over
8-million gallons of heavy fuel oil aboard.  On December 30,
1976, the Zenith reported its position as about 60 miles south of
Yarmouth, Nova Scotia.  It was never heard from again.  Several
days later, after the ship failed to arrive at its destination,
the Coast Guard began a search for the missing ship.  However it
was noticed that the last position reported by the Zenith was so
far north of its planned course that it did not seem to make
sense.  As a result, the search was shifted to a seemingly more
likely area far to the south of that location.

   The story of the Grand Zenith is a tragic one, my friends. 
But it might have been less tragic had the Coast Guard taken the
last position report by the Captain of the Grand Zenith more
seriously and anchored search operations on that position,
because on January 7, 1977, I received Intelligence information
to the effect that the location of the sunken Grand Zenith was
approximately 43 degrees 5 minutes North, 67 degrees 52 minutes
West.  Furthermore, my information indicated that as of that time
there were still survivors in the immediate vicinity of the

   It was urgent that this be brought to the attention of the
Coast Guard without delay.  The search had already been narrowed
down to the wrong area--over 200 miles to the southeast of the
correct position--based on the finding of two life jackets
bearing the name Grand Zenith.  I immediately contacted the J. F.
Moran Company in Providence, Rhode Island (the ship's agent in
New England), and gave them the information.  They passed it on
to the Coast Guard--but there it stopped!

   For days I tried directly and indirectly to get someone to
check out the location I had been given.  On January 10 I
contacted the Coast Guard directly to see what had been done.  I
was informed that no attempt whatever had been made to check out
my report, and that no attempt was going to be made!!  Instead
the same fruitless area 300 miles east of Cape Cod was searched
day after day for a week with no hope whatsoever of finding the
survivors.  Meanwhile I could not persuade the Coast Guard even
to make a single flight over the actual site of the sinking in
order to check out my report.

   The same information was also given to the Navy after the
Coast Guard refused to investigate; and the Navy, too, refused to
check it out.  Had either the Navy or the Coast Guard checked the
information I gave them about the Grand Zenith, they would have
found it to be true, and that would have demonstrated to the
public at large that my Intelligence sources about matters like
this are extremely accurate.

   My Intelligence sources had hoped that this would be exactly
the outcome of my relaying the life-saving information about the
Grand Zenith.  But, my friends, the TRUTH has many enemies.

Topic #3--The brain-scrambling microwave weapons which are now
entering operational status in the Soviet arsenal are just one
example of a whole new generation of superweapons which are now
under development in a secret arms race.  The participants in
this race are none other than the Corporate Socialist Rockefeller
cartel on the one hand, and the State Socialists of the Soviet
Union on the other.  Thus, while they are allies in the drive to
take over the rest of the world, there remains a tension of
rivalry between the two.  Each would like to achieve clear
supremacy over the other, and each is trying to prevent the other
from achieving such supremacy.  Caught in the middle as both pawn
and prize is the United States of America with her people, her
resources, and her industrial and military establishment.  We
continually hear about the military relationship between the
Soviet Union and the United States, but the real arms struggle is
between the Soviet Union and the Rockefeller empire--and it is a
well kept secret.

   Weapons which are under normal official Defense Department
control in this country are always compared with weapons which
enjoy a similar officially acknowledged status in the Soviet
Union.  Thus military planners think in terms of Soviet Backfire
Bombers versus the American B-1 Bomber; Soviet missiles and
missile-firing submarines versus their counterparts; and new
developments such as Cruise Missiles which, by the way, are not
actually a basic new concept at all.  All of these things are
real and important factors in the military equation.  But there
is another layer of weaponry that you have never heard about, yet
which is crucial to the real power balance between the
Rockefeller and Soviet empires.  This is the realm of the secret
arms race in highly advanced super weapons.  This realm is
completely unaffected by SALT treaties or other treaties, and
involves a continual jockeying for pure raw power!

   Thus, for example, timid reports are just beginning to be made
public about the possibilities that lasers might be used to blind
military satellites, and that some day far in the future they
might even be developed into death rays like those of Science
Fiction.  As for operational weapons in the supersecret category,
the Soviet underwater nuclear missiles that now infest our waters
and the sonar-absorbing mini-submarines which are used to plant
them are good examples.

   One of the puzzling things to me until recently was the
incredible "Red Friday Agreement" of October 1, 1976, whereby the
Rockefeller Brothers pledged, through President Ford, not to
harass the Soviet submarines planting missiles in our waters. 
Even more puzzling has been the absence of a Soviet ultimatum or
surprise attack so far, given our heavy coastal targeting with
these missiles.  But now, I can give you the answers.

   When I first revealed the locations of Soviet underwater
missiles around the world in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 last
August, I did so with the knowledge that a planned world-wide
Soviet surprise attack was imminent, and that public exposure was
the only thing that could prevent it.  Now I know more fully why
the surprise element was so crucial to the double-cross embarked
upon by the Soviet Union.  The Soviets were trying to prepare and
launch the attack before an awesome weapons system that is under
direct Rockefeller control could be activated; but ever since
that surprise was ruined, they have been forced to bide their
time while they watch for another opportunity to catch the
Rockefeller empire in a vulnerable moment.

   Meanwhile a standoff is being maintained between the Soviet
underwater missiles and the Rockefeller superweapons system I am
about to tell you about.  At the same time, Rockefeller
propaganda is being used to rapidly wash away the idea of
East-West detente in a flood of warnings about the Soviet threat
and possible war.  The purpose of it all is to lead up to a
"Declaration of National Emergency", as I have already warned. 
Finally, NUCLEAR WAR ONE is programmed to come.  The purpose of
the Rockefeller superweapons is not to prevent this war.  These
superweapons are only a club over the head of the Soviets to
insure that the war goes according to plan.  This includes Soviet
adherence to the "Nuclear Safe Zone" which was established by
secret agreement to protect the Rockefeller Brothers and their

   I was first alerted to the existence of the Rockefeller
superweapons system as the result of my press release which was
sent out to nearly 11,000 newspapers in the United States late in
October in connection with the release of monthly AUDIO LETTER
No. 17.  The press release called attention to the pivotal role
General George S. Brown, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff,
had played in preventing a surprise attack by means of Soviet
underwater missiles.

   On November 17, 1976, one of my associates received a call
from a Mr. Tony Hodges, a prominent environmentalist who lives in
Honolulu.  Mr. Hodges had been given a copy of the press release,
and called to find out more about it.  He had good reason to be
interested because nearly a year earlier, unbenoticed to my
associates or myself, he had delivered a 47-page warning document
to the ambassadors of more than 50 countries who had signed the
1971 Seabeds Arms Control Treaty.  In this warning document Mr.
Hodges alerted the reader to, quote:

  "Probable violations by the USA and the USSR of the 1971
Seabeds Arms Control Treaty."

He was careful to make clear that the material contained in the
document did not prove his suspicions that undersea weapons of
the sort banned by the treaty had been deployed by either the
United States or the Soviet Union.  Nevertheless he did explain
in considerable detail why such weapons, such as missiles and
undersea silos, would be militarily desirable; and he also
presented the statements of several extremely highly qualified
experts in this field of technology contending that such undersea
missile systems are feasible.

   One of these authorities is Dr. John P. Craven, who is
presently (Jan. 1977) the dean of Marine Programs for the
University of Hawaii as well as Marine Affairs Coordinator for
the State of Hawaii.  Formerly he was Chief Scientist on United
States Navy projects which involved both the development of this
nation's submarine-launched ballistic missile system and deep
submersibles.  He is also an attorney specializing in Marine Law,
and at last report continued to be a high-level consultant to the
Department of Defense.

   In his warning document, Mr. Hodges lists the impressive
credentials of Dr. Craven in more detail, and also presents
voluminous notes on a conversation he had with Dr. Craven in
November 1975 about the subject of undersea missiles.  The entire
Craven interview as reported in the Hodges warning document
provides a great deal of insight into the whole subject of
undersea missiles, which are discussed throughout as being sealed
inside a protective capsule while they dwell in their hiding
places beneath the sea.  At no point did Dr. Craven admit to
knowing of the actual existence of any such system; but according
to the report of Mr. Hodges, the feasibility of such undersea
missiles was strongly confirmed by Dr. Craven.

   To illustrate this, I will now quote from page 26 of the
Hodges warning document--Notes C-29 through C-31, quote:

  "Craven said he could develop a total weapons system to do what
I suggested in a maximum of four (4) years, longer if it needed
to be clandestine.

   The above is an enormously important statement by Craven,
since the author believes that Craven was intimately involved in
the development of the systems noted in this warning document.
The figure Craven gave for carrying out the system development in
total secrecy, such as has been done, was seven (7) years.  This
is significant because it is believed that the program to place
nuclear weapons on and within the seabed was begun in 1968 while
Craven was still chief scientist of the Navy's Strategic Systems
project and its Deep Submergence Systems project.  The seabed
silos and the tidal wave and earthquake-generating systems would
certainly fall in those two areas of responsibility of his.

   It should be noted that whenever during the conversation we
got away from whether or not the weapons system had actually been
implanted, Craven quickly warmed up to the subject as the 'can
do' technologist he is known to be.  When he said he could
develop such a program--a 'total weapons system' he called it--in
only (4) years, he did so with considerable gusto.

   It was in this vein that Craven offered the next remark.
Craven said that the individual missile capsules did not have to
be placed in silos on the seabed, but could be dumped off the
rear of a fast-moving destroyer.  Craven said that there would be
some problem for the missile to know its precise location, but
that this could be worked out."

   The Hodges warning document also reports the assessment of
feasibility of underwater missiles by two other experts.  One who
is identified as having worked for 16 years on American
submarine-launched ballistic missile projects is Robert C.
Aldrich.  He is quoted as saying, quote:

  "Quite feasible, though I was skeptical at first."

Another person quoted is Costa Tpsis of MIT Center for
International Studies, a well known analyst of strategic missile
systems.  His assessment of the feasibility of undersea missile
systems, as described by Hodges, is reported to be quote:

  "'Absolutely possible.'  Tpsis said that such silos could be
placed on the continental shelf in water as shallow as 100 meters
and still achieve the same protective purpose."

(End of quote from the Hodges warning document.)

   My friends, Tony Hodges deserves a great deal of credit, both
for the importance of the material he uncovered and summarized in
his warning document, and for the way in which he has handled it. 
First, he tried unsuccessfully to get the Government to take
proper corrective measures without having to resort to
embarrassing publicity about it.  Then, he turned to the press in
the person of a syndicated columnist, whom I will simply call
"Mr. X."  Mr. X took great interest in the Hodges warning
document material and in the plan to have it delivered to the
governments of the signatories to the Seabed Arms Control Treaty
on December 17, 1975.  According to Hodges, a big news story was
written ready to break on the same day the documents were
delivered--December 17, 1975.  But suddenly Mr. X decided to kill
the story because CIA Director William Colby, National Security
Council Staff Director Brent Scowcroft, and Richard Chaney of the
White House Staff all asked him to kill it!  Nevertheless the
warning document was delivered to the ambassadors of the Seabed
Treaty signatories in Washington and at the United Nations in New
York City.  According to Mr. Hodges this, too, apparently fell on
deaf ears.  Nor have attempts to bring it to the attention of the
United States Congress apparently been of any use!

   But, my friends, Tony Hodges was on to something very big
indeed.  Having been alerted for the first time by his warning
document that the United States might be involved in some way
with undersea missiles or other nuclear weapons, I began checking
my own Intelligence sources to find out whether it was actually
so or not.  And, my friends, the answer is "Yes."  The Hodges
warning document provides a great deal of very informative
background material for what I am about to tell you; and I am
informed that as long as he has copies of it left, you can obtain
a copy for $10.00 by writing to him directly.  The name and

   Mr. Anthony Hodges, 3238 Paty Drive, Honolulu, Hawaii  96822
   His telephone number now is: Area Code 808-988-2557.

   What I have to tell you now, my friends, is not the
responsibility of Tony Hodges in any way.  It is what I have
learned from my own Intelligence sources over the past two
months, and I accept full responsibility for making it public.

   When I revealed the presence of Soviet short-range nuclear
missiles in our waters last August, I mentioned that the United
States had not placed similar missiles in the waters around the
Soviet Union.  I can confirm once again that this is the case. 
But now, I have learned that an entirely different kind of
underwater-launch offensive nuclear missiles are targeted on the
Soviet Union from resting places deep in the Atlantic and Pacific

   According to my own Intelligence information, only 14 of these
undersea supermissiles have been deployed--5 in the Pacific, 9 in
the Atlantic--but that's enough.  Each of these encapsulated
supermissiles is more akin to the Saturn moon rocket than to any
ordinary ICBM.  Each carries several dozen independently
targetable hydrogen warheads.  Several of these on each missile
are superyield warheads, with the rest being similar to the
normal Minuteman or Polaris warhead.  The superyield warheads are
designed to devastate all the major ports and key portions of the
industrial heartland of the Soviet Union, in spite of the Civil
Defense measures that the Soviets have taken in recent years. 
The huge number of lower-yield warheads are targeted on
relatively soft targets throughout the Soviet Union with the sole
purpose of raising the Soviet casualty toll as high as possible.

   The whole purpose of these undersea supermissiles is to
confront the Soviet Union with a threat of massive counterattack
which cannot be neutralized in a Soviet first strike, and which
would ruin the Soviet Union as a functioning society.  According
to plan, these missiles would virtually destroy the Soviet Union
as a modern civilization, killing over 100-million people in the
process.  But, my friends, the purpose of these undersea
supermissiles aimed at the Soviet Union is not to protect you and
me, nor to prevent war!  They are under the direct control of the
Rockefeller Brothers by way of their controlled CIA--not the
normal chain of command through the Department of Defense; and
their purpose is to serve as an awesome club over the heads of
the Soviet rulers to make sure that NUCLEAR WAR ONE goes as

   The world-wide Pearl Harbor attack that was imminent last
August when I publicly revealed the world-wide locations of
Soviet underwater missiles was a daring Soviet gamble.  Its
purpose was to eliminate the Four Rockefeller Brothers from the
scene and simultaneously prevent the CIA undersea missiles from
being launched by making such counterattacks seem pointless.  But
the key ingredient of that plan was secrecy and total surprise. 
My intelligence sources made it abundantly clear last July and
August that the only way to prevent immediate nuclear disaster
was public exposure of the truth.  And now we know why.  Now we
also know why the Four Rockefeller Brothers felt that they could
get away with the seemingly suicidal policy instituted on Red
Friday, October 1, 1976, agreeing to allow the Soviet Union to
keep planting short-range nuclear missiles in our territorial
waters without harassment.  It's all part of a nuclear standoff
involving weapons the public does not even know about and in
which the Rockefellers believe they hold the upper hand.

   There are now strong indications that the Four Rockefeller
Brothers, believing they still hold the upper hand with their
undersea supermissiles, plan to turn the presence of the Soviet
missiles in our waters to their own advantage.  During the fall
of 1976 they re-established the strained alliance between
themselves and the Soviet Union for the time being; and now we
are being built up rapidly to accept a Declaration of National
Emergency.  The announcement by the Government that there are
Soviet missiles in our waters is now being arranged to be done
with the advanced knowledge of the Soviet Union.  Just as
Franklin D. Roosevelt declared an "unlimited national emergency"
on May 27, 1941 as part of the build-up for war, a similar
scenario is being worked out now to trap us all!

   But the cruel joke may be on the Rockefeller Brothers
themselves, who may yet be buried by the Soviet Union along with
millions of us.  Something is going wrong with the CIA
supermissiles deep in the ocean; and as of now, one is completely
disabled and five more are deteriorating rapidly and probably are
not usable.  That leaves only eight undersea supermissiles at the
disposal of the Rockefeller Brothers; and their reliability, too,
is now open to serious question.  In addition, the Soviet fears
about their corroding underwater missiles in the secret Soviet
missile crisis of 1971, which I described in monthly AUDIO LETTER
No. 14 last July, apply again now.  Several of the undersea
supermissiles are now leaking plutonium from their disabled
warheads into the surrounding water, and the possibility of an
uncontrolled explosion cannot be ruled out.  Should this happen,
tidal waves or earthquakes could be created that could affect
Hawaii, the Bahamas, or any place along the east coast from Nova
Scotia to Florida.

   Just as my Intelligence sources emphasized last summer that
public exposure of the truth was the key to avoiding disaster,
the same situation exists again now.  The CIA undersea
supermissiles in the Atlantic and Pacific cannot protect us from
war, and in fact are not even intended for that purpose.  Yet
they sit there as a present hazard to all of our lives, directly
and indirectly.  Therefore I am going to reveal the locations of
all 14 of the CIA undersea supermissiles in navigational
coordinates.  At a minimum I hope to strip the Rockefeller cartel
of their ace in the hole that makes our survival irrelevant to
them; but even more, I hope to undo their continued cooperation
with the Soviet Union in a plan to sacrifice millions of our
lives.  This may well be our last chance to prevent the present
"pre-war period" from erupting as planned into NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

   The missiles are located in water depths ranging from a few
hundred feet at several Atlantic sites to more than 15,000 feet
at one Pacific site.

   The following five locations are in the Pacific Ocean. 
Incidentally, these are in the vicinity of locations which are
shown on a map in the Hodges warning document as probable
locations of undersea weapons.  As explained in the warning
document, Mr. Hodges believes that these locations were the
subject of seabed weapons installations or tests by the
CIA-financed Howard Hughes mystery ship, the Glomar Explorer.

Pacific Missile No. 1--About 25 miles north of the Hawaiian
Island Kauai at 22-37-14 North, 159-21-55 West.  Plutonium
leakage from this missile is badly contaminating the surrounding

Pacific Missile No. 2--About 10 miles north of Kauai at 22-21-59
North, 159-36-19 West.  Leaking, but not as badly.

Pacific Missile No. 3--About 650 miles northwest of Christmas
Island at 9-20-0 North, 165-18-41 West.

Pacific Missile No. 4--About 550 miles northwest of Christmas
Island at 8-0-0 North, 163-34-38 West.  This missile is totally

Pacific Missile No. 5--About 420 miles west-northwest of
Christmas Island at 3-2-0 North, 164-35-25 West.

Now for the Atlantic missiles:

Atlantic Missile No. 1--In Canadian waters near Sable Island at
43-52-0 North, 59-10-54 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 2--In Canadian waters about 140 miles
south-southeast of Halifax, Nova Scotia, at 42-30-24 North,
63-1-5 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 3--About 225 miles due east of Cape Cod at
41-46-23 North, 65-54-33 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 4--About 120 miles southeast of Cape Cod at
40-20-0 North, 68-18-32 West.  Leaking.

Atlantic Missile No. 5--About 50 miles to the southwest of
Atlantic Missile No. 4 at 40-4-0 North, 69-17-27 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 6--Only about 30 miles southeast of Cape
Hatteras, North Carolina at 34-49-1 North, 75-17-27 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 7--About 240 miles east-northeast of
Charleston, So. Car. at 33-5-40 North, 75-43-38 West.

Atlantic Missile No. 8--About 290 miles east-southeast of
Jacksonville, Fla. at 30-9-9 North, 77-8-44 West.  Leaking.

And finally:

Atlantic Missile No. 9--In British waters about 100 miles
east-northeast of Nassau in the Bahamas at 25-19-21 North,
75-54-33 West.

   In 1947 the Rockefeller Brothers arranged for the CIA to be
created for their own private purposes, and today it is the
CIA--not the normal military chain of command--that exercises
control for the Rockefellers over the undersea supermissiles as
part of its expanding encroachment into military affairs.  This
is helping to bring our beloved country to agony and ruin,
unless, my friends, WE stop it!

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 19

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02


Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC. (1982 current
address: 1629 K St. NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is December 18,
1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 19.

   As our Bicentennial Year of 1976 draws to a close, the United
States of America is in grave danger.  Our economy is ravaged by
the twin plagues of high inflation and high unemployment, a
condition which I named STAGFLATION some years ago.  Our Republic
is under attack in a far-advanced plan to bring our country under
dictatorship.  Our very lives are under the threat of extinction
in a surprise nuclear attack which would be the beginning of
NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and all of these terrible things have been
brought about deliberately by a handful of ruthless, powerful men
here and abroad, bent on world domination.

   "But how can this be?", you ask.  "How can so few people
control the destinies of all the rest of us?"

   After all, it is easy to imagine how far our Secret Rulers and
their henchmen would get if they tried to take over even one
city, much less all of America, with their own bare fists and
brute force.  They would be stopped in their tracks in no time
flat because everyone understands that kind of threat and there
are far more of us than there are of them.  But those who want to
enslave us understand this all too well; they know better than to
try any kind of frontal attack on us that would be widely
understood.  Instead, they have perfected the art of harnessing
our own energies so that gradually, step by step, we are
enslaving ourselves under their control.

   The Hegelian principle of thesis, antithesis, synthesis is
being applied so as to gradually merge our life with that of the
Soviet Union at every level!  The average working man and woman
in America would never knowingly allow this to happen, and yet it
is happening--gradually, year after year.

1. The first step, called Thesis, is to create and publicize a
problem in education, economics, or otherwise in our daily lives.
In other words, where there is peace, create discord and trouble.

2. Step 2, Antithesis, is to create opposition to the problem.

3. The final step, Synthesis, is to offer a so-called solution to
the problem.

This diabolical, roundabout approach psychologically conditions
people to accept things which they would otherwise oppose
vigorously.  Just a look around with this in mind, and you will
see that this technique is being used all around you in a
thousand ways; but the real key to the success or failure of this
method of manipulating the public lies in something Abraham
Lincoln said over 100 years ago, quote:

  "With public sentiment, nothing will fail; without it, nothing
can succeed."

So long as we, the people, are simply told the truth about
things, public sentiment reflects the truth.  Under those
conditions, real solutions can be found for real problems to
everyone's benefit; but when we are not told the truth, public
sentiment reflects only what we believe and we can be manipulated
into supporting all kinds of things that are not in our best

   Here in the United States a subtle, long-range propaganda
technique--known simply as MISINFORMATION--has been used to build
up an artificial and false picture of the world and our own
nation.  In the areas of foreign policy, national security,
politics, and economics, the truth has been suppressed and
replaced with an elaborate structure of lies, distortions, and
half-truths.  This false picture has come to be accepted as the
truth with the result that the truth itself has been rendered
unbelievable.  I don't think anyone in his right mind could do
what has been done to us.  Our education, our CONSTITUTION, our
free enterprise system, everything possible has been perverted in
order to confer ever more power on our Secret Rulers.

   Now, WAR IS COMING.  The wars of this century have been fought
far from our shores, but this time it is coming here--to our
land, to our homes, to our people!  It will not be a conventional
war but NUCLEAR WAR ONE.  As in all modern wars, it will begin
with a surprise attack.  Thanks to the silence of the United
States Government and of the controlled major media, most
Americans will be caught completely by surprise, believing in a
lie called detente until thermonuclear fireballs erupt all around
our nation.

   To show how different the truth is from what we are led to
believe by our Secret Rulers, I will discuss these three topics




Topic #1--On the evening of October 4, 1957, Americans were
stunned by the announcement that the Soviet Union had become the
first nation in history to place a man-made satellite in orbit. 
Sputnik I, weighing 184 pounds, was circling the Earth every hour
and a half sending out beeps that became famous overnight.  The
world was thrilled, and the world press heaped great praise on
the Soviet Union.  They inferred from this accomplishment that
the Soviet socialist system was superior to our own in scientific
and technical progress.  It was a historical first that can never
be undone--the Soviet Union had beaten the United States into

   Less than a month later Sputnik II was launched.  It weighed
over half a ton and carried the first live passenger into space,
a dog.  The dog died within a week but it was another startling
achievement nonetheless.

   Meanwhile poor old America was struggling along trying to put
a tiny 16-pound satellite into orbit by means of the Navy's
Vanguard rocket.  Two launches were attempted, but both failed. 
In one case the rocket lifted a few feet off the pad only to
settle back into a tremendous fireball as it exploded.  It made
exciting footage for the television news that evening.  Finally
on January 31, 1958, almost four months after Sputnik I, America
launched its first space satellite from Cape Canaveral, Florida. 
It was called Explorer I, and it was launched not by the Navy but
by the Army.  We were in space at last, but only after being
thoroughly humiliated before the entire world.

   After the Sputnik shock, space flight and rockets were
suddenly the "in" thing to be interested in.  Even then Senator
Lyndon B. Johnson arranged for a new "Aeronautics and Space
Committee" to be set up, with himself as its Chairman.  He was
thereafter as visible as possible in connection with space
matters, and today the manned space flight center in Houston
bears his name.  At the time, I could hardly imagine anything
more hypocritical for Johnson to do.  Even though I was a lawyer,
I had been a member of the then named "American Rocket Society"
for a number of years and had vivid memories of Johnson's
attitude toward space in the early 50's.  At that time, four or
five years before Sputnik, I was a member of a group headed by
Dr. Wernher Von Braun who approached Johnson in hopes of
obtaining support for a space program.  I'll never forget Lyndon
Johnson's reaction to the whole idea.  He did not merely say
"No", but jeered at the whole concept as ridiculous and

   A few years later the United States was deprived of the chance
to be first in space, but not by Lyndon Johnson.  What I am going
to tell you does not affect our national security now, but it
does provide a typical example of what has been happening to
America for many years.  And as Wernher Von Braun lies on his
death bed in a hospital near Washington, D.C., I believe the time
has come for the truth to be told about why we were not the first
to put a satellite into space.

   In late 1955 or early 1956, the Joint Chiefs of Staff began
the first act of planning for an American space program.  Their
goal: To have the United States initiate the world's first
successful space flight at the beginning of the International
Geophysical Year that was to begin on July 1, 1957.  After some
controversy as to which Service should sponsor the space project,
it was concluded that the Army was most capable of doing the job. 
This was agreed to and approved by the Joint Chiefs and by then
Secretary of Defense Charles Wilson.

   The Army's Redstone Arsenal in Huntsville, Alabama was
fortunate in having the services of the world's foremost rocket
expert, Dr. Wernher Von Braun.  From a very early age Von Braun
had been fascinated with the idea of space flight, and he had
spent his life working with rockets.  During World War II Von
Braun was pressed into service by Hitler, and the German rocket
program was far ahead of other countries by the end of the war. 
When the war ended, many of Von Braun's subordinates at the
German rocket base were taken prisoner by the Soviet Union and it
was they who were forced to develop and direct the Soviet missile
and space programs; but Von Braun himself had resolved well
before hostilities ended that he would surrender to the United
States, and he succeeded in doing so.  Our Government then
prevailed upon him to enter governmental research where he would
have the money and resources to pursue rocketry in earnest.

   When the Earth Satellite project came under consideration
years later in the mid-50's, the Joint Staff project officers
interviewed the Redstone Arsenal officials along with Von Braun
himself to ascertain their capability.  Von Braun stated that his
group could engineer a space vehicle and have it ready for orbit
in only a few months.  The Joint Staff pushed for the Von Braun
project; and after it was approved by the Joint Chiefs and
Secretary of Defense, it went to President Eisenhower for final
approval and allocation of Defense Department funds--but there it
stopped!  Strangely there was a long delay in getting the
expected presidential approval.  Finally the word came down to
the Joint Staff from the President.  Incredibly, they were to
disregard the Army's capability and give the Space project to the
Navy instead.  Such a decision was all but unbelievable.  The
Navy did not even have a blueprint for such a space vehicle! 
They would be starting almost from scratch; but the decision
stood, so several large aircraft companies and Navy scientists
gathered to initiate a program called "PROJECT VANGUARD."

   As a direct result of this decision, the Soviet Union was able
to put Sputnik into orbit while the United States was still
struggling unsuccessfully with Vanguard.  Joint Staff project
officers were most perplexed about the American political
decision to allow the Soviet Union to beat us in this endeavor
when we had the capability to be far ahead of them.  It appeared
to follow a pattern of withholding American capabilities and
allowing the Soviet Union the advantage.  Later, an aide to
President Eisenhower explained confidentially what had

   A select group of scientists and financial leaders got wind of
the American space satellite plans at an early stage.  The group,
headed by a man who was later awarded the Lenin Peace Prize by
the Soviet Union, went to the President and pressed him to
sponsor a purely American space project with only native
Americans working on it.  They didn't want by any means for a
former German, such as Wernher Von Braun, to give the world and
future historians the impression that the Germans of all people
were superior in the field of space science.  This group, who
were actually doing the bidding of the Rockefellers on behalf of
their Soviet allies, were instrumental in forcing America to take
a back seat in the early years of the Space Age when we were
fully capable of being supreme!

   Finally, after two Soviet Sputniks and two humiliating Navy
Vanguard failures, Eisenhower became exasperated and told the
Defense Department to get Von Braun into action.  Just six weeks
after he received the go-ahead, Von Braun's Army team launched
Explorer I.  He did exactly what he had said he could do two
years earlier--and the very first time he tried it; but the
special place in history he so richly deserved had been denied
him forever, just as it had been denied to the new homeland of
his choice, the United States of America.  The anti-German
argument that had been used on President Eisenhower was, of
course, a total fraud.

   When Sputnik I was launched a short dozen years after World
War II, the Soviet rocket program was even more dependent on the
efforts of captured German scientists than was true in the United
States.  Thus only one thing was really accomplished by delaying
the Army satellite effort under Wernher Von Braun: A tremendous
propaganda coup for the Soviet Union and a setback to American
prestige and self-confidence that persisted for years.  It is a
grim fact that accolades go to the spoilers and traitors among
us, but no acclaim to our true heroes and men dedicated to
American principles.

   Under the enthusiastic leadership of Wernher Von Braun the
United States was able to come from behind to win the race to the
Moon, but soon the world press will have relegated him to the
footnotes of modern history.  Like General Douglas MacArthur,
Wernher Von Braun will "just fade away."

Topic #2--When Secretary of Defense James Schlesinger was fired
by President Ford just over a year ago in November 1975, he said,

  "Some years from now someone will say, 'Why weren't we warned?'
and I wanted to be able to say: 'Indeed you were.'"

But most Americans when reminded of this parting statement by
Schlesinger tend to be surprised.  It is as if his words have
gone out into thin air, leaving no lasting impression at all. 
This is a perfect illustration of the way in which the American
public have been left comfortably asleep by the controlled major
media of our country, oblivious to the steadily mounting threat
of war.

   Around the world the alarms of impending nuclear disaster are
jangling louder and louder; but these alarms are muted, muffled,
and silenced by the time they reach you.  When isolated facts
about American or Soviet military developments are reported, it
is done in such a way that it has little lasting impact on most
people.  Thus, for example, you may hear a news item concerning
the debate over the new B-1 Bomber which the United States Air
Force is developing.  Taken in isolation you may well wonder what
all the shouting is about and, for that matter, why such a new
bomber is even being considered in this age of missiles.  Or you
may hear a brief news item mentioning that the Air Force wants to
buy some F-15 Fighters to augment our air defense system.

   Perhaps these things would make a little more sense to you if
you knew that the Soviet Backfire Bomber began to be deployed
operationally over three years ago!  The Backfire is a supersonic
long-range bomber capable of delivering nuclear weapons to
targets here in the United States--and that, my friends, is
precisely its purpose, not the so-called peripheral missions
mentioned by some.  Knowing this, perhaps it would have struck
you as a little strange that in 1974 after the Soviet Backfire
Bomber began being deployed, the United States virtually
dismantled its air defense system.  At the very time that a
renewed Soviet bomber threat was developing, our network of
interceptors was reduced to just six active Air Force Squadrons
plus six more in the Air National Guard!  The extensive network
of Nike Hercules Antiaircraft Missiles under Army command was
shut down completely.  But now, with war threatening to break
out, the Defense Department is reversing its position on air
defense without telling you why.

   The mounting controversy over the relative military strength
of the Soviet Union and the United States has taken many people
by surprise.  Almost 3-1/2 years ago the warning was sounded that
the Soviet Navy had become stronger than the United States Navy. 
That's what the world's foremost naval authority, Jane's Fighting
Ships, said in July 1973; but if you saw this reported at all by
the major media, did it make any impression?  Or consider the
matter of long-range ballistic missiles.  Over four years ago on
November 27, 1972, the Soviet Union successfully test-fired a
submarine-launched ballistic missile with a range of 4,500 miles! 
By comparison, the most advanced American sub-launched missiles
have a range of less than 3,000 miles.  In addition, the
development of a whole new series of Soviet missiles was

   Early this month the Soviet Union began a 20-day period of
tests of the new submarine-launched SSNX-18 Ballistic Missile,
firing them into a circular zone 100 miles in radius in the North
Pacific southeast of the Aleutian Islands.  The SSNX-18 now has a
multiple warhead capability; and these tests, which are
full-operational tests, extend over the full range of the missile
which is now more than 5,000 miles!  Particular attention is
being given to warhead performance in these test-proving flights. 
If all goes as planned, the SSNX-18 will be committed to full
production and operational status within a year's time.  The
SSNX-18 will give the Soviet Union a commanding lead over the
United States in the realm of submarine-launched ballistic
missiles.  But what have you learned from network news reports or
other major media about this missile?  Practically nothing.

   But the most tortured reasoning I have seen yet appeared on
December 6, 1976, in the New York Times.  An editorial on that
date entitled: MOSCOW'S SUBMARINE MIRV begins with the incredible
words, and I quote:

  "The Soviet Union's first successful test of a
submarine-launched ballistic missile armed with MIRV multiple
nuclear warheads is good news paradoxically for the United States
and the world."

The editorial then argues, in effect, that since this will
eliminate the one remaining missile advantage held by the United
States, it opens the door for the Soviet Union to make
concessions in SALT negotiations that could prevent either side
from acquiring a first-strike capability.

   Such Alice-in-Wonderland reasoning may still serve the purpose
of lulling millions of Americans back to sleep, but it would not
sit well these days with most NATO Defense Ministers.  For the
first time many officials of NATO are generally alarmed by the
continuing relentless build-up of Soviet power in Europe where
the best Soviet troops are concentrated.

   For example, consider Denmark which sits astride the channels
which lead from the Baltic Sea to the North Sea.  Soviet activity
in the Baltic has grown more and more ominous of late.  Early in
September a Soviet task force suddenly materialized off the
southeast coast of Denmark, then left, then reappeared.  All
kinds of Soviet naval war games are now being carried out
practically on Denmark's doorsteps so close that they could
suddenly turn into attack that would give practically no warning. 
Danish Foreign Minister K. B. Andersen said recently,

  "I'm astonished at what is going on.  This is completely
contrary to the expectations created by the Helsinki agreement."

And yet our kept press would have you believe that the new Soviet
SSNX-18 missile I just told you about is unimportant or even good
news, because of possible agreements the Soviet Union might make
about it.

   At the NATO Defense Ministers' meeting in Brussels earlier
this month, Admiral Sir Peter Hill-Norton of Britain warned that
the trend of the military balance between East and West is
continuing to move in favor of the Soviet bloc.  He declared that
more money and better planning are needed if NATO is to match
what he called the "relentless determination" of the Warsaw Pact
countries to achieve military superiority.  He warned that NATO
can no longer rely indefinitely upon the superiority of Western
technology because massive Soviet spending on research and
development have resulted in vast improvements in Soviet weapons.

   As Dutch Defense Minister Vredeling said on December 8, the
day after Sir Peter's speech, quote:

  "The situation as far as the balance of forces world-wide is
more serious than many people think."

And there are many other examples of genuine alarm at the
vulnerability of Western Europe to a devastating surprise attack.

   What did Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld, who was and is
a CIA operative, have to say to the NATO ministers?  He gave a
brief nod to the wide-spread concern over the Soviet build-up,
but what you heard reported in the news emphasized the following,
and I quote:

  "I think the alliance is healthy.  I leave my post as Secretary
of Defense next month with a good deal of optimism about the
Atlantic alliance--the fact that it survived some 26 years; the
fact that it's working, I think reasonably smoothly at the
present time; frankly reassured by the fact that there is an
Atlantic alliance, that it's on watch and doing its job."

And so, my friends, we can all go back to sleep, comfortably

Topic #3--One week from today will be Christmas 1976.  On that
day most Americans will be celebrating the birth of our Lord
Jesus Christ by giving gifts to one another.  The joy of giving
is something most everyone understands to a greater or lesser
extent.  When presents are opened on Christmas Day, for example,
parents of small children usually get their greatest fun out of
watching their children open presents, not from opening their own

   In the same vein, people usually feel good about it when they
give a portion of what they have to help others or to support a
worthy cause.  This is the foundation of what is known as
charity--but unfortunately there are always a very few among us
who are motivated not by a spirit of sharing but by runaway
greed.  Their only pleasure in life comes from amassing more and
more of this world's wealth for their own coffers and extending
their power to control the wealth of others as well.  Ultimately
those who are motivated this way reach the point where they have
so much wealth and so much power that it is no longer enough just
to add to it just still further.  The only thing left in life for
those who have acquired wealth and power through greed is to use
that power and that wealth to play with the lives and destinies
of people.  In short, they try to play 'God'.

   You may ask: Why would the Soviet Union go to war?  Would the
super-wealthy of America want to create a dictatorship here with
themselves in control?  You might as well ask: Why does the
mountain climber want to climb the highest mountain?  Common
answer is: Because it's there--just like the United States, the
richest country in the world, is there.  What a prize.

   Early in this century a systematic long-range program was
begun by a small group of immensely powerful people.  The goal of
this program was to acquire ever greater control over American
society.  This was to lead ultimately to America's merging into a
One-World Government with themselves and their heirs in control.

   The method by which this would be accomplished was the
dismantling of the basic structure of American society and its
reconstruction in the image desired by those who had decided to
play 'God'.  And to carry out this long-range program, powerful
tax-free Foundations were established and given the halo of
philanthropy.  They were explained to the public as simply a
special means the wealthy had devised for giving to the public at
large.  Each Foundation was thus given the image of an
institutional Santa Claus.

   Instead of questioning what they did, the American people were
led to accept their activities in the confident belief that they
were just showering wonderful gifts on our society day in and day
out.  This is the picture that is still accepted as the truth by
most Americans.  They believe it just as fervently as millions of
small children believe in Santa Claus.  The raw truth about this
network of Foundations may therefore sound unbelievable--just as
it sounds unbelievable to a small child if he is told there is no
Santa Claus.

   For months now I've been referring to the role that has been
played by these Foundations in undermining American society and
placing us in the extreme peril we now face.  Now I have been
given permission to reveal one of my primary sources of
information about these Foundations, and to repeat for you his
own words about them.  He is my friend Mr. Norman Dodd.  Mr. Dodd
was Director of Research of the special committee of the United
States House of Representatives to investigate tax-exempt
Foundations in 1953 and 1954.  The late Congressman Carroll Reece
of Tennessee was chairman of this very important committee.

   Recently Mr. Dodd gave a rare speech here in Washington, D.C.,
and he has given permission to repeat it here for you.  I will
now be quoting him.


   "This is not going to be a speech.  This is a sharing of ideas
born of experience, and I'd like to begin by qualifying myself in
your minds.

   I am a product of a strange type of education and schooling. 
The education of which I am a product featured the importance of
the question 'WHY?' and then went on to try to instill in us the
importance of the question plus our responsibility as individuals
to find the answers.  I happen to have taken this education and
schooling seriously and I have lived accordingly.

   In this schooling to which I was subjected, great stress was
laid upon the history of this country to illustrate the feature I
have just mentioned.  As a result I participated in and was
witness to something in the nature of a discovery--which was that
in the 200 years of our history many more truths made themselves
self-evident than motivated our Founding Fathers.  One of these
truths bears heavily upon the experiences that I shall recite to

   The truth, were it to be put in words, would read something
like this.  I'll repeat it slowly because it is quite significant
and deserving of considerable thought:

   The condition or state of the members of any nation at any
given time reflects the use to which the wealth they have
produced is being put by others than the ones who played a part
in its production.

That brings me to two experiences which I will describe to you.

   The first was my response to an invitation from the president
of the FORD FOUNDATION in his offices in New York.  His name:
Rowan Gaither.  Upon arriving there I was greeted with the

  'Mr. Dodd, we invited you to come because we thought that
perhaps, off the record, you would be kind enough to tell us why
the Congress is interested in the operations of Foundations such
as ourselves.'

Before I could think how best to reply, he volunteered this:

  'Mr. Dodd, we operate here under directives which emanate from
the White House.  Would you like to know what the substance of
these directives is?'

My answer was:  'Yes, Mr. Gaither, I would like very much to
know.'  Whereupon he said:

  'The substance of the directives under which we operate is that
we shall use our grant-making power so to alter life in the
United States that we can be comfortably merged with the Soviet

Needless to say, I nearly fell off the chair.  As soon as I could
recover myself to reply, I said:

  'Mr. Gaither, legally you are entitled to use your grant-making
power for this purpose, but I don't think you are entitled to
withhold this information from the American people to whom you
are beholden for your tax exemption.  So why do you not tell the
American people what you have just told me?'

His answer was:

  'Mr. Dodd, we would not think of doing that.'

That was one experience that was very informative.  It was
incredible; nevertheless, it is the truth.

   The next experience involved the acceptance of an invitation
invitation came in response to a letter which I had written the
Endowment asking a few pertinent questions.  By 'pertinent' I
mean that they related to the effort of the Congress to determine
if Foundations were engaged in what the Congress said could be
'un-American activities', without defining 'un-American.'  I
arrived at the office of Dr. Joseph Johnson, who was then
president of the Endowment.  He was the successor to Alger Hiss. 
Present were two vice-presidents, relatively new men, and counsel
(a partner in the law firm of Sullivan and Cromwell).  After
amenities, Dr. Johnson opened the conversation this way:

  'Mr. Dodd, we have received your letter.  We can answer the
questions but it will be a great deal of trouble.  The reason for
its being a great deal of trouble is that with the ratification
by the Senate of the United Nations treaty, our task was done;
and so we bundled up everything in the way of records and sent
them to the warehouse, and adopted a policy of constructing a
building across the street from the United Nations which will
serve as a facility for the benefit of those many organizations
which from this point on will be bound to follow the activities
of the United Nations.  So we have a counter suggestion which is
as follows:

   If you can spare a member of your staff and send him to New
York for two weeks, we'll provide a room in our library and also
make available to him the Minute Books of this corporation from
its inception.'

My first reaction was that he had lost his mind.  I had some
suspicion of what these Minute Books might well contain; but here
was counsel and there seemed to be no disagreement on the part of
the vice-presidents--and all of them were relatively young, so my
guess was that none of them had ever read the Minutes themselves. 
As a result, I accepted the invitation and did send a member of
my staff to New York.  That member brought back to me on
dictaphone belts the following:

   We are now back to roughly 1908 when the Trustees raised the
question, asking themselves:

(1)  Is there any way known to man more effective than war,
assuming they wish to alter the life of an entire people?

They discussed this question academically and in a scholarly
fashion for almost a year, and came up with the conclusion that
WAR is the most effective means known to man, assuming that

   Then they raised question No. 2:

(2)  How to involve the United States in a war?

This was in 1909.  I doubt if there was any subject more removed
from the minds of the people in this country at that time than
the possibility of involvement in war.  There were intermittent
shows, you will remember, in the Balkans; and my guess is that
not many people in the country even knew where the Balkans were. 
They answered the question this way:

  'We must control the diplomatic machinery of the United

   That brings up question no. 3, which is:

(3)  How do we secure control of the diplomatic machinery of the
United States?

   and the answer comes up:

  'We must control the State Department.'

   That fits in with prior findings which we had uncovered;
namely, that the hand of the Carnegie Endowment for International
Peace inside the State Department was a fact.

   Finally, we are in a war.  These Trustees have the brashness
to congratulate themselves on the wisdom and validity of their
original decision because already the impact of our participation
in World War I has indicated its capacity to alter our national
life.  They even go so far as to word and dispatch a telegram to
President Wilson, pressuring him to see to it that the war does
not end too quickly!

   Finally, the war is over.  The Trustees then take up the
problem which they face: namely, of preventing, as they put it, a
reversion of life in the United States to what it was prior to
1914.  They came up with the conclusion that:

   To gain that end, we must control education in the United

They realize this is a prodigious piece of work so they seek and
obtain the assistance of the ROCKEFELLER FOUNDATION.  They then
divide the task into parts, giving to the Rockefeller Foundation
the responsibility of altering education as it pertains to
domestic subjects.  They retain for themselves the task of
altering our education as it pertains to subjects bearing on our
international relationships.  Then they decide together that the
key to this is an alteration in the teaching of American history,
so they approach three of the then existing prominent historians
with the proposition that they alter the manner in which, up to
then, they had presented the subject.  They are all turned down

   They then decide that it is necessary for them to build their
own stable of historians.  They approach the GUGGENHEIM
FOUNDATION, which specializes in the awarding of fellowships, and
suggest: When we discover a likely young person who is studying
and looking forward to becoming a teacher of history, we will
take him to London to pursue his studies.  So they take 20 to
London, and these 20 are briefed in what is expected of them. 
These 20 return and eventually become the most active influence
in the American Historical Society.

   This coincides with the appearance which perhaps you will
remember of book after book the contents of which cast aspersion
on the Founders of this country, cast aspersion on the ideas
which prompted the founding of this country, and relegates them
to the realm of myth!

   Finally toward the end of the 1920's the Endowment grants the
American Historical Society $400,000 for the sole purpose of
rendering a report as to what the future of this country promises
to be and should be!  This appears in seven volumes.  The seventh
volume, of course, summarizes the contents of the other six, and
it ends on this note:

  'The future belongs to collectivism administered with
characteristic American humanitarianism and efficiency.'

   Well, in essence this was the whole story written down; and
Mr. Reece who was chairman of the investigation--the last
investigation of Foundations--hoped to be able to accomplish
this.  He was not able to do this owing to the disinterest on the
part of the committee's counsel and the violent activities of one
of its members.  I might mention that that member whose
activities barred the way was none other than Wayne Hays--who has
come to the end of his career, although this marked the start of


   Mr. Dodd concluded his talk with some additional comments
which I want to save for another discussion, since they go beyond
the subject of Foundations alone.  But you may want to replay
what I have just recited from his speech, noting carefully how
different the truth is from appearances.  And remember, the truth
has many enemies!

   And so it is that the 20th Century has been an unparalleled
era of increasingly destructive warfare, violence, and terror on
a world-wide scale.  By pursuing with relentless determination
the goal of merging the United States into ONE WORLD GOVERNMENT,
the Trustees of the key group of major Foundations have brought
us to the threshold of NUCLEAR WAR ONE--to be waged primarily on
American soil.

   As I first revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 for May
1976, some of the present-day Trustees of these Foundations have
been awakening to the threat of a Soviet double cross in the
grand plan for world domination--and last summer this double
cross got underway with the planting of short-range
underwater-launch nuclear missiles within the territorial waters
of the United States, as well as of many other countries.  But
the world-wide economic and political empire that is today
presided over by the Four Rockefeller Brothers is so huge that it
includes many individuals who still do not believe that any
Soviet double cross will take place, much less that it is already


   For example, last month I reported that 18 Soviet submarines
were deployed along our west coast preparing to inject plutonium
particles into the air on November 20, 1976.  And our own
EPA--the Environmental Protection Agency--was cooperating by
telling us that on that date a radioactive cloud from a Chinese
atomic test would begin passing over our west coast, when
actually the radioactive cloud from China had not yet left
China's own borders!  By interesting coincidence, Russell Trane,
the head of the EPA, arrived in a presumably safe location,
Moscow, on November 19--the day before the plutonium was to be
released by the Soviet subs.  With appropriate irony, he arrived
there as head of the United States delegation to the
"Soviet-American Commission for Cooperation in Environmental
Protection."  Can you imagine?

   The plutonium was released by the subs as scheduled on
November 20; but just as happened when this was done the first
time in early October, unusual weather conditions kept the United
States from being badly contaminated.  The plutonium cloud
drifted across the upper part of the United States and had little
effect at ground level.  But, my friends, the Soviets never give

   Five days ago on December 13 I learned that Soviet submarines
were lining up along the northwest coast of the United States for
the third time for this purpose.  This time there are 21
submarines loaded with plutonium poison to inject into our
atmosphere.  According to my latest Intelligence sources, 16 are
deployed along the coast from Seattle, Washington to Eugene,
Oregon, while five (5) more lie between Eugene and Eureka,
California.  All of these are within 20 miles of the shoreline.

   I've already explained in detail the connection between this
radioactive chemical warfare and the Swine Flu hoax being
perpetrated by the United States Government, particularly in
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17.  Therefore it is significant that
the so-called Swine Flu inoculation program was halted with great
publicity two days ago owing to death and paralysis suffered by
many who have taken the vaccine.  This serves to focus the
nation's attention once again on the terrible threat Swine Flu is
said to be just at a time when the Soviet submarines are once
again prepared to inject a poison into our atmosphere that can
produce severe flu-like symptoms.  It may be that, as was done
the past two times, the Soviet submarines will wait for another
announcement from the United States Government that it will serve
as a cover story, such as a Chinese nuclear test, before
releasing the plutonium into our air.  But now they have acquired
some experience and it is possible that they will release the
plutonium at any time.

   Meanwhile the build-up for war continues.  While the mounting
Soviet threat to Europe is fraying the nerves of NATO Defense
Ministers, the most immediate threat to Europe is once again
emerging in the Middle East.  In my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6
over a year ago I revealed the over-all plan that existed at that
time for war to begin in the Middle East.  I ask you now to
listen to that AUDIO LETTER No. 6 again.  All is nearly ready
once again for the long planned war in the Middle East to be
ignited.  The Rockefeller oil interests now have gotten most of
their money out of the Arab region.  Now the title to all the oil
fields have been sold to the Arabs themselves.

   The Middle East war will also leave the United States in an
even more defenseless position that we are now in if the Soviet
surprise attack on our country is allowed to take place.


   Last month I explained in detail why the underwater missiles
that are being planted along our shores by the Soviet Union are
so crucial to them in their plan to defeat the United States in
NUCLEAR WAR ONE, but I also explained that they are no longer
being removed by the United States Navy.

   Since I recorded that tape, 57 more nuclear missiles have been
planted in our own territorial waters.  Added to the 36 I
mentioned last month, this brings the total to 93 Soviet missiles
in the waters of the United States including Alaska and Hawaii. 
In addition, four (4) missiles still threaten the Panama Canal,
and five (5) more missiles now threaten Canada.

   I declared last month that I would no longer reveal the
locations of these missiles unless and until responsible
arrangements are made to inform the public of the deadly threat
we are under.  Our Secret Rulers had been using my information
from October 1st onward only for their own benefit--and that is
not what it is for.

   I intend to continue to hold my silence until action is taken
for everyone's benefit.  Nevertheless I am going to make one
exception at this time--it involves Hawaii.  World War II began
with a devastating surprise attack on Pearl Harbor, and now no
less than nine (9) Soviet underwater missiles now threaten Pearl
Harbor and the Island of Oahu with the same fate a second time.

   I will now give the coordinates for these nine missiles only,
in hopes that this time action will be taken to protect the
United States Pacific Fleet from the attack that could come at
any moment.  These coordinates are:

Missile #1:
   21 degrees/13 minutes/47 seconds North
   157 degrees/46 minutes/28 seconds West

Missile #2:
   21-18-37 North, 157-57-21 West

Missile #3:
   21-17-31 North, 158- 4-17 West

Missile #4:
   21-21-19 North, 158- 9- 7 West

Missile #5:
   21-36-12 North, 158-12-48 West

Missile #6:
   21-36-33 North, 158-11- 6 West

Missile #7:
   21-26-54 North, 157-47-17 West

Missile #8:
   21-19-27 North, 157-38-36 West

Missile #9: About 25 miles east of Oahu and 8 miles north of
Molokai at
   21-21-13 North, 157-15-26 West.

   I continue to hope, my friends, that a war can still be
prevented.  To find out what you can do in the event war does
come, I suggest you read issue 135 of McKeever's Multinational
Investment and Survival Letter, 1012 Russell St., Baltimore, MD 
21230, but my prayer is that you will never need that kind of

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 18

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC. (Current 1982
address: 1629 K St. NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is November 20,
1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 18.

   As I speak with you today, we are drawing ever closer to being
swallowed up by the evils unleashed two generations ago by a
tight network of Foundation Trustees.  Operating under a false
cloak of philanthropy, supposedly for the benefit of others, they
actually launched long-range programs designed to grab everything
for themselves.

   Claiming to improve education in the cause of freedom, they
actually began replacing education with indoctrination in the
cause of collectivism.  And while painting themselves as
champions of peace, they have led the world into war after war on
the road to their version of "peace"--that is, an all-powerful
WORLD GOVERNMENT with themselves in control.

   Blinded by the insatiable greed for power, they could not see
that they were opening Pandora's box, setting forces in motion
that would ultimately prove impossible to control.  Only
recently, with disaster looming up fast, have the present-day
successors to those original Trustees begun awakening to this
fact, too late to regain control.  Now only the truth spread far
and wide can avert total catastrophe.

   Two years ago the United States of America plunged over the
brink of a devastating economic collapse as the result of
deliberate measures to create "stagflation", as I described in my
1973 book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR.  But the process was
arrested part way down because other aspects of the Master Plan
for world domination were slipping behind schedule.

   As I have related in detail in previous tapes, factors such as
the still concealed Fort Knox Gold and Plutonium Scandals,
reverses in the Middle East, Indira Gandhi's upset of the CIA in
India, and other things have caused our Unseen Rulers enormous
difficulties for over 18 months.  But time is running out, and it
is do-or-die for those who seek to enslave us.  So now the United
States has at last been pried loose from its temporary economic
foothold and we are falling slowly but helplessly like a dreamer
in a nightmare toward the dreaded economic depression far below.

   Politically, the phantom election plan I revealed last month
by which Nelson Rockefeller still plans to become America's chief
executive is proceeding so far exactly as planned.  Sixty-eight
per cent of the voting precincts nation-wide had voting machines
on November 2, 1976, and where they jammed all across the country
there was no provision for paper ballots!  Thousands of ballots
were lost in certain areas, the legality of thousands of others
is being challenged, and re-counts are under way in some places. 
The net result, exactly as planned, was an extremely close
popular vote and no landslide for anyone.  President Gerald Ford
thought he had the election "in the bag", having been promised by
Nelson Rockefeller that he would carry New York State, but the
pained expression on Ford's face as his wife delivered his
concession statement on November 3 was nothing compared to the
shock that awaits Jimmy Carter if the plan now under way
succeeds.  Meanwhile, as the stage is being set for economic and
political shocks in America, we drift ever closer to war and a
"Declaration of National Emergency" that could spell the end of
our freedoms, and the dangerous Intelligence gap created by Henry
Kissinger continues.

   When I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 17 on October 26,
last month, I mentioned that the Soviet Union already knew where
our lost Phoenix Missile was in the North Sea but had not
retrieved it.  I had just learned of the missile's location and
revealed it in that tape.  On October 27, the following day, as
soon as the tape was released, I also relayed it to Military
Intelligence.  That same day Navy spokesmen told the press that
they still had not located the Phoenix; but using the information
I relayed to them, the Navy found and retrieved the Phoenix
Missile on October 31.  The United States Government would have
you believe it is mere coincidence that they suddenly found the
Phoenix after I revealed its location, even though the Navy had
spent six weeks in a fruitless search prior to that!

   There are also those who would have you believe that General
George S. Brown, the top military officer in the United States,
met with me for more than an hour on September 16, 1976 in his
Pentagon office out of idle curiosity.  And especially there are
many who want you to believe there will be no reason for the
Soviet Union to do as I have charged, planting
underwater-launched nuclear missiles within our own territorial
waters; but nothing, my friends, could be further from the truth. 
What the Soviet Union has done and is doing is completely logical
and to be expected if we look at it from their point of view.  As
Mrs. Margaret Thatcher, leader of the Conservative Party in
England, recently said, and I quote:

  "The danger is our Western tendency to assume that other people
will apply our own standards and values.  When considering
international matters, the important thing is not to look at
other nations as if we were standing in their shoes but as if
they were standing in their shoes."

If you depend, as most Americans do, on the controlled major
media for your understanding of the world, you will never learn
to think this way nor can you hope to grasp the real issues that
govern military survival; yet such understanding is essential if
we are to see how to correct our dangerous situation.

   One organization which in my opinion does do an excellent job
of clarifying matters of defense and national security is the
American Security Council located at Boston, Virginia.  Their zip
is 22713.  I recommend the Council as an excellent source of
information for every concerned American.

   To help in understanding the threat we now face and how we got
into such a position, I will discuss the following three topics




Topic #1--Secretary of State Henry Kissinger has said over and
over again for nearly a decade, quote:

  "Detente, or nuclear holocaust; there is no third way."

With this in mind, public discussion of American-Soviet relations
has focused for years on the alleged happy fruits of detente--the
growing thaw between East and West, etc.--but lately there has
been an ominous change.  President Ford dropped the word
"detente" from his active vocabulary, and mounting of concern
over the ragged condition of NATO forces has been expressed
increasingly by European and American leaders.

   Just last week two so-called prestigious groups burst upon the
public scene to churn up controversy over the issues of mounting
Soviet military power.  First, on November 11 came the "Committee
for the Present Danger" urging presumed President-elect Carter to
increase military spending, instead of decreasing it as promised
during the election campaign.  Then three days later a study
group financed by the Rockefeller Foundation proposed the
opposite--that we undertake joint military reductions with the
Soviet Union, perhaps initiating the process with selected
unilateral reductions of our own.  And the warnings continue!

   Just three days ago a representative of Boeing Aerospace
Company testified before Congress that in case of nuclear war,
98% of the Soviet population would survive because of the
elaborate Civil Defense precautions being taken there.  By
contrast, of course, the United States has no Civil Defense
program worthy of the name.  Obviously detente is fading from the
official scene rapidly.  According to the Kissinger formula, that
means nuclear holocaust is on its way.  But where did he get that

   The word "detente" is just another word for what was termed
"peaceful coexistence" in the early 60's, and the Kissinger
formula first emerged in October 1959 in the form, quote:

  "Peaceful coexistence or nuclear holocaust--there is no third

But the speaker then was not Henry Kissinger; it was Nikita

   The peaceful coexistence idea which later became so-called
"detente" began 20 years ago when Khrushchev announced a major
new Soviet policy line--namely, that war with the West was not
inevitable after all, contrary to the teachings of Lenin. 
Instead, the nuclear age had made peaceful coexistence necessary. 
To most Westerners, this sounded like "live and yet live"; but to
the Soviet Union it meant only the avoidance of a war which could
destroy the Soviet Union.  It was all right to continue to break
off chunks of the free world by intrigue, subversion, and
so-called "wars of national liberation", such as those which have
occurred in Vietnam, Angola, and elsewhere.  The Soviet Union
concentrated on selling the idea of peaceful coexistence for five
years from 1956 to 1961, ably assisted by their allies here in
the United States.

   Then in 1961 a major new phase began as John F. Kennedy became
president of the United States.  For decades the State
Socialists, who run the Soviet Union, had been in alliance with
and supported by the Corporate Socialists whose control over the
United States was drawing ever more complete.  Now at long last
the time was ripe to launch their well-orchestrated joint program
that was to lead to complete dictatorial control of the United
States by the Corporate Socialists, Soviet conquest of vast areas
of the world, piecemeal, with Corporate Socialist assistance, and
finally joint domination of the entire world by the
Rockefeller-Soviet alliance.

   The basic idea of the program was for the strength and resolve
of the United States to be undermined and sapped while the Soviet
Union would be enabled to forge ahead into unprecedented world
power.  Communism would be made to appear to be the wave of the
future, while American morale and faith in our free system of
government would be steadily eroded.  Finally according to plan,
the United States would be in the process of increasing
encirclement and vulnerability, more and more countries becoming
Soviet satellites with the unseen help of American Corporate
Socialists who would share in the spoils.  Economic disaster,
military vulnerability, and the collapse of our own
self-confidence would, according to plan, open the door for
dictatorship here in America.

   The single, most critical step in this long-range plan began
to be taken in 1961--the progressive shut-off of critical
research and development programs for future military technology.

   If research uncovers a basic new concept at a given point in
time, it will ordinarily be 5 to 15 years before it can be
translated into a new operational technology.  In between there
must be development, experimentation, evaluation, and full-scale
production programs.  By the same token, if research and
development are cut off, at some point 5 to 15 years later you
will not have the new technology available that would otherwise
have come into being.

   Early justifications for the dwindling R&D program were based
on fond new hopes for disarmament in connection with the new
Soviet stance in favor of peaceful coexistence.  Later, as the
conflict in Vietnam grew into a major war, it became easier to
leave important R&D items out of the already swollen Defense

   Another key ingredient in the overall plan was to be the use
of Cuban troops as proxies in Soviet so-called "wars of national
liberation" in Latin America and elsewhere.  The Bay of Pigs
invasion in 1961, a few short months after Kennedy took office,
could have produced a serious setback for the Rockefeller-Soviet
plans for overthrow of numerous governments, so Kennedy's
advisers carefully steered him away from making the invasion a

   Meanwhile the Soviet Union constructed long-range plans to
take advantage of the American disadvantage in military
technology that was being arranged to occur in the mid-1970's. 
While our R&D began to decline, theirs accelerated.  By knowing
exactly what to expect, the Soviet Union was able to target its
military development toward achievement of a dominant position 15
years later; and that time has now arrived.

   In 1962, however, a gamble by Nikita Khrushchev almost caused
the whole plan to come apart.  For more than a year a prominent
United States Senator, Kenneth Keating, had been sounding
warnings that offensive nuclear missiles were being placed in
Cuba by the Soviet Union; but his charges were denied by the
Administration, just as my charges about Soviet underwater
missiles are being plausibly denied now.  But President Kennedy
finally decided to look into it himself personally, instead of
accepting blind assurances that there was nothing to it from his
advisers.  He found out that the charges were true and the Cuban
Missile Crisis was upon us.

   The Cuban Missile Crisis led to the elimination from the scene
of both Kennedy and Khrushchev.  First, as I revealed in monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 3 for August 1975, President Kennedy was
murdered because he was becoming increasingly dangerous to the
Rockefeller-Soviet alliance.  He had come into office lacking any
real grasp of the realities of international politics--but he was
learning, and learning fast.  It was clearly only a matter of
time before he would get around to reversing the cutoff of our
critical R&D programs.  Already he was initiating steps intended
to turn off our involvement in Vietnam.  Khrushchev, for his
part, took longer to oust since his power had to be chipped away
carefully by his enemies in the Kremlin; but finally he was
removed for jeopardizing the long-range plan of conquest with a
dangerous gamble that failed.

   Looking ahead toward the increasing opportunities that would
present themselves for the Soviet Union to benefit at America's
expense, the "Institute of the United States of America" was
founded early in the 1960's in Moscow.  This Institute, whose
purpose is to study the vulnerabilities of the United States, was
founded with the help of financing from the Rockefeller

   Once the Oval Office was inhabited by Lyndon Johnson, the
grand plan proceeded onward without further difficulty! 
Secretary of Defense Robert McNamara played an especially
important role in several ways.  The period during which he
served, from 1961 to 1968, was one in which research and
development carried out prior to the R&D cutoff would potentially
be continuing to bear fruit; but McNamara, doing the bidding of
those who had placed him in that position, succeeded in causing
the cancellation of important advanced weapons programs,
decommissioning of many Defense installations, physical scrapping
of huge quantities of Defense materiel, and costly concentration
of effort on ill-fated programs, such as the F-111 multipurpose
Air Force Navy fighter.  He also championed the
impressive-sounding theory of warfare called "Measured Response"
which guaranteed the escalation of Vietnam into a major war by
preventing clear-cut, decisive wins in battle.  As his reward for
such 'valuable' service, McNamara was made president of the World
Bank.  Can you imagine?

   With the inauguration of President Richard M. Nixon of January
20, 1969, the Kissinger era of foreign policy emerged in full
bloom.  Kissinger had been an influential voice in Government
since the early 60's, thanks to his association with Nelson
Rockefeller that began in 1955.  Now he became one of the most
important Rockefeller-Soviet agents in the United States
Government!  Following the outlines of the long-range plan, he
became known as the architect of so-called detente, repeating
Khrushchev's old formula--"peaceful coexistence or nuclear
holocaust"--almost verbatim.

   In 1972 detente entered a new phase.  The SALT I Agreement was
signed in Moscow by President Nixon in May of that year. 
Meanwhile, the same year, the Soviet Union launched the massive
drive in Civil Defense that has lately started attracting
attention.  The Soviet Union could see that the long awaited
opportunity to pull ahead of the United States was fast
approaching.  That same year, 1972, saw the expansion of
so-called detente to Red China.  Kissinger also played a central
role in this development; but far from promoting real peace,
Kissinger was undoing a golden opportunity for freedom for a
quarter of the world's people--and possibly peace for the entire

   What I am about to tell you is top secret, and I am revealing
it for the very first time.

   Some years ago an international entrepreneur (whom I will call
"Smith") was in the act of selling a large European bank when he
was approached by a Chinese on a business venture involving a
retired Chinese general (whom I will call "Lee").  Lee had known
both Chiang Kai-shek and Mao Tse-tung very well during earlier
revolutionary days, and was still closely associated with six
regional military chieftains in Red China who were all genuinely
anti-Soviet in every way.  Moreover, after the turmoil that took
place in Red China in 1957 and later, these Chinese military
chieftains became completely disenchanted and disgusted with
Mao's program of using young hoodlums to terrorize and murder all
suspected opposition to his dictatorial and oppressive programs. 
Mao's euphemistic term, cultural revolution, for these cutthroat
methods of bending the people to his will, did not impress them. 
They contacted Lee and queried him as to the possibility of
getting American support in case they should decide to overthrow
Mao and establish a republic using the customary parliamentary
form of government.  Those who preferred the security of
Socialism would be allowed to live in communes, but the
government would foster a free-market system for the country as a

   General Lee arranged through the United States Department of
State to send envoys through the Bamboo Curtain to make the
necessary arrangements; but someone in the State Department
leaked the information to Red Chinese officials, and all of the
envoys were quickly apprehended and put to death.  Nevertheless
General Lee persisted.  He asked Mr. Smith if he could arrange
for broadcasting equipment to inform all of Red China what was
taking place, why the military deemed it necessary to overturn
Mao, and what form of government would be established.  Smith
agreed to contact certain top officials in the United States
Government close to the President, however General Lee emphasized
that he must circumvent Henry Kissinger and get the ear of Mr.
Nixon only, since Lee did not trust Kissinger nor anyone else in
the State Department.  The contacts were made, but unfortunately
a member of another agency heard of the plan and briefed
President Nixon about it in front of Kissinger.  Almost
immediately arrangements were made for Kissinger to visit China
to meet secretly with Mao.

   This meeting took place, and at the meeting Kissinger informed
Mao that he would be overthrown by a military coup unless Mao's
regime chose to cooperate with those who held the real power in
the United States.  To sweeten the deal for Mao, certain secret
agreements were made concerning the future course of American
relationships with the Republic of China on Taiwan.  The
outgrowth of the meeting was ping-pong diplomacy--the Nixon
summit trip to Peking in February 1972, and so-called detente
between Red China and the United States.  In return, Mao
Tse-tung's ironhanded dictatorship over Red China was rendered
secure once again.  Red China would thus continue to be a
controllable threat to the Soviet Union.  With any real threat to
the Soviet Union from the direction of Red China taken care of,
the Rockefeller-Soviet plan continued.

   Last year the Helsinki Accord gave the Soviet Union
essentially what she had wanted for 20 years--a ratification of
her conquests in Eastern Europe.  By thus signaling to the
imprisoned countries behind the Iron Curtain that we consider
them to be within the Soviet sphere, we reduce any tendency they
might have to revolt in case of war.  The Soviet western flank is
thus made far more secure than before.

   In the past several years, countries have been falling into
the Soviet orbit at a quickening pace with their domination
shared secretly by their Corporate Socialist allies here in
America.  At the same time, the declining military might of the
United States and the fast increasing threat from the Soviet
Union has finally become too obvious to hide any longer.  This
stage, too, was foreseen and planned.

   All of the economic, political, and military factors are
intended to lead to a "Declaration of National Emergency" here in
America, dictatorship, and war!

   But, as it turned out, there is a terrible joker in the deck
that has been dealt by the Rockefeller empire in its hidden
collaboration with the Soviet Union.  The war to come, NUCLEAR
WAR ONE waged primarily on American soil, was supposed to be
neatly limited and controlled with a "Nuclear Safe Zone" set
aside for the Soviet allies here in America, as I revealed in
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 last May; but the Soviet Union has
for months been maneuvering to carry out a double cross at this
critical stage in America's increasing vulnerability.  They want
to seize all the marbles for themselves.

Topic #2--For many years American strategic defense strategy has
been based on a concept called "Mutual Assured Destruction", or
MAD.  The idea here is that should either the Soviet Union or the
United States launch a nuclear attack on the other, the victim of
the attack would be able to destroy the attacker in return.  In
this concept, furthermore, the targets are cities, not military
targets such as enemy missile installations.  An ICBM attack
under these conditions would have only one basic purpose--to kill
tens of millions of innocent civilians.  This is the so-called
"balance of terror" we often hear about.

   In World War II, Hitler used V-1 buzz bombs and V-2 missiles
in exactly this way against the civilian population of England
instead of against military targets, thinking to terrorize
England into submission.  But as we all know, it didn't work. 
The British learned to dig into bomb shelters, absorb the
civilian deaths and damage, and meanwhile redoubled their efforts
at military installations to strike back at Hitler in more
important ways.

   The MAD mutual terror defense strategy is nothing more than a
nuclear age version of the very technique that was proven to be
useless over 30 years ago.  We've all heard countless times,
quote: "The last thing the Soviet Union would ever want is a
nuclear exchange with the United States."  This comforting
statement tends to make one accept the foolish MAD defense
doctrine, if it is to be believed; but it is wrong.  The
announcement by Nikita Khrushchev in 1956 that all-out war was
not inevitable with the West after all, appeared to be a
renunciation of a basic Leninist principle, but it was not.  It
was simply the beginning of an elaborate 20-year ploy to make us
lower our guard so that when the inevitable all-out conflict did
come, the Soviet Union would be in a position to win.

   History is repeating itself.  In the late 1930's many people
made the mistake of believing that Hitler did not actually want
war but was willing to risk it in order to obtain concessions, so
the concessions were made with the idea that this would prevent
war.  Only too late was it realized that Hitler was determined to
have a war one way or another.

   In the past, the Soviet Union has been notably cautious when
skirting the fringes of a possible nuclear war, but that was
while she was still at a disadvantage militarily.  Now for the
first time the Soviets are emerging into a totally new situation
in which their military power is second to none.  With the rapid
collapse of free governments now occurring around the globe, the
over-all correlation of forces, as they call it, is shifting
rapidly in favor of the Soviet Union.  The Soviet Union is now
No. 1 in military power, while the United States is No. 2--a
situation that has never existed before.

   The time is now ripe for the Soviets to press their advantage
in an effort to seize control of the world.  The standing threat
from Red China is often mentioned hopefully as a major factor
tending to offset any Soviet ideas of waging major war against
us; but this, too, is in error.  The Soviet fear of Red China,
far from acting as a brake, is spurring them on.  Right now Red
China is leaning on the United States; but should the United
States be knocked out of action by a Soviet hammer blow before
China could take advantage of the situation, China would then be
isolated.  Red China would then have no choice but to patch
things up with the Soviet Union and cooperate, at least on
pragmatic matters.  Of course with the United States defeated,
and the two Communist superpowers joining forces once again, the
fate of the rest of the world would no longer be in question. 
Thus, as I stated in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15, if we fall, the
world falls; and that is the basis of Soviet strategy.

   Thus the Soviet Union does want nuclear war with the United
States provided the Soviet Union is prepared to survive with
losses limited to acceptable levels, and provided the United
States can be destroyed as a military rival in the process.  The
Soviet rulers emphatically do not think of nuclear war as
something that could only happen as the unwanted result of a
confrontation, even though this is how we tend to think of it. 
To them war, including nuclear war, is a tool of conquest to be
used whenever it is advantageous to do so.

   People have asked the question: Why would the Soviet Union
plant underwater missiles in our waters when they already have
ICBMs, missile-launching submarines, and so forth?  Even some
officials who know about the Soviet missiles raise this question
in various forms as a smoke screen to create doubt.  For once you
understand the basic Soviet viewpoint I have described, the
reasons for the planting of underwater missiles become far easier
to grasp.

   To begin with, the underwater missiles constitute a
first-strike capability for the Soviet Union--that is, they are
concentrated on military targets.  Specifically, they are
intended to wipe out our naval bases, major ports, and a good
fraction of our naval fleet in one sudden, surprise blow without
advance warning.  This type of first strike is quite different
from those usually discussed, but would be extremely effective. 
Consider the choice faced by an American president immediately
after such a sudden strike by the Soviet Union by means of its
underwater missiles followed by a Soviet ultimatum to surrender! 
True, the American naval forces at sea around the world at the
time of the attack would be unaffected and our missile subs could
give the Soviet Union an unpleasant pasting.  Even our ICBMs
might still be available to fire, but what then?

   First, the damage we could now inflict on the Soviet Union
would be minimized by the mammoth Civil Defense preparations that
have been under way in the Soviet Union for five years and more. 
If the president did choose to counterattack, several million
Soviet citizens would possibly die and a small portion of the
military and industrial facilities of the Soviet Union not
underground would be destroyed.  But the vast majority of the
Soviet population would survive our counterattack as would a
large part of their military-industrial complex.  Now it would be
their turn again.

   The price we would pay for disobeying the Soviet ultimatum
would be awesome.  A salvo of ICBMs, not the whole Soviet ICBM
force, perhaps but a few hundred nonetheless, would rain down on
the United States, hitting both military targets and big cities. 
Thanks to the well named MAD defense strategy we have followed,
we have no Civil Defense and the carnage would be beyond
imagination, especially since Soviet nuclear warheads are many
times more powerful than ours.

   As for our naval forces, attacks by Soviet antiship cruise
missiles would rapidly take their toll; and the inability of
returning to port for fuel and more weapons would cause our navy
to wither away as a fighting force.  It would only be a matter of
time until our vital sea lanes of commerce were totally
destroyed.  The process might continue perhaps for some time, but
the outcome would not be in doubt.  The Soviet Union would be
able to outlast us and outblast us once the initial crucial
strike against our navy was made with the underwater missiles.

   The secret of success of the Soviet plan is their use of a
weapon system that would enable the first strike against our navy
to be a complete surprise with extremely reliable results.  The
greatest possible surprise, of course, would have been achieved
if our navy had never even known the missiles were there off our
shores until the moment they were fired.  That was the surprise
element that my monthly AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15 were
intended to remove last summer.

   Another element of surprise has to do with the warning time if
a missile is actually launched.  With ICBMs, satellite
surveillance can provide a warning time of 20 minutes or
so--plenty of time to launch our own missiles in retaliation if
the decision is made to do so.  Submarine-launched ballistic
missiles may cut the warning time to a few minutes.  But in the
case of the short-range underwater-launch missiles, there is
virtually no warning at all since they must travel only a short
distance and the time of flight is brief.  By the time they are
detected and our defenses alerted, they will be exploding over
their targets.

   There is only one other kind of warning, which is probably the
most important of all--advance warning of impending attack
through Intelligence channels and through reading the meaning of
political tensions.  Up to now, for example, NATO defense
planning has assumed that any attack on Western Europe by the
Soviet Union would be preceded by a warning of at least three
weeks.  And 35 years ago there were several advance warnings
before the attack on Pearl Harbor beginning a week or so ahead of
time, but at that time these warnings were deliberately blocked
at high levels of the United States Government because certain
individuals wanted to insure that the attack did occur!  And now
the chance of obtaining advance warning of impending attack is
once again reduced, thanks to the Intelligence gap created by
Secretary of State Henry Kissinger!

   When the Soviet Union decides the time is ripe to attack, they
do not intend to telegraph their intentions in advance.  In this
regard, the underwater missiles lurking along our shores can be
invaluable to them.  Their ICBMs have too long a warning time and
insufficient accuracy and reliability for the Soviet rulers to
employ them with full confidence in a world-wide naval Pearl
Harbor attack, such as I described in monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
15.  And if they chose to use their missile-launching submarines
for that purpose closing in to short range to produce short
flight times for their missiles, they would risk alerting our
navy that something was up because of the peculiar deployment of
their submarines.

   On top of that, a world-wide surprise attack of the kind
contemplated by the Soviets depends for its success on a
simultaneous strike everywhere.  Not an easy thing to achieve
with missiles launched by numerous submarines all over the world;
but the underwater missiles are made to order for a surprise
attack.  They lurk unseen for days, weeks, or months until they
are needed; then when they are to be fired, the preparations for
the attack can be made without any outward sign at all, deep
inside a Command Post in the Soviet Union.  To launch the attack
itself, a signal need only be flashed world-wide from the Command
Post, while the observable activities of the Soviet Union,
military and otherwise, proceed in normal patterns giving no hint
of the impending attack!

   When the surprise attack plan of the Soviet Union is known,
the question is no longer: Why would they plant those underwater
missiles?  The question becomes: Why wouldn't they do it?

   The Soviet Union is prepared to wage war with several times
our own nuclear firepower.  At the same time, they are prepared
to survive such a war as a viable society with population losses
of perhaps no more than 2%.  That's around five-million lives,
and it is indeed very hard for you and me to imagine deliberately
accepting such losses for a political purpose.  But remember, the
Soviet bosses think their way, not our way; and if they were to
suffer losses that large, our own losses could be 50- to

   Provided they have the ability to disable the United States
Navy at the outset with the surprise attack they have planned,
the Soviets believe they have little to lose and everything to
gain now by their standards in a nuclear war; and that is why the
Soviet Union wants nuclear war now.

Topic #3--Since early July 1976 short-wave radio communications
world-wide have been disrupted by what one ham radio operator
describes as, quote: "A super-enormous strong signal that sounds
like a buzz saw."  Not only hams have been affected but maritime,
aeronautical, and telecommunications channels have been rendered
practically useless in some cases.  The signal is a rasping sound
that pulses 10 times per second, originating from Soviet

   The monitoring branch of the Federal Communications Commission
has received a flood of complaints and has written four
complaints to Moscow about it, without any reply whatsoever. 
According to Robert Kutz, chief of the FCC's International
Operations Division, this silence from the Soviet Union is very
unusual, quote: "Usually they have been very cooperative, unless
there's something particularly unique about this situation."

   Indeed there is something unique about these Soviet radio
signals, my friends.  They are transmissions between Moscow and
Soviet submarines world-wide by means of the Advanced
Communications System I mentioned in a recent monthly AUDIO
LETTER.  It is no accident that these signals first began early
in July 1976.  That was the month when I first revealed the
existence of underwater missiles in American and Canadian
territorial waters planted by the Soviets.  It is also no
accident that transmissions like this were first heard in 1962
during the Cuban Missile Crisis.

   The Government professes not to have any idea what these
signals are all about, but they know better.  These signals are
being used to maintain tight coordination of Soviet naval
activities, especially submarine movements, in preparation for
war.  But one lie leads to another; and just as you are not being
told about the Soviet underwater missiles that threaten your life
and your freedom, you are not being told the true meaning of the
Soviet buzz saw signals.

   There are at least 13 transmitters broadcasting these powerful
signals located mostly in Soviet or Soviet-occupied territory. 
Transmitters are operating at Archangel, Leningrad, Moscow, Kiev,
Odessa, Gdansk, the Bosporus Straits, Rostov, Minsk, Warsaw,
Prague, East Berlin, and of all places Loch Ness in Scotland. 
The Loch Ness transmitter is aboard a small submarine that
entered the northeast end of Loch Ness by means of the canal that
connects Loch Ness to Moray Firth.  If there wasn't one before,
there certainly is a Loch Ness monster now, compliments of the
Soviet Union.

   These Soviet transmissions make use of a technique known as
"pulse modulation."  Each of the 10 pulses per second sounds like
nothing more than a meaningless rasp to the ear, but in fact each
pulse contains a superimposed signal in code.  The possible codes
are endless, and a computer is required both to create the coded
pulses for transmissions and to decode them where they are
received.  Therefore unless and until Intelligence information
becomes available on the details of the exact code, it is
practically impossible to intercept and understand the Soviet
messages to their subs.

   But matters even more blatant than the Soviet mysterious
signals are being hidden from you.  For example: Do you know
about the joint Soviet and Cuban naval and aviation maneuvers
that took place from September 15 to September 23, 1976, in the
Caribbean and the Gulf of Mexico?  These war games utilized not
only the new Soviet submarine base at Cienfuegos Harbor not far
from the United States naval station at Guantanamo Bay but also
Marianao and Havana, right across from Florida!  These war
exercises carried a clear threat for the Panama Canal, Puerto
Rico, and our base at Guantanamo Bay; and, in addition, ranged
all along our Gulf coast as far west as Galveston, Texas.  Yet
our so-called Defense Department said not one word about it, and
our sleeping press, following the non-existent lead of our
controlled major media, said nothing about it either.

   Since "Red Friday", October 1, 1976, our Military from General
George S. Brown on down have been muzzled, ordered to flatly deny
charges about Soviet missiles in our waters, if pressed to
comment on them.  Meanwhile, top secret Civil Defense exercises
are now under way here in Washington, D.C. and other sensitive
areas for top Government officials only, while the rest of our
people are left in the dark not only without protection but
without even any official warning that war could be imminent!

   But the last straw came in just the past several days, my
friends.  Last month I reported that immediately after the "Red
Friday" capitulation by President Ford to the Soviet demands
advanced by Andrei Gromyko, Soviet submarines along our east and
west coasts performed a chemical warfare experiment.  Clouds of
radioactive plutonium were released into our atmosphere to drift
inward and contaminate the United States while the United States
Government cooperated by claiming that we were being plastered
with radioactive fallout from a Chinese nuclear test 10 days
earlier.  As I reported last month, we were spared major effects
from that experimental plutonium release due to weather
conditions that did not behave as predicted by the Soviets.  But
now they are poised to do it again!

   On Wednesday November 17 a large Chinese atmospheric hydrogen
bomb test was announced, and immediately we were inundated with
announcements that the radioactive cloud would reach our west
coast only three short days later--today, November 20, 1976. 
Last time they claimed that the Chinese cloud took 10 days to
cover the same distance, but that was because the Soviet subs
were not ready at that time to use the Chinese blast as a cover
for their chemical attack against us.  This time they can hardly

   As of noon yesterday, November 19, 18 Soviet submarines were
deployed at even intervals along our west coast within about 35
miles of our shore line.  They are not missile launchers but are
equipped specifically for the injection of plutonium into our air
today.  The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) is telling us
not to fear the Chinese nuclear cloud alleged to be passing over
our country, but is cooperating completely with the Soviet Union
in providing a totally false cover for the Soviet radioactive
plutonium attack on our country!  In actual fact, the
radioactivity created by the Chinese test itself has not yet gone
beyond Red China's own borders.

   The media are reminding us how terrible Swine Flu might be,
and we are also being told of the disappointingly low number of
eligible Americans who are taking the free Government Swine Flu
shots.  We are told that Swine Flu, if it breaks out, could
spread like wildfire; and now certain persons in the United
States Government are cooperating with the Soviet Union in an
attack on our nation by means of radioactive plutonium, the
effects of which can be mistaken for severe "flu" if intended
dosages are achieved.

   My friends, the so-called mysterious signals from the Soviet
Union stopped temporarily on November 2, but then on November 10
they started up again because Soviet war preparations were
resuming.  Since I talked with you last, 36 new missiles have
been planted in our waters in addition to those I referred to
last month.

   I have not given the locations of these to anyone, and for now
I do not intend to do so.  Now let me tell you why.  On one hand
there are those factions within the shell of a Government left
here in Washington who are actively cooperating with the Soviet
Union.  Some of these are outright Soviet agents; others are part
of the Corporate Socialist network that cooperates with the
Soviets for mutual advantage at the expense of the rest of us. 
Some in this second group still do not believe that a Soviet
double cross has been under way for months in the form of the
underwater missiles in our waters.  On the other hand, there are
many who are honestly trying to counter the Soviet underwater
missile threat acting within constraints imposed on them.

   Prior to October 1, missiles were being removed as they were
planted by the Soviet Union, acting on information I was
providing to General George S. Brown and to Military
Intelligence.  In this capacity, I have been acting as an
information channel to go around the Intelligence gap created by
Henry Kissinger.

   But where is all this leading?  What will happen if traitors
in our midst continue to cover up the truth about the Soviet
underwater missiles, and if patriots in our Government cannot
summon the courage to tell the truth, regardless of the
consequences?  What is going to happen if that situation
continues, my friends, is THERMONUCLEAR WAR and DICTATORSHIP here
in America!

   Even if the United States Navy were to continue removing
Soviet missiles as they are planted--which they have been ordered
NOT to do since October 1--this would not prevent disaster.  The
Soviet Union is able to plant missiles far faster than we can
remove them.  So the information I have been relaying is really
being used now for just one purpose--to enable our leaders to
keep abreast of the chances of attack, and to minimize those
chances until they are ready to run and hide in the 96
underground cities of the "Federal Relocation Arc" to ride out
the war--then war can come, scorching the land and consuming our

   The top-secret information provided me by my sources, often at
the risk of their own lives, is not intended for the private use
of cold-blooded traitors and spineless leaders in the American
Government.  It is intended to bring about exposure of the truth
as the one and only thing that can prevent a war.

   If war comes, it will be a devastating surprise to most
Americans.  The perverse behavior of our public officials in
misusing my information threatens to condemn millions of us to a
nuclear holocaust.  Therefore it is only right that they condemn
themselves at the same time.  Without the missile locations I am
now withholding they, too, will be caught in the lightning
surprise attack by the Soviet Union that threatens to engulf the
rest of us.  Millions of our lives apparently mean nothing at all
to them compared to their service to the Soviet Union, and their
jobs, and their pensions.  But now their lives are at stake along
with the rest of us.  Only if the truth about the Soviet
underwater missiles is exposed will I turn over the new
information I have on which not only our lives but theirs, too,
now depend.

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.


Audio letter No. 17

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC. (1981 current
address: 1629 K St. NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is October 26,
1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 17.

   Four months ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 13 I reported the
presence of a Soviet nuclear weapon at Seal Harbor, Maine, placed
where it could destroy the summer homes of David and Nelson
Rockefeller.  The rulers of the Soviet Union were embarking on an
all-out double-cross of their long time allies, the four
Rockefeller Brothers; and for the past four months we have been
in the grip of the "Soviet Missile Crisis of 1976"--a fact of
which most Americans are still unaware.  The month before this
crisis began, in May 1976, I had revealed the rapidly mounting
fears of certain Trustees of the key Rockefeller-controlled
foundations that such a Soviet double-cross was imminent.

   More than half a century ago a commitment was formed for the
creation of a One-World collectivist government to be ruled by a
mere handful of wealthy, immensely powerful individuals.  This
drive, which long ago crystallized into the Rockefeller-Soviet
alliance, had been aided and abetted by the Trustees of the
Rockefeller-controlled group of foundations; but they have opened
Pandora's box, unleashing forces they can no longer control. 
Certain of the Trustees realized this even before the actual
Soviet double-cross began.  But the Gang of Four, the four
Rockefeller Brothers, could not bring themselves to believe it
until the Seal Harbor H-bomb was found by the United States Navy.

   Now they know beyond any doubt that a Soviet double-cross has
been in progress against them--as well as against the rest of us. 
But still the Rockefeller Brothers have not learned their lesson. 
They still think that they can get back to business as usual with
their Soviet allies in their joint program for world domination. 
And for the moment, the Soviet Union is doing everything possible
to encourage this false impression strictly as a tactic.  The
Soviet Union was robbed of the element of surprise by my
disclosures in monthly AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 and 15, and they are
trying to lull the Rockefeller Brothers back to sleep so that
they can be successfully disposed of a little later on.

   Beyond that, the Soviets did not expect to be caught in their
program of planting underwater missiles for a surprise attack;
and because they were caught and their missiles were removed
during August and September, they are proceeding with extra
caution right now.  And so for the moment the alliance between
the four Rockefeller Brothers and the Soviet Union is
functioning, but it is now a false alliance.  The Soviet rulers
are just biding their time, watching and preparing for another
chance to eliminate the Rockefellers and seize the whole world
for themselves.

   Meanwhile you and I are again under attack jointly by the
Rockefellers and the Soviet Union.  In a vain attempt to save
their own lives, the Brothers are bargaining away millions of
ours.  At this moment the United States and Canada are once again
encircled by Soviet underwater missiles and prowling submarines;
but now, since Friday, October 1, 1976, the missiles are no
longer being removed!

   Here are my topics for today:




Topic #1--Last month in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 16 I reviewed
for you the events that had taken place in the Soviet Underwater
Missile Crisis since recording AUDIO LETTER No. 15 in early
August.  As I pointed out, Air Force General George S. Brown,
Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, had so far played a
crucial role in preventing a Soviet surprise attack on the United
States, thanks to the actions taken by American Armed Forces
under his command.  In August he had obtained the go-ahead from
President Ford, as Commander in Chief, to seek out and remove the
Soviet underwater missiles in our coastal waters.  A remarkable
achievement, because Ford had to overrule Rockefeller agent Henry
Kissinger in giving this order!

   Using the navigational coordinates I revealed in my August
tape, the United States Navy was able to remove all the Soviet
missiles in our territorial waters during the latter part of
August.  On September 1, 1976, with the threat presumed to be
over, General Brown wrote me a letter, which was widely
publicized, seemingly dismissing my charges, but actually opening
the door for communication between us.

   On September 7 I had information about a new round of missiles
that were being planted by the Soviets.  I wrote General Brown to
request a meeting, and on September 16, 1976, I met with him at
the Pentagon in his office for well over an hour.  During that
meeting I gave him the navigational coordinates for 48 new Soviet
missiles threatening the United States and Canada from locations
in our territorial waters--and again he ordered prompt action by
the United States Navy to start removing them.  But as I warned
last month, the Soviet Union is not giving up; and on top of
that, General Brown confronts terrible opposition WITHIN the
federal government!  So I asked you to express your support for
General Brown to strengthen his hand for our country's benefit.

   Now you can begin to see why.  On October 17, 1976, selected
excerpts from an interview with General Brown were leaked to the
press a week prior to publication.  These comments, taken out of
context, made it appear that General Brown was disparaging
certain of our allies; and instantly General Brown was at the
center of a storm of controversy.  General Brown is being
criticized now for remarks in a six-month-old interview which was
rejected for publication then, yet has magically surfaced now! 
Certain individuals have arranged for the story to be made public
at this time as an indirect means of attack that obscures the
facts.  The real reason for efforts to get rid of him is his
dedication to our country's defense.

   What is happening now to General Brown is standard practice in
Washington today.  The idea is to get something on someone,
anything, that can be made to look bad by the media, and put it
in his dossier for future use.  Thus a dark cloud is always handy
later on in case it is needed to blackmail, or destroy, or
intimidate someone.

   In General Brown's case, he was set up with this particular
cloud by none other than his boss, Secretary of Defense Donald
Rumsfeld, who was the CIA contact man in the White House and is
still a CIA operative now.

   Last spring a political writer and cartoonist drew a cartoon
of Rumsfeld, and Rumsfeld called him to ask if he could have the
original.  The political writer agreed, and it was also agreed
between them that Rumsfeld would get Brown to give the political
writer an interview.  The interview was not used at that time,
six months ago.  Even when General Brown was questioned
intensively by the Senate two months later when his confirmation
for a second two-year term as Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of
Staff was being decided upon, the interview still did not emerge. 
But now, after helping prevent thermonuclear war for over two
months, by doing his duty Brown is in hot water.

   The Rockefeller Brothers are making a desperate effort to put
things right back on track with the Soviet Union, and they have
decided that Brown must go as part of the price of reinstating
so-called detente.  The controversy now surrounding Brown is
intended to build up until he resigns, is dismissed, or loses his
influence and credibility.  This is totally unrelated to the
election, contrary to appearances.

   In this situation, it is more important than ever that you
show your support for General Brown.  His enemies are trying to
bring him down by means of a battle he must fight with both hands
tied behind his back.  If he were to publicly reveal one word
about the Soviet missile crisis and his role in combatting it--in
other words, the real reasons for his present troubles--General
Brown could be instantly dismissed, court-martialed, and
imprisoned!  And speaking out, he would be rewarded with personal
disaster; and the major media, under the thumb of the gang of the
Four Brothers, would then pull out all the stops in a campaign to
discredit whatever he said so that no one would believe it.  By
the same token, if Senate Bill No. 1 promoted by Attorney General
Levi had passed earlier this year, I, too, could be imprisoned
for telling you the truth about the Soviet missiles aimed at you
because, my friends, this information is classified "Top Secret",
not because the Government wants to keep anything from the
Soviets, they know all about their own offensive weapons planted
in our waters--it is YOU that the Government wants to keep in the
dark for their own protection, not yours!

   Even if you have already written to General Brown to express
your support, I urge you to do so again by letter, telegram, or
Mailgram.  My good friend Mr. Edward Durell, an industrialist who
lives in Berryville, Virginia, is urging his associates to write
their Congressmen showing their support for General Brown, and to
send a copy of each letter to:

  General George S. Brown
  Chairman, Joint Chiefs of Staff
  Grant Avenue, Fort Myer
  Arlington, Virginia  22211.

I think this is an excellent suggestion, and I urge you to do the
same.  You may want to write to both of your Senators too, and
send copies to General Brown as well.  Just address your letter

  Congressman (or Senator) so-and-so
  House (or Senate) Office Building
  Washington, D.C.  ...  The zip is:
    20515 for the House Office Bldg.
    20510 for the Senate Office Bldg.

   The controversy over General Brown, my friends, is only the
most visible part of a terrible reversal in our country's
fortunes that has occurred this month.  The turning point came on
October 1, 1976, a "RED Friday" for the United States of America. 
That was the day that President Gerald Ford caved in to pressure
from the Rockefeller-Soviet-Kissinger team.

   Two closely related events took place on October 1, 1976:

One was the appearance in the Washington Post of a story by
Woodward and Bernstein, no less, that the Watergate Special
Prosecutor's investigation of President Ford was (quote)
"serious."  The story, complete with big headlines, shook the
Stock Market where rumors circulated that Ford was about to step
down.  But, most importantly, Ford himself was given a clear
signal that swift political destruction awaited him if he did not
play ball with the Rockefellers.  Originally, Nelson Rockefeller
had arranged for the Watergate-related investigation of Ford as a
means of forcing Ford from office and in putting himself in
position as "Acting President" under the 25th Amendment to the
Constitution; but due to the Soviet Missile Crisis, that scenario
has been scrapped because the Watergate Prosecutor's
investigation was used instead to apply pressure for a different

   That different purpose had to do with the second major event
that took place on Red Friday, October 1--the visit to the White
House by Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko!  It was reported
that Gromyko's reception at the White House was the coolest it
had ever been since Ford became President--and no wonder.  When
Gromyko told reporters afterward that he and Ford, quote: "spoke
of the most cardinal issues" he was deadly serious.  He was
referring not to SALT talks or the Middle East but to the threat
of war between the Soviet Union and the United States.

   When I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 16 last month on
September 25, the second round of Soviet underwater missiles,
whose locations I had given to General Brown during our meeting
on September 16, had practically all been removed by our Navy. 
But the Soviets were already beginning to plant a third round of
these missiles, using the missile-laying mini-subs I described
last month, which are specially designed to elude detection by
our coastal sonar defenses.

   As of September 25, one of these Soviet mini-subs was resting
on the bottom of Chesapeake Bay near Norfolk, Virginia.  A mishap
had killed the crew, so the mini-sub was resting there like a
giant nuclear mine in American waters waiting for the Navy to
recover it.  Meanwhile over 142 Soviet submarines were deployed
in attack positions along the East, West, and Gulf coasts of the
United States.  During those last few days of September there
were growing indications that the Soviet missile crisis might
actually break out into the open for all to see, just as it must
do if the Soviet plans for nuclear attack world-wide are to be

   For example, a speech which I mentioned last month delivered
on September 24 by Navy Secretary William Middendorf used the
word "emergency" three times to describe our present naval
plight, and concluded his speech in the words, and I quote:

  "Our concern today is the future.  The ominous words of Admiral
Gorshkov and the cold steel of his ships tell us that we are in
an emergency situation right now.  Something must be done.  The
threat is real, and the choice is ours.  We must make the right
decisions now while we have these few precious moments of freedom
left, or be willing to suffer the consequences."

   Then on September 27, 1976, the Norfolk, Virginia Ledger-Star
newspaper published an article by reporters Garland Bradshaw and
Jack Kestner who had flown to Washington on September 23 to
interview me about my charges of Soviet underwater missiles.  The
article did exactly what honest journalism is supposed to do.  It
exposed the readers of the Ledger-Star to the fact that I have
charged the Soviet Union with planting offensive nuclear weapons
in our territorial waters, and did so in a fair, objective way. 
They did not try to convince their readers either to believe or
disbelieve my charges, but included background information on
both sides as available from their own sources.  The important
thing is that the Ledger-Star reported fairly about my charges to
a readership that can be considered an expert audience about such
things, since the Norfolk area is the biggest naval concentration
in the United States.

   Yes, things were beginning to break into the open--but then
came Red Friday October 1.  President Ford and White House aide
William Hyland met with Gromyko, Henry Kissinger, and Kissinger's
State Department Counselor, Helmut Sonnenfeldt.  Gromyko demanded
that the Soviet Union be permitted to sneak into Chesapeake Bay
to recover their dead missile-laying mini-sub near Norfolk.  In
return for that, Gromyko said the Soviet submarines deployed at
battle stations along our coasts would disperse.  Kissinger and
Sonnenfeldt counseled Ford to agree to this offer by Gromyko as a
reasonable and sound compromise.  As always, Ford was confronted
with the standard Kissinger option: "Do you want peace?  Or war?" 
And on top of that, Ford knew that the Watergate-related
political time bomb was all set to go off if he resisted, and so
he caved in and agreed.  Blackmail and threats won the day for
the Soviet Union!

   The same day, Henry Kissinger pressed his advantage and also
induced Ford to issue a secret Presidential Order to the Military
from that day onward to flatly deny all my charges when asked
about them.  In other words, they are now under presidential
orders to lie in order to keep the truth about the Soviet
missiles from the public.  This blackout on the Soviet missile
story is not for the purpose of avoiding a confrontation with the
Soviets, because that has already occurred; and it is not for the
purpose of buying time while we get into a better military
posture.  Since Red Friday, October 1, the third round of Soviet
missiles, which have been newly planted around our country, are
still there!  The blackout, my friends, is only to keep YOU in
the dark.

   This situation here stands out even more boldly when compared
with the behavior of some of our allies who are now alerted to
Soviet plans.  Ironically October 1, 1976, the day President Ford
caved in to the Soviet Union, was the same day that the Irish
Navy successfully concluded a naval confrontation with the
Soviets on the high seas.  A huge Soviet fishing trawler, so
called, was caught operating illegally inside the Irish 12-mile
limit near Cork Harbor the previous day, and the Irish fishery
protection vessel, L. E. Grenay, went after the trawler to make
an arrest.  The trawler fled into international waters, but the
Irish vessel gave chase, brought the trawler to a halt by firing
warning shots across her bow, and sent a boarding party aboard. 
The Soviet Captain was totally uncooperative, but the Irish sent
reinforcements, and ultimately had more than 50 men aboard the
Soviet ship.  The Soviet trawler entered Cork Harbor under arrest
with the Irish boarding party still aboard and accompanied by two
Irish naval vessels.  It was correctly reported by the Cork
Examiner newspaper for Friday October 1, 1976, that, quote:

  "The confrontation was regarded as the biggest and potentially
most dangerous that the naval service has faced in its history of
fishery protection."

   The Irish were prepared to apply whatever force proved to be
necessary to arrest the intruding Soviet ship.  And why?  Because
Cork Harbor itself is one of the locations from which a Soviet
underwater nuclear weapon was removed by the Royal Navy in
August, using information in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15.  The
Irish now know quite simply that no intruding Soviet ship is to
be trusted.

   But here in the United States the Soviet Navy was allowed to
intrude into our waters Monday night, October 4, under the RED
FRIDAY AGREEMENT reached between Ford and Gromyko in the White
House.  At approximately 10:00 PM local time the Soviets
retrieved the dead mini-sub from its position on the bottom of
Chesapeake Bay outside Norfolk, operating under cover of
darkness.  The missile-laying mini-sub left the Norfolk area that
night in Soviet hands--and with it went what may have been our
only chance to learn the details of the technology of the
mini-subs and their sonar-defeating system so that we could begin
defending ourselves against them.  At the same time we lost a
golden opportunity to galvanize the whole world into standing
with us against an all-out common foe, the Soviet Union, by
announcing the capture of the mini-sub, displaying it on
television, and revealing what the Soviets had been doing with
these subs.

   If our country were run today by civilians of integrity,
honor, and courage who were trying to serve the people of the
United States of America instead of trying to merge our lives
with that of the Soviet Union, such a thing could have been done. 
Swift action could have been taken to do this after I first
notified the Pentagon of the presence of the mini-sub near
Norfolk on Monday, September 20; but NO, that's not the way it
works today.  All opportunities for the United States to act
sensibly for the good of its people must be suppressed,
sabotaged, thrown away.  Only in this way can we be ground down
to such a low level of life that the goal of the White House
Merge Directive can finally be achieved.  That Directive, in
existence for decades, is to the effect that our lives are to be
so altered that they can be comfortably merged with life in the
Soviet Union.

   By the following day, the Soviet submarines at battle stations
along our shores had dispersed, as agreed; but within a few more
days they were back again--and they are there now.  They are not
at this time deployed in the precise patterns that they were in a
month ago, which indicated readiness for an immediate attack, but
they are present in international waters just off our shores in
great numbers.  As of October 11, 1976, 164 Soviet submarines
were on station in the waters near Canada and the United States,
including Hawaii; and the situation has not changed significantly
since then.

   Since Red Friday, October 1, I have been cut off from contact
with General Brown, and none of the Soviet underwater missiles in
Canadian and American waters have been removed since that day. 
As of now, 50 Soviet nuclear missiles and bombs are planted in
American territorial waters plus the three (3) missiles in the
Gulf of Panama whose coordinates I gave last month.  ln addition,
seven (7) missiles are now planted in Canadian waters, whose
coordinates I have already given to Canadian Intelligence.

   My friends, there will be no effort by the United States Navy
to remove the nuclear missiles in our waters unless it is forced
by a new surge of public awareness and demand for action, because
Nelson Rockefeller's wife arrived in Moscow and on October 12
delivered a personal letter from Nelson Rockefeller to the
Kremlin.  In this hand-delivered letter Nelson Rockefeller made
the following pledges to the Kremlin on behalf of the "Gang of
Four", quote:

  "There will be no further harassment of your submarines, nor
will your underwater missiles and bombs be taken up.  The credit
squeeze by banking circles will be lifted.  You will not be
required to sell gold.  We will send gold for products delivered.
American know-how, grains, and food stuffs will continue to be
provided.  You must reinstate the 'NUCLEAR SAFE ZONE' agreement."

   The coordinates of all the Soviet weapons now in American
territorial waters have been transmitted to a number of reliable
men in the United States Intelligence Community, except for the
newest missile, which was planted three days ago in Delaware Bay
   39 39' 35"  North   75 32' 20"  West.

Action will therefore be possible if the Military can once again
be free to do its job.

   At least Great Britain, which had 29 new Soviet nuclear
weapons in her waters as of October 11, 1976, is taking action
once again to get rid of them.  By October 22, four days ago, the
Royal Navy had removed all but 10 of them, and is still fast at
work.  As for Latin America, all the missiles I revealed last
month are still there with two exceptions--British Honduras and
Guatemala were targeted by one missile each, but these have now
been removed.

   Our controlled major media tell us nothing at all about the
Soviet missile threat that is ready to engulf us in thermonuclear
war, but instead divert our attention to the case of the Navy
F-14 fighter that plunged off a carrier deck into the North Sea
six weeks ago on September 14, 1976.  Great attention is being
given to the F-14, and we are being fed all sorts of lies that
the Soviet MiG-25 Foxbat flown to Japan by a defecting pilot is
hopelessly inferior to the F-14.  But the Soviet Navy hasn't even
bothered to try to retrieve the plane.  They already know all
about the F-14, and it doesn't worry them.

   As for the Phoenix Missile which separated from the F-14 when
it hit the water, the Soviets know where it is too, but have not
yet picked it up.  The Phoenix Missile is resting on an
underwater plateau far to the south-southeast of the point where
the F-14 was found.  The coordinates of the Phoenix Missile are:
   61 - 26 - 6 North, 1 - 23 - 16 West.

   And so, my friends, the great war game continues.  Our Armed
Services are allowed to participate in NATO and other training
exercises, but are forbidden by Rockefeller hired hands from
doing anything about the real life-and-death threat now lurking
within our own territorial waters.  We are being made sitting
ducks for attack; and, in fact, we have already been attacked by
the Soviet Navy because on October 3, two days after Red Friday,
the Soviet submarines along our East, West, and Gulf coast
performed an experiment in radioactive chemical warfare with all
of us as the guinea pigs.

Topic #2--On October 5, 1976, just as the so-called "SWINE FLU"
inoculation program was getting under way, news reports suddenly
told us that we were experiencing fallout from an alleged Chinese
atmospheric nuclear blast on September 26.  Oddly enough, the
initial reports about this came from the East Coast, especially
Pennsylvania, New Jersey, Delaware, and Connecticut; but certain
areas of the Pacific Northwest were soon mentioned as being
affected too.  We were told that radioactive iodine-131 was
showing up in milk at various locations; but we were also
assured, as we invariably are whenever any radioactive hazard
appears, that there was really no danger.

   In the days that followed we continued to hear about the
supposed Chinese fallout, but other things probably seemed even
more worrisome.  For example, elderly people began dying of heart
attacks shortly after taking swine flu shots, causing widespread
alarm at first.  But the Government quickly assured us that their
deaths didn't really matter at all, that they would have died
anyway; and the swine flu inoculation program went right back
into high gear.

   And then there were the strange outbreaks of an unknown
"mystery illness" at electronics plants in western Pennsylvania,
Ohio, and Oregon.  The employees, most of them women, experienced
headaches, nausea, stomach pains, difficulty in breathing, a
feeling of being intoxicated in some cases, and even fainting
spells.  This time the swine flu vaccine could not be the culprit
because the victims had not received it.  Instead, some were
worried that the swine flu itself had struck.  Others remembered,
with a shiver, the equally mysterious "Legionnaires Disease" that
had sickened nearly 200 people in Philadelphia and killed more
than two dozen of them two months earlier.

   My friends, there is actually no mystery at all behind these
developments and more like them that you can expect to see.  All
of these cases I have mentioned are man-made and deliberate, but
those who are responsible for them are neither telling you about
them nor leaving clues that will be found in normal medical
investigations of these episodes.  We in the United States are
now under attack in a campaign of experimental testing of
chemical warfare weapons so that they can be employed later on
with precision and devastating effect against us in full scale
war--that is, if we let it happen.

   For years all the major countries of the world have been in a
continuing race against time to discover ever more sophisticated
forms of bacterial and chemical weapons, some of them amounting
to doomsday weapons capable of destroying all life on this
planet.  Only mad men would even consider using such weapons, but
only mad men deliberately cause wars for their own greedy
purposes, too--and war is very near at hand right now.

   A few years ago a nerve gas called sarin was perfected in a
facility in Colorado.  A tiny amount escaped, and two shepherds
and their 7000 sheep were killed.  In response to the public
outcry that resulted, a statement was issued that the Chemical
Warfare Service had destroyed the sarin gas and was no longer
doing such research--but that was a lie.  Experimentation still
continues today on all kinds of such poisons, and at a furious

   As of right now, many hideous lethal ailments can be inflicted
on whole populations as operational weapons.  These include black
plague, smallpox, meningitis, dysentery, gangrene, yellow fever,
tetanus, botulism, typhus, hepatitis, Bang's disease, and Q
fever.  Thirty grams of Q fever is sufficient to infect over
150-million people, and it is considered especially convenient
since any individuals who are to be saved in such an attack can
first be immunized against it!  Such selective immunization could
easily be done, for example, under the cover of a mass
inoculation program like the swine flu program.

   Q fever, though, is mild by comparison to a nuclear gas called
AP-7 which is being manufactured in Uruguay and Argentina by
American and European subsidiaries of Rockefeller-controlled
conglomerate corporations.  Two thimblefuls properly distributed
could kill 180-million people; and one pound, all life on the
face of the earth.  Unless and until these hideous weapons are
unleashed on the earth, they remain in a condition in which they
can be destroyed and neutralized; and it is essential that they
be destroyed instead of just being handed around from one agency
to another, as Senator Frank Church permitted last year in his
shellfish toxin shell game.  But other types of chemical and
biological weapons are also of great interest to weapons
researchers which can be used in more selective ways or to
produce lower-order effects than the poisons I have just

   The Soviet KGB, which works hand in hand with the
Rockefeller-controlled CIA, now has access to whole families of
such chemical weapons which can be adjusted in exact dosage and
formula to produce a variety of effects on victims.  These were
and are intended for use as part of the program to eliminate
effective opposition by the people of the United States to the
planned Rockefeller dictatorship here in America and our
conversion into the most valuable of all slave nations for the
Soviet Union.

   Before these new weapons can be used with confidence though,
they must be tested, and that testing is going on now.  As a
cover for the periodic episodes of strange illnesses that will
occur here and there around the United States while this testing
is going on, the trumped-up swine flu threat was developed.

   On March 24, 1976, President Ford announced his proposal for
the unprecedented nation-wide inoculation program supposedly to
fend off the strange swine flu virus.  To this very day not a
single case of swine flu has been confirmed anywhere in the
United States since President Ford's announcement.

   Last February in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 9 I revealed that
the Government had panicked because of my disclosure that the
Fort Knox Bullion Depository contained leaking canisters of
deadly plutonium superpoison, and in January 1976 dumped part of
the poison into underground streams beneath Fort Knox.  Later
when the swine flu charade was announced, I was able to tell you
of the Government's plan to use this device to cover up the real
cause when and if the poison from Fort Knox began surfacing at
various points in the southeastern United States and causing
sickness and death.  But it wasn't until July of this year 1976
that I received information about the rest of the swine flu
story, and at that time the far more imminent threat of the
Soviet missile crisis involving a Soviet double-cross of the four
Rockefeller Brothers had to take precedence.

   The reason that the Government concluded last January 1976
that they could get away with dumping the plutonium poison from
Fort Knox into underground streams, which would surely carry the
poison elsewhere, was that the swine flu campaign had already
been planned for another purpose.  That purpose was to serve as a
cover to explain the effects that would be caused when chemical
warfare experimentation began, as planned, in July 1976 in our
country.  So when I revealed the presence of the leaking
plutonium superpoison in the Central Core Vault of the Fort Knox
Bullion Depository, they concluded that they could just dump some
of it underground and cover up that, too, with the swine flu

   In late July 1976 the joint KGB-CIA chemical warfare
experimentation program began in Philadelphia at the American
Legion Convention.  A convenient test group was assembled, and it
was exploited.  Data was desired for the effects of a formulation
of the new family of poisons on older men in particular, and the
American Legion Convention was chosen as the perfect target. 
Aerosol spray cans containing poisoned room freshener were used
to selectively saturate the atmosphere of the Legionnaires. 
Afterwards the special spray cans were taken from the hotel,
leaving the city by airplane from a small airport on the
northwest side of Philadelphia.  Two of the active ingredients in
the poison that produced the Legionnaires Disease were plutonium
and zirconium.

   The next experiment occurred late in August 1976 about a month
after the Legionnaire episode, and had quite a different purpose;
and so a different poison formula was used.  Plutonium was again
an ingredient, as it is in the entire line of chemical warfare
agents now being tested; but this time the formula was designed
for very rapid effect with the victims receiving a massive dose. 
On a day late in August two Air Force C-141 Starlifter transport
aircraft that were preparing to leave McGuire Air Force Base in
New Jersey on flights over the Atlantic were sabotaged by the
placement in their cockpits of concealed canisters of poison gas,
rigged so that the gas would be released in flights without being
detected.  The two planes left McGuire at nearly the same time,
and crashed within hours of one another when approaching separate
destinations in Greenland and England.  The very next day, with
the wreckage of the aircraft hardly cooled, a Pentagon spokesman
said, quote:

  "Sabotage does not appear to be a factor.  It's not even being
considered as a factor."

Officials also said there was no apparent connection between the
crashes.  Apparently leaving the same Air Base at practically the
same time and then crashing almost simultaneously without warning
is not supposed to suggest the possibility of anything but
coincidence.  No doubt it is also coincidence that McGuire Air
Force Base, the origin of these two strange fatal flights, is
right next door to Fort Dix where the whole swine flu cover-up
scare originated!

   The successful experimental sabotage of the two C-141s
provided valuable data to the Soviets, since it gave them some
measure of the operational reliability of the formula used for
that purpose.  Now, when they are ready to wage war, they have
another weapon tested and proven--the placement of canisters of
poison gas in the cockpits of numerous Allied aircraft to make a
shambles of our air power just when we need it most.

   Next came the mystery disease in the electronics factories. 
This time more data on women was wanted, especially since the
Legionnaires Disease did not kill many women.  The ideal target
would be some assembly plants containing a high proportion of
female employees.  To avoid too strong a public uproar, sublethal
doses were used; but again a key active ingredient was plutonium,
and many of the classic symptoms of radiation sickness were

   Finally in early October, this month, the first chemical
warfare experiment was performed against the entire population of
the United States.  On October 3, while the huge fleet of Soviet
submarines I told you about last month were still deployed at
precise intervals very close to our shores, the submarines
released a very fine dispersion of plutonium into the atmosphere
along the Atlantic, Pacific, and Gulf coasts of the United
States.  Unlike normal fallout produced by nuclear weapons, the
invisible clouds of plutonium from the Soviet submarines were
released at relatively low altitudes.  The theory was that the
plutonium clouds released in this way would diffuse inward over
land from all of our shorelines and ultimately settle mainly on
North America with very little of it reaching high enough
altitudes to be swept around the globe to the Soviet Union.  But,
my friends, this time they miscalculated and the nation-wide
plutonium cloud experiment backfired.

   Here is what happened: The early progress of the plutonium
cloud was just as planned.  The invisible clouds of plutonium
diffused inward onto the East Coast and onto the Gulf Coast, and
along the West Coast moved inland much more rapidly due to the
assistance of prevailing westerly winds.  By October 5 the
expanding plutonium cloud had penetrated a hundred miles or so
inland from the East and Gulf coasts and as far as the Rockies,
where it entered from the Pacific Northwest.  That was the day
that the cover story about Chinese nuclear fallout suddenly
appeared, pinpointing areas along the East coast and Pacific
Northwest as being most heavily affected so far.  Thus in case
the Soviet plutonium cloud turned out to have unexpectedly strong
effects, Red China had already been identified as the scapegoat. 
Over the next two days, the plutonium cloud gradually grew
together over the midwestern United States, forming finally a
continuous blanket over practically all of our land area.  At the
same time, the plutonium cloud had also been expanding outward as
well as inward from our coastlines, and by October 8 large areas
of Canada and Mexico were also affected.  Prevailing winds were
also tending to move the expanding plutonium cloud eastward out
over the Atlantic; and at this point things began departing from
Soviet calculations.

   In recent days there has been an extremely unusual shift in
the position of the high altitude jet stream to a position much
further south than normal.  The jet stream has a lot to do with
our weather; and in the case of the Soviet experimental plutonium
cloud, it did enough by causing the plutonium cloud released by
the Soviet subs to drift away from the United States sooner than
expected and to settle all over the Soviet Union
itself--definitely not according to plan.  As of now, it has
largely dissipated and does not continue to be a threat.  The
main problem that is left is that practically everyone in the
United States plus much of Mexico, Canada, the British Isles, and
Europe have suffered some exposure to this plutonium, though
fortunately it was at a relatively low experimental level this

   The best protective measure against radioactivity is, of
course, to avoid it; and that is exactly what Nelson Rockefeller
did, forewarned about the plutonium cloud to be released by the
Soviet subs.  When the plutonium drifted inward from our shores,
Nelson and Happy Rockefeller just happened to be elsewhere, in
London.  After all, Nelson wants to stay as healthy as possible
so that he can relish his planned elevation to the position he
has craved for decades--President of the United States and of the

                  THE PHANTOM ELECTION OF 1976

Topic #3--Nelson Rockefeller keeps saying, "I'm relaxed.  I
haven't got a worry", and seems from the generous media coverage
he is now receiving to be almost a wistful, nostalgic figure
fading from the public scene before our own eyes.  Meanwhile, he
is made to appear a refreshing point of interest against the
background of a presidential campaign that has turned off
millions of voters.  But what is not being reported in the
national press is the strenuous campaign Nelson Rockefeller is
carrying on right now all over the country, currying the favor of
members of Congress.  What is actually going on now is that
Nelson Rockefeller is down to his ninth and final scenario to
become President.  Barring some unforeseen development, he is now
counting on his final backup plan to make him Chief Executive of
the United States.  All of his previous scenarios have been
disrupted, one after another, and this is his last hurrah; and
yet when he says "I'm relaxed", he means it because this time he
is confident that he has it "in the bag."

   The Rockefeller-controlled major media have from the start
turned the presidential election 1976 into a media event,
disfranchising the American electorate in the process.  Now the
media are making both Carter and Ford look unappetizing to vast
numbers of voters, trying to insure both a low turn-out and a
very close election.  In addition, the Rockefellers have a
spoiler in the race, Eugene McCarthy, for the young voters. 
Everything possible is being done to make sure that the outcome
of the election on November 2 is very close and that no one gets
a mandate.  The plan is to create doubt as to the outcome,
possibly even triggering demands for recounts.  This situation
will be used to focus public attention on the electoral college.

   As you know, when you vote on Election Day you don't vote
directly for a presidential candidate but for his elector; but
unknown to the American people, certain key electors have already
been reached by Rockefeller agents.  On December 13, 1976, the
electors will do their voting.  The results will then be sent for
safekeeping to the president of the Senate, who just happens to
be Nelson Rockefeller, and they will remain in his possession for
over three weeks until January 6, 1977.  On that day, acting in
his official capacity, Rockefeller will open the envelopes
containing the votes of the electors, and the votes will be
tallied; and if all goes according to Nelson Rockefeller's plan,
he will announce that no candidate has received the required 270
electoral votes and therefore that no one has been elected. 
Therefore, under the Constitution, Congress will then be required
to select a President and Vice-President from among the leading
candidates in the election.  But things not being normal,
Congress may not be able within the short space of two weeks to
choose either a President or a Vice-President, so that as of
noon, January 20, 1977, the United States of America will no
longer have either a President or a Vice-President.

   This plan, my friends, is the real reason why the usual
elaborate preparation of inaugural facilities is not taking place
this year.  Instead, we are told folding chairs will be
used--folding chairs for a folding election.

   Nelson Rockefeller spent over 25-million dollars to get
himself confirmed almost two years ago as Vice-President, so he
still has a residue of good will in Congress.  In addition, he is
quietly courting Congressmen all over the country because he
plans to be the likely choice of Congress to become Acting
President with an open-ended term that carries no specific time
limit.  This will be according to Section 3 of the 20th Amendment
of the United States Constitution.  Once in that position, Nelson
Rockefeller will begin consolidating his power with all possible
speed.  His goal: The declaration of a "National Emergency"
invoking Executive Order 11921 signed very quietly by President
Ford on June 11, 1976.

   As I have explained in earlier tapes, our freedoms under the
Constitution will be suspended if this Executive Order is used,
and Nelson Rockefeller may well be on his way to making his
dictatorship permanent.  But should any candidate win by a
landslide on Election Day, Rockefeller's plan will be rendered

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 16

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC. (1981 current
address: 1629 K St. NW, Washington, DC  20006)

   Hello my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is September 25,
1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 16.

   Last month I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 much earlier
than normal, on August 2, because of its extreme urgency.  In
that tape I revealed the locations of multiple warhead missiles
and hydrogen bombs which had been planted by the Soviet Union in
the coastal waters of 25 countries around the world--especially
the United States, Canada, the British Isles, and Western Europe. 
We were on the threshold of a world-wide Pearl Harbor-type
surprise nuclear attack, and yet no one in the federal government
had taken any official action whatsoever to respond to my
warnings about this terrible war threat.  It was obvious that
nothing would be done in time unless public opinion forced it to
be done, and so I appealed to YOU.

   I told you the truth about our desperate situation, and I
asked you to bring about the rescue of our beloved country by
applying the kind of pressure on the Government that only
aroused, informed citizens can bring to bear.  Your overwhelming
response was a major shock to the United States Government; and
as a direct result of your efforts, action has been and is being
taken.  Thanks to you, the missiles and bombs in American waters
which I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 have been removed
by the United States Navy.  Likewise, those around the British
Isles and a number of other locations world-wide have also been
removed; but the grim fact is, my friends, that we are still in
very grave danger because the Soviet Union is not giving up. 
That means you and I must not give up either.

   The Soviet Navy is now struggling and maneuvering around the
clock trying to re-establish a commanding, strategic position for
attack, because an imminent nuclear attack on our country is
still planned by the Soviets.  If this attack is to be prevented,
two things must be done:

First, they must be prevented from achieving the decisive edge in
battlefield position which they are now trying very hard to
accomplish at sea by means of submarines; and

Second, the fact that the Soviet Union is preparing to plunge the
world into thermonuclear war must be completely exposed, not only
here in America but world-wide.  As I pointed out last month, in
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15, the audacious world-wide naval
surprise attack which is almost ready to be triggered makes the
Soviet Union the all-out enemy of every other nation on earth. 
Once this becomes known, Russia's military posture will be very
awkward indeed.

   In order to bring you up to date on the events of recent
weeks, my three topics today are:




Topic #1--An increasing number of public figures in our country
know about the Soviet underwater missiles ringing our country,
but so far only one has come close to warning you about it.

   At the Republican National Convention on August 19, 1976,
Ronald Reagan was invited to the speakers platform to say a few
words following the nomination acceptance speech by President
Ford.  After some opening words of a personal nature and brief
comments about the Party Platform he had helped to forge, he
turned to what was really on his mind.  He began, and I quote:

  "If I could just take a moment, I had an assignment the other
day.  Someone asked me to write a letter for a time capsule that
is going to be opened in Los Angeles a hundred years from now on
our Tricentennial.  It sounded like an easy assignment.  They
suggested I write something about the problems and issues of the
day, and I set out to do so riding down the coast in an
automobile looking at the blue Pacific on one side and the
mountains on the other; and I couldn't help but wonder if it was
going to be as beautiful a hundred years from now as it was on
that summer day."

With a few words about various challenges we face, he then
continued, quote:

  "We live in a world in which the great powers have poised and
aimed at each other horrible missiles of destruction--nuclear
weapons that can in a matter of minutes arrive in each other's
country and destroy virtually the civilized world we live in. 
And suddenly it dawned on me: Those who would read this letter a
hundred years from now will know whether those missiles were
fired.  They will know whether we met our challenge.  Whether
they have the freedom that we have known up to now will depend
upon what we do here.  Will they look back with appreciation and
say, 'Thank God for those people in 1976 who headed off that loss
of freedom, who kept us, now a hundred years later, free; who
kept our world from nuclear destruction'?  And if we failed, they
probably won't get to read the letter at all because it spoke of
individual freedom, and they won't be allowed to talk of that or
read of it.  This is our challenge."

   It is no coincidence that nuclear missiles came to Ronald
Reagan's mind as he looked at the waters off the California
coast.  We had been in telephone contact with one another since
August 11, and he knew all about the Soviet underwater missiles
when he said those words of warning I just quoted.  But most of
his audience never realized what he was driving at, thanks to the
total absence of any other clues about the Soviet threat from the
Government or the major media.  So the fate of our beloved
nation, and therefore of the whole world, rested during the month
of August 1976 in the hands of those who heard my charges and
acted on them.

   Here is what happened: During August the United States
Government came under steadily mounting pressure from people like
yourself all over the world who sent copies of my tapes, relayed
my charges, and demanded action.  The first sign that this was
beginning to take effect came on August 14, 1976.  On that date I
learned that a secret code name had been assigned to the Soviet
Underwater Missile program.  However, action to remove the
missiles still had not been approved, and was not going to be
approved unless such action was forced by public opinion. 
Meanwhile the first concrete action in the August Missile Crisis
of 1976 was taken--not by the United States, but by Canada.

   On August 17, 1976 the Canadian Navy had found the Crescent
Beach missile near Vancouver, B.C., but lacked the capability to
retrieve it.  Prime Minister Trudeau, receiving no cooperation
from the United States Government at that time, called Soviet
Charge d' Affaires Nikolai Makarov in Ottawa and demanded that
the Soviet Union itself come and remove the missile.  And remove
it they did.  On August 25 the Vancouver area was visited by
three Soviet ships--two destroyers, the Sposobny and the Gnevny;
and a tanker called the Ilim.  Rear Admiral Vladimir Varganov
arrived aboard one of the ships, using this 'good will' visit as
a cover.  By the following afternoon, Canadian divers confirmed
that the missile was gone.

   Meanwhile Great Britain had also begun taking serious action
in order to rid herself of the 12 underwater missiles and bombs
ringing the British Isles.  On August 18, 1976, Prime Minister
Callaghan called a special Cabinet meeting at 11:00 A.M. London
time.  Present were the First Lord of the Admiralty, the First
Sea Lord of the Admiralty, and several Fleet Commanders.  The
purpose of the meeting was to listen to my monthly AUDIO LETTERS
Nos. 14 and 15 which had gone to England by diplomatic pouch. 
They already knew that my information was accurate because of the
Soviet missile discovered the previous day in the waters near
Vancouver, so the Royal Navy wasted no time in taking action.  By
August 27, 1976, all but one of the missiles had been removed;
and that one, too, was retrieved shortly thereafter.

  By late August the United States was at last taking action too,
prodded into it by still-building public pressure.  For once
President Gerald Ford acted on his own, over-ruled Rockefeller
agent Henry Kissinger and gave the go-ahead for the Soviet bombs
and missiles surrounding the United States to be removed.

   Having been unleashed at last, the United States Navy worked
fast, acting on the information in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
15.  By the evening of August 26, 1976, seven of the Soviet
weapons in our waters--six missiles and one hydrogen bomb--had
been removed; and by August 31, 1976, the waters along the
American coastline had all been cleared.  At this point the
threat to the United States that I had spelled out last month had
been eliminated at last, using the very information I had made
public.  But the Government in general, and the Military in
particular, were still under heavy public pressure; and under the
assumption that the Soviet threat was now over and done with,
they chose a technique which has become standard practice in
Washington today.  It's called "plausible denial"--a particular
type of bureaucratic double talk.  The Joint Chiefs of Staff and
the United States Navy had just completed an operation to remove
the missiles around our country, a job potentially so hazardous
as to defy imagination.  In short, they had done their duty; and
the Navy especially deserves our thanks for accomplishing their
task without anyone being hurt.

   They should be acclaimed as heroes, and our whole nation
should be rallying behind them with justified pride.  But, my
friends, in the nightmare world of step-by-step surrender to the
Soviets called "Detente", it doesn't work that way.  Even our
Military leaders are so thoroughly hemmed in by the "One-World"
web that the only way that they can do their duty in the face of
such a Soviet threat is to hide the fact that they are doing it. 
And so, as soon as the missile removal operation had been
completed around our shores, "plausible denials" of my charges
began being issued by the United States Military.  This began on
August 31, 1976, when Vice Admiral B. R. Inman, Acting Director
of the Defense Intelligence Agency, answered an inquiry sent to
the Secretary of Defense Rumsfeld weeks before by Senator Harry
F. Byrd, Jr. of Virginia.  Admiral Inman's letter gives a number
of arguments as to why any prudent government, including the
U.S.S.R.,  would presumably refrain from planting such missiles
and bombs in our waters.  But the real crux of his plausible
denial letter is the following sentence, quote:

  "There is currently no evidence indicating the Soviets have
placed underwater nuclear devices, including missiles with
multiple warheads, within the territorial waters of the United

Technically, Admiral Inman was telling the truth, because as of
August 31, 1976, when he wrote this letter, all of the
evidence--the missiles and bombs--had been removed from our
waters; but the impact of his letter, if read casually, would
seem to be that my charges never had been true!

   By the same token, General George S. Brown, Chairman of the
Joint Chiefs of Staff, wrote me the following day on September 1,
1976.  His letter has been photocopied and sent all over the
world by the Pentagon.  I will now read it in its entirety:

  "Dear Dr. Beter:

   Your recent tape report alleging that Soviet nuclear warheads
and hydrogen bombs have been planted in the coastal waters of the
United States has been brought to my attention.  I have
investigated these assertions and find not a shred of truth to
any of your statements in this regard.  Let me assure you of this
country's capability to detect any such aggressive actions by the
Soviet Union or any other world power.

   We stand ready to evaluate and comment in advance on any such
information you may acquire in the future which impinges upon the
vital issue of our national security.

                                            George S. Brown
                                            General, U.S.A.F."

The seeming impact of General Brown's letter, read casually, is
that my whole story about the missiles was a fake.  But the real
key, once again, is the word "find" (present tense). 
Furthermore, in the last sentence, General Brown actually
signaled me that the door would be open if I acquired more such
information; and by the time his letter reached me, I had more
such information because as I said before, the Soviet Union is
not giving up.

Topic #2--On the afternoon of September 7, 1976, I received
General Brown's letter of September 1, which I just read you. 
Ironically, I also learned on the same day, September 7, that
"round two" of the Soviet Underwater Missile Crisis was just
beginning.  Three underwater missiles were now threatening Los
Angeles, and San Diego was once again targeted by an underwater
missile close by.  Accordingly I answered General Brown's letter
as follows:

"Dear General Brown:

   Today I received your letter of September 1.  I fully
understand the position you are taking at this time; however
other governments have not taken your position.  They know the
truth, I know the truth, and so does President Ford; and the
truth is that during the month of August 1976 a surprise Soviet
nuclear attack of world-wide proportions has been partially

   Make no mistake, the huge build-up of Soviet nuclear missiles
on land and in the sea world-wide, continues to be a clear and
present signal for an imminent surprise attack of immense
proportions.  In 1962 we had a Soviet Missile Crisis in Cuba; in
1971 we had the Soviet Missile Crisis in Canadian and United
States territorial waters which was kept from the American
people; and now once again, in 1976, the world is experiencing
yet another Soviet missile crisis.  The world must know of the
courage of President Ford as Commander in Chief in moving aside
unbelievable obstacles in order to begin to meet the Soviet
challenge last month.

   In your letter you state that, quote:

  'We stand ready to evaluate and comment in advance on any such
information you may acquire in the future which impinges upon the
vital issue of our national security.'

   In view of this and the urgency of the situation, I
respectfully request to meet with you privately in your offices
within the next ten (10) days.  At that time I will present
evidence of the validity of all my charges, and under specific
conditions I will advise you of other strategic locations of
Soviet nuclear missiles planted in our coastal waters and
elsewhere of which you may not be aware and which constitute a
clear and present danger to our national security.

                                             Sincerely yours,
                                             Peter Beter"

   Shortly after my registered letter reached the Pentagon, Navy
Captain Sidney V. Wright, Jr. called on behalf of General Brown
to arrange a meeting with the General.  We agreed on meeting in
General Brown's offices at 3:00 P.M., Thursday September 16.  An
associate accompanied me to the meeting as a witness; and
promptly at 3:00 P.M. the meeting began with General Brown and
Captain Wright, who tape-recorded the meeting with my consent. 
In spite of the public posture which he has so far had to
maintain, General Brown told me that he had overruled his staff
in order to meet with me; and although he couched many of his
comments with considerable care, our discussion lasted for well
over an hour without interruptions, without telephone calls, and
without any cutoff because of time.

   I gave General Brown a special tape for his ears only,
revealing the locations of 48 new missiles threatening the United
States, and within two days the United States Navy was already at
work removing them.  In addition, General Brown made three
commitments to me, and I made one to him.

   To fulfill my own commitment, I sent the following registered
letter to him on September 17, 1976:

"Dear General Brown:

   Thank you for affording me the opportunity to meet with you in
your offices yesterday for over an hour.  During our conversation
I mentioned that the Soviet nuclear device which was removed from
Seal Harbor, Maine, had been taken to a location near Otis Air
Force Base on Cape Cod, Massachusetts, and that it was still
there as of the time of my meeting with you yesterday afternoon.
You requested that I provide you with details about its location.

   The facts are that the Seal Harbor nuclear device was in the
process of being retrieved by the United States Navy late
Saturday, 28 August 1976, and was on the beach at Seal Harbor
waiting transportation by the afternoon of 29 August.  That
evening it left Seal Harbor by truck, which took it to an airport
at Augusta, Maine.  On the afternoon of 30 August the nuclear
device was flown from Augusta, Maine, to Otis Air Force Base,
Cape Cod, where the airplane touched down at 17:13 EDT, 30 August
1976.  From Otis Air Force Base this nuclear device was
transported to a remote location on the west side of Buzzards
Bay.  For over two weeks the device stayed in that location,
which is between one and two miles east of the small town of
Marion, Massachusetts, on a small peninsula, the tip of which is
known as Butler's Point.  The coordinates are: 41 42' 0" North,
70 43' 30" West.

   The Seal Harbor weapon remained there until about 2200 EDT
last night, 16 September 1976; but then less than six (6) hours
after my meeting with you yesterday afternoon, it left this
location.  As of today, this weapon is in a new location about 24
miles west of New London, Connecticut, with the approximate
coordinates: 41 19' 0" North, 72 31' 0" West.

   If I had not known about this latest move, the result would
have been an echo of your letter to me of 1 September 1976, in
which you state that you, quote 'find' no evidence to support my
charges.  Your letter of 1 September 1976, of course, was written
43 days after I first made my charges and only hours after the
Soviet missiles had all been removed by the United States Navy.

                                             Peter Beter"

   My friends, General Brown is laboring under the handicap of an
Intelligence gap created by none other than Secretary of State
Henry Kissinger.  Allied Intelligence sources inform me that they
have become gun-shy in sharing some of the information they give
me with the official Intelligence community of the United States
because invariably Kissinger betrays it immediately into the
hands of the Soviet Union.  Large segments of the United States
Intelligence establishment are so independent that they do not
consider themselves accountable even to the President.  Instead
they work under the direction of Henry Kissinger, who owes his
power to the four Rockefeller Brothers and who also works in the
interest of the Soviet Union.

   Of course many of our Intelligence people are still patriotic
and loyal to our country and they are doing everything they
possibly can to protect our nation.  Through their efforts the
Joint Chiefs of Staff first learned about 90 days ago that
missiles and bombs had been planted in American waters by the
Soviet Union; but due to the Intelligence gap, they were unable
to obtain complete information about them.  Only when I publicly
revealed this information last month, did they obtain it; and
even then had I related to them privately instead of making it a
public issue, Kissinger would still have been able to block any
action to remove them.

   The signs of our growing Intelligence gap are all around us. 
A few years ago the United States was believed to be far, far
ahead in multiple warhead technology for missiles; yet as far
back as 1971, as I revealed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14,
short-range Soviet missiles with multiple nuclear warheads were
found in our own waters.

   A few years ago no real threat in naval aviation was
anticipated from Russia, but two months ago, July 1976, the first
Soviet Aircraft Carrier Kiev entered the Mediterranean through
the Bosporus Straits boldly violating the 1936 Montreux
Convention as it did so; and instead of the stubby little
aircraft the Pentagon had expected, the Kiev carries sleek
advanced aircraft comparable to the American F-4 Phantom with the
additional capability of vertical take-off!  And the Soviets are
building at least four more carriers like the Kiev.  It is now in
the North Sea to bolster Soviet air power, which is a weak spot
in that area for them.

   The military philosophy of detente as expressed to me by a
very high military official is, and I quote: "We watch what
they're doing, and they watch what we're doing, and that's good. 
It prevents miscalculations."  But, my friends, this means we are
in a perpetual war game with all of our lives at stake; and
because of the Intelligence gap that now exists, a miscalculation
cannot be prevented.  Instead, it becomes inevitable; and with it

Topic #3--Yesterday, September 24, 1976, Secretary of the Navy,
J. William Middendorf II, delivered a very important briefing at
the News Media luncheon of the American Security Council held at
the Army-Navy Club here in Washington.  He spoke of things that
every American should be alerted about, but the major news media
treated it as a non-event.  The Baltimore Sun and the Washington
Star carried stories which dealt with splinters from Secretary
Middendorf's speech but missed the basic thrust of his comments. 
The Washington Post and the New York Times and the rest of our
major media said nothing at all.  Here at home another attempt to
warn the American people has so far been muffled and silenced!

   But half a world away, Radio Australia did give Secretary
Middendorf's speech the attention it deserves--and they did not
miss the point.  Here is what Radio Australia had to say at 8:00
o'clock this morning EDT, quote:

  "A warning that the growing strength of the Soviet Navy has
created an emergency situation for the United States has been
sounded in Washington by the Secretary of the Navy, Mr. William
Middendorf.  He also said that the emphasis being placed by the
Soviet Union on Civil Defense has another ominous trend.

   Mr. Middendorf said the Soviet Union now has 345 submarines,
many of them nuclear-powered and armed with missiles capable of
hitting every city in the United States.  In contrast, the United
States has only 169 submarines.  Mr. Middendorf said that it is
evidence by the Soviet Union that the 40,000-ton Kiev-class
Aircraft Carriers, with four more believed to be under
construction, was another ominous change for the near future. 
Mr. Middendorf said that while the Soviet Union was producing
submarines and warships by leaps and bounds, the United States
Navy had been almost cut in half to 474 ships over the past six

   Is the Secretary of the Navy crying "Wolf"?  I submit he is
not, knowing what we know.  In International Law, mining the
harbors of another country is an act of war.  The Soviet Union
has already invaded our territorial waters, not merely with mines
but with hydrogen bombs and multiple-warhead nuclear missiles. 
By contrast, we have placed no such weapons around the Soviet
Union--so the actions already taken by the Soviets are acts of
war and pure aggression.

   As I say these words, an undeclared submarine war is going on
between the Soviet Union and the United States in the waters
surrounding our country.  So far it is still at the stage of
maneuvering for attack on the part of the Soviets, who now have
nearly half of their submarine force surrounding the United
States.  The challenge before us now is to prevent this from
escalating into all-out war, as planned by the Soviet Union.  To
do this, we must all understand what we are up against.

   As I explained several months ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No.
13, WAR DOES NOT JUST HAPPEN!  It is planned and triggered
deliberately by those whose lust for power is more important to
them than the lives of their fellow men.  Conspiracy and
double-cross are standard practice in such things.  The threat of
nuclear attack by the Soviet Union that hangs over us right now
is tied directly to a three-way power struggle involving the
Rockefellers on one side, the Soviet Union on the other, and in
the middle Henry Kissinger who serves both sides!

   The four Rockefeller Brothers, of course, have been
double-crossing and using the American people for
decades--economically, politically, and in wars for their own
enrichment and expansion of power.  These things I've revealed in
my previous tapes, but in particular they have been working hand
in hand with the Soviet Union.  Now, the Soviet Union is
double-crossing them, trying to use their immense military might,
which has been built up with Rockefeller aid, in order to seize
complete world domination in a flash.

   For 20 years Henry Kissinger has been a key Rockefeller agent
in the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance, and in recent years has been
the exclusive--I repeat, the exclusive--negotiator with the
Soviets in many sensitive areas behind closed doors.  But
Kissinger sees the handwriting on the wall.  He knows Nelson
Rockefeller is trying to push President Gerald Ford aside to take
over.  Now if that happens, Rockefeller will be within reach of
the Dictatorship he has craved for so long, and Kissinger will
have outlived his usefulness to the Rockefeller Brothers,
becoming instead a dangerous liability because of what he knows.

   Kissinger has now tilted towards the Soviet Union, whom he
thinks will be the winner in this struggle.  Not only has he
created the Intelligence gap I told you about earlier, but he has
also used his unique position to withhold certain critical
information even from the four Rockefeller Brothers!  Not only
did he negotiate the agreements between the Rockefellers and the
Soviets concerning the "NUCLEAR SAFE ZONE" for the benefit of the
Rockefeller Brothers in the planned war to come; but it is he,
Henry Kissinger, who also conspired with the Kremlin for the
Soviet double-cross that is now under way!  The military threat
we now face is tied very closely to political maneuverings here
in the United States.  Nelson Rockefeller at this late date still
wants to get Ford out of the way as quickly as possible in the
hope that he can turn even this dangerous situation we now face
to his own benefit.

   The financial scandal against President Ford that Rockefeller
has had ready to spring for many months is now under way in the
form of the investigation of Ford by the Watergate Special
Prosecutor's office.  But the Soviet threat is real, the time is
short; and, therefore, as Nelson Rockefeller himself keeps
saying, "Anything can happen."

   Once he seizes the power of the presidency, Nelson Rockefeller
will have the option of declaring a "National Emergency" to help
meet this missile threat, thereby activating all of the
dictatorial controls that are provided for in Executive Order
11921, which I discussed in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14.  This is
not affected by the bill signed by President Ford on September
14, 1976, which has been falsely represented in some quarters as
eliminating the emergency powers of the president.

   Meanwhile Soviet military forces are now being deployed in
offensive positions.  In Europe over 4000 Soviet tanks have now
been deployed along the borders next to West Germany and Austria. 
Soviet naval and amphibious forces are ready for action in the
area of the Baltic and North Seas, but most ominous of all is the
deployment of Soviet submarines around the shores of the United
States.  In recent days, Soviet submarines have been swarming
into position at battle stations along our East, West, and Gulf
Coasts.  As of today, September 25, 1976, there are at least 142
Soviet submarines in position, lined up at precise intervals up
and down the East and West Coasts of the United States and
concentrated especially in the Gulf of Mexico.  The number of
Soviet submarines now in position around us is almost equal to
the entire submarine force of the United States--which are
scattered world-wide.

   One major advantage the Soviet Union has in this situation is
the ability of the Soviet Naval Command to maintain continuous
contact with any or all of its submarines.  This is a capability
which the United States Navy has been trying to obtain for over a
decade by means of "PROJECT SEAFARER" which has been thwarted
time and time again.  But the Soviet system of communication with
its submarines is far more advanced even than our Project
Seafarer would be, and enables the Soviet submarine force to
operate in close coordination, reacting quickly to any changes in

   Most of the Soviet submarines now at battle stations around
the United States are in readiness for direct participation in
warfare.  However, certain subs are also still at work planting
underwater missiles along our shores.  For this purpose, the
Soviets have a special type of missile-laying sub that is small,
highly maneuverable, and able to operate in shallow waters and
relatively tight quarters.  The missiles themselves are also
relatively small due to their short range and their use of
satellite guidance.  And these special submarines are very
difficult for our Undersea Sonar Detection Nets to pick up
because the hull is treated in such a way that it absorbs sonar
signals instead of reflecting them.  By moving slowly, these
submarines also avoid making sound that might be picked up by
passive sonar sensors.  Thus they move in and out of our waters
at will, planting missiles and bombs wherever they choose. 
Thanks to the detailed information handed over by Henry
Kissinger, the Soviet Union has been able to turn our undersea
sonar nets into another Maginot line.

   Since I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 15 last month,
additional missiles and bombs have been planted around the world
in certain locations besides the United States.  In particular,
the British Isles were ringed by 23 new underwater missiles as of
September 21, 1976.  On that date, I relayed complete information
to British Intelligence so that the Royal Navy can once again
take action to remove them.

   Elsewhere around the world the situation has not changed
drastically except in the case of Latin America.  As of last
month, the Soviet Union still had not planted underwater missiles
in positions to threaten Latin America; but now they, too, are
targeted.  Mexico has six missiles in its coastal waters. 
British Honduras, Honduras, and Guatemala have one each, while
three missiles now infest the waters off Costa Rica.

   The underwater missile which originally threatened the Panama
Canal from the north end has been removed by the United States
Navy, but now the Soviet Union has planted three new missiles to
the south of the Canal in the Gulf of Panama.

One is at
   Latitude 7 52' 20" North   Longitude 79-35-22 West

The second Panama missile is at
   18-19-24  North   78-58-12  West

and the third is at
   7-57-17  North   78-37-54  West.

   One missile lies off the coast of Surinam, two missiles lie
off Ecuador, and Peru is also targeted by two missiles.  Chile
has three missiles in the waters nearby.  Argentina and Brazil
are targeted by two missiles each.

   Last month I mentioned that the nuclear missiles in Guyana
which were formerly located around the huge Atkinson Airfield
near Georgetown had been moved south to a new location.  As of
now, they have been moved again, slightly north and west to the
new position:
   5-29-33 North   58-55-53 West.

In addition, there is now a Missile Resupply Base for Soviet subs
northwest of Georgetown, Guyana, at
   6-56-24 North   58-25-27 West.

   At present the Soviet submarines are also being resupplied
with nuclear missiles at stations in Cuba and Nicaragua where
Castro has been working very quietly.  In Cuba there is a Nuclear
Depot near the north coast northwest of Camaguey at:
   Latitude 22-7-37 North   Longitude 78-21-32 West.

Until recently, offensive missiles were also installed in
undersea concrete silos along the north and south coasts of Cuba,
ready to fire at the southern United States and the Panama Canal,
but these have now been taken up.

In Nicaragua the Nuclear Depot is on the east coast at:
   Latitude 12-49-42 North   Longitude 83-50-45 West.

These resupply depots are making it possible for the Soviet
submarine fleet to give the United States Navy a very difficult

   On September 16 I gave General Brown a list of 48 new sites
around the United States where missiles and bombs have been
planted during the first two weeks of September.  Two days later
the United States Navy was fast at work picking them up, and by
now has removed practically all of them; but we pick up one and
the Soviets lay down another.

   Using their missile-laying submarines, the Soviets have
planted seven more missiles in new locations around the United
States since my meeting with General Brown.  As of yesterday
afternoon, the United States Navy had already found and removed
two of these new ones--one northeast of Vero Beach, Florida; the
other southeast of Jacksonville, Florida.

   As of today, four of the other five are still in place in the
following locations:

Near Miami, Florida at:
   25-19-0 North   80-12-50 West

In the southwest end of Pamlico Sound, North Carolina, at:
   35-4-20 North   76-30-20 West.

In the northeast end of Pamlico Sound about 20 miles south of
Kitty Hawk, North Carolina at:
   35-40-0 North   75-38-50 West.

And near Valdez, Alaska, at:
   60-51-50 North   147-5-0 West.

The other new missile was planted Sunday night, September 20,
1976, near Bloodsworth Island in Chesapeake Bay at: 38-12-25
North   76-11-55 West but is now being removed.

   The Bloodsworth Island missile is a special case, and I will
have more to say about it in a moment.  Before I do that though,
it is important to mention a diabolical new trick the Soviet
Union is now trying in an effort to confuse the United States
Navy long enough to replant enough missiles in our waters for an
attack.  Some sites which have been cleared by the United States
Navy are now being used to replant new underwater missiles very
close to the exact location used before.  The Soviets anticipate
that when these locations are given to the United States Navy
they will be entered on the Master Plot in use by our Navy, and
at that point it will of course be noticed that the new report
corresponds to a location where a missile has been removed.  The
natural assumption would be, therefore, that such a new report
was simply a repetition of an earlier report and was now
out-of-date.  If this happens, the new missile will be overlooked
and will not be removed.  Just to make sure, however, the Soviet
Union is placing the new missiles just far enough from the
previous location to prevent our Navy from discovering them by
anything less than a complete new search of the area.

   As of approximately noon yesterday, I can confirm two new
missiles which have been newly planted at old locations this way.

One is near Gulfport, Mississippi, at
   Latitude 30-17-20 North   Longitude 89-18-25 West.

The other is near Mobile, Alabama, at
   Latitude 30-38-40 North   Longitude 87-59-0 West.

Both of these sites are almost identical to the ones which I gave
to General Brown on September 16 and which had been cleared by
September 21.

   A moment ago I mentioned a new underwater missile that was
planted last Sunday night, September 20, in Chesapeake Bay near
Bloodsworth Island, which is about midway between Baltimore,
Maryland, and Norfolk, Virginia.  The small missile-laying
submarine installed the Bloodsworth Island missile at 10:30 PM
EDT, and then headed back south toward Norfolk, Virginia.  As of
10:00 AM the following morning, Monday September 21, this small
submarine with at least one more thermonuclear weapon on board,
was close to the mouth of Chesapeake Bay, but had stopped and was
playing possum on the bottom.  Its location was about 10 miles
northeast of Norfolk, Virginia, at:
   Latitude 37-6-20 North   Longitude 76-7-10 West.

Upon receiving this information, I immediately called General
Brown's office and relayed this information to Captain Sidney V.
Wright, Jr.

   Here was a chance for the United States Navy to catch one of
the Soviet missile-laying submarines red-handed.  By the time you
hear this, the Bloodsworth Island missile planted last Sunday
night by this submarine will be gone, thanks to the action now in
progress by the United States Navy; but as of now, the submarine
is still there.  This Soviet missile-laying submarine will stay
there complete with its cargo of mass destruction until our Navy
pulls it up and takes it away because, my friends, the small
Soviet submarine now resting on the bottom of the Chesapeake Bay
has become a tomb for its crew.  Something went wrong with its
power plant, and now the Soviet crew is dead. The sub itself,
still loaded with nuclear weapons, has now become a gigantic mine
in the waters near the biggest naval concentration in the United
States, and so it will remain unless and until it is removed by
the United States Navy.

   My friends, the threat of war from the Soviet Union has never
before been as great nor as imminent as it is now.  But I remain
firmly convinced that, even now, a shooting war can still be
prevented.  Our fate remains in YOUR hands; but now I believe
more than ever that the American people, when told the truth, are
equal to the task.  Congressmen and Senators write letters to
President Ford or Henry Kissinger and get no satisfactory
response; but YOU, you opened the door for communication between
General George S. Brown, who heads our country's military
establishment, and myself, and I thank you from the very bottom
of my heart.

   Now I ask you to get behind General Brown in the same way. 
This is more important than I can express because General Brown,
handicapped by the Intelligence gap created by Henry Kissinger,
is confronted by many opposing forces within the federal
government who, unlike General Brown, are not loyal to the United

   As soon as you finish listening to this tape, I ask you,
PLEASE, to send a letter, telegram, or Mailgram to General Brown
expressing your support.  It took great courage from the
standpoint of his own career for General Brown to see me at all,
yet he overruled his staff in insisting upon doing so.  And under
General Brown's command, with the approval of President Ford as
Commander in Chief, the United States Navy has acted and has  so
far been able to fend off the intended surprise nuclear attack by
the Soviet Navy.

   Send your letters and telegrams to:

General George S. Brown
Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff
Washington, D.C.  20301.

Thank him for seeing me, thank him for taking action, and tell
him you are behind him.  By doing this, my friends, YOU can help
strengthen Gen. Brown's hand against those who would rather see
inaction or outright surrender to the Soviet Union.  Remember:

   If God will grant us the time and the wisdom to do so, I
believe the war which is now so close can still be averted; but I
would not be honest if I did not urge you to take such
precautions as you can for your own protection in the event war
does come.  The Soviet Union has a massive Civil Defense program
to enable it to survive nuclear war.  No such preparations have
been made in the United States except for the so-called "Federal
Relocation Arc", a network of 96 virtually bomb-proof underground
cities in which many of the Government officials, who have
betrayed us into war, will be able to ride it out in safety and
comfort.  So the rest of us, who are considered expendable, are
left to fend for ourselves.

   Almost two years ago, looking ahead to this situation, I
recorded my first tape for AUDIO BOOKS. INC. entitled: "HOW TO
WAR."  The exact timetable and some other details have changed
since then due to unexpected obstacles and failures which the
four Rockefeller Brothers have encountered, including now their
double-cross by the Soviet Union; but the measures I suggested
then are still the ones I would suggest now in order to protect
yourself and your family.  Highly informed individuals who know
from their own sources that my present warnings are correct, are
actively preparing their own bomb shelters right now just in case
the worst should happen.  But as I said in conclusion to that
first tape two years ago, what we could accomplish to protect
ourselves individually was one thing, and what we can accomplish
working together was quite another.  Now, as then, that is where
my real hopes lie; and now, my friends, we are working together
to save our beloved country.  If we will continue without losing
heart, and if we will all show our overwhelming support for
General Brown, then I have the feeling that we're going to do it. 
It may sound too good to be true--but then, so did the concept of
FREEDOM that became the United States of America 200 years ago!

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 15

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC. (1980 current
address: 1629 K St. NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is August 2,
1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 15.

   Normally I record each issue of my monthly AUDIO LETTER around
mid-month or later, but this month I must make an exception,
because of the urgency of what I have to tell you.

   In monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 12, three months ago, I
revealed the joint Rockefeller-Soviet plan for NUCLEAR WAR ONE to
be waged primarily on American soil.  In that tape I also
revealed the existence of the super secret "Nuclear Safe Zone"--a
swath across the upper half of the continental United States and
lower Canada between the latitudes of 40 and 50 degrees North
within which nuclear attack had been agreed not to take place
under secret agreements between the four Rockefeller Brothers and
their Soviet allies.  The fact that the four Brothers themselves
take this agreement very seriously is reflected by the fact that
they have virtually abandoned the famous Rockefeller estates at
Pocantico Hills, New York, moving their secret documents and
other assets to their other homes on Mt. Desert Island and
Bartlett Island just off the coast of Maine, right in the middle
of the Nuclear Safe Zone.  Only today, in fact, Nelson
Rockefeller entertained reporters at Seal Harbor, which is on Mt.
Desert Island; but in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 I also reported
that more and more of the Trustees of the major
Rockefeller-controlled Foundations, through whom the Rockefellers
exercise their control over our economy and our government, are
increasingly fearful that the ONE WORLD program of the
Rockefellers has jumped the tracks.

   Over a period of 50 years and more the wealth and power of the
western world, especially the United States, has been bled off in
a continuous transfusion to strengthen the Soviet Union
artificially.  But now they see increasingly that they have
opened Pandora's box and that a terrible double-cross by the
Soviet Union is looming closer and closer as the hideous dead end
of their behind-the-scenes control of our nation.

   The very next month, in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 13 I was able
to reveal the existence of a Soviet-planted nuclear weapon in the
waters near the entrance to Seal Harbor, Maine, ready to destroy
the summer homes of David and Nelson Rockefeller upon Soviet
command.  And just two weeks ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14
for July 1976, I revealed the presence in American territorial
waters not only of three more bombs but of 10 short-range,
underwater-launch, multiple-warhead missiles with nuclear

   We are now in the grip of a grotesque rerun of the deadly
Soviet Missile Crisis of 1971 which I revealed and described in
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14.  Now, as then, our leaders are not
telling you one word about it, but this time the Soviet threat is
vastly greater and more imminent than it was in 1971.  What the
Soviet Union is hatching, my friends, is a devastating naval
surprise attack of world-wide dimensions which goes far beyond
even the huge dimensions of the threat I revealed to you last
month.  No less than 25 countries around the world are now
threatened with surprise attack by the Soviet Union at any moment
the Soviets may choose by means of underwater-launched missiles
and bombs planted by the Soviet Navy.

   It has now been two weeks since I recorded monthly AUDIO
LETTER No. 14 in which I challenged the United States Joint
Chiefs of Staff to take appropriate action about the deadly
Soviet nuclear offensive weapons in our territorial waters and in
which I pledged my readiness to cooperate fully with the Joint
Chiefs.  My challenge and offer of cooperation were also
transmitted directly to the appropriate officials; but, my
friends, as of this moment I have not received one word of
official reply to my charges, my challenge, or my offer to help!

   The Joint Chiefs of Staff have been given notice of specific
aggressive acts by the Soviet Union that imperil the peace and
security of the United States, the placement of offensive nuclear
weapons at strategic locations within American territorial
waters; but to my knowledge up to this moment they have not taken
any action whatever to seek out, much less to destroy, any of the
bombs or missiles I revealed last month including even the
missile near Pearl Harbor, Hawaii, whose location I spelled out
in navigational coordinates.  So long as this inaction continues,
they are failing to protect our shipping, to protect our vital
sea lanes of communication, to maintain general naval supremacy
in our own waters, and to protect crucial naval bases and
property among other things.  The Joint Chiefs of Staff are in
flagrant and continuing violation of Title 10 of the United
States Code and of the Department of Defense Directive 5100.1
which spells out the functions and responsibilities of the Armed
Forces of the United States.  What is the meaning of this?  Does
this mean that the Joint Chiefs are so completely trapped and
insulated by Rockefeller agent Henry Kissinger that they are no
longer free to do their duty?

   My friends, what hope can there be for us when our most
trusted and respected leaders, civilian and military, fail us
through treason and fear?  The answer is that ours is not the
only government facing this terrible Soviet threat, so I have
turned this information over to them too; and while the United
States Government sits paralyzed through fear and Rockefeller
treason, other governments are taking action.  Meanwhile my own
efforts are to rob the Soviets of the crucial element of surprise
which they are counting on to make their world-wide naval attack

   Today I want to discuss these three topics:




Topic #1--In the early fall of 1938 an International Conference
was held to consider Adolf Hitler's demand that the Sudetenland
with its heavy German population be ceded to Germany by
Czechoslovakia.  For years the Third Reich had been rearming
itself to the teeth in open defiance of the "Treaty of
Versailles" but the Western Allies, afraid of offending Hitler,
had done nothing about it.  Prior to Czechoslovakia, Austria had
been annexed under the pretext of racial ties like those in the
Sudetenland that demanded such an organic relationship to
Germany.  The Allies had done nothing about Austria, and now
Britain and France agreed as well to Hitler's annexation of the
Sudetenland.  On September 30, 1938, the fate of the Sudeten
residents of Czechoslovakia was decided without their own
participation when the infamous Munich Agreement was signed. 
Amid widespread relief, "peace in our time" was proclaimed; but
less than a year later, on September 1, 1939, World War II began
with Hitler's invasion of Poland.  Just over a year ago, on July
30, 1975, a new Munich agreement was signed, 35 signatories were
involved as the Helsinki Accord was signed sealing the fate of
the Soviet satellites of eastern Europe as a stable relationship
referred to as "organic and permanent" by high officials of the
United States Department of State.  Widespread praise for the
so-called "Spirit of Helsinki" assured us all that detente was
doing fine and all was well.

   Meanwhile the steadily accelerating Soviet military build-up
has redoubled its pace in clear violation of the "Strategic Arms
Limitation Treaties" (SALT) which forbid such major new weapons
as the huge Soviet SS-19 ICBM now being deployed.  In the past 10
years the military superiority once enjoyed by the United States
has been systematically and deliberately eroded, always with the
excuse that our failure to unilaterally disarm in stages might
seem provocative to Russia.

   Meanwhile the Soviet build-up has doubled and redoubled to the
point where nations around the world are expressing increasing
alarm at such military preparations which now go far beyond
anything that could conceivably be limited to self-defense.  The
situation is becoming so ominous that more and more nations which
have formerly kept their silence rather than to risk offending
the Soviet Union are now crying out in alarm.  In May 1976, the
same month in which I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12
telling you of the mounting fears of a Soviet double-cross by
certain Trustees of the major Rockefeller-controlled Foundations,
the clamor of concern over Soviet military intentions began
building up.

   For example, on May 9, 1976, Denmark's Foreign Minister, K. B.
Andersen, was quoted as saying about neighboring Soviet and
Warsaw Pact exercises, quote:

  "The military activity in the last few years has been more than
is necessary for defensive purposes.  It is more than is
reasonable in the spirit of Helsinki."

The Danes are especially worried about amphibious landing
maneuvers which are being carried out on the Baltic coast and
which are moving ever closer to Denmark, which controls the
straits which lead from the Baltic into the North Sea.

A week later, on May 16, 1976, Denmark's growing concern was
echoed by West Germany's Foreign Minister, Herr Genscher, who
said that the Soviet Union is arming itself beyond its defense
needs, creating a danger for European security.

About the same time half a world away, the Japanese were
increasingly voicing serious concern over Soviet military
escalation.  Since the beginning of 1976 there has been a
dramatic increase in Soviet naval and air activity in the
vicinity of Japan including frequent scrambling of aircraft,
numerous violations of Japanese air space by Soviet aircraft, and
submarine exercises just off Japan.

By late May the same theme had been taken up by Great Britain. 
On May 26, 1976, British Foreign Secretary Crosland told the
Central Treaty Organization of Foreign Ministers, quote:

  "We cannot ignore the evidence of our eyes.  It has been
precisely during the years when the Soviet Union has advocated
detente that we have witnessed the steady build-up of the Soviet
armed forces."

Nor have the warnings by leaders of other countries abated. 
Australia's Prime Minister Malcolm Fraser has rightly criticized
detente as an illusion used by the Soviet Union to veil its
imperialist designs.

Red China, which is badly weakened at the moment by the
devastating earthquakes, has expressed worry over the recent
strengthening of Russian land and air forces along her northern

And only three days ago on the first anniversary of the Helsinki
Agreement, Mrs. Margaret Thatcher, leader of the Conservative
Party in Britain, reinforced her warnings voiced earlier this
year concerning the very real and growing threat posed by the
Soviet Union.

   Meanwhile here in our own United States all attempts to voice
similar warnings are suppressed, muted, and diffused.  Recently
the Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, General George S.
Brown, revealed that while the American Pacific Fleet should be
able to keep sea lanes open to Hawaii and thereabouts, quote:

  "Because of a shortage of warships the fleet will not be able
to protect the sea lanes into the western Pacific."

Admiral James L. Holloway, Chief of the Naval Operations, has
gone even farther, declaring that American warships now operate
in the Sea of Japan only at the tolerance of the Soviet Pacific
Fleet.  No wonder the Japanese are worried; but perhaps the most
dismal estimate of the situation comes from retired Admiral Elmo
Zumwalt who flatly says that the United States could not win a
war against the Soviet Union today.  Well, he ought to know.  It
was while he himself was Chief of Naval Operations that the
Soviet Missile Crisis of 1971 occurred involving underwater
missiles in American and Canadian waters, as I revealed last

   Meanwhile Rockefeller Soviet agent Henry Kissinger speaks
comforting lies for American public consumption about the
military inferiority of the Soviet Union; and our interim
president Ford, speaking words put in his mouth like a
ventriloquist by Nelson Rockefeller and Kissinger, solemnly lies
to us that there have been no violations of the SALT agreements
by the Soviets, and that they have refrained from using any
loopholes in the SALT agreements.  The Rockefeller major media
drum lies like these into our heads, creating a false sense of
security.  We, the people of the United States as well as of the
other countries now under the threat of the Soviet surprise
attack, have been sold out by the four Rockefeller Brothers and
their agents in and out of Government.  Our trust of those in
positions of leadership has been used against us at the very
highest levels.  We have all been double-crossed for the private
gain of a handful of greedy, callous men; and yet, even they too
are about to lose everything in the same way--double-cross by the
Soviet Union.

Topic #2--In this age of Intercontinental Ballistic Missiles,
Viking space craft landing on Mars, and B-1 Bombers, it is easy
to forget the indispensable roles played by land and sea forces. 
The vast tonnages of commodities that travel around the world in
international trade travel not by air in most cases but by land
and especially by sea.  For reasons of simple economics, the sea
is still the unrivaled highway of the world's commerce, spelling
prosperity for many and survival for some; and as long as this is
true, navies will always play a major role in a nation's military
power.  If some Americans have forgotten this, the Soviet Union
has not.  For over two decades just one man has been continuously
in command of the Soviet Navy, Admiral Sergei Gorshkov.  The
Soviet Union has less need of a navy for defensive purposes than
many other nations, but for 21 years Admiral Gorshkov has worked
relentlessly to build the Russian fleet into a formidable
striking force world-wide, and he has succeeded.

   Starting as a minor defensive military arm when Stalin died in
1953, the Soviet Navy has been built into a modern armada in
astonishingly short time, and it is still expanding rapidly.

   While the United States has been shutting down shipyards at
home and losing bases abroad, the Soviet Union has been building
new shipyards and stretching its reach by opening more and more
bases far from its own shores.  Even now, before the new American
naval base is built on Diego Garcia in the Indian Ocean, the
Russians are angling for a new base in the South Pacific on the
Island of Tonga north of Australia.  Gorshkov has said, quote:

  "Establishing the conditions for gaining sea control has always
required prolonged periods of time and the execution of a series
of measures while still at peace."

He also emphasizes the importance of the Soviet Fleet for
exercising, quote: "influence on coastal countries."  Gorshkov
claims that his navy is now capable of fighting anywhere as a
political tool in furthering the Kremlin's aims, including not
only the wartime role of severing sea lanes but even possible
peacetime harassment and interference with shipping.  He now
considers the Soviet Navy to be, quote: "a long-ranged armed
force which could exert decisive influence on the course of an
armed struggle in theaters of military operation of vast extent." 
In other words, the Soviet Navy is now a global striking force,
and Gorshkov recently signaled his fleet that it will be the Navy
which will bear the brunt of any armed conflict to come.

   Western military analysts have been puzzled by recent
indications that the Soviet General Staff is preparing, quote:
"new methods of repelling aggression and waging war."  Well,
anti-tank guided missiles, which many analysts are concentrating
on, are just a side show in these so-called new methods.  The
real focus in current Soviet military planning is the Navy, and
prominent among these new methods are the underwater-launched
missiles and bombs which the Soviet Navy has now planted in
coastal waters all around the world.

Topic #3--In monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14 which I recorded just
two weeks ago on July 19, 1976, I reported the presence of 4
bombs and 10 short-range underwater-launch missiles with multiple
nuclear warheads in the territorial waters of the United States,
all of them planted there by the Soviet Union.  I can now confirm
that all of these bombs and nuclear warheads are of the
thermonuclear variety--that is, hydrogen bombs as opposed to
smaller atomic bombs.  What is more, the list for North America
now includes two more missiles--one at the south end of
Chesapeake Bay near Norfolk, Virginia, and the other in Canadian
waters near Vancouver, Canada.  Of these two, the Norfolk missile
has been planted just within the past few weeks.


   Here now are the navigational coordinates for the locations of
the 16 nuclear weapons in United States and Canadian territorial
waters.  Most all the locations are firm but some could be off
one or two miles:

(1) Near the entrance to Seal Harbor, Maine.  Hydrogen bomb.
   Latitude 44  17'  0" North   Longitude 68  14'  0" West

(2) In a cove off Boston Bay near Quincy and Weymouth, Mass.
   Latitude 42  14' 30" North   Longitude 70  59' 0" West

(3) Long Island Sound near Bridgeport, Connecticut.  Missile.
   Latitude 41  9'  40" North   Longitude 73  5'  0" West

(4) Chesapeake Bay near Deale, Maryland, east of Washington, DC.
   Latitude 38  46'  0" North   Longitude 76  33'  0" West

(5) Potomac River near Indian Head, Maryland, south of
Washington, D.C.  Hydrogen bomb.
   Latitude 38  33'  40" North Longitude 77  12'  0" West

(6) South end of Chesapeake Bay near Norfolk, Virginia.  Missile.
   Latitude 36  58'  30" North   Longitude 76  16'  0" West

(7) Inside Pensacola Bay, Fla.  Missile.
   Latitude 30  23'  30" North   Longitude 87  11'  30" West

(8) In the Mississippi River near New Orleans.  Hydrogen bomb. 
(A correction here from monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14.  The bomb is
down river near Port Sulphur, La., rather than up river.)
   Latitude 29  35'  30" North   Longitude 89  50'  30" West

(9) In Galveston Bay, Texas.  Missile.
   Latitude 29  22'  10" North   Longitude 94  49'  10" West

(10) Inside San Diego Bay near Chula Vista, California.  Missile.
   Latitude 32  38'  0" North   Longitude 117  7'  0" West

(11) Inside San Pablo Bay near San Francisco, California.
   Latitude 37  59'  0" North   Longitude 122  23'  0" West

(12) In American waters between northwest Washington State and
Vancouver Island, British Columbia.  Missile.
   Latitude 48  13' 0" North   Longitude 123  8'  0" West

(13) In Canadian waters southwest of Crescent Beach near
Vancouver, British Columbia.  Missile.
   Latitude 48 58'  9" North Estimated Longitude 122 57' West.

(14) In Prince William Sound, Alaska, near the entrance to the
Port of Valdez.  Hydrogen bomb.
   Latitude 60  57'  40" North Longitude 146  44'  15" West

(15) In the waters just north of Colon, Panama Canal Zone.
   Latitude 9  25'  30" North   Longitude 79 54'  45" West

(16) And finally, in the coastal waters just outside Pearl
Harbor, Hawaii.  Missile.
   Latitude 21 18'  30" North    Longitude 157  58'  58" West.

   My friends, get out a map and mark these locations on it.  See
for yourself just how complete the surprise attack is that is
being readied for the United States Navy.  Then after you have
absorbed that, listen on because, my friends, there is more, much

   The principal target of the Soviet Union in the surprise
attack now planned is the United States of America.  If we fall,
the world falls; but that does not make us the only target. 
American Naval Forces are deployed world-wide.  In addition, the
Soviet Union has designs on Western Europe, the Mediterranean
area, southern Africa, China, Japan, Australia, India, the
Persian Gulf--in short, the whole world!  Large chunks of the
world are already under direct Soviet control, while others are
primarily within the direct influence of their Rockefeller
partners whose chips they plan to pick up by means of the
double-cross.  But all the areas of the world which remain to be
conquered or stand in the way of overwhelming Soviet victory are
also targeted with bombs and underwater-launched missiles planted
in coastal waters.

   I can now report that coastal waters in at least 64 locations
world-wide now contain nuclear offensive weapons planted by the
Soviet Union.  A few are bombs, but the vast majority are
underwater-launch multiple-warhead missiles armed with hydrogen

   The Soviet Navy, true to the claims of its Commander in Chief,
Admiral Gorshkov, that it is now a global striking force, is now
poised for the most ambitious, most devastating surprise attack
of all time--a world-wide Pearl Harbor-type attack designed to
bring all the navies of the world to ruin at a single blow.  If
this naval attack succeeds, the sea lanes that are the life blood
not only of defense but of trade and even survival for many
nations, will be severed and destroyed.

   Regardless of any reprisals by means of Intercontinental
Ballistic Missiles, bombers, and all the rest, the Soviet Union
is prepared to survive the minimum casualties, no more than
perhaps 10-million--which the Kremlin is willing to accept,
thanks to the all-out Civil Defense preparations which have been
underway in Russia for years.  Eventually, they reason, even
if--and that is a very big "if"--if we do strike back we will run
out of ICBM Missiles and will consume all of our remaining
defenses without any hope of ultimate success, robbed as we will
be of any significant naval power.  Thus, whether their initial
surprise attack persuades us all to just lay down our arms and
surrender, or whether we first retaliate with such forces as we
can muster after the destruction of our Navy, the Kremlin expects
to emerge inevitably as the victor, as the unchallenged ruler of
the entire world.  That is what this world-wide Pearl Harbor
attack is all about, and that is what I am trying to prevent by
taking away the advantage of surprise that the Soviets are
counting on.


   I will now give you the other locations world-wide.  The same
time, I will just give each Latitude or Longitude as three
numbers--meaning degrees, minutes, and seconds respectively.

   Northern Europe, Scandinavia, and the British Isles are
heavily targeted with underwater missiles and bombs.  This is
intended to free a considerable part of the Soviet Baltic Fleet
for service elsewhere and also to neutralize or eliminate the
NATO air power, which is presently a weak spot for the Soviet

   Denmark is the key to Soviet access to the Baltic Sea, and two
missiles are now planted in Danish waters: One north of
Copenhagen at
   Latitude 56 - 10 - 37 North   Longitude 12 - 25 - 56 East

The other to the south at
   Latitude 54 - 55 - 30 North   Longitude 10- 27 - 51 East

   Far to the north a missile is also located at the north end of
the Gulf of Bothnia near the border between Finland and Sweden at
   Latitude 65 - 42 - 25 North   Longitude 24 - 34 - 0 East

   On the Baltic coast of West Germany just south of Denmark a
missile is located at
   Latitude 54 - 27 - 27 North   Longitude 13 - 4 - 14 East

while the North Sea coast of West Germany is the site of another
missile near Bremerhaven at
   Latitude 53 - 39 - 50 North   Longitude 8 - 20 - 41 East.

   Moving on down the North Sea coast to the Netherlands, a
hydrogen bomb has been planted by the Soviets just outside the
mid section of the huge dike about 50 miles north of Amsterdam. 
The bomb is at
   Latitude 53 - 2 - 4 North   Longitude 5 - 10 - 55 East

If it were detonated, the North Sea would rush in like a tidal
wave to crush and drown the inhabitants of Amsterdam and more
than 1000 square miles of Dutch low-country formerly reclaimed
from the sea.  This is horrible to imagine, my friends, but it
would be far more horrible if we allowed the Soviet Union to do

As if that were not enough, the Netherlands coast is also
threatened by a missile at
   Latitude 51 - 36 - 7 North   Longitude 3 - 55 - 43 East

in a cove southwest of Rotterdam.

   The French coast, too, is targeted.  One missile is southwest
of Brest at
   Latitude 48 - 10 - 23 North   Longitude 4 - 50 - 12 West

   The other missile, further south, is about midway between
Nantes and Bordeaux at
   Latitude 46 - 15 - 9 North   Longitude 1 - 30 - 51 West.

   As I have explained in earlier monthly AUDIO LETTERS, such as
No. 6 for November 1975, the Rockefeller plans for war did not
include hostilities in Europe or Great Britain; but remember, the
Soviet surprise attack plan is all part of the massive Soviet
double-cross of their Rockefeller masters, and nowhere does the
magnitude of this great double-cross create a greater shock than
in looking at the current Soviet threat against the British

   Under the Rockefeller scenario the United Kingdom was not to
be involved in hostilities; but under the surprise attack
double-cross being readied by the Soviets, the British Isles are
now the most heavily targeted area on earth in terms of the
geographic concentration of missiles and bombs now planted in
their territorial waters.  Not only naval targets, but American
and Royal Air Force targets are crucial to the Soviet goal of
liberating their own Northern Naval Fleet to help conquer and
patrol the rest of the world.  The Soviets view England as a huge
enemy aircraft carrier that must be sunk.

   Beginning on the northeast coast of Scotland, a missile is
located in Moray Firth northeast of Inverness at
   Latitude 57 - 36 - 0 North   Longitude 4 - 2 - 49 West.

Next, near the entrance to the Firth of Forth and northeast of
Edinburgh, Scotland, a missile is planted at
   Latitude 56 - 7 - 0 North   Longitude 2 - 31 - 46 West.

   Next, an atomic bomb (not a hydrogen bomb) is at the narrow
entrance to the cove at Middlesborough, England, at
   Latitude 54 - 38 - 30 North   Longitude 1 - 7 - 43 West.

Continuing down the coast, a missile is roughly centered in the
entrance to the bay known as "The Wash", east of Nottingham:
   Latitude 53 - 7 - 30 North   Longitude 0 - 30 - 48 East

And on the north flank of the entrance to the Thames River east
of London, still another missile now sits at
   Latitude 51 - 37 - 0 North   Longitude 1 - 2 - 26 East.

Moving over to the west coast, a missile is located in the water
about 30 miles north of Liverpool at
   Latitude 53 - 49 - 0 North   Longitude 3 - 6 - 40 West.

Further north at
   Latitude 54 - 55 -0 North   Longitude 3 - 30 - 50 West

a missile is planted in Solway Firth at the border between
England and Scotland.

   North of that a missile now lurks in the Firth of Clyde
southwest of Glasgow, Scotland at
   Latitude 55 - 39 - 0 North   Longitude 5 - 7 - 4 West.

And the last missile in the waters along the west coast is in the
channel known as "Little Minch" off the northwest coast of
Scotland at
   Latitude 57 - 21 - 0 North   Longitude 6 - 52 - 37 West.

   Ireland, too, has been targeted.  The entrance at Dublin
Harbor contains a hydrogen bomb at
   Latitude 53 - 20 - 0 North   Longitude 6 - 5 - 0 West.

Likewise the entrance to the harbor at Cork on the south coast
also contains a hydrogen bomb at
   Latitude 51 - 48 - 0 North   Longitude 8 - 14 -24 West

And in the waters of the west coast of Ireland there is a missile
in Blacksod Bay at
   Latitude 54 - 1 - 30 North   Longitude 9 - 56 - 34 West.

                        ICELAND LOCATIONS

   To round out the Soviet preparation for total elimination of
resistance to movements of its Northern Naval Fleet, Iceland also
has two missiles in its coastal waters.  One is near the entrance
to the port at Reykjavik at
   Latitude 64 - 10 - 24 North   Longitude 21 - 56 - 15 West.

The other is near the northwest side of the island at
   Latitude 66 - 9 - 2 North   Longitude 22 - 58 - 18 West.

   So much for any obstacles to the Soviet Northern and Baltic
Fleets if the surprise attack by underwater missiles and bombs is
carried out.

                     MEDITERRANEAN LOCATIONS

   The next major area of concern to the Soviet Navy is the
Mediterranean; and there, too, preparations have been made.  The
main American Naval Base now left in the Mediterranean is at
Naples, Italy, and in the northwest side of the Bay of Naples a
Soviet underwater-launched missile is now located at
   Latitude 40 - 47 - 4 North   Longitude 14 - 6 - 0 East

   In addition, four more underwater missile sites have been set
up by the Soviets in the west end of the Mediterranean so that
the American Sixth Fleet can be completely cornered, trapped, and
ultimately destroyed, leaving the Mediterranean as a Soviet lake.

Missiles are located just inside the Strait of Gibraltar on the
north side at:
   Latitude 36 - 8 - 29 North   Longitude 5 - 24 - 17 West.

and on the south side at
   Latitude 35 - 54 - 45 North   Longitude 5 - 18 - 13 West.

The other two missile sites are about 140 to 150 miles east of
Gibraltar, one on the north in the Gulf of Almeria at
   Latitude 36 - 43 - 7 North   Longitude 2 - 15 - 0 West.

The other on the south near a point of land jutting out from
Melilla, Morocco, at
   Latitude 35 - 26 - 13 North   Longitude 2 - 52 - 35 West.


   The waters around southern Africa contain three missiles.  One
is southwest of Capetown, South Africa, at
   Latitude 34 - 12 - 4 South   Longitude 18 - 10 - 18 East.

Another is on the Transkei Coast roughly midway between Durban
and Port Elizabeth, South Africa, at
   Latitude 32 - 2 - 32 South   Longitude 29 - 8 - 7 East.

The third is in the bay near Lourenco Marques, Mozambique, at
   Latitude 25 - 54 - 56 South   Longitude 32 - 57 - 11 East

about 300 miles east of Johannesburg, South Africa.

   The rest of Black Africa is already under joint
Rockefeller-Soviet domination which the Soviets plan to transform
into pure Soviet domination by means of their massive
double-cross of the four Rockefeller Brothers.


   A similar situation prevails throughout Latin America, and
aside from the Panama Canal missile, the Soviets have not planted
anything in Latin American territorial waters.  The only nuclear
missiles in Latin America are those in Guyana targeted on the
Panama Canal, the southern United States, and other places.

   I can now reveal that these have been removed from the
vicinity of Temehri Airfield near Georgetown and moved to a site
about 100 miles south of Georgetown, Guyana, at
   Latitude 5 - 20 - 0 North   Longitude 58 - 7 - 54 West

southeast of the town of Ituni.  This remote site is now in use
in order to separate the missiles from the Temehri Airfield which
has been under heavy use for movement of Cuban troops to southern
Africa and which is also planned to be the landing point for the
new Soviet Backfire Bomber and other aircraft in an attack on the
United States.


   Another area of strategic importance to the Soviet Union is
the Persian Gulf with Saudi Arabia to the southwest and Iran to
the northeast.  Under a secret deal made in 1972 by the
Rockefeller Brothers through their agents Henry Kissinger and
then president Richard Nixon, a huge arsenal of sophisticated
weaponry has been built up in Iran with a current value of over
10-billion dollars.  This includes 80 brand new F-14 Jet
Fighters, Hawk anti-aircraft batteries totaling 1800 missiles,
and an ultramodern naval fleet that includes six (6)
Guided-Missile Destroyers more advanced than anything owned or on
order by our own United States Navy!  Can you imagine?  And yet
the tremendous arms build-up in Iran has far outpaced the ability
of Iran to use these arms due to lack of adequate training.  What
is actually happening is that Iran is secretly being used by the
Rockefeller Brothers to funnel weaponry into the Soviet Union
itself and to an area which can be taken over by the Soviets in
the coming war.  The real shah of Iran is United States
Ambassador Richard Helms, the former head of the CIA who now
controls Iran for the Rockefeller Brothers!

   Just as we left 5- to 10-billion dollars worth of weaponry
behind for the North Vietnamese to pick up when we pulled out
very hastily last year, the same thing is planned to happen in
Iran.  In both cases, these deals between the Rockefeller
Brothers and the Soviet Union were made in return for secret
agreements guaranteeing Rockefeller control of oil and other
mineral interests in that region.  But this arrangement is now
about to blow up in the Rockefeller Brothers' faces, as well as
yours and mine, in the world-wide surprise attack planned by the

   There is now a Soviet underwater missile site in the Persian
Gulf about 60 miles southwest of Bushehr, Iran, at
   Latitude 28 - 33 - 40 North   Longitude 48 - 55 - 29 East.

   As I explained in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6, November 1975,
the joint war plan between the Rockefeller Brothers and their
Soviet allies involved the outbreak of war in the Middle East as
the trigger with the disabling of Arab OPEC oil fields by means
of an American limited nuclear strike.  This would cripple
Europe, rendering southern Africa vulnerable in turn to final
conquest.  Meanwhile an Asian war was to be building up as a
follow-on with a joint Rockefeller-Soviet take-over of India and
Red China, with Japan being whipped back into submission for the
Rockefellers in the process.

   But now, under the audacious double-cross and world-wide Pearl
Harbor-type surprise attack that has been plotted by the Soviet
Union, the Soviets plan to make all of these dominoes tumble at
once and into their own laps with the Rockefeller empire
eliminated as a factor.  To this end, many more underwater-launch
missiles are planted in coastal waters around the world.


   India is targeted with two such missiles.  One is on the west
side northwest of Bombay at
   Latitude 20 - 52 - 56 North   Longitude 71 - 48 - 39 East.

The other is on the east side in a cove south of Calcutta at
   Latitude 21 - 45 - 7 North   Longitude 88 - 17 - 32 East.

The waters east of Singapore contain a missile at
   Latitude 1 - 28 - 52 North   Longitude 105 - 8 - 51 East.

Japan is threatened by Soviet missiles in its waters in two
locations.  One is in a bay at the south end of the Island of
Hokkaido at
   Latitude 42 - 17 - 26 North   Longitude 140 - 30 - 42 East.

The other is in the coastal waters southeast of Hiroshima at
   Latitude 34 - 7 - 15 North   Longitude 132 - 46 - 32 East.

   Seoul, South Korea, is threatened by a Soviet missile in the
waters about 25 miles to the southwest at
   Latitude 37 - 21 - 47 North   Longitude 126 - 30 - 47 East.

   Red China is menaced by three Soviet underwater missiles in
its territorial waters.  One is in the Gulf of Chihli about 260
miles southeast of Peking at
   Latitude 38 - 31 - 34 North   Longitude 120 - 45 - 43 East.

The second is about 75 miles south of Shanghai at
   Latitude 30 - 17 - 55 North   Longitude 121 - 35 - 44 East.

And the third is about midway between Canton and Hong Kong at
   Latitude 22 - 42 - 2 North   Longitude 113 - 39 - 56 East.

   In addition, there is a missile in the north end of the Gulf
of Tonkin about 50 miles east of Haiphong, Vietnam, at
   Latitude 21 - 4 - 30 North   Longitude 107 - 30 - 14 East.

   And about 25 miles north of Taipei off the northern tip of
Taiwan still another missile sits waiting at
   Latitude 25 - 24 - 11 North   Longitude 121 - 30 - 41 East.


   To round out the Soviet plan for crushing all the rival navies
of the world with one blow, underwater missiles are also planted
in the waters of the Philippines and Australia.

   One of the Philippine missiles is in the water southwest of
the Batan Peninsula within striking range of the United States
Naval Bases at Subic Bay and south of Manila.  The Latitude is
   14 - 33 - 8 North   Longitude 120 - 15 - 55 East.

The other Soviet missile in the Philippines is northwest of Panay
Island at
   Latitude 11 - 51 - 57 North   Longitude 122 - 5 - 0 East.

   As for Australia, four underwater missiles have been planted
by the Soviet Navy around the heavily populated southwest
quadrant of coast line.  One is just south of Kangaroo Island,
southwest of Adelaide at
   Latitude 36 - 3 - 43 South   Longitude 137 - 34 - 7 East.

Another is near the entrance to Port Phillip Bay, south of
Melbourne at
   Latitude 38 - 19 - 3 South   Longitude 144 - 44 - 44 East.

The third missile is near the entrance to Port Jackson near
Sydney at
   Latitude 33 - 50 - 46 South   Longitude 151 - 16 - 0 East.

And missile no. 4 is in the water northeast of Brisbane at
   Latitude 27 - 22 - 14 South   Longitude 153 - 12 - 24 East.

   My friends, the world-wide surprise attack that has been
prepared by the Soviet Navy makes the Soviet Union the
aggressive, all-out enemy of every other nation on earth.  The
sheer audacity of such a plan is one of its greatest strengths. 
No one would expect such an attempt to bring the whole world to
its knees all at once!  This is especially important as it
regards the double-cross of the Rockefeller Brothers.  The
Rockefellers themselves had the audacity to spirit away the
monetary gold supply of the United States, realizing full well
that most people would find such a huge crime unbelievable and
would therefore never suspect anything.  But the world-wide
surprise attack that has been devised by the Soviets is designed
to take even the Rockefeller Brothers themselves off guard.  They
have held sway over the Kremlin for so long that they literally
cannot imagine losing that power.  And so the Soviets believe no
one will believe such a thing is possible until the day they push
a button, signals flash world-wide by satellite, missiles erupt
from coastal waters around the world, and the biggest surprise
attack in history takes place.  Then everyone will believe, but
then it will be too late.  This is the long and the short of the
fantastic Soviet gamble that is now ready to be played out at the
moment they choose.

   My friends, what I have told you is the truth; and while you
may be tempted to try to argue a thousand ways to convince
yourself not to believe what I have said, just keep one cold,

   On the evening of December 6, 1941, the American Fleet was
peacefully at anchor in Pearl Harbor, Hawaii, and Christmas
parties were in progress.  Suppose you had been at one of those
parties and I had walked in and started trying to tell people
that the Japanese were going to attack the following morning. 
Your reaction would probably have been, quote: "But we haven't
heard anything about that.  There's nothing on the news about it,
and the Government hasn't sent us any warnings, and the Fleet
certainly would not be in the harbor like this if there were any
danger.  I just don't believe it."  I might have then produced
all kinds of evidence about the Japanese build-up, little-known
information about the efforts of the Rockefeller-sponsored
"Institute of Pacific Relations" to bring on such an attack, and
so on; yet you might still have refused to believe me.  But I
would have been telling the truth, and the truth would still have
been the same.  At 7:55 A.M. the following morning a sky full of
Japanese planes raining death on your head would have been
proving my warnings, but then it would have been too late.

   Don't let it be too late this time.  My charges are true, and
they will be proven to be true one way or the other.  They can be
proven now by forcing those officials, military and civilian, who
have the responsibility of protecting our lives to do their duty,
to find and neutralize these missiles and bombs; OR we can sit
back and listen to more lies, more comforting arguments, more
distractions until the unearthly flashes of burning light from
hydrogen bombs drive the truth home horribly, conclusively, and

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 14

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC.  (1980 current
address: 1629 K Street NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello, my friends, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is July 19, 1976,
and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 14.

   What I am forced to tell you about today is grave and urgent
beyond description.  I believe you have a right and a need to
know about it, and yet I already know that in all likelihood you
will not believe me when I tell you because it is something no
one wants to believe.  I've wrestled with this thing wondering
how best to tell you what you must be told, but all I can say is
that it is absolutely true beyond any shadow of a doubt.  I stake
my entire life and my reputation on this fact.  If there were any
doubt at all about what I am about to reveal, I would not reveal

   At this very moment the United States of America is teetering
on the precipice of a devastating nuclear surprise attack the
likes of which the world has never seen.  If the detailed plans
for war that I have already told you about are carried out as
discussed especially in my monthly AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 6, 12, and
13, this attack might not come for as much as another year or
even more; but that is a very big IF because the capability for
this attack is now in place, and it includes provisions for a
Soviet double-cross of their allies--the four Rockefeller
Brothers, who now rule America behind the scenes.

   Today I want to alert you to the terrible threat we face by
means of these topics:




Topic #1--It was a sleepy Sunday morning in Hawaii nearly 35
years ago when WORLD WAR II came to America.  Much of the Pacific
fleet of the United States Navy was peacefully at anchor
suspecting nothing, while President Franklin D. Roosevelt and his
closest advisors far away in Washington, D.C. waited anxiously
for the attack to occur as planned.  At 7:55 A.M. on that
peaceful Sunday morning, December 7, 1941, more than 100 Japanese
aircraft suddenly appeared in the skies over the Island of Oahu,
Hawaii.  All attempts to warn the Navy of the impending attack
had been thwarted or delayed, and the bottled up American fleet
was torn to shreds as a result of the complete surprise that
resulted.  F.D.R. and his closest advisors had made sure that no
aircraft carriers were caught in the raid because these would be
indispensable in the retaliation to come against Japan.  Instead,
the sacrifice was limited to battleships, destroyers, cruisers,
and several thousand American Servicemen's lives.

   Soon the news of the crushing disaster that had befallen the
United States Navy flashed across a stunned and unbelieving
America, and the words "Pearl Harbor" from that day have been a
synonym for surprise attack of the most catastrophic variety.  It
should also bring to mind high treason and intrigue, because
while most Americans were trying to recover from the shock and
horror of the Pearl Harbor attack, F.D.R. and his Rockefeller
bosses were congratulating themselves on the success of the
operation.  The United States would now be drawn into the war
against Hitler, enabling a Rockefeller take-over of the formerly
British oil concessions in Saudi Arabia; yet President Roosevelt
would be making good on his campaign promises not to send
American boys away to die in a foreign war.  Instead, he had
arranged to get us into war by allowing several thousand American
boys to die in a rigged attack on American territory--Pearl
Harbor!  His renowned "Day of Infamy" speech then galvanized the
nation overnight into a fighting mood.  The obstacle of American
isolationist sentiment had been flattened, and the United States
was AT WAR.

   Today we are once again at the mercy of an imminent Pearl
Harbor-type attack.  As before, we are being given no warning
whatever that this is the case aside from the general level of
tensions here and abroad.  But this time it has been planned to
be far worse because this time the plan is not for America to win
the war but to lose it.

   Two months ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 I first revealed
the existence of the supersecret "Nuclear Safe Zone"--a swath
across roughly the upper half of the continental United States
between the latitudes of 40 and 50 degrees north.  According to
secret agreements between the Rockefeller Brothers and their
Soviet allies, this Zone is supposed to be spared from the
all-out thermonuclear war that is planned to engulf the southern
half of the United States in NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

   This arrangement has three (3) purposes:

First, as I revealed two months ago, it provides a zone within
which the Rockefeller Brothers and their closest collaborators
expect to ride out the coming NUCLEAR WAR ONE in safety and

Second, much of the industrial base and agricultural breadbasket
of America will be preserved for exploitation after the war.

   A third factor, which I did not mention before, has to do with
the high altitude jet stream which goes clear around the earth. 
Should the Soviets find it necessary to back up their so-called
"clean bombs", which I revealed last month, with the older dirty
bombs, they don't want radioactive fallout from America to drift
around the earth and land on the Soviet Union.  More than 95% of
the Soviet Union lies north of the 40th parallel of latitude; so
by agreeing with the Rockefeller Brothers to strike America only
below that latitude except for a small strike against Alaska, the
Soviets have avoided the danger of having much radioactive dust
from America circle the globe to land on their own country.  But
the Soviets are very eager to break free of the Rockefeller
control under which they have functioned for so long, and they
are preparing a double-cross.

   As I reported last month in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 13, the
Safe Zone agreement has been violated by the placement of an
atomic bomb at Seal Harbor, Maine, to blast the summer homes of
Nelson and David Rockefeller off the map.  But that, I am sorry
to report, is only the beginning of the "Pearl Harbor" the
Soviets have prepared for us.  The Soviet double-cross of the
Rockefeller Brothers is to be thorough and complete, and it will
include several more violations of the Nuclear Safe Zone--an
acceptable price in Soviet eyes for breaking free of the
Rockefellers and into the position of absolute world supremacy

   While the United States has focused its missile development on
long-range intercontinental ballistic missiles, the Soviet Union
has never forgotten the potentialities of shorter range missiles,
which are easier to design and build.  That's what the Cuban
Missile Crisis of October 1962 was all about.  The Soviets, not
wishing to depend on their long-range missiles, had installed
much shorter-range missiles in Cuba able to reach many American
cities from the vulnerable south; and when President John F.
Kennedy spoiled the Rockefeller-Soviet plans by forcing Nikita
Khrushchev to remove them, they did not abandon this idea. 
Instead, J.F.K. was removed from the scene himself; and his
replacement, Rockefeller puppet President Lyndon B. Johnson,
handed the Soviets a new site for the implacement of medium-range
missiles to threaten the United States from the south.  This was
done by turning over the huge United States-built MacKenzie
Airfield to the newly independent Marxist republic of Guyana. 
The Americans pulled out, MacKenzie Airfield was re-named the
Temehri Airfield, and this new air base, the largest in Central
and South America, was then fortified by ringing it with nuclear
missiles aimed at the Panama Canal and cities in the southern
half of the United States.  And as l have been reporting for over
two years--without any Government investigation of my charges
whatsoever--the missiles in Guyana are at operational readiness
today, threatening the United States and the Panama Canal.

   But that's not all, my friends.  Five years ago, in 1971,
there was another Soviet missile crisis, this time involving both
Canada and the United States; and I am here revealing it for the
very first time.  The Soviet Missile Crisis of 1971 began with an
accidental discovery by some divers off Vancouver Island, Canada. 
A Vancouver fishing trawler had sunk in the area and divers were
sent down to locate it.  While they were looking, they came
across something unbelievable--a missile anchored to the bottom. 
It was attached by heavy chains to four concrete blocks, each
estimated to weigh five tons.  The blocks in turn were anchored
to the bottom by extra heavy anchors of Soviet design.  The
divers reported their unexpected find immediately, and the North
American Air Defense Command (NORAD) went into action.  The
Canadian ship H.C.M.S. Resogoushe plus two mine-layers and a
torpedo boat were dispatched and immediately covered the area.

   By coincidence, this chance discovery occurred just as the
Soviet Navy was launching its own operation to recover that very
missile.  Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko had just arrived
to visit Vancouver for a hush-hush Foreign Ministers Conference
ostensibly.  Strangely, he arrived aboard the Soviet ship SUROV,
a heavy cruiser of the Cresta class.  But Gromyko explained that
away by saying that he had just been inspecting the Soviet fleet
which was on maneuvers--but that was just a cover story.

   A Soviet oceanographic research ship doing underwater
experiments on guided missiles near Sakhalin had reached the
conclusion that six guided missiles, which had been placed
strategically on the seabed around the North American continent
years before would now have to be recovered and removed at once. 
These had been planted on the orders of Khrushchev after his
defeat by President Kennedy in the Cuban Missile Crisis, and for
years they had been lurking undetected.  But now they would have
to be removed because the Soviet experiments at Sakhalin had
revealed that the metals used in the missiles were proving
unstable and had started disintegrating rapidly in the salt
water.  The situation was very serious, not only because the
missiles were no longer dependable as weapons but also because
corrosion of the warheads could have led to leakage of
radioactive materials or even under certain conditions,
uncontrolled explosions.  This was the real reason for Gromyko's
strange visit to Vancouver aboard the heavy cruiser SUROV in

   The Soviet Navy in reality was invading the territorial waters
of Canada to recover a malfunctioning weapon, the Underwater
Missile; but due to the accidental discovery of the missile by
the Canadian divers, Gromyko's mission was foiled.  He stayed
there for three days aboard the ship and then was aghast to see
the Soviet missile go past him on a barge on the way to dockside. 
Gromyko immediately canceled his appearance in Vancouver and
sailed for home without delay.  The missile itself was rushed by
special airplane immediately to a secret location in the United
States for study and analysis.

   The Vancouver discovery also triggered an intensive search of
all the American and Canadian coasts by specially equipped
surface and underwater vessels.  This search turned up three more
such missiles--one off the coast of California and Oregon;
another just south of San Rosario, Baja, California; and the
third one off the coast of Maine just east of a rocky island
there.  Two additional underwater missiles were known to exist as
well.  One was believed to be somewhere in the arc from Cuba to
Pensacola, Florida; the other was thought to be in the Caribbean
Islands aimed at the Panama Canal.  These last two were never
found by the United States Navy, but the pattern of activity of
the Soviet Navy indicated that they were successfully recovered
by the Soviets.  The Soviets had been poised to mount a recovery
operation for all six missiles, but were prevented from making
any such attempt because of the intensive United States Navy

   Each of the four missiles which were recovered by the joint
Canadian-American effort was examined and its targets determined. 
It turned out that each missile was fitted with multiple
warheads.  The one discovered by the divers off Vancouver had six
targets--the Royal Canadian Naval Base on Vancouver Island, the
Port of Vancouver, the Port of Seattle, and three Boeing aircraft
plants in Seattle, Everett, and Blaine.  The missile found off
the coast of Oregon and California had its multiple warheads
targeted on five centers in the San Francisco Bay area.  The San
Rosario missile was targeted on the United States Naval Base at
San Diego and on the City of Los Angeles.  As for the missile
found in the waters off the coast of Maine, its targets were
Boston, the Submarine Base in Connecticut, the Brooklyn Navy
Yard, and the New York Harbor.  The missile which was apparently
retrieved by the Soviets in the Cuba-Pensacola area was assumed
to have been aimed at strategic coastal targets in the Southeast.

   And so ended the Soviet Missile Crisis of 1971.  In some
respects it was even more dangerous than the Cuban Missile Crisis
nine years earlier because the underwater missiles off our shores
were already operational, whereas those in Cuba were stopped just
short of operational status.  But you've never heard a word about
the Soviet Missile Crisis of 1971.  This is because that would
not have squared well with our official policy of so-called
detente with the Soviet Union.  The Rockefeller agents in our
government knew all about the missiles, and had a ticklish job
keeping the lid on after the accidental discovery by the
Vancouver divers brought NORAD and the United States Navy into
the picture.

   All's well that ends well, or so it seems; but this just
wasn't the end of the Soviet Missile Crisis.  On February 11,
1971, the same year in which the Soviet Missile Crisis occurred,
63 nations signed a treaty prohibiting installation of nuclear
weapons on the seabed beyond any nation's 12-mile Coastal Zone. 
On top of that, the United States over the past dozen years has
laid down a grid of electronic sensing wires and cables on the
ocean floor all along both our Pacific and Atlantic coasts making
the seabed look like a giant spider web.  These detection nets
called "Sosus" for the Atlantic and "Caesar" for the Pacific are
tied into computers which enable any submarine passing over them,
American or foreign, to be detected, located, and even identified
in a very short time.  So, what could happen?

   My friends, the Maginot line did not protect the French from
invasion in World War II--the Germans went right over it.  In the
same way, the Rockefeller Brothers have enabled the Soviets to go
over our underwater detection nets as if they did not exist! 
When President Richard M. Nixon arrived in Moscow on May 22, 1972
for summer talks with the Kremlin, he had more to discuss than
the highly publicized SALT talks.  A key agreement arrived at
then established joint oceanographic projects with the Soviets,
and since that time Soviet oceanographic vessels have been in and
out of our territorial waters continuously!  For approximately
two years these vessels operate in a totally innocent-appearing
fashion while actually gathering information on optimum placement
sites for a new fleet of underwater missiles along our shores. 
By the time the joint Army-Navy teams monitoring the underwater
nets had become accustomed to the Soviet oceanographic ships as a
routine non-threatening presence in our waters, the Soviets were
ready to act.  Under cover of oceanographic operations, the
Soviets began planting underwater missiles along our shores once
again, plus several strategically located atomic bombs.  And as
if they needed it, the Soviets have also slipped in through a
loophole in the 1971 treaty, which superficially seems to ban
such weaponry in our coastal waters.  Most if not all of these
weapons have been planted inside our 12-mile territorial limit,
whereas the treaty only forbids such things beyond that limit.

   This is a chilling echo of President Franklin D. Roosevelt's
promises to avoid a foreign war before World War II, only to help
rig an attack on our own territory.  But the Soviets, having been
given the oceanographic cover they needed in order to get the
bombs and missiles into our coastal waters, have already
double-crossed their Rockefeller allies.  Not only have the
Rockefeller Brothers themselves been marked for destruction, as
signaled by the bomb at Seal Harbor, Maine, but their precious
Nuclear Safe Zone has already been breached by the Soviets in at
least three other places where missiles have been placed contrary
to their agreement with the Rockefellers.  The Soviets, like the
Rockefeller Brothers themselves, are now going "for broke"--they
are trying to arrange in every way they can to break the back of
any conceivable retaliational resistance by the United States in
the coming war.  It is still in the Soviet interest to minimize
warfare within the Nuclear Safe Zone, but specific targets will
be attacked within this Zone whenever the Soviets consider it
necessary to achieve their goal of total victory and total world
domination over the United States.

   I can now reveal that the coastal waters of the United
States--including Alaska, Hawaii, and the Panama Canal Zone--now
contain at least ten (10) multiple warhead, short-range,
underwater-launch missiles of a new advanced design.  In
addition, at least four (4) atomic bombs have been strategically
placed in harbor areas.  Here is the situation as it now stands
according to my own latest Intelligence sources:

First, the four bombs.  One is the bomb I was able to reveal last
month which is placed at Seal Harbor, Maine, to destroy the
summer homes of David and Nelson Rockefeller.  The second is
planted in the Potomac River near the United States Naval
Ordnance Station at Indian Head, Maryland.  The third is in the
Mississippi River upstream from New Orleans in the vicinity of
Bonnet Carre Spillway and Floodway.  And the fourth atomic bomb
has been planted in the Port of Valdez, Alaska, which is the
southern terminus of the Trans-Alaska Oil Pipeline.  By rendering
the port of Valdez useless, of course, the Pipeline will be put
out of action, since oil tankers are supposed to carry the oil
from the Pipeline delivery point at Valdez to destinations in the
lower United States.

   As for the short-range multiple warhead Soviet missiles which
once again infest our coastal waters, three violate the Nuclear
Safe Zone.  One is in Boston Harbor; the second is in Long Island
Sound about midway between New York City and the Submarine Base
at New London, Connecticut; and the third is in the
Seattle-Vancouver area situated between Victoria, British
Columbia, on the north and the Port Angeles or Sequim,
Washington, area on the south.

Outside the Nuclear Safe Zone, missile No. 4 is in Chesapeake Bay
east of Washington, D.C.  No. 5 is located just off shore from
Pensacola, Florida.  A 6th missile has been planted in Galveston
Bay, Texas.  A 7th lies just off shore of San Diego, California;
while missile No. 8 is deep inside San Pablo Bay near San
Francisco.  The 9th missile is located in the Atlantic Ocean near
the north entrance to the Panama Canal.  And finally, missile No.
10 with tragic irony is poised in the Pacific Ocean near the
entrance to Pearl Harbor, Hawaii.  The exact location of the
Pearl Harbor missile is: Longitude 157 degrees, 58 minutes, 58
seconds; latitude 21 degrees, 18 minutes, 28 seconds.  All the
Navy needs to do is to look and do it now before the Soviets have
time to sneak in and move it, and they'll find this missile.

   I respectfully urge--no, I demand--that the Joint Chiefs of
Staff immediately take such actions as are required to remove the
deadly missiles which now menace the United States and Vancouver,
Canada from our own territorial waters.  The things I have just
revealed are true, my friends, and I urge you to add your
challenge to mine.  I stand ready to cooperate fully with the
Joint Chiefs of Staff in the new larger Soviet missile crisis we
are now in.

   Will the Joint Chiefs act?  If they do not do so and soon,
then they themselves will have violated their oath to protect and
safeguard our Constitution, our Nation, our lives, and the lives
of generations to come.

Topic #2--I comment often about the covert alliance that exists
between the Corporate Socialists headed by the four Rockefeller
Brothers in America, and the Communist bosses of the Soviet
Union.  It is essential that this relationship be understood even
though the day is fast approaching when the Soviets plan to end
it by means of a double-cross.  But it is also important to grasp
the fact that the Rockefellers are not themselves Communists.  To
them, Communism is just a very convenient and powerful tool, a
stepping stone to power.  They don't themselves subscribe to any
rigid ideology, Communist or otherwise.  Their only real doctrine
is that of domination and control along with destruction of
everything and anyone they cannot control.  In this they bear a
striking resemblance to just one man, Adolf Hitler.

   What we have today is a blend of emerging fascism, which is a
combination of State Control with Monopolistic Capitalism and
Socialism of the Marxist variety all wrapped up in American
packaging and sold to us by means of Rockefeller public relations
propaganda.  Our would-be Dictators realize full well that if
they were to dress up in combat fatigues, get up on a high
balcony and rant and rave about the need for the state to control
our lives totally, we would all recognize them right away for
what they are--and their schemes would fail.  Instead, they wear
nice business suits, use cleverly worded phrases that seem to say
exactly what we want to hear, and make sure that they smile a
great deal.  And instead of swaying great crowds in a public
square from a high balcony, they can now cajole and mislead whole
nations from the matchless high balcony of television.

   In monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 1, June 1975, I mentioned the role
played by the Rockefeller empire in providing the support Adolf
Hitler needed in order to rise to power in Germany.  They
supported him, watched him, and learned from him.  In the late
1920's the Rockefellers had succeeded in wrestling control of the
German dye and drug cartel, I. G. Farben Industry, AG, away from
the British.  This, plus an ongoing rivalry between Britain and
the Rockefellers over oil, led the British to institute boycott
tactics preventing the Rockefeller Standard Oil interests from
exploiting the vast Saudi Arabian oil concessions which the
Rockefellers had pried loose from the British during World War I. 
The Rockefeller solution: Confront Britain with a threat great
enough to break Britain's Saudi Arabian oil boycott.

   When 22-year-old Nelson Rockefeller returned from his
around-the-world honeymoon trip in 1930, he convinced his father,
John D. Rockefeller, Jr., that the solution to their problems lay
in one Adolf Hitler.  Not many Germans really took Hitler
seriously in 1930, but the Rockefellers did.  Having observed
Hitler at close range, they were convinced that Hitler could
serve the Rockefeller purpose well.  Hitler was obviously bent on
conquest and war; so providing the support he needed to achieve
power would produce a very real menace to Britain in due
course--just the right medicine to cure Britain of her Saudi
Arabian boycott against the Rockefeller oil interests.

   Hitler was especially attractive for Rockefeller purposes for
one additional reason beyond his sheer aggressiveness.  His
earlier failure and imprisonment had taught Hitler a very
important lesson which the Rockefellers themselves had also
learned decades before; namely, that successful revolutions are
best carried out with, and not against, the full power of a
nation's government.  In other words, Hitler had concluded that
the best way to achieve his goals would be to first acquire
control of the government through means which were legal, at
least in appearance, and then to carry out the revolutionary
changes he desired.  Therefore, by supporting Hitler and watching
to see how he went about the details of his take-over and
revolution, the Rockefellers stood to learn valuable lessons for
their own use later on.  This was a very nice bonus for the
Rockefellers, so support for Hitler through covert channels began
immediately; and from 1930 onward, Hitler's star rose rapidly.

   The same time, the Rockefellers had to make sure that they
would be in a position to check Hitler's advance when he had
served his purpose--which was to frighten the British government
into surrendering control over Saudi Arabia.  In other words, a
balance of power had to be maintained so that Hitler would not
get out of control.  For this reason and as well as others,
Rockefeller support for Hitler was counterbalanced by support
also for the man who, as president, would have the job of getting
America into the war to stop Hitler--Franklin Delano Roosevelt! 
FDR had staged a political comeback from his crippling attack of
polio several years before, but it was about from 1930 onward
that FDR's political star rose rapidly on the national scene
paralleling the rise of Hitler in Germany.  Throughout their
period on the world stage, the careers of Hitler and FDR
paralleled one another.  Both came to power early in 1933, and
both proposed sweeping changes in rapid fashion that differed
widely from their campaign pledges.  Both exercised unprecedented
power during their terms in office, and both died in April 1945
less than three weeks apart as the war in Europe was ending.

   The dual role of the Rockefellers throughout can be
illustrated, for example, by the actions of Nelson Rockefeller. 
In 1935 he became a Director of the Creole Petroleum Company in
Venezuela, a subsidiary of Rockefeller-owned Standard Oil of New
Jersey.  Creole was the principal avenue through which the Nazi
war machine was provided with the essential fuel without which
war could not have been waged; and for seven years, 1937 through
1943, Creole Petroleum shipped 90% of its Venezuelan oil
production to Germany in Nazi tankers, only a token 10% going to
the United States.  In this way the Rockefeller
empire--increasingly dominated by Nelson, David, Laurance, and
John D. III--provided Hitler with over 65-million barrels of oil
each year from the Venezuelan oil fields alone well into the
World War II.

   In 1940, Nelson resigned his directorship of Creole Petroleum
to become Coordinator of InterAmerican affairs by appointment of
Rockefeller puppet president FDR.  As Coordinator, Nelson was
supposedly feverishly at work to combat the Nazi menace in this
hemisphere, the very menace that was being sustained by oil
provided by his Creole Petroleum Company!  Through Hitler, the
Rockefellers did at last bring Great Britain to her knees, and a
great deal was learned from the plan Hitler followed that is
being followed again today by the four Rockefeller Brothers.

   Hitler had two very important rules for exercising power.  One
was to use the masses by means of effective propaganda, leading
them to accept and do things which they normally would not.  The
other rule was to make sure that any lies were big lies, so big
that no one could believe they were lies, coming from their

   Those same principles are being used today in updated and very
smooth ways by the Rockefeller Brothers and their agents. 
Hitler's rise to power was made possible by an era of inflation,
shortages, and then depression.  The same conditions are being
brought about deliberately here in America in order to help
achieve the same end result--revolution and dictatorship!

   While Hitler was in prison, he began writing "Mein Kampf",
which means "my struggle."  In it and in his speeches, Hitler
made it clear what he would do if he ever acquired the power to
do it.  In a similar vein, we can read "The American Rich"
published in 1930 by Rockefeller advisor Hoffman Nickerson; "The
New Federalism" by Nelson Rockefeller; "The Emerging
Constitution" published in 1974 by Rexford Tugwell quietly
revealing a dictatorial new Constitution, which was written to
match a secret outline provided by Nelson Rockefeller himself; or
the Bicentennial Declaration advertisements published nation-wide
in 1975 by John D. Rockefeller III's National Committee for the
Bicentennial Era.  The last item could have been titled: A
Bicentennial Manifesto, since a manifesto is nothing more than a
public declaration of intentions, motives, or views; but everyone
now knows that the Communist Manifesto of a century ago was no
joke, so that word was avoided.

   But keep in mind what Hitler said in January 1941, quote:

  "It is nonsense for the rest of the world to pretend today that
I did not reveal this program until 1933, or 1935, or 1937.
Instead of listening to foolish chatter, these gentlemen would
have been wiser to read what I have written and re-written
thousands of times.  No human being has declared or recorded what
he wanted more often than I."

If the four Rockefeller Brothers are allowed to succeed in their
diabolical plans, they, too, will be in a position to indict us
in practically the same words.

   Hitler directed much of his appeal to the new generation. 
Young people had grown up in an abnormal time, lacking normal
roots and values, and who were therefore more vulnerable to being
misled and used.  Introduction of the 18-year old vote,
regardless of its actual effect, was intended for a similar
purpose here in America.  Hitler pursued a 'policy of legality'
strictly as a tactic in his campaign to take control of the
German government.  In every respect Hitler was challenging the
authority of the State under the Weimar Constitution, yet he
camouflaged this challenge by using fair-sounding words.

   The same thing is happening once again here today.  The words
we hear in the presidential campaign--for example, such as: "A
new world framework for peace", "governmental reorganization",
"interdependence."  But the meaning of these words involve World
government, surrender of United States sovereignty, and
suspension or replacement of the United States CONSTITUTION! 
"But why", you may ask, "do they bother to leave any clues at all
like this if they're trying to be devious?  Why don't they just
lie outright?"  The answer is simply that it is harder to lie
convincingly than to tell the truth; and if one starts telling
actual lies, it becomes harder and harder over a period of time
to keep track of what has been said before, and eventually one
makes mistakes which can be detected.  So instead they tell a
little bit of truth but always in such a way that you won't
understand it unless you are very alert.

   Hitler realized that his 'policy of legality' could only lead
to success in one way; that was to gain access to the position of
Chancellor and use the emergency powers of the president under
the Weimar Constitution.  This was true because try as he might,
Hitler was never able to achieve majority popular support for
himself or his Nazi Party.  And today, our would-be Dictator,
Nelson Rockefeller, who has also been frustrated in his attempts
to gain majority popular support nationally, is also trying to
position himself to seize control by means of emergency
presidential powers.  David Rockefeller's agent Jimmy Carter
meanwhile, whose build-up has been used to impress Ford with
Rockefeller power, also stands ready in case Nelson's illness
should overcome him.

   In 1936 Hitler said, quote:

  "It is not enough to overthrow the old State, but that the new
State must previously have been built up and be practically ready
to one's hand.  In 1933 it was no longer a question of
overthrowing a state by an act of violence; meanwhile the new
state had been built up, and all that there remained to do was to
destroy the last remnants of the old state--and that took but a
few hours."

So it is that the Rockefeller Brothers are rapidly getting the
governmental machinery into place which is to go into full
operation under their dictatorial new Constitution for the,

   Shortly before Hitler became Chancellor in 1933, he said to
then Chancellor Bruning, quote: "Herr Chancellor, if the German
nation once empowers the National Socialist movement to introduce
a constitution other than that which we have today, then you
cannot stop it."  On September 12, 1975, Nelson Rockefeller
displayed exactly the same thinking, during a news conference in
Dallas, Texas, in response to criticisms leveled at him as our
appointed Vice-President by a columnist; Rockefeller's answer
was, quote: "Well, he's got one, so there's nothing he can do
about it."  On August 9, 1974, our last elected president,
Richard Nixon, became the first in American history to resign,
hounded out of office by means of the Watergate scandal.

   Listen now to the following words taken from a conspirator's
diary, and I quote:

  "For him alone, winter seems to have arrived.  He is being
secretly undermined and is already completely isolated.  He is
anxiously looking for collaborators.  Our mice are busily at work
gnawing through the last supports of his position."

Those words could have been written about Watergate with complete
accuracy, but they were not.  They were written by Hitler's
propaganda chief, Paul Joseph Goebbels, 12 days before Chancellor
Bruning was forced to resign on May 30, 1932.  Bruning was
succeeded by an interim chancellor more to Hitler's liking, Franz
von Papen; and Hitler himself replaced von Papen on January 30,
1933, when Hitler was appointed Chancellor by aging President von
Hindenburg under the provisions of the Weimar Constitution.  It
was this weakness in the Weimar Constitution--the fact that the
Chancellor was appointed, not elected, that enabled Hitler to
succeed in his plan to take control of Germany by 'legal' means
despite his lack of majority popular support!

   This lesson was not lost on Nelson Rockefeller, who introduced
exactly the same weakness into the United States Constitution for
his own benefit by means of the 25th Amendment!  The 25th
Amendment was proposed a scant three weeks after the
assassination of President John F. Kennedy by Nelson
Rockefeller's water boy, Birch Bayh, almost as if it had been
ready and waiting!

   Immediately after becoming Chancellor, Hitler forced new
elections.  His election campaign promised nothing at all, but
instead simply ran down the failures of the past.  Hitler said
simply, "Give us four years."  Meanwhile he assured his
supporters that these would actually be the last elections to be
expected for 10, perhaps even a hundred years.

   Terrorism and lawlessness mushroomed during the campaign,
culminating in the Reichstag fire just a few days before the
elections.  This pretext was used to suspend individual liberties
as guaranteed by the Weimar Constitution, enabling the Nazis to
take any actions they pleased against their political opponents. 
Following the election and the suppression of all effective
opposition, Hitler forced the passage of the infamous enabling
law, the foundation of Hitler's dictatorship.  This gave the
Chancellor the right to make laws without the cooperation of the
Reichstag for a period of four years.  Now, after it was too
late, it became clear what Hitler had meant in his campaign
theme, "Just give us four years."

   Hitler's enabling law gave him the power to rule by fiat,
which is the power of dictatorship.  To enact a law as Dictator
without the concurrence of the Reichstag, the Chancellor had only
to write a law and publish it, and in exactly the same way the
President of the United States can, and does, make law without
any action by Congress in the form of "EXECUTIVE ORDERS."  These
'laws' signed by the President himself, become law simply by
being published in the "FEDERAL REGISTER."

   Since March 1933, we have been technically in a continuous
condition of 'National Emergency', and many governmental powers
have been usurped by American presidents under this condition
over the past 43 years.  But every time a major new phase is
entered, there is a fresh declaration of National Emergency.

   In monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 10 four months ago, I alerted you
to the fact that plans are now progressing rapidly toward
implementing Executive Order 11490 signed by President Nixon
nearly seven years ago to provide in detail for a total
government take-over of all activities in a 'declared Emergency'. 
And on June 11, 1976, just last month, President Ford signed a
new Executive Order 11921 very quietly, which updates the older
Executive Order and shifts the emphasis heavily in the direction
of post-attack conditions as we near the outbreak of war!  It
places heavy emphasis on procedures relating to nuclear,
biological, and chemical hazards of the sort introduced into our
environment by the planned war.  It provides for the
establishment, not the preservation, of an economy for the
nation.  It provides for sweeping controls on that all important
resource, WATER, which is to be controlled and allocated by the
federal government.  This is the outcome of the little noticed
"National Commission on Water Quality" which was started by
Nelson Rockefeller at the same time as his better known
"Commission on Critical Choices."

   My friends, write to your Congressman and demand that he send
you a copy of the FEDERAL REGISTER for June 15, 1976, and read
for yourself the 44 pages of detailed provisions for the
"National Emergency" which is planned for all of us.  If
possible, this will be brought into play in the wake of oil
shortages and other disruptions generated in the wake of a Mid
East war!  But the thrust of Executive Order 11921 just signed by
Ford has to do with the aftermath of nuclear attack.

   The pattern, my friends, is unmistakable.  After Hitler
achieved power, he progressively consolidated it by eliminating
opposition political parties, ending independent local government
and replacing it with agents of his federal government, enforcing
his will by means of a Secret Police and spies, disposing of
troublesome elements by means of Concentration Camps, and using
Germany as a springboard for war to conquer other nations as

   If the Rockefeller Brothers succeed in their plans, the United
States of America will soon witness a replay of Hitlerism,
brought up to date and made more repressive and horrible than
ever by those who used Hitler for their own purposes.

Topic #3--If NUCLEAR WAR ONE is permitted to take place as
planned on American soil, perhaps you will survive it.  Many will
not, but some will; but if you do survive, what sort of future do
you and your trusting children have to look forward to?

   My friends, whether or not the Rockefellers are double-crossed
by their Soviet allies, the aftermath of NUCLEAR WAR ONE promises
to be slavery for you and all your loved ones.  If the
Rockefeller Brothers somehow find a way to prevent a double-cross
by the Soviets, then the war will proceed as planned for the
benefit of the Rockefellers.  Half of America's population will
be consumed in nuclear blasts a thousand times hotter than the
ovens of Hitler.  Those who are left will be given the task of
rebuilding America along the patterns dictated by the Rockefeller
Brothers--a once free people reduced to slave labor, shipped like
cattle to one area to rebuild a bombed-out power dam, to another
area to work in uranium mines, to still another area to work the
agricultural lands owned by the huge agri-businesses owned by the
Rockefellers and their collaborators.

   If the Rockefellers are double-crossed, the death toll during
the war itself may be even higher but the results afterward will
be no different.  Instead of living under a Rockefeller
dictatorship, we will exist under Soviet occupation whose
characteristics will be practically the same.  And so, my
friends, the choice between the Rockefeller Brothers and their
Soviet allies is no choice at all.

   If these things are allowed to come to pass and the final link
in the chain reaction that is to begin with general war in the
Middle East, then the life that will be left to us and our little
ones will not be worth living.  That is why for my part I would
rather speak the truth now in the hope that we may yet turn to a
third choice, the saving of our free country from war and
dictatorship while it can still be done.  The lesson of history
is that this cannot be done; that like countless peoples before
us, we will refuse to see the truth, believe it, and act on it in
time to save ourselves.  That is how most Germans reacted to
Adolf Hitler in the early 1930's, and that is how most Americans
are still behaving today.

   But 200 years ago a small band of very wise men defied the
rules of history and created a government that freed men as no
government had done in 5000 years, the UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 
And you and I can redeem this priceless heritage.  We, too, can
and must defy history in the same way by saving the unique
heritage that is ours.

   Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you,
and may God bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 13

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC. (Current 1982
address: 1629 K St., NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello everybody, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is June 26, 1976,
and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 13.

   Just a few days from now, on July 4, 1976, the United States
of America will observe its 200th birthday, our BICENTENNIAL. 
This is a special milestone in our history which will be here
only once and then gone, never to return again.

   What it should be is a time of thankful reflection on our
past, of joyous appreciation of our present, and of eager
anticipation of our future.  That is what it should be, but it is
being ruined deliberately for us by a handful of very powerful
people who want to take it all away from you and me.  Instead of
peacefully celebrating the freedom won for us in the American
Revolution two centuries ago, we are being plunged into a
so-called "Second American Revolution" to end that freedom.

   As Patrick Henry declared in his Liberty or Death speech of
March 1775:

  "Gentlemen say, peace, peace; but there is no peace.  The war
is actually begun!  The next gale that sweeps from the north will
bring to our ears the clash of resounding arms!..."

   Economically, politically, and militarily the war to undo our
independence and destroy our way of life is raging all around us
today.  It is therefore up to us, the American people, to
reaffirm our treasured DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE whose signing
we celebrate on July 4, and to enforce it against those who seek
to enslave us--the Four Rockefeller Brothers along with their
client followers.

   At the conclusion of monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 last month I
challenged those who wield great power on behalf of the Four
Rockefeller Brothers to declare their own independence and begin
immediately to work for good, instead of evil.

   The top layer in the vast pyramid of power under Rockefeller
control are the innermost circle of Foundation Trustees.  My
associates and I know who they are.  There are about a hundred of
them--the Trustees of a mere dozen Foundations--controlling the
financial and industrial base of America not only through the
Foundations themselves but through their interlocking
directorates of banks, multinational corporations, insurance
companies, educational institutions, and legal firms all for the
benefit of their Rockefeller bosses, NOT for yours!

   These inner circle Trustees--and they know who they are--have
breached a fiduciary trusteeship because the Foundations are
public supported, being almost totally exempt from United States
taxation.  I charge these Trustees with subversion of schools,
churches, government, and the very liberty intended by our
Founding Fathers.  Their day is coming, they will be unmasked,
and they will do well to be found hard at work to undo the evil
they have set in motion; otherwise their power, like that of
their masters the Four Rockefeller Brothers, can and I believe
will be taken away and given to more faithful custodians by an
increasingly informed, aroused America.

   Last month I explained the most important key to the
maintenance and expansion of power--deliberate destruction. 
Today I want to point out how CONSPIRACY (they call it
commitment) is always involved in such deliberate destruction in
order to expand their power.

   My three topics today are:




Topic #1--Suppose a pair of thugs were to confront you in a
parking lot, steal your brand new $5,000 car, sell the
unidentifiable parts at a junk yard for $50, and push the rest
over a cliff.  The thugs would be $50 richer at the expense of
your losing 100 times that much, and the value built into the
destroyed car would be permanently lost and irretrievable.  If
this happened to you, you would be the victim of economic
destruction which benefits only the destroyers to the detriment
of everyone else.

   Most thieves, of course, would know better than to just walk
up and confront you this way, face to face; instead they would
work out a plan together whereby they could make off with your
car without your knowing who did it, coordinating their actions
so that they would not be caught.

   The legal term for such planning of an illegal act by two or
more individuals is called "conspiracy", and in this case it
would be a conspiracy for the purpose of economic destruction.

   If a ring of thieves were to make a continuing business of
stealing cars, selling their parts and junking the remains, they
would no doubt make sure that they maintained a convincing image
as legitimate business men so that no one would suspect anything. 
If they didn't get caught, the members of the auto theft ring
might get wealthier and wealthier, appearing to be pillars of the
community in the process.  But meanwhile their predatory
activities behind the scenes would be a serious drain on the
community's economy, perhaps heightened by the inability after a
certain point for residents to buy Auto Theft Insurance. 
Eventually the unsuspecting townspeople might turn to the little
group of citizens who appear to be wisest because they had become
the wealthiest, the well disguised thieves themselves, to tell
them how to solve the community's deepening problems; and the
thieves, if they foresaw this opportunity to steal everything at
once, might well have a new town charter ready to propose that
would put them in charge of everything.

   This, basically is what the Four Rockefeller Brothers and
their close associates are up to economically--economic
destruction for their own benefit but on a vast complex scale.  I
described the economic aspects of this three years ago in my book
"THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR"; but instead of a new town
charter, the Rockefellers have their secret "NEW STATES OF
AMERICA CONSTITUTION" ready to enslave us all!

   The Rockefeller conspiracy for economic destruction is all
around us, and far advanced!  Consider, for example, the gold
situation.  I have stated before and repeat again now, that David
Rockefeller plans for gold to go past $2,000 an ounce and the
economic chaos that is being brought on by David and his
brothers; and yet since about the time of the first Gold Auction
by the United States Treasury on January 6, 1975, gold has been
defying all natural market influences and slowly dropped in price
without regard to anything else that is going on!  The situation
has gotten so worrisome that at least one newsletter specializing
in this area has suspended publication, and other analysts
express bewilderment also.

   The question is: What's wrong with gold prices?  The answer
has two parts--Fort Knox and South Africa.  A year ago the
cover-up for the Fort Knox Gold Scandal was a prime influence in
artificially holding down gold prices, as I have explained in
earlier tapes; but now the main factor in the gold price is
economic warfare against South Africa.

   The Rockefeller Brothers and their allies, the Rothschilds,
have formed a conspiracy to double-cross their associates in
South Africa, such as the Guggenheims and others.  Through joint
action on the London Gold Market, the Rockefeller-Rothschild team
are manipulating gold prices downward to reduce South Africa's
income from gold sales--income that is needed in order to resist
the Rockefeller-Soviet take-over of southern Africa that is now
far advanced.

   This tactic against South Africa and all of southern Africa is
having side effects elsewhere as well, such as the suspension of
some gold-mining operations here and abroad due to the inability
of current low gold prices to pay for extraction costs.

   Early this month, on June 2, 1976, the International Monetary
Fund held its first gold auction in what will allegedly be a
four-year series of gold sales.  When the IMF announced the
beginning of its gold auction series, the United States Treasury
announced that there would be no competing sales of United States
gold during that four-year period--a clever move since there is
no United States gold left to sell except for a small amount left
over from the two Treasury auctions of 1975 which utilized the
illegally-obtained gold from the Exchange Stabilization Fund. 
This tiny leftover amount of United States gold was about 780,000
ounces, and by odd coincidence this was the exact amount sold
under the IMF banner in Washington, D.C., on June 2!  Was that
really IMF gold?  Or was it actually the very last of America's
gold, disposed of in yet another illegal maneuver?

   Many questions have been asked about the reason for the
International Economic Conference being held in Puerto Rico this
weekend which was caused by the United States; but I can reveal
to you that one of the main secret topics to be discussed at this
conference is whether to continue with further gold auctions by
the IMF even though the IMF has announced a general time schedule
for future gold auctions.  Should the IMF gold supply be shut
off, and once the current turmoil in southern Africa succeeds in
shutting down the gold mines there, the stage will be set at last
for gold prices to take off.  It will then be just a matter of
selecting the proper moment politically, then the
Rockefeller-Rothschild team will take the lid off the gold
pressure cooker.  Gold will climb ever higher; paper currencies
like the United States dollar, the pound sterling, and others
will be thrown into the fires of inflation; the Stock Market will
collapse; and the generalized economic destruction sought by the
Rockefeller Brothers for their own benefit will begin its final,
catastrophic phase.

   The United States economy has been bled dry of its normal
resilience and stands on the edge of instability.  Banks continue
to fail here and there, and just a few days ago more than
one-third of Mississippi's Savings & Loan Associations were put
under a ban on withdrawals to stop a spreading run on deposits
that was bordering on panic.  More than 120,000 accounts and
nearly half a billion dollars in depositors' money are now tied
up, out of reach.  Much has happened nation-wide in the Bank
Holiday declared by President Franklin D. Roosevelt in 1933.  The
specific trigger of this situation in Mississippi was localized;
but the underlying conditions that allowed it to spread, now
exist throughout the United States brought about by faulty, poor
banking practices fostered by David Rockefeller who still thinks
of himself as an OSS spy.

   Those who depend on our Social Security System are also being
swindled without mercy.  It has now been revealed that the
currently foreseeable obligations for Social Security are at
least four thousand billion dollars more than the total projected
income into the fund to cover them--half again as large as the
estimate just one year ago!  The true situation is even worse. 
An accelerating inflation, feeding on itself now, will either
destroy the System or create an unbearable burden for current

   And as I spelled out in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 9, February
1976, the conspiracy to destroy our postal service, with all the
destructive effects that it will have economically and otherwise,
is continuing.  The recent trial balloons about terminating
Saturday mail service are just a pale shadow of things to come. 
I strongly urge everyone who can do so to get a Post Office box
now while you can.  The day is coming when this may well be the
only mail service left to us under the destructive control of the
Rockefeller Brothers and their Corporate Socialist associates!

Topic #2--Conspiracy for political destruction is an ever present
aspect of the Rockefeller program to bring about the
revolutionary changes they desire.  In this area of maximum
intrigue and deception the unexpected can happen.

   The Capitol Hill sex scandals which broke several weeks ago
starting with Congressman Wayne Hays are a part of the conspiracy
for political destruction in the United States.  It was Hays,
acting on behalf of the Rockefeller Brothers who stopped the
Reece Committee investigations into tax-free Foundations in
1954--an honest investigation which, had it been allowed to run
its course, might well have prevented the national disaster that
threatens us today.  It was also Hays, ironically, who nine years
ago fought the establishment of the House Ethics Committee which
is now investigating him even though he triggered the downfall of
Congressman Adam Clayton Powell on ethical grounds.  Now Hays'
own turn has come and his political destruction is being turned
toward the advancement of the Rockefeller political program. 
After the Hays scandal broke it was quickly joined by similar
allegations about other members of Congress, and the whole thing
is turning into an American rerun of the Profumo Affair that
shook up the British Parliament several years ago.

   This destruction of some political careers breaking at this
particular time has two purposes.  The first purpose is aimed at
the presidential campaign, while the second longer-range purpose
has to do with the ultimate fate of Congress itself!

   The first major impact is supposed to come at the Democratic
National Convention.  The sex scandals so far seem to afflict
primarily Democrats, and this is no accident--not because the
Republicans in Congress are the least bit more moral than the
Democrats but because this is a political ploy aimed at the
Democratic Party; and already the frightened Democrats are
scrambling to introduce so-called reforms in Congressional
privileges to try to prop up their image.

   The next step is to be the downgrading of Jimmy Carter, who at
this moment is being proclaimed a sure thing for the nomination. 
This is planned even though Jimmy Carter is a puppet of David
Rockefeller and has been for over three years.

   Carter was initially chosen as a tool to destroy the George
Wallace presidential threat and this, of course, was successful. 
Then the Rockefeller major media turned Carter into a steam
roller to flatten all the other Democratic contenders as well
except for Rockefeller ally Hubert Humphrey, who knows the score
and entered no Primaries; California Governor Brown, who also has
Rockefeller backing; and Senator Henry Jackson whom Nelson
Rockefeller himself had to blow out of the water by alleging that
Jackson's staff harbored Communist sympathizers such as
Rockefeller's own long-time close associate Dr. Dorothy Fosdick. 
Right now they are still getting their mileage out of Carter by
giving him tremendous publicity as he delivers foreign policy
speeches written for him by Professor Brzezinski, who is the
Director of the powerful Tri-Lateral Commission on behalf of
David Rockefeller.  And especially Carter is being used to inject
an explicit moral leadership theme into the presidential
campaign.  But Carter is scheduled to run into trouble.  The
Rockefeller-controlled major media made him and they will unmake

   For example, it will be said that he has no true capacity to
survive a campaign, that he is a nobody who has come up from
nowhere too fast and that he lacks humor, that he takes himself
too seriously, that he is overconfident in the Dewey style, that
it is difficult for him to make personal contact, that he does
not have the ability to compromise, that he arouses widespread
misgivings, that he cannot cope with stress situations, and that
he leaves himself open for attack on slip-of-the-tongue personal
opinions.  These are hardly leadership characteristics.  He is,
therefore, the captain of a political Titanic minutes before it
sinks to the bottom along with everyone who is clutching his

   By the time the Democratic Convention begins next month the
Rockefeller scenario now is for Carter's supposedly unbeatable
delegate line-up to be shaky and vulnerable, and for moral
leadership to be a nagging concern thanks to the sex scandals.  A
deadlock on the first ballot will set the stage for an
electrifying upset with moral leadership assuming a key role. 
The deadlocked Convention is programmed to turn at last to
H.H.--not Hubert Humphrey but former Senator Harold Hughes of

   Hughes received heavy publicity in the Rockefeller controlled
major media several years ago when he quit the Senate, reportedly
to pursue religious activities.  His credibility as a moral
leader will be unsurpassed, but 15 months ago in my AUDIO BOOK
talking tape No. 2 on the "FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL AND WHAT IT
MEANS TO YOU" I revealed this plan concocted by Nelson
Rockefeller for Hughes to be nominated as a dark horse.  In that
tape I described him and the way he is to be used but did not
name him, hoping that he would wake up and not go along with this
plan; but at the present time everything is still lined up for
Hughes to be nominated in this way.

   Last December 1, 1975, Hughes was even installed as chairman
of the "Commission on the Operation of the Senate", a one-year
operation set up by the Rockefeller Brothers to be a vehicle for
Hughes.  This Commission, virtually unknown to the public, makes
Hughes highly visible on Capitol Hill yet practically invisible
to the rest of the country--that is, until he receives his cue to
walk into the spotlight.

   In revealing this plan I must remind you that even as long
standing as it is, and even though it is still on course at this
moment, it could still change.  The Rockefeller Brothers, as I
explained several months ago, are continuing to juggle a lot of
factors in their do-or-die catch-up plan, and they always have
contingency backup plans.  The important thing to know is that
you should not be deceived if the Hughes plan is carried out and
what looks like a stunning upset takes place.  Remember the words
of that old "political animal" F.D.R.:

  "Nothing ever happens in politics by accident.  If it happens,
you can bet it was planned that way."

   The second and longer-range purpose of the Congressional sex
scandals is to begin the final downfall of Congress as an
institution, paving the way for Nelson Rockefeller as our
President and Dictator to abolish it under his "NEW STATES OF
AMERICA CONSTITUTION."  Momentum in this direction is supposed to
pick up steam soon with a startling echo of the Watergate
Scandal--the trial of Gulf Oil lobbyist Claude C. Wild, Jr. for
illegal campaign contributions.

   At this time two years ago the Watergate Scandal had reached
the stage of impeachment proceedings for the political
destruction of our last elected President, Richard M. Nixon. 
This served its purpose of placing Nelson Rockefeller in the
Vice-Presidency by way of his 25th Amendment to the UNITED STATES
CONSTITUTION; but now some of the very legislators who basked in
the glory of Nixon's destruction are about to be destroyed
themselves in the wake of testimony that they, too, were guilty
of illegal fund raising like that for which they condemned Nixon. 
Erupting between the two national conventions, the trial of the
Gulf lobbyist is calculated to have destructive political effects
on both Parties and both Houses of Congress.

   This same trial, after the Republican Convention nominates a
Ford-Rockefeller ticket, is also supposed to ensnare President
Ford in scandal.  This is the option of several that are ready by
which Nelson Rockefeller plans to become Acting President on or
about September 19, 1976, after Ford is declared "unable to
discharge his duties as President" under Section 4 of
Rockefeller's 25th Amendment.  Once he is in position as Acting
President, Rockefeller plans to move as rapidly as circumstances
allow in dismantling what remains of our free Republic.  At the
cost of destroying everything the rest of us hold dear about our
land, Nelson Aldrich Rockefeller hopes ultimately to realize his
own lifelong dream when under his secret new Constitution he
begins a nine-year term as our Dictator-President.  And, my
friend, only you and I can stop it!

Topic #3--The idea that any group of people could be both
powerful enough and ruthless enough to deliberately conspire to
destroy human life by means of war, to suit their own purposes,
is a very hard thing to accept.  To most of us, human life is a
sacred and precious thing, not only our own lives but those of
others as well.  But to those who are consumed by an insatiable
lust for power, the most important thing is CONTROL--control of
people and of their lives.  If this means that some people have
to be destroyed in order to make those who remain more
controllable, that is regarded as an acceptable cost by these
power-hungry people.

   For example, the Communist regime that rules mainland China
today was brought into power at an estimated cost of 64-million
lives; but three years ago, while Rockefeller agent Chou En-Lai
was still alive, David Rockefeller said, quote:

  "Whatever the price of the Chinese Revolution, it has obviously
succeeded in producing a more efficient and dedicated

And he went on to add, quote:

  "The social experiment in China under Chairman Mao's leadership
is one of the most important and successful in human history."

Since David wrote these words, however, Chou En-Lai has passed
from the scene and China for all intents and purposes has slipped
free of Rockefeller control.  This removes China from the success
category, by Rockefeller definition, and China therefore now has
to be whipped back into line by means of war.

   Japan, too, is straining at the bonds of Rockefeller control,
and is therefore being forced by the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance
into the Red Chinese orbit so that both nations can be crushed
into submission together with one shot.  As I explained in my
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 of November 1975, the war now building
in the Middle East is engineered to set the stage for the far
larger war in Asia which in turn is to be the prelude to NUCLEAR
WAR ONE waged primarily on American soil!

   To see that "control" matters more to the Rockefeller Brothers
than does human life, one need only to compare our foreign
policies toward Canada and the Soviet Union.  Canada, our
friendly neighbor who in no way threatens our lives, is guilty of
wanting to be independent of Rockefeller control--an unpardonable
sin in the eyes of the Rockefeller Brothers--so the Rockefellers
have declared economic and political war on Canada with
explanations such as that given earlier this month in an
interview by the United States Ambassador to Canada.  He said,

  "Canada can't simply unilaterally cut back on its relations
with the United States and expect there won't be a reaction from

So now Canada has on its hands the hot issue of the Air Traffic
Controllers' dispute.

   If the Canadian government would investigate the real reason
why the Premier of Quebec, Mr. Bourassa, pushed through the
Quebec Legislature his extreme bill No. 22 about 19 months ago
making the French language the official working language within
the Quebec Province, the investigators may well find that the
bottom line in this bilingual issue is to restore Rockefeller
control over all Canadian affairs by engineering their own John
Turner, former Finance Minister of Canada, into the office of

   By contrast, the Soviet Union does now pose a grave threat to
millions of American lives; but the Rockefeller Brothers still
think they do control their Soviet allies so they keep right on
aiding Russia financially, technically, and militarily.  For just
one recent extremely serious example of how Russia is thus being
equipped by the Rockefeller Brothers to be our mass executioner,
I refer you to the lead article in the June 7, 1976 issue of the
Daily News Digest, Box 27496, Phoenix, Arizona  85061.  This
article, suppressed by the Rockefeller major media in the United
States, details the way in which an 8 to 10-year jump in Soviet
missile technology has been handed to them on a platter within
the past year with disastrous implications for us!

   But developments like these are simply climaxing a process
that has been going on out of public eye for a very long time. 
For example, when I was in private law practice in Washington
during the 50's, I once had a case involving an oceanographic
physicist who was being railroaded out of his naval job by some
Admirals on the false ground that he had associated with
Communists in 1933 while working his way through college.  The
truth behind these charges turned out to be that the Admirals
simply wanted to get rid of him because they wanted to spend
their appropriations on ships of all kinds, while my client was
pressing hard for high priority to be given also to research on
obtaining hydrogen energy from the seas--a field in which the
Soviet Union was 15 years ahead of us.

   Because of legal work I had done in connection with the
Federal Prison System, it happened that I knew Senator William
Langer, who was chairman of the powerful Senate Judiciary
Committee.  I told him about the predicament of my client, the
Navy physicist; whereupon he suggested that I send my client to
see Secretary of State John Foster Dulles.  He said it was really
Dulles, not President Eisenhower, who was running the government;
and that if I wanted to get my client reinstated in his Navy job,
Dulles was the man to see.  I said "Okay"; and Senator Langer got
an appointment for my client to see Dulles.  Neither my client
nor I was prepared for what happened next.

   John Foster Dulles was the former head of the Rockefeller
Foundation, but I had yet to learn the true significance of that,
nor did I know at that time that President Eisenhower was merely
a figurehead--just one more in a succession of Rockefeller puppet

   Eisenhower's nomination in 1952 had been engineered by
Winthrop Aldrich, the uncle of Nelson Rockefeller and his
brothers, by handing out literally baskets of cash to Republican
Convention delegates at his suite in the Blackstone Hotel; nor
for that matter, did I at that time have the slightest inkling
about what the Rockefeller Brothers were really up to.

   Senator Langer advised me not to accompany my client to his
appointment with Dulles, explaining that for some reason Dulles
was very wary of any lawyer-client presence in private
conversations.  So off my client went to see Dulles, alone.  A
short while later he reappeared at my office white as a sheet,
looking as if he had seen a ghost.  When I asked him what had
happened, he said he had gone and told his story to the Secretary
of State Dulles, whereupon Dulles answered, and I quote:

  "Since they say you have associated with Communists, whether
true or not, why don't you go to Russia.  They need people like

My client could hardly believe his ears.  Here was our own
Secretary of State, proclaimed by the media to be staunchly
anti-Soviet, anti-Communist, telling my client to go to a
Communist country and help them!  He recovered from his shock to
hear the following advice from Dulles, and I quote:

  "Go to the Soviet Embassy on 16th Street here in Washington and
they will receive you."

My client thanked him for his time, and left to report to me
immediately.  I was appalled, too, by what had transpired with
Dulles.  After some further discussion, my client said he would
have to talk things over with his wife and would be back in

   Two days later he decided to visit the Soviet Embassy, and
sure enough they had been expecting him.  They told him he would
be well taken care of in the Soviet Union.  He would be given an
automobile, a fine apartment, and other special privileges, and
would be flown to Moscow with his wife and small children in
first-class accommodations.  My client told me it was an offer he
could hardly afford to refuse since he was now cut off from money
and jobs here in the United States by the big lie about his
having consorted with Communists in his college days.  And so two
weeks after his astonishing private talk with Secretary of State
John Foster Dulles, he and his family flew off to the Soviet
Union, where he is now doing research on hydrogen energy in the
oceanographic laboratories of the Soviet government.

   It's no wonder that our present Secretary of State, Henry
Kissinger, who is the John Foster Dulles of today, privately says
that America's time is past and the future belongs to the
Soviets.  Like his predecessors and his masters the Rockefeller
Brothers, Kissinger is doing everything in his power to make this
bleak forecast come true.

   The story of ever-expanding joint Rockefeller-Soviet
domination of nation after nation, is a story of
DESTRUCTION--destruction of economies, destruction of political
institutions, destruction of freedom and individual choice, and
in every case destruction of human life--all done in secrecy so
that you won't know about it.

   Right now the Rockefellers and their Soviet partners are in
the process of destroying southern Africa, just as they have
destroyed other parts of Africa in order to obtain control over
it and its immense richness in natural resources.  According to
the Rockefeller-CIA timetable I first revealed in February 1974,
the Union of South Africa now has less than a year to go before
it is utterly destroyed.

   Africa's troubles really began when John D. Rockefeller III
took a two-month trip there in 1948 as a Trustee of the
Rockefeller Foundation, ostensibly out of concern over the health
and welfare of the natives but actually to survey the commercial
and industrial potentialities, just as he had once done in Japan
years before.  When he came back from Africa he was so excited
over the vast natural resources there that he could hardly keep
himself on the subject of his professed interest, the natives, in
an interview with the New York Times; and within a few years a
crescendo of Black upheaval, death, and destruction began in
Africa that still has not ended.  This has been brought about by
the combined efforts of the Rockefeller-controlled foundations,
the International Labor Organization of the AFL-CIO, the CIA, and
the Soviet KGB working together abroad.

   It is a fact of life that the Blacks in Africa are not yet
capable of carrying on business, commerce, and industry all by
themselves and they know it, as I know from my own personal
experience of five years in Africa.  So although the basic
industries are always nationalized by the new Black governments
as they take over as a face-saving gesture, they then have to
turn right around and give the management contracts to the white
Corporate Socialists, who thereby earn income in the form of fees
larger than if they owned the assets outright themselves.  On top
of that, double sets of books are then kept by the Corporate
Socialist managers so as to pay low taxes and royalties while
actually exploiting cheap local labor to produce huge amounts of
low-cost raw materials for use by Rockefeller multinational
corporations in the industrialized countries.

   The whole thing is immensely profitable to the Corporate
Socialists, and that is why destructive revolutions and massacres
are stirred up in order to bring about this kind of arrangement. 
This is what Rockefeller agent Henry Kissinger is actually
working for in southern Africa today, handing out millions of
American tax dollars to revolutionary Blacks while he publicly
expresses pious satisfaction over the progress being made there
toward "majority rule."  In the same vein, Joseph Stalin used to
say that everything in the Soviet Union belonged to the people;
but then he would add, quote: "We are only managing it for you."

   The Trustees of the "Carnegie Endowment for International
Peace" were right about one thing they decided in 1908 and 1909:
War does completely transform the life of a nation.

   Close your eyes and try for a moment to see beautiful quiet
villages nestled on the sides of hills and mountains, with the
smell of cedars in the air, and snowcaps on the mountain tops
most of the year.  Visualize gentle, kind, happy working-people,
prosperous and contented in their peaceful country--people with a
song in their hearts and love for their neighbors, people who
pray each according to his own faith, people who are tolerant,
who practice the golden rule and who say, "To each his own"; a
country with a strong banking, business, and industrial base, a
country uninterested in conflict and intrigue with little more
than a militia as its military establishment.

   Would I be speaking of Switzerland?  No, I would be describing
Lebanon, the Switzerland of the Middle East, the Lebanon that I
knew and loved, and the Lebanon that has now been destroyed in a
nightmare of senseless terror, destruction, and mayhem.  What has
happened would never have happened spontaneously, the people
simply are not like that; but little Lebanon just by being there,
has been caught up in a bigger picture--the deliberate triggering
of general war in the Middle East which is to culminate in
NUCLEAR WAR ONE in the United States!  Just as Jamaica is now
being destabilized by the CIA causing death, destruction, and a
state of emergency, the agony of Lebanon has been brought about
deliberately by the Rockefeller-controlled CIA under direction of
the CIA station in Athens, Greece, using agents infiltrated into
Lebanon from Libya, which is totally controlled by the CIA.

   Nearly one out of every 100 persons in Lebanon has now died in
the violence there, and no one in that country now remains
untouched by the horrible tragedy there.  Yet as terrible as they
are, the death throes of Lebanon are intended by the Rockefeller
Brothers to be nothing more than the match that ignites the
forest fire of NUCLEAR WAR ONE.  Lebanon is only a convenience
for them; it is YOU and I who are the ultimate targets.

   If the crescendo of war that has been planned by the
Rockefeller-Soviet conspiracy is allowed to run its course, the
final phase will be the nuclear destruction of the southern half
of the United States in NUCLEAR WAR ONE.  As I first revealed in
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 last month, a supersecret "Nuclear
Safe Zone" has been set up by secret agreement between the four
Rockefeller Brothers and their Soviet allies consisting of a
swath across the northern United States and southern Canada
between the 40th and 50th parallels of latitude.  All of the
states to the south of this zone, plus Alaska and Hawaii, have
been condemned by the Rockefeller Brothers to have the ultimate
in human destruction rain down on their heads--THERMONUCLEAR WAR!

   To the Rockefeller Brothers there is such a thing as excess
population and excess people whose unwanted numbers make it
difficult to maintain the rigid control over people that they
desire; so the war they have planned for America will, to them,
amount to nothing more than a very fast, efficient form of
population control, which all four of them--John, Nelson, David,
and Laurance--publicly promote in every possible way.

   The industrial heartland and much of the bread basket of
America are to be preserved within the Nuclear Safe Zone because
these will be needed after the war both to keep supporting the
Soviet Union, an artificial state which cannot support itself,
and as the base for reorganized industry in the planned "NEW
STATES OF AMERICA" under complete totalitarian Corporate
Socialism.  These resources they want to protect; it is only
excess human lives that they mainly want to get rid of in order
to strengthen their control over those who are left.

   In this nuclear attack, according to Intelligence sources, the
Soviet Union now has the option of using what are called "clean"
hydrogen warheads.  Most hydrogen bombs are triggered by atomic
bombs, and this atom bomb trigger is where most of the
radioactive fallout comes from.  But the Soviets, with huge
amounts of aid, have now perfected the technology to set up a
hydrogen warhead in another way; and by setting off such a
warhead above a city, instead of right on the ground, it is
possible to destroy all life in the attack zone and yet produce
very little radioactive fallout to drift downward.  Such warfare
can therefore be used to cut the population of the United States
in half yet leave the vast natural resources of America largely
intact, ready for further exploitation.

   The lives of many of those living in the southern half of the
United States are scheduled to be sacrificed on the altar of
Rockefeller control if these hideous, inhuman plans are allowed
to be carried out.  Tens of millions of our lives are considered
by them to be expendable.  There are no Civil Defense
preparations for us like those in the Soviet Union; but where our
Rulers own lives are concerned, that is another matter.  A
network of 96 underground cities known as the Federal Relocation
Arc has been built to house thousands of key federal officials
when war arrives, keeping them safe and comfortable, immune to
the nuclear holocaust taking place all around them.

   And as I revealed last month, the four Rockefeller Brothers
and their intimate client followers have quietly prepared their
own hideaways inside the Nuclear Safe Zone in order to ride out
the coming war unharmed.  The middle of the Nuclear Safe Zone is
the 45th parallel, and almost at that exact latitude the
Rockefeller Brothers have their fortified hideaways all ready on
Mount Desert Island and Bartlett Island off the coast of Maine. 
What the Rockefeller Brothers do not realize is that they have
already been marked for a selective double cross by their Soviet
allies in the coming NUCLEAR WAR ONE.  The Rockefeller Brothers
have an instinct for conspiracy and especially for the
double-cross; but they are not the only ones who can play the
game and, according to Intelligence sources, the arrangements
that have been made for their double cross involve a kind of
poetic justice, gruesome though it is.

   There exists today a large and growing black market in
plutonium, which is the raw material for atomic bombs as well as
for the incredibly dangerous next generation of nuclear power
plants now on the drawing boards.  The Rockefeller Brothers
themselves, convinced that a plutonium energy economy is the wave
of the future, are the leaders in this growing plutonium black
market, just as they are in the rest of the nuclear field.  It is
therefore ironic that they themselves are now in a position to be
destroyed by means of plutonium.  At least one powerful atomic
bomb, made with plutonium, now has been planted at the small cove
known as Seal Harbor, Maine, strategically located to blast the
summer homes of both Nelson and David Rockefeller which are
located on opposite sides of Seal Harbor.  I have not been
informed as yet of any similar arrangements at David's new
fortifications on nearby Bartlett Island, but time may change
that because the Soviets intend to leave nothing to chance in
their double cross of the Rockefeller Brothers.

   For example, the Brothers may think they can escape anyway by
fleeing to their remote mountain-top fortress in Venezuela, which
is accessible only by air.  Rockefeller private aircraft are kept
on 24-hour call for just such an escape; but there, too, they are
in for a surprise.  It so happens that the Marxist Prime Minister
of neighboring Guyana, Forbes Burnham, who was put into power a
decade ago by David Rockefeller's CIA, is already double-crossing

   The gold produced by Guyana, which is what attracted David's
interest in the first place, is for the most part being stashed
away in caves, unreported to David.  For once the Rockefellers
are on the receiving end of a swindle through double-bookkeeping
process, and the nuclear missiles which ring the huge Temehri
Airfield in Guyana now include one target not planned by the
Rockefeller Brothers.  Not only are they targeted on the Panama
Canal, which is our new Pearl Harbor, and not only are they aimed
at cities in the southern half of the United States in readiness
for the planned war to come, but the Venezuelan retreat of the
Rockefellers is also targeted.

   The Soviets, who have yet to live up to any agreement they
have ever made, intend to break free of the Rockefeller grip on
them when the time is ripe.  After eliminating the Rockefeller
Brothers from the scene, the Soviets expect to step into full
control themselves using the Corporate Socialist managers, who
now work with the Rockefellers, to do their own bidding--just as
they found managers in Eastern Europe to do their bidding after
it was conquered.

   This, my friend, is where the Rockefeller conspiracy to
destroy economies, societies, and human lives is leading--to the
destruction of the Rockefeller Brothers themselves and the
destruction of our nation and our way of life in the
process--that is, my friend, if we sit idly by and allow it to

   Listen again to the things I urged you to do at the end of
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 12 last month.  It is essential that as
many Americans as possible be informed of the disaster now
threatening us and get behind the drive to stop it; but it will
take the actions of individuals like you, acting on your own
initiative, to make it happen.

   Our situation today is once again expressed by the words of
Thomas Paine who in December 1776 wrote in the crisis:

  "These are the times that try men's souls.  The summer soldier
and the sunshine patriot will, in this crisis, shrink from the
service of his country; but he that stands it NOW, deserves the
love and thanks of man and woman.  Tyranny, like hell, is not
easily conquered; yet we have this consolation with us, that the
harder the conflict, the more glorious the triumph..."

   Until next month, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you, and may God
bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 12

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC. (Current 1981
address: 1629 K St., NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello everybody, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is May 26, 1976,
and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 12.

This issue completes the first year of the monthly AUDIO LETTER
series, and what a year it's been!

   In his Farewell speech as the first President of the United
States of America, George Washington warned:

  "In proportion as the structure of government gives force to
public opinion, it is essential that public opinion be

That is what my monthly AUDIO LETTER is all about.  Public
opinion is always wrong when it's based on false and incomplete
information, and that is exactly what is served up daily by the
Rockefeller-dominated major media under the guise of "news." 
Every month I try to help you cut through the exhausting flood of
Rockefeller propaganda in order to focus on more basic underlying

This month I want to pull together some of the most basic threads
that run through everything I've been telling you about.  After
hearing this issue, I strongly urge you to go back and review
what I have passed on to you in previous tapes--both my monthly
AUDIO LETTERS and the AUDIO BOOK talking tapes I have recorded;
and always keep in mind that it is physically impossible to
repeat everything from one month to the next to remind you of
everything that's going on.  Instead, every issue is devoted to
matters which I believe will remain relevant for a long period of
time.  Whenever plans are later changed in any drastic way, I try
to alert you to those changes.  Otherwise you may assume that
what I've told you in the past continues to have a bearing on
what is happening today.

   What I want to do today is to try to give you a peek into the
minds of the Four Rockefeller Brothers and their allies--in other
words, to show you what makes them tick.  By this, of course, I
do not mean a peep show or prying into their personal behavior
even though they themselves have launched such gutter level peep
shows lately without total regard for truth or good taste to
debunk the late President Kennedy, former President Nixon, former
Vice-President Agnew, among others; but I do think you have a
legitimate and pressing need to understand in the clearest terms
possible what they are trying to achieve, why they are trying to
achieve it, and how they exercise vast power to suit their own
purposes.  As an old saying goes,

        "Know your enemy."

   The entire program of the Four Rockefeller Brothers boils down
to one of conquest and enslavement by any and all means! 
Wherever possible, resistance to their schemes is reduced by
using techniques which are not understood by the general public,
and control of the major media through various "fronts" is used
to help guarantee this lack of public understanding.  But all of
their most powerful techniques involve a common denominator,
DESTRUCTION--economic destruction, physical destruction,
destruction of individual choice; and whenever it suits their
purposes, destruction of human life world-wide!

   My three topics today are:




Topic #1--In my home state of West Virginia, John D. Rockefeller
IV, also known as Jay Rockefeller, is breaking all records there
for campaign spending in his bid for the governorship.  He's
campaigning openly on the theme that he's too rich to steal, and
he won the Democratic Gubernatorial Primary by a landslide.  He
spent over $4,000,000 just to win the Primary!  Can you imagine? 
This is not to say that Jay would steal, but the fact that he can
actually campaign on the "Too rich to steal" theme is a vivid
illustration of what has been accomplished by three generations
of Rockefeller public relations aided and abetted by
ever-expanding Rockefeller domination of the major media.

   Jay's great-grandfather, John D. Rockefeller, Sr., was
America's first billionaire by the dawn of the 20th Century, but
he most emphatically was not viewed as too rich to steal. 
Rather, he was widely regarded as "too rich to trust" because the
source of his immense wealth lay in ruthless grasping and
destruction of competitors.  Through these methods, the huge
Rockefeller Standard Oil Trust had been built into a monster that
was depicted in political cartoons of that time as devouring
everything in sight.  No wonder.

   An honest United States Supreme Court not yet packed by the
Corporate Socialists, ruled in its 1911 Standard Oil Company
dissolution decree, and I quote:

  "For the safety of the Republic, we now decree that this
dangerous conspiracy must be ended by November 15, 1911."

   The Rockefellers, of course, paid no real heed to this legal
order to dissolve their monopoly.  For the sake of appearances
only, their infamous Standard Oil Trust was carved up into
several allegedly separate companies--but behind the scenes,
Rockefeller control was retained over all of them through the use
of nominees, banks, and tax-exempt Foundations which hold the
controlling interest in these companies for the benefit of the

   The Standard Oil decree of 1911 exemplified one very basic
fact--the incredible fortune amassed by John D. Rockefeller, Sr.,
was acquired by unjust, corrupt means.  It was, therefore,
susceptible to being erased if justice were allowed to take its
course.  This posed an ever present danger to the Rockefeller
fortune, to which the Rockefellers responded in two ways:

On one hand they launched the most elaborate sustained public
relations program the world has ever seen in order to create a
more favorable image in the public eye.  The centerpiece of this
campaign was, and still is, so-called "philanthropy" through an
ever-growing complex of tax-exempt Foundations.  These were sold
to the public as "something for nothing" devices, thoughtfully
set up by the Rockefellers to help them 'give away' their money
for the 'public good' without the slightest thought of benefit to

The other side to the Rockefeller program was to continue the
actual expansion of their monopolistic empire to ever grander
proportions, using these very Foundations to cover and hide their
control and to escape taxation; monopoly in business with the
same motivation as before, greed.  Soon this expanded into
monopoly in labor by bringing into their camp more and more of
the most important Labor leaders--they were housebroken.  And
monopolistic control of money itself through their
unConstitutional private central banking system--the Federal
Reserve System!

   To protect their economic monopolism from being tripped up by
law and justice, Rockefeller efforts spilled over more and more
into control of politics, of our Judicial system, and of

   Soon after the troublesome Supreme Court decree of 1911,
Woodrow Wilson became President--the first president to be a
complete Rockefeller puppet!  And in 1930, the Supreme Court
acquired a new Chief Justice, direct from the Rockefeller
Standard Oil stables--Charles Evans Hughes.  This began the
gradual packing of the Supreme Court, which later reached
scandalous proportions under Rockefeller puppet President
Franklin D. Roosevelt.

   Key factors in the successful advancement of Rockefeller
monopolism and the resulting destructive effects on American life
were none other than the very Foundations which were hailed in
Rockefeller public relations propaganda as "philanthropies."

   In 1917 Senator Chamberlain of Oregon warned on the floor of

  "The Carnegie-Rockefeller influence is bad.  In two generations
they can change the minds of the people to make them conform to
the cult of Rockefeller or the cult of Carnegie, rather than the
fundamental principles of American democracy."

Truer words were never spoken; and even as Senator Chamberlain
made these remarks, Rockefeller termites were busily at work on
Congress too, eating away the true representation of the people
and leaving nothing but the weak, hollow shell we have today!

   By means of World War II the Rockefellers acquired an economic
weapon which enabled them to make a giant leap forward,
outdistancing all of their rivals both here in America and around
the world.  That weapon was their control of Saudi Arabian oil,
whose surrender by Britain to the Rockefellers was the price of
America's entry into World War II.

   The Saudi fields were then developed by G.I. labor at
practically no expense to the Rockefellers, who then obtained the
oil for 30 years, up until two years ago, at just five cents (5)
a barrel!  Using the tremendous windfall profits that
resulted--hundreds of billions of dollars--the Four Rockefeller
Brothers, operating through various fronts here and abroad, were
able to buy up the industrial base not only of America but of
Europe, Japan, Latin America, and elsewhere.  Soon thereafter,
global corporations under Rockefeller control posed an
unprecedented economic challenge to the very sovereignty of
nation after nation.

   Today, after three generations of relentless striving, the
Rockefeller empire controlled by the Four Rockefeller
Brothers--David, Nelson, Laurance, and John D. III--is on the
threshold of total monopoly here in America if they can implement
their dictatorial "NEW STATES OF AMERICA CONSTITUTION."  But you
may ask: "What does total monopoly really mean?  How would it
affect me?"  In a total monopoly, my friend, you would be
surrounded, boxed in.  You would be a complete slave!  And to the
extent that partial monopoly already exists, you are a half-slave

   This brings me back full circle to West Virginia once again. 
There on a localized scale, you could have seen total monopoly in
action not long ago.  I've seen it with my own eyes; and I have
to tell you, my friends, it was not a pretty sight.  I have seen
it over and over again all around my home state--miners working
long, hard days in dangerous mines for low wages which were not
even paid to them in currency but in tokens called "scrip."  The
miners and their families lived in houses owned by the coal
company, paying their rent in scrip--houses which often would not
have been accepted as meeting minimum standards anywhere else! 
For all the necessities of life, the miner and his family had to
go to the company's store, the only place where scrip could be

   Years ago I knew a high official of a large railroad which
owned coal fields in West Virginia.  One day he tried to bring to
the attention of the Directors of a large financial institution
in Cleveland, Ohio, which controlled the railroad, that prices in
the coal company stores were inhumanly high and kept the miners
perpetually in debt to the company store.  He said: "Why not pay
the miners a living wage and reduce prices to a fair level in the
company stores?"  At this, the Directors shouted: "Socialism,
Communism"; and within a few months they forced him into early
retirement.  Far from being a Communist or a Socialist, my friend
was simply a Christian with a sincere concern about the working
and living conditions of the miners.  But the bank itself was
controlled at the top by the Rockefeller interests, who are in
league with the Soviet Union, which is run by nothing but a bunch
of Communists.  What irony!

   The same sort of thing is all around us today.  The
Rockefeller Brothers always make sure that they have plenty of
spokesmen giving a lie that they 'support the free enterprise
system'--when actually they are monopolists through and through.
They are Corporate Socialists, just as their counterparts under
the Soviet system are State Socialists.

   The goal of the Rockefeller Brothers for the United States is
that our entire nation be brought under their total monopoly so
that we can all be exploited, as were the coal miners.  Living in
company-owned housing, buying the necessities of life at
outlandish prices from the company store, paid in scrip which
could not be redeemed elsewhere, and deprived of educational or
other opportunities to break the vicious cycle they were in, the
miners were economic slaves!

   Living a life of hard, dangerous work, they fought an
ever-losing battle against mounting debts to their slave
masters--the coal companies.  They were not merely employed, they
were consumed!  They were disabled by occupational hazards like
Black Lung and on-the-job injuries.  They left destitute widows
and children without pensions.  A miner did not last
indefinitely, but the company didn't worry too much when he fell
by the wayside.  Generally he would be replaced without any
difficulty by his or another miner's son growing up, caught in
the same economic spider web.  And if the Rockefeller Brothers
get their way, we will all end up as their slaves, just like
those miners in the coal fields then.

Topic #2--We Americans today are becoming more and more like the
enslaved coal miners of yesterday.  We carry out our financial
transactions in scrip instead of in real money.  The scrip we use
called "Federal Reserve Notes" is denominated in dollars but it's
not redeemable by your Government for gold, silver, or anything
else; nor is it backed up by gold, silver, or anything else
except the assurance of a corrupt government that we should think
of it as if it were money.  As I know from personal experience,
even the Blacks in the bush in Africa know that if the government
is corrupt, the money is corrupt; but most Americans have been
educated out of understanding that and are therefore learning the
hard way now.

   The scrip that used to be paid to the West Virginia miners was
not issued by the Government but by their private, employers, the
coal companies; and in America today our scrip is not issued by
the Government but by the Federal Reserve System owned and
controlled privately by the very same Rockefeller-dominated
corporations and financial institutions which increasingly
control your job, directly or indirectly, and from whom you must
buy most of what you need.  So our monetary situation in America
today increasingly resembles that of the coal-mining districts of

   We hear a lot about the money supply and the "balance of
international payments"; but as I explained three years ago in my
book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR, these things no longer
really matter under the monopolistic control of the Rockefellers. 
Inflation is produced now not by money supply but as a result of
the combined impact of Big Business, Big Labor, and Big
Government compared with the real ability of the economy to
produce now that our gold reserves have been stolen!  And the
"balance of payments" has been rendered obsolete by the
Rockefeller multinational corporations which can make the figures
look any way they want simply by trading back and forth among
themselves across national boundaries.

As I also pointed out in my book, the alleged "Balance of
Payments Deficit" was used throughout the 1960's as a smoke
screen, a cover, to justify the hemorrhaging of America's gold
reserves out of the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox and our other
Depositories and sending it overseas.  Now that this has been
completed, however, and the Rockefeller Brothers have cornered
our nation's gold, the Government has just announced that now it
considers overall balance of payments figures to be obsolete and
will stop publishing them.

   The United States dollar has been reduced to the status of
pseudo money, scrip--and it's going "for broke."  We're coming
closer and closer to the day when the Federal Reserve scrip we
use today, which is disguised for psychological reasons to
resemble our real money of the past, will be replaced in a
reverse split of perhaps 100 to 1 by the "red-backs" now stored
in the mountain vault at Culpeper, Virginia, and other
underground vaults.

   Like the coal miners' scrip, the red-backed dollars will not
be convertible to other currency--they will serve only for
domestic transactions as we work as slaves for the Rockefeller
Corporate State and spend our red-backed scrip at various
branches of the nation-wide Rockefeller company store embracing
everything from housing to groceries.  The Rockefeller brothers
want to eliminate your independence and to make you dependent
upon them as a slave.  That is why they want to control money
itself as well as the means of production, distribution, and
supply of everything that money can buy.

   I can now reveal that if you have gold their plan now does not
call for it to be confiscated, but that it is because unlike the
situation in 1933, so very few people now have any gold that the
Rockefeller Brothers do not plan to bother with it since they
have already cornered the United States' monetary gold supply.

   We are to be left holding worthless paper money as the fruit
of our labors, while the Rockefeller Brothers themselves hold our
gold as the fruit of their crimes.  They plan to make another
great leap forward in their own wealth and power by turning our
entire nation into one big slave-labor camp for them to exploit
at will by destroying the economy we presently have, which does
not yet give them total control.

Topic #3--In monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 7 December 1975 I revealed
that the Canadian Government has decided to strike out alone,
instead of being led down the road to Rockefeller domination; and
now Canada is trying to defend itself against political and
economic war being waged against it by the Rockefeller Brothers. 
It may come as a surprise to some people but the Canadian
Government, unlike that of the United States, is currently trying
to act in the best interests of its own citizens.  For that
reason I seldom go into much detail about what the Canadian
Government is doing because I do not want to upset its efforts to
save itself.

   In a television interview in Ottawa on May 11, 1976, David
Rockefeller said to his Canadian audience, quote: "You face a
dilemma.  Are you more anxious to be completely independent?  OR
do you want to see your resources developed faster with the aid
of others?"  He added that Canadians must choose between greater
economic independence or increased prosperity.  His statements
reflect the intensifying economic pressure being applied to
Canada by the Rockefeller interests.  For example, they are now
backing out of major commitments to develop Canadian oil
reserves.  This led a few weeks ago to a bombshell announcement
by the Canadian Government that contrary to all past projections,
Canada will not be energy self-sufficient in the coming years
after all.  Meanwhile, the Canadian Government has struck back by
turning down for the moment at least a fleet of Orion military
aircraft built by the Rockefellers' Lockheed Aircraft Company.

   Whether it be individuals, companies, or nations, competitors
are always regarded by the Four Rockefeller Brothers as a threat
to be absorbed or eliminated.  Where there is competition and
diversity, there is always the chance no matter how small that
they might somehow lose their position of supremacy.  Losing
that, they reason, they might some day be exposed and brought to
justice--and that could mean losing everything because their
entire mode of operation is one of corruption, hidden
manipulation, and flaunting of the laws that they impose on us
peasants, as they call us privately.  So through a combination of
greed and an ever-haunting concern for security, there arises an
insatiable lust for power.  And because evil practices confer
vast worldly power, this leads to a conscious embrace of these
practices that amounts to the worship of evil.

   Early in the 20th Century the Rockefellers of that day joined
certain others who shared an identity of interest in such things
to form a commitment to create a ONE-WORLD GOVERNMENT.  This is
what Nelson Rockefeller means today when he refers to "an open
world"--no borders, no North and South Vietnam, no East and West
Germany, no Virginia and West Virginia, and no taxes for his
global corporations--just one stupendous world government, the
most awesome dictatorship of all time with himself as World
President.  To direct and coordinate the entire program under the
One-World commitment established two generations ago, the
Rockefellers set up powerful tax-exempt Foundations and used
public relations to give them the halo of philanthropy!

The first stage in this commitment, as I reported to you last
month, was to embark on the deliberate use of war to so alter
national life in the directions they desired.

   The second stage, which followed very quickly, was the forging
of a covert partnership between the Rulers of the United States
and those of the Soviet Union whose Communist system was put into
power by the same group of people.  The wealth and know-how of
the Western world, especially the United States of America, would
be drained off to strengthen their ally, the Soviet Union,
leading to the forced collapse of the United States!

This would mark the dawning of the third stage--One-World
Government under a partnership between the Soviet Union and an
America reorganized on the pattern of the Soviet system.

   To bring these things to pass, powerful forces were unleashed
over 50 years ago--corrupt, dishonest forces.  In 1920, for
example, the Rockefeller and Carnegie Foundations arranged
through the Guggenheim Foundation to establish scholarships to
begin the re-writing of American history to create doubt about
the principles laid down by our Founding Fathers.  Carefully
selected candidates were sent to certain universities in England
for indoctrination, after which they were brought back and placed
in strategic educational positions at the University of Chicago
and sprinkled through other important institutions of higher
learning.  Through their positions of leadership, they would
ultimately influence United States history teaching throughout
America.  The objective of this commitment was to bring on
"collectivism" through the downgrading of the individual and the
upgrading of the elitist group that planned to rule the
collectivist world.  At the same time propaganda through
entertainment, educational, and news media was to be designed to
render people incapable of believing the truth about what was
happening by making conspiracy theories of all types look
ridiculous, too silly to be taken seriously.

   In the more than half century since this One World commitment
was formed, the Trustees of the Rockefeller-controlled
Foundations have moved the One-World Program very far indeed; but
the forces they unleashed are now running out of control!  They
have opened Pandora's box and now they are beginning to see that
they, too, are being swept along by the very same forces that
they themselves have set in motion.  More and more of the
Trustees of the Rockefeller-controlled Foundations now believe
that the commitment for a One-World Government, as originally
conceived, has jumped the tracks; and now they see the specter of
a horrible end coming into sight just a little further down the
road--a double cross by the artificially strong Soviet Union with
the Soviets picking up all the chips for themselves.

   But the mounting fear of the Trustees still is not shared by
the Rockefeller Brothers themselves.  Loyal, patriotic members of
the United States Intelligence Community inform me they are
grinding their teeth in frustration because the efforts of the
Joint Chiefs of Staff to upgrade American defenses against the
very real Soviet threat are being vetoed at every turn by Nelson
Rockefeller through Henry Kissinger!

   The Rockefeller Brothers firmly believe that war is coming,
and soon; but even now they still believe the Soviets will abide
by their secret agreement for a completely programmed war when
that phase of World War III, or NUCLEAR WAR ONE, is reached which
calls for nuclear warfare on American soil!  David Rockefeller
and his affluent intimates still think they hold the upper hand
with the Kremlin bosses through various devices.  For example,
there are several casks of radioactive Plutonium-239 superpoison
stored by the CIA on the fourth floor of the central building of
the United States Embassy in Moscow.  These were taken there in
1971 from the Fort Knox Bullion Depository by the CIA to be
maintained as a blackmail threat against any tricks by the
Soviets.  Like those which remained in the Fort Knox Bullion
Depository, they began leaking long ago and are responsible for
the leukemia now suffered by Ambassador Stophil and others in the
Embassy.  This is the truth behind the cover stories you saw
recently alleging that health problems in the American Embassy in
Moscow were being caused by Soviet microwave radiation.

   But why expect the Government to worry about a few mere
employees at our Embassy in Moscow?  Exactly the same kind of
radioactive superpoison has for months been spreading through
underground streams from Fort Knox into the southeastern United
States!  One of the most immediate threats from the CIA
superpoison is an underground concentration centering on
Chattanooga, Tennessee.  This hot spot extends 23 miles west, 25
miles south, 42 miles east and northward toward the source, which
is Fort Knox, Kentucky.  The water supply for over a quarter of a
million Americans is threatened, yet the federal government still
refuses to tell the truth about this deadly threat.

   David and his brothers still believe also that the Soviet need
for trade with their global corporations will keep the Soviets in
line, adhering to their secret commitments--but how wrong they

   To get ready for the war, David Rockefeller has just built a
new fortified family hideaway on Bartlett Island, adjacent to Mt.
Desert Island off the coast of Maine where other Rockefeller
strongholds are now in existence complete with bombproof
shelters.  The latitude of Bartlett Island is 44 degrees 22
minutes North, almost the exact center of the supersecret NUCLEAR
SAFE ZONE which has been established for the Rockefellers and
their affluent intimates in America during the coming war.  This
zone is a band across roughly the upper half of the United States
and including the lowest portions of Canada.  It extends from 40
degrees to the South to 50 degrees on the North, and the center
is 45 degrees--almost the exact latitude of the Rockefeller
compounds off the coast of Maine.  That, in fact, is why 45
degrees was chosen as the center of the Nuclear Safe Zone. 
Members of the Rockefeller inner circle who are "in the know"
about all this, have been buying real estate in Oregon, Idaho,
Montana, Wyoming, and the Dakotas, as some of you may have
noticed who live in those states.  Now you know why.  Now you
also know the real reason why our anti-ballistic missile
installations which were located within the Nuclear Safe Zone
were dismantled last year.  The upper half of the United States
is to be a virtual de-militarized zone except for some military
installations which have been around too long to deactivate
without arousing suspicion, but they would not be used against
the Soviet Union in NUCLEAR WAR ONE by the United States.

   Just look at a map of the United States, my friends.  Look at
the enormous nuclear disaster that is in store for us if the
Rockefeller Brothers and their Soviet allies are allowed to carry
out their insane plans for total conquest.  Alaska, which lies
above the Nuclear Safe Zone, is scheduled to have its now
uncompleted oil pipeline blasted out of existence.  Hawaii, below
the Nuclear Safe Zone, is scheduled to be hit to knock out the
naval installations there.  But our real Pearl Harbor this time
is to be the Panama Canal, as I revealed 19 months ago in my

   As for the continental United States--California, Nevada,
Utah, Colorado, Kansas, Missouri, Illinois, Indiana, Ohio,
Pennsylvania, Delaware, New Jersey, and all states south of them
are immediate candidates for nuclear attack even if there is no
Soviet double cross of the Rockefeller Brothers.  As I first
warned on radio in June 1974, not only the Panama Canal but
American cities are already targeted by nuclear missiles in the
Republic of Guyana next to Venezuela, ready to strike from the
south where we are weakest.

   Americans really cannot believe the terrifying possibility of
nuclear war, feeling that neither the Soviet Union nor the United
States would risk its own destruction; but the Soviet Union,
spending over a billion dollars a year on massive Civil Defense
preparations, is ready to survive NUCLEAR WAR ONE, unlike
ourselves; and the Rockefeller Brothers and their intimates are
ready to survive it, too, with their fortified hideaways in the
Nuclear Safe Zone.  But for the rest of us, my friends, the only
war preparations are the mass burial sites which are now being
quietly set aside without explanation, such as the 80-acre site
in Wood County, Wisconsin!

   My friends, this IS WAR; and you, your loved ones, and
everything you hold dear are the targets.  We are being attacked
without mercy, and the weapons being used against us are the
CHANCE--not with the power of evil, however, but with the power
of truth, which I still believe is more powerful than the most
evil plans men can devise.

   Here is what we must do now:

First: We must stop the insane plans for America's destruction in
NUCLEAR WAR ONE, which I am convinced will be even worse if it is
allowed to take place than the Rockefeller Brothers planned
because of certain Soviet double cross.

   All aid and trade with the Soviet Union must be cut off, and
the Joint Chiefs of Staff must be freed to take the proper
measures to protect our country against the Soviet Union. 
There's no time to be lost.

   Every Governor, every Senator, every Congressman, every State
Legislator, and every Mayor in the states including or below the
40th Parallel plus Alaska and Hawaii, has an immediate duty and
responsibility for the lives of the citizens they represent. 
That duty is to demand that Secretary of State Henry Kissinger
publicly reveal the secret war plan agreements with the Soviet
Union which established the Nuclear Safe Zone I have described. 
These agreements are now in the possession of the Four
Rockefeller Brothers in their hideaways on Mt. Desert Island and
adjacent Bartlett Island off the coast of Maine.  Every single
one of the officials I have described must be alerted to this
plan and, if need be, forced by public pressure to demand this
public accounting from Kissinger.  Any official who refuses to
pursue this life-and-death duty once alerted and pursue it
vigorously will be knowingly jeopardizing the very life of every
man, woman, and child he has taken an oath to protect.

   Second: We must block the program of the Four Rockefeller
Brothers to eliminate our beloved free CONSTITUTION and replace
it with their own dictatorial "New States of America

   The same officials I have just mentioned, but for all 50
States, must be alerted to this plan and must be pushed by public
pressure into action.  Have no illusions, my friends, neither
Congress nor most of the other officials I have mentioned will do
anything whatsoever about either of these things on their own. 
With rare exceptions, they respond only to pressure and usually
that pressure comes only from powerful special interests--which
these days usually means the Four Rockefeller Brothers and their
total lackeys.  But, if they are alerted to these terrible
dangers and are kept under constant unrelenting public scrutiny
and pressure, I believe Congress as well as the other officials
can be mobilized on both of these particular matters--the WAR and
the CONSTITUTION--to do what must be done to save our country,
because this time their own survival is at stake as well as ours!

   What you must do in this terrible situation is something that
does not come easily to most of us.  You must get off the
sidelines and into the fight.  You must speak out about what you
know even though many may not yet believe you.  You must search
out others who share your concerns once alerted to our common
danger and who will join with you to take action under our
Constitution to prevent disaster; and you must get your
priorities straight.

   This situation is not a Liberal, Conservative, Black, White,
Jew or Gentile, Democrat or Republican issue.  It's a matter of
survival, literally life and death; and survival as well as of
the system which allows all these individual differences among us
to continue to coexist.  You must join with others in your area
even if it is only one or two at first, and figure out what your
particular group can do to bring the pressure for action I have
just described.

   Do you have an independent newspaper in your area whose editor
will listen to the truth and perhaps follow up on it with his own
investigation and editorials?  Is one or more of you a member of
a lodge where you could bring up these matters and generate
support for action?  Can you rent or borrow space in a church or
school to hold public meetings where more people can be informed
through tapes or other means?

   Take stock of your own resources whatever they are and use
them, and don't ignore your financial resources be they large or
small.  Would you rather use a portion of your worldly goods in
order to preserve an entire way of life?  Or would you rather sit
back and let it evaporate uselessly through Rockefeller-induced
inflation and the searing heat of nuclear warfare?

   Remember: YOU count.

   The Rockefeller Brothers and their affluent intimates are
powerful, but their power is exercised through the willing minds
and hands of millions of others who for the most part do not even
know that is what they are doing.

   You and I are not confronted by a whole nation of enemies but
just a very few individuals who have learned how to push and
maneuver others into doing their bidding; so if you feel
outnumbered, don't.  As far as our real enemies are concerned
(those at the top), we now outnumber them, so what in the world
is the sense in letting them enslave us?

   My friends, I have told you what I think we must focus on, and
fast!  In December 1975 I also recorded AUDIO BOOK No. 6, "WHAT
WE CAN DO TO SAVE AMERICA", to give you some thought-starters;
and I know that some of you are pursuing suggestions I made then. 
But beyond that, I believe you must use your own initiative to
see how to put things together to work your way, working with
others in your area.

   Under the First Amendment to the United States Constitution,
you are guaranteed the right of peaceable assembly for a reason. 
Use it.  You are also guaranteed the right to petition government
for the redress of grievances.  Use it.  And keep in mind always
that under the Ninth and Tenth Amendments it is to us, the people
of the United States of America, that the ultimate power of our
government is reserved.  USE it, or very soon you will LOSE it!

   My friends, the time has come in your life when your future
depends on your willingness to face up to reality, and to act.  I
understand your attachment to things you have worked so long and
so hard to acquire and achieve.  And, yes, there is a risk
involved in doing as I am urging you to do--a risk of being
ridiculed by some, a risk of losing money, and even a risk of
failure; but the element of risk is now reversed from what we
usually think.  The real risk now lies in NOT taking action
because if you don't take whatever action you can, you risk
letting the Rockefeller Brothers succeed in their insane
plans--and thereby losing everything!

   As I begin the second year of the monthly AUDIO LETTER series
next month, God willing, I plan to keep on providing you with the
information you need in order to do your part to save yourself,
your loved ones, and our NATION.

   Will those who have exercised vast power through covert means
on behalf of the Rockefeller Brothers continue now to throw in
their lot with their masters now that they see at last where this
is leading?  Or will they choose to begin making amends for the
evil forces they have unleashed against us, the people who are
the United States of America?

   Never before in the history of our United States has this
phenomenon occurred that one family controls the destiny of this
country, and whatever happens I consider myself honored to be
placed in the position that I am now in to join with you in the
fight to move our great country forward once again on the path
laid out by our Founding Fathers.

   Until next month, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you, and may God
bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 11

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


   This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC.  (Current 1981
address: 1629 K St., NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello, everybody, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is April 24, 1976,
and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 11.

   This year of 1976 is of course our Bicentennial, the 200th
anniversary of the founding of our beloved country.  It should be
a time for reflection on our hard-won unique heritage and for
thankful celebration of it.  At the same time, it is only fitting
that we also look ahead and give some thought to our future
destiny and that of our trusting children.  But on all sides we
Americans are being bombarded with propaganda enticing us to
focus only on the future without bearing in mind the lessons of
the past.  Bicentennial programs and articles dealing with our
nation's early days keep the spotlight narrowly focused on the
Revolution itself most of the time instead of on the wonderful
free Republic that was the product of that Revolution.  This is
no accident.  It is intended to gradually make us more revolution
minded in order to make the so-called "Second American
Revolution" being promoted by John D. Rockefeller III seem more
and more acceptable to us.

   The wise first President of our Republic, George Washington,
left us with advice in his "Farewell Address" that was so
forward-looking that it is still valuable today, and time after
time he referred to experience as, quote: "the surest standard"
by which to judge existing and planned governmental measures. 
This stands in stark contrast to the approach that is preached
regularly by the man who wants to preside over the end of our
free Republic, Nelson Rockefeller.  He keeps saying, quote:
"Forget the past and let's look to the future."

   To what sort of future does Nelson Rockefeller ask us to look
if it has nothing to do with our past?  It is the future that was
spelled out as early as 1924 by the father of Nelson and his
brothers, John D. Rockefeller, Jr., in a talk to a group of
students.  John Jr. was quoted by his attorney, agent, and
biographer Raymond B. Fosdick as saying on that occasion, and I

  "We are standing tonight on the mountain top with the world
spread out at our feet--your country, your country, my country,
all of us--so it may come to pass that some day, some day the
people of all nations will stand on the mountain top together and
no one will speak of 'my country' but we will speak of 'our

So, my friends, the real question of America's destiny that now
confronts us is one which has been forced upon us by the Four
Rockefeller Brothers--David, Nelson, Laurance, and John D.
III--pursuing this objective spelled out by their father.  It is
essentially the same question that faced President Abraham
Lincoln just over a century ago: whether or not the United States
of America was to be destroyed.  The threat then was one of
destruction by dismemberment and fragmentation, and it was met by
the use of federal powers to maintain the Union.  The threat
today lies at the opposite extreme of overcentralization of
power, and it can be met only by reasserting individual and State
powers and rights under the CONSTITUTION.

   To explore the radical change of direction in America's
destiny that is being plotted and manipulated by the Four
Rockefeller Brothers and their allies, I want to talk about the
following three topics today:




Topic #1--One of the strangest and most sensational kidnap
episodes in history began on February 4, 1974, when a young lady
named Patricia Hearst was kidnapped from her apartment in
Berkeley, California.  Her kidnappers soon identified themselves
as a radical group called the Symbionese Liberation Army, or SLA. 
Thus began a nightmare of impossible demands, tape recordings,
merciless publicity, shoot-outs and unrelenting pressure behind
the scenes for Mr. and Mrs. Randolph Hearst.

   On April 3, 1974, a tape recording announced a "new twist"
that Patty Hearst had joined the SLA under the new name Tania,
and a few days later Tania helped rob a bank as if to prove what
she said.  Just for good measure, a few days after that Tania was
seen spraying bullets from an automatic rifle to cover SLA member
William Harris as he left a store where he had allegedly been

   Soon the SLA was all but wiped out in the spectacular
shoot-out in Los Angeles, but somehow Tania just happened to be
elsewhere watching it all on television.  Tania had escaped, and
for more than 16 months in spite of an alleged manhunt
nation-wide by the FBI, she and her SLA companions William and
Emily Harris reportedly continued to evade capture.  But finally
on September 18, 1975, the manhunt suddenly ended as abruptly as
it began.  Tania and the Harrises were found right in San
Francisco, no less, where it all began, and the trio were quickly
rounded up without much fuss.

   I mentioned briefly in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 7 that the SLA
was a CIA operation, and that its purpose, in which it was
successful, was to bring about a Rockefeller take-over of the
huge Hearst empire.  But now I believe the time has come to tell
you more, for two reasons: First, I fear for the life of Tania,
the impersonator of Patty Hearst who is currently in custody; and
second, I am now convinced that Mr. and Mrs. Hearst, Patty's
parents, do not know that the girl captured last September is an

   Until very recently there were indications that they knew this
but were keeping their silence about it to protect the rest of
their family.  For that reason I have refrained from discussing
the details of the Patty Hearst case other than to tell you about
the Rockefeller take-over of their holdings.  The Hearsts of all
people have good reason to fear additional CIA-engineered
reprisals against them and I would never want to usurp their
personal prerogatives; but I have at last obtained evidence which
convinces me beyond question that Mr. and Mrs. Hearst are still
in the dark.  And it is for their sake and for the sake of the
life of the girl whoever she is, that I am about to reveal the
truth in the Patty Hearst case, for I truly believe that the
truth even when it is unpleasant, is always to be preferred over
lies no matter how pleasant or convenient; and only the truth can
provide the basis for justice to be done.

   The Hearst newspaper chain first incurred the wrath of the
Rockefeller Brothers three decades ago when they led the campaign
to expose major abuses spawned by the Rockefellers.  For example,
it was the Hearst chain that publicized secret Congressional
testimony showing that America's atomic secrets were handed over
to the Soviets--not stolen by them--even before our first atomic
bomb was finished; and that the Rockefellers were directly
involved in this.  This was very easy for the Rockefellers, by
the way.  The world's first controlled nuclear reaction was
achieved at their own University of Chicago late in 1942; and the
Manhattan Project worked outward from there.  Even this name
"Manhattan" for the atomic bomb project was chosen as a subtle
acknowledgment of the real bosses of both atomic energy and the
nation's power centers in Manhattan, the Rockefellers.

   The Rockefeller interests launched savage counterattacks on
the Hearst empire, using financial and other means to force many
of the Hearst newspapers out of business, just as they are
presently strangling the Star here in Washington by means of an
advertising boycott.  But the Rockefeller Brothers never forget,
and their ultimate goal was to eventually take over complete
control of those portions of the Hearst business complex that
managed to survive the initial Rockefeller counterattacks.  Patty
Hearst was the pawn they used in order to do so.

   The first tapes after Patty was captured were full of fear and
urgency, and relayed crushing demands to her parents as
conditions for her release.  Mr. Hearst was coerced into
incredible outpouring of his resources in a giveaway program only
to have the demands from the SLA keep rising until they became
unreachable.  Then, after a period of silence, came the first
Tania tape claiming that Patty was disgusted with her parents and
was joining her captors.  But, my friends, the real Patty Hearst
was no longer alive by that time.  On February 28, 1974, just 24
days after her abduction, Patty was drowned in a bathtub by three
SLA men against whom I am told Patty put up a tremendous fight. 
Afterward cremation was used to prevent any chance that her body
might be discovered and identified.  This is common practice in
covert CIA executions, by the way and I am reliably informed that
this was also Jimmy Hoffa's fate after his abduction late in July
1975, which I discussed in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 3.

   The rest of the charade up until the capture last September of
Tania, the impostor who is alleged to be Patty Hearst, had just
one purpose--to maintain unmerciful pressures on the Hearsts in
order to crack their control of the Hearst interests.  And the
prime pressure point in this campaign was Tania herself who was
used in order to convince the Hearsts that their daughter Patty
was still alive.

   Any loving parents in the position of Mr. and Mrs. Hearst
would cling desperately to the hope of having their child
returned to them, and the Hearsts are no exception.  So long as
she was not captured there would be no chance for the Hearsts to
discover Tania was an impostor; and by allegedly being spotted
from time to time, the assurance was maintained that she was
still alive.  Thus in the best Rockefeller-CIA traditions, Mr.
and Mrs. Hearst were tricked into believing that they were
bargaining for the life and for the return of their daughter
Patty even after she had actually been murdered.

   This deception continued for nearly a year and a half until at
last the CIA achieved by way of the SLA what the Rockefellers had
sought all along--a transfer of the control of the far-flung
Hearst interests to the Rockefeller Brothers.  As soon as the
arrangements were made for this transfer of control, the bargain
was for Tania (alias Patty) to surface, and surface she did. 
This was a simple matter since the FBI had known even before
Patty's kidnapping that her abduction was planned, and was aware
of her whereabouts and that of Tania, Patty's impersonator
throughout the so-called manhunt of 19 months duration.

   The Hearsts gave up practically everything in a deal to get
their Patty back; and the last most critical part of the SLA
operation was to convince them that they had gotten what they had
bargained for--namely, their daughter Patty.  Tania, therefore,
had to be captured and convince the Hearsts that she is their
daughter Patty; and the psychological profiling techniques which
were so useful in Watergating Richard Nixon and his aides out of
the White House were also used on the Hearsts in order to
minimize the risk that they would see Tania as a fraud.

   The Patty Hearst-Tania manhunt was dragged out over 19 months,
and during that entire time the Hearsts were subjected to cruel
psychological pressures of all kinds for the purpose of damaging
their capacity to perceive anything from a normal perspective. 
During most of that time the Tania charade was utilized to get
them gradually accustomed to the idea that if they ever did see
Patty again she would be drastically changed by her ordeal and
therefore not like they remembered her.  And Tania, for her part,
was herself schooled and psychologically programmed in order to
be as convincing as possible in brief encounters with the Hearsts
after her alleged capture.

   Even in spite of all this, the whole elaborate trick almost
broke down when Mr. and Mrs. Hearst first got to see their
alleged daughter after her capture.  She was even more different
than they had imagined, and afterward Mrs. Hearst sadly said to
the press, quote: "That girl just isn't our Patty."  She
apparently meant it in a figurative sense, but her words
unconsciously expressed the literal truth.  But the natural
deep-seated wish to believe that Tania is Patty apparently won
out, reinforced by all the inhuman pressures which even now still
rest heavily on the Hearsts.  For the moment the Rockefeller
Brothers have won their gamble, they have fooled the Hearsts.

   Now there remains just one more detail to be attended to--the
girl herself, Tania, the girl who is alleged to be Patty.  She
has now completely served her purpose and it is her turn to be
double-crossed.  The one thing the Rockefeller-CIA agents cannot
permit to happen is for Tania to be released and have extended
contact with Mr. and Mrs. Hearst.  It is one thing for Tania to
hoodwink the Hearsts into believing she is Patty during brief
encounters under tense unnatural conditions in unfamiliar
surroundings and against a two-year backdrop of nightmarish
events.  But it would be quite another matter for Tania to return
home with the Hearsts and continue to convince them she is their
daughter during the course of an ongoing relationship in what
should be familiar surroundings.  The Hearsts would without any
doubt soon see that something was terribly wrong about the girl
who is supposed to be Patty Hearst, and that, my friends, is why
I fear for the life of this girl who has called herself Tania in
the past.  She cannot be allowed to go free; and now that her job
is finished as far as the Rockefeller Brothers and the CIA are
concerned, she has become a liability for them.  If she is very
fortunate she may just be locked up out of sight and the key
thrown away; but I fear for her life because if she is silenced,
the deception of the Hearsts will have been sealed permanently
and any chance that she herself might some day blurt out the
truth will be ended as well.  If this happens, Tania will have
gone the way of Lee Harvey Oswald, Jack Ruby, and many others
before her.

   The Patty Hearst case is a tragic example of the way in which
individuals are seen as nothing more than pawns to be pushed
around on the chessboard of power by the Rockefeller Brothers and
their helpers.  But you do not have to be a Hearst, or a Nixon,
or a Hoffa to become a Rockefeller CIA pawn.

   I revealed in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 5 for October 1975
that electronic psychological programming techniques are being
used by the CIA to program people like human robots to do all
kinds of things they normally would not do.  There is now a
rising demand by the CIA for people who can be made to run
involuntary errands for them this way, busy as they are with
bombings, terrorism and other projects to warp America's
Bicentennial to Rockefeller purposes.  But people vary
considerably in their receptiveness to such programming, and a
catalog of highly receptive individuals is therefore of great
interest to the CIA.  Therefore the CIA has secretly aided in the
establishment of a chain of centers which offer to help you quit
smoking, lose weight, or stop drinking almost overnight.

   What they use are psychological conditioning techniques which
are related to the very much more advanced techniques used by the
CIA; and if you go to such a center and your therapy reveals a
very high susceptibility rating, your name, with or without the
knowledge of the particular center you visit, will end up in a
special CIA file for possible future use.  If you contemplate
using such therapy, you should be warned of this hidden
liability.  If you have already used it, I can only suggest that
you exercise due caution whenever you must receive medical care,
especially if hospitalization is involved.  If possible, stick
with your family doctor or others you know you can trust.

   On March 24, 1976, President Ford announced still another
effort to treat us as pawns, and this time every man, woman, and
child in the United States is intended to be involved.  I refer,
of course, to the trumped up Swine Influenza threat, and the
proposal to inoculate everyone against it.

   The stated medical reasons for this totally unprecedented
project are so patently flimsy that everyone from the World
Health Organization to individual doctors all around the country
have sharply questioned what is proposed.  Many doctors have gone
so far as to openly ask what the real political reason for it is,
so unconvincing is the medical basis for it.  Meanwhile the
Rockefeller-controlled major media are beating the drums in favor
of it.  Some groups have questioned whether perhaps something
sinister is to be added to the vaccine; but while this could be
done, it is not the underlying reason for the Swine Flu program. 
The whole Swine Flu swindle is an elaborate cover-up, the most
diabolical so far of the truth about the horrible CIA radioactive
plutonium super poison which is now contaminating the entire
southeastern portion of the United States and is even beginning
to show up now in traces nation-wide.  This is the poison which
was stored in the Central Core Vault of the Bullion Depository at
Fort Knox, as I first revealed in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 5,
October 1975.

   As part of the federal government's cover-up, they made
matters a thousand times worse when they deliberately dumped it
into underground streams under Fort Knox during January, as I
have previously reported.  Now they are beginning to realize the
hideous extent of their folly; but instead of honest remedial
action, their response is still cover-up.

   First, the Swine Flu campaign began by alarming everyone with
its alleged threat.  Then it was pointed out that even those who
do get the vaccine run a considerable risk of getting sick anyway
due to side effects.  And to cap it off, officials expressed
public doubt by the end of March that it would be possible to
produce and administer enough vaccine to inoculate everyone by
late this year, when the Government allegedly fears a Swine Flu

   The whole thing is intended to condition us all to the idea
that this will be the cause if and when Americans start dying
like flies in some area soon due to poisoning from the spreading
CIA plutonium poison from Fort Knox.  And just for good measure,
preposterous stories have also found their way into print
recently, alleging in effect that plutonium is practically
harmless based on records which have 'suddenly' been discovered
recently about people who were injected experimentally with
plutonium years ago.  It's all big game of "look over there"; and
you, your children, and your loved ones are the pawns in this
cold-blooded game.

Topic #2--Down through the centuries, war has always been an evil
which the vast majority of individuals have feared and wanted to
avoid, yet we all know they keep right on happening.  And why? 
Because there also have always been small groups of men who have
viewed war from a very different perspective.  To them, war is
just one more tool to use in both the exercise and the expansion
of their own political and economic power.

   In the 20th Century, wars have become bigger, more frequent,
and more savage than ever before.  For nearly three generations,
one place or another around our planet has been aflame with the
fires of war and revolution; and now, having already suffered two
World Wars, we are stepping across the threshold of a third!

   What's wrong?  It's said that "From a little acorn, a mighty
oak will grow"; and where war is concerned, a very important
acorn was planted shortly before World War I.  The Trustees of a
tax-exempt foundation, known at that time as the "CARNEGIE
ENDOWMENT FOR INTERNATIONAL PEACE" which involved an alliance
with the Rockefeller and Carnegie interests, spent a full year
debating just one question: Is war the best way by which to alter
the life of a nation?  And incredibly, my friends, the conclusion
they decided upon was: Yes.

   Shortly thereafter World War I began.  President Woodrow
Wilson, a Rockefeller puppet, was enthusiastically supported by
the Trustees of the Carnegie Endowment when he got America into
the war; and on at least one occasion, they even sent Wilson a
telegram urging him not to let America's involvement in the war
end too soon!  They did not want to cut short all those desirable
changes in America that were to be expected as a result of our
involvement in that war--"desirable" according to their criteria,
of course, not yours or mine.

   By the time World War II was brought about by the Rockefeller
interests and their allies, this philosophy was even more
entrenched and more powerful.  The United States was deliberately
dragged into World War II by means of Pearl Harbor with the
active help of President Franklin D. Roosevelt; and as in World
War I, World War II was also deliberately dragged out longer than
necessary, in order once again to bring about major changes in
national life--not only in the United States but in other
countries as well.  For details on this subject I refer you to
the recent two-volume AUDIO BOOK talking tape No. 7 entitled "THE
TRAGIC TRUTH ABOUT THE FDR ERA" recorded in February 1976 by
Colonel Curtis Dall and myself.  FDR was Colonel Dall's
father-in-law, and Colonel Dall speaks from personal knowledge
about many very important things.

   Three years ago in my book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE
DOLLAR", I pointed out the very intimate connections that linked
politics, economics, and matters of war and peace.  And in this
regard I tried to call attention to the very powerful, important
new economic and political forces now emerging in Asia, and I
ended my book in these words, and I quote:

  "If the new Asian forces are not understood, but are met with
ignorance and arrogance, then the world will indeed be headed not
for a 'generation of peace' of which President Nixon has so
proudly boasted, but for World War III."

   In the same context, I referred to the crucial importance of
the Panama Canal, and on June 1974 on a radio program in Dallas,
Texas, I relayed Intelligence information I had just received
confirming that the Temehri Airfield in the Republic of Guyana,
next to Venezuela, is now ringed with atomic missiles aimed at
the Gatun Locks of the Panama Canal and at cities in the United
States.  But, as usual, the federal government still refuses to
this very day to permit an honest investigation of this
life-and-death situation.  And, by the way, Temehri Airfield is
being used by Cuba nowadays to ferry its mercenaries and supplies
to southern Africa for more wars there.  Temehri Airfield, 25
miles outside Georgetown, Guyana, is larger than our Kennedy
Airport in New York!

   In my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 last November, I was able at
last to reveal the whole grand strategy of the coming war,
including the opening rounds in the Middle East and the
succeeding stages by which it is presently intended to mushroom
into a full-fledged world war.  And on April 19, 1976, just five
days ago, the United States Government gave the official green
light for the Middle East war to begin.  On that day, April 19,
the White House quietly dropped its previous opposition to all
outside military intervention in war-torn Lebanon.

   All of the blocks in the Middle East war plan are now falling
rapidly into place.  On March 13, 1976, Saudi Arabia sealed its
own doom when the negotiations with American top oil people in
Panama City, Florida ended in an agreement for Saudi Arabia to
buy the remaining 40% of the assets of ARAMCO, the four-company
Rockefeller oil combine that operates in Saudi Arabia.  Oil
minister Sheik Yamani revealed that the take-over transaction
will be carried out all at once within four to six weeks.  What
they do not realize is that after the Rockefellers get their
money, the oil wells will be bombed out of existence by an
American limited nuclear strike emanating from the Sinai.  The
White House go-ahead signal April 19th to get the ball rolling in
this war, came exactly five weeks after Sheik Yamani's

   Meanwhile Prime Minister Vorster of South Africa injected his
country into the Middle Eastern fray by making a secret visit to
Israel two weeks ago for the sole purpose of obtaining military
hardware in exchange for raw materials.  By doing so, he also
left his country open to infiltration by a client state of the
Rockefeller-controlled CIA.  On top of that, he inflamed the
Arabs and most all of Black Africans.  So, South Africa has
jumped from "the frying pan into the fire."  And Henry Kissinger
on his African trip will be handing out millions of American
dollars to the so-called Liberation Fronts who are bent on
liberating Rhodesia and South Africa for the Rockefellers.  And
so the Black leaders here and abroad will be used by the
Rockefellers in their attempt to help their ally, Soviet Russia,
do the dirty work for them in southern Africa for the rich
mineral resources there.

   The war situation we face, my friends, is increasingly
dangerous; and as far as the first stages of it are concerned,
imminent.  But before I leave this subject, I should add that we
must now not allow ourselves to lose our resolve to halt this
trend into disaster.  I believe we can still do it, and WE MUST

   Until recently, Rockefeller propaganda sought to create false
optimism about our foreign policy, military posture, and other
factors in our national strength.  But now people are waking up. 
They know something is wrong.  So now we are entering a new phase
of defeatism propaganda designed to ruin our morale so that we
will just lie down conveniently to be conquered.

   An example of this on the domestic scene was the statement by
Senator Frank Church last summer to the effect that Americans
would have no way to resist in the event of a take-over by a
dictator, so vast are the spying abilities of the federal
government.  This alleged warning, greatly exaggerated for
effect, came from one of the earliest accomplices in the cover-up
now in progress about the hideous CIA plutonium poison!

   Other voices are also lending their weight to the defeatism
campaign but on an international scale.  One voice stands out
above all others--that of the allegedly exiled Soviet author
Alexander Solzhenitsyn.  A recent quotation from Solzhenitsyn,
which is a condensation of practically everything he publicly
says today, is and I quote: "I wouldn't be surprised at the
sudden and imminent fall of the West."  Then he goes on regularly
and at great length to build up an image of Soviet power,
supposedly matchless in its propaganda and quickly becoming
invincible militarily.  He speaks of all this in disapproving
terms, thereby sounding as if he is on our side; but the image he
paints, my friends, is still one of defeatism for us and imminent
victory for our real enemies.  He spreads seeds of
hopelessness--not of hope as some would have you believe.  Such
hopelessness could cause the West to be defeated from within,
just as France was in the 30's and early 40's.  Even when he
admits for a moment that the West could still save itself from
complete take-over--which it still can, my friends--he follows
that up by putting down any notion that he actually expects that
to happen.  But Solzhenitsyn is very powerful in his use of
words, and he has become a Pied Piper with patriotic,
freedom-loving individuals and organizations following in his

   What will be the effect, my friends, if a year or two from now
with war and economic and political chaos on all sides,
Solzhenitsyn should dramatically announce: "The West is doomed,
I'm going back home to the home of Communism, the wave of the
future"?  Might not this be the crowning stroke the Soviets need
to collapse remaining patriotic morale in the West?  Apparently
the Rockefellers and their Soviet allies think so.

   That's why their controlled media are now giving Solzhenitsyn
tremendous publicity; and according to highly reliable
intelligence information I have received recently, this is the
real purpose for which Solzhenitsyn was sent to the West, while
other Soviet dissidents remain unable to follow his path.

   Whether Solzhenitsyn himself is consciously involved in this,
or whether he is simply the victim of psychological profiling and
programming, the defeatism he is spreading could prove to be one
of our most mortal enemies.  Remember, it was Lenin who also was
in exile in Zurich and who longed for the collapse of Russia!  So
why could not Solzhenitsyn, who also is supposed to be in exile
in Zurich, long for the collapse of the West?

Topic #3--If you have one of the newly-issued $2.00 bills in your
pocket, please take it out and look at the back, which depicts
the signing of the DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE in 1776.

   The seated gentleman that is No. 7 as you count from the left
is supposed to be Robert Morris according to the original
painting of this scene by John Trumbull.  Morris was then a
wealthy financier who gave his all for the cause of freedom and
independence, and ended up penniless as a result.  In his
original painting, Trumbull honored Morris for his sacrifices in
the cause of freedom by depicting him prominently in a shining
light with a proud look of determination on his face.  After all,
if it had not been for Morris, the rag-tag Army of the United
States might have collapsed for lack of funds.

   On the new $2.00 bill, Morris' important role is also
symbolically acknowledged--but by people who want to undo the
freedom which his sacrifices helped bring about.  On the bill,
Morris is darkened into obscurity, just as our Unseen Rulers want
to obscure and blot out our freedom.  As I have mentioned before,
such subliminal propaganda messages and signals are all around
us--such as the State flag postage stamps which say "Bicentennial
Era", code words which refer specifically to the so-called
"Second American Revolution" program of John D. Rockefeller III.

   In more direct ways, too, Rockefeller propaganda is designed
to advance their program toward dictatorship.  On April 18, 1976,
the Rockefeller-controlled Atlantic Richfield Oil Co.,  known as
ARCO, began taking out full-page ads nation-wide for something
they called a "Tricentennial."  It pictures a mock American flag
consisting of 300 white stars on a field of blue with the number
2076 in computer-style numerals against a field of red, and below
that it encourages you to write and tell what changes you want to
see in America--without even a passing nod to the fact that you
might like some things to remain as they are.  The crux of the
whole ad is contained in the words, and I quote:

  "In about six months we plan to gather your responses, analyze
them, and make a full report of what we found out."  And, quote:
"We'll make sure it reaches the people who are in positions to
consider and act on it."

   What people do they mean?  The Rockefeller Brothers and their
helpers, that's who!  The new ARCO Tricentennial campaign is
nothing more or less than a replacement for John D. Rockefeller
III's National Committee for the Bicentennial Era, which was
forced to shut down a while back after its Bicentennial
Declaration ad of a year ago was exposed as the kickoff for the
secret new Rockefeller Constitution.

   Meanwhile, Rockefeller progress toward implementing their
secret and dictatorial "New States of America Constitution" is
proceeding as fast as they are able.  During the first week of
this month, April, a so-called "critical appraisal" of the UNITED
STATES CONSTITUTION was held in Philadelphia with over 100
attendees representing universities, business, labor, civil
rights groups, the judiciary, Congress, and others.

   Prominent names from the WATERGATE investigation were on the
list, including Henry Ruth, Jr., who served as the Watergate
Special Prosecutor in the final phases.  Can you imagine?

Labor was represented by Victor Gotbaum of the AFL-CIO; and
Stephen Schlossberg, General Counsel of the United Auto Workers.

On the business side were Board Chairmen of three corporations:
J. Irwin Miller of Cummings Engine Co.;  John DiBold of the
DiBold group; and Fletcher L. Gramm of Coppers Company, an
especially outspoken proponent of ideas which appear in the
Rockefeller "New States Constitution."

The Presidents of the Council on Foreign Relations, the League of
Women Voters, and Common Cause were there; as well as the
Executive Director of the American Civil Liberties Union; and the
Co-Director of the admittedly radical, anti-capitalist Peoples
Bicentennial Commission, Jeremy Rifkin.

Top representatives were present from Time Magazine, the Federal
Reserve System, and the American Bar Association.  Nearly a dozen
federal judges were in attendance; plus a retired Supreme Court
Justice; and the head of the General Accounting Office himself,
Elmer Staats.

   It's hardly any wonder that Professor Marvin E. Wolfgang,
President of the sponsoring American Academy of Political and
Social Science, confidentially declared at the meeting, and I

  "Neither the Congress nor the White House can ignore what we
say here."

And this is no idle academic comment, my friends, because on May
12, 1976, the Philadelphia World Affairs Council, a unit of the
Council on Foreign Relations, plans to come to Washington to
begin seriously pressuring Congress in preparation for formal
adoption of both the dictatorial Rockefeller "New States of
America Constitution" and the treasonous "Declaration of
Interdependence" first introduced last October in Philadelphia.

   Meanwhile the four Rockefeller Brothers continue working to
position themselves to take full command of the dictatorship they
hope to create soon.  Front man Nelson is rapidly emerging now
with the publicity campaign I mentioned he was planning in my
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 9 two months ago, and he is pulling out
all the stops.  On one hand to one audience he says: "Forget the
past, and let's look to the future"; but to another audience he
professes to be an unabashed believer in, quote: "the
old-fashioned virtues."  Can you imagine?  He says living by
example is his key religious precept; but, of course, he doesn't
mention any of the examples of his past record that I revealed
for you in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 1.  Most recently he has even
begun lashing out at old friends and allies, even close family
friends of long standing--such as Dr. Dorothy Fosdick of Senator
Henry Jackson's staff--in his consuming ambition to harness for
himself the so-called "Conservative sentiment" that is now
sweeping across America.

   Nelson Rockefeller and his brothers are still playing their
deadly end game of tactical maneuvering to meet contingencies,
trying to time political and economic events here in the United
States to mesh with fast-breaking events overseas in the build-up
for war.  To this end, my latest information is that two prime
options have now been developed for Rockefeller's take-over of
the presidency; and, as usual, I reveal them in the hope that by
doing so such actions as may be necessary may be taken to prevent
their happening.

   Option 1 may be exercise of the forces for Middle East war
that have now been unleashed to progress very rapidly leading to
war there and a "Declaration of Emergency" here before the
conventions this summer.  In that event, President Ford may be
removed from office one way or another before the Convention, in
which case Rockefeller will become President and serve out Ford's
term until January 20, 1977.

   But, my friends, Option 2 is now at the top of the Rockefeller
preference list.  I can now reveal that Nelson Rockefeller plans
to use his infamous 25th Amendment to the Constitution again--but
in a different way.  He has already made Ford to agree that he be
his Vice-Presidential candidate.  Rockefeller now plans for Ford
to be nominated for President and himself for Vice-President
regardless of what happens in the Primaries!  Then, after the
Convention, the plan is for President Ford to be incapacitated
for one reason or another, thereby activating Clause 4 of the
25th Amendment of the United States Constitution.

   Under this Clause, and I quote: "...a majority of the
principal officers of the executive departments"--who are now 99%
Rockefeller client followers--will send a written declaration to
the President pro tem of the Senate and the Speaker of the House
of Representatives that, and I quote: "...the President is unable
to discharge the powers and duties of his office..."  Thereupon
Vice-President Nelson Rockefeller, who himself is the President
pro tem of the Senate, quote: "...shall immediately assume the
powers and duties of the office as Acting President."

   Now get that, Acting President!  Rockefeller plans to achieve
this on or about September 19, 1976; and in this capacity under
the provisions of the 20th Amendment he will serve, quote:
"...until a President shall have qualified..."  But that could be
indefinitely, because part of the plan is also to call off the
elections because of the very abnormal circumstances and
attendant confusion--all of this paving the way for acceptance of
their dictatorial "New States of America Constitution" by a
National Referendum!

   And if you think such a thing just couldn't happen, just
remember: The banks were closed and the people's gold was
confiscated by FDR in 1933--and the people accepted it because of
the abnormal circumstances.

And World War II--Japanese Americans were rounded up and herded
into Concentration Camps.  An unthinkable act, yet it was
accepted due to the abnormal circumstances.

And would you have believed, just four years ago that both a
Vice-President and a President could be hounded out of office and
be replaced by two appointees?!!

   My friends, our Founding Fathers realized that the day might
come when our governments, both federal and state, would fail us
and their Constitutional duties to represent the people.  It was
for that reason that they included ARTICLE X of the Bill of
Rights.  Often it is called the States' Rights Amendment, but it
should be called the Peoples' Rights Amendment.  It reads, and I

  "The powers not delegated to the United States by the
Constitution, nor prohibited by it to the states, are reserved to
the states respectively, or to the people."

   I repeat: "reserved to the people."  So we have to look to
ourselves, and it has now come down to that--to you, to me, to
all the people of the United States!  It is time for us to highly
resolve, as did Abraham Lincoln:

  "...that this nation, under God, shall have a new birth of
freedom; and that government of the people, by the people, for
the people, shall not perish from the earth."

   Until next month, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you, and may God
bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 10

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


   This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC.  (1981 current
address: 1629 K St., NW, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello, everybody, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is March 19, 1976,
and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 10.

   In his Farewell Speech as our nation's outgoing first
president, George Washington warned us with the words:

  "Let there be no change by usurpation, for though this in one
instance may be the instrument of good, it is the customary
weapon by which free governments are destroyed."

He would, no doubt be shocked to know that today, nearly two
centuries later, his words are more truthful, more urgent, and
more up-to-date than all the oceans of meaningless words being
poured into the ears of the American public by current
presidential hopefuls.

   "Change by usurpation" has become the order of the day as the
rights of the people are usurped by our Unseen Rulers in order to
change our way of life; and if the Rockefeller Brothers succeed
in their accelerating plan to destroy our Republic right before
our very eyes, their New World Dis-order in alliance with the
Soviet Union will engulf us soon with blinding speed.

   But my friends, WE MUST NOT GIVE UP; because in the decisive
days we are now entering, the Rockefeller Brothers will in many
ways be more vulnerable than ever before because their complex
program of conquest is now behind schedule, some parts of it as
much as one year behind, and they now have to play a deadly game
of catch-up ball.  They are being forced now to speed up and
compress the timing of very major events in the very next few
months in an attempt to get back onto schedule and the hour is
now very late for them, as well as for you and me!

   They are behind because they have stumbled repeatedly in the
past two years.  First they stubbed their toe by leaving a trail
in the Fort Knox Gold theft, which has profoundly disrupted and
now ruined some of the planned final stages of David
Rockefeller's world gold corner.  Then, for that and other
reasons, Nelson Rockefeller failed to seize the presidency
according to plan between March and June 1975; and beyond that,
he has stubbed his toes two more times in the early fall and
around Christmas 1975.  John D. Rockefeller III, for his part, is
being forced to close up shop at the New York office which
published the huge "Bicentennial Declaration" ads one year ago
calling for a "Second American Revolution--the reason being our
success in exposing its connection with the secret new
Rockefeller Constitution.  The work is continuing but it is
concentrated now in the "American Revolution Bicentennial
Administration", a federal agency here in Washington headed by
John Warner, who is on John D. Rockefeller III's committee of the
"Second American Revolution"--the name given to a book written by
John D. Rockefeller published in early 1973.  As for brother
Laurance, he is occupying himself with the Food Stamp Program and
other preparations for war.

   The Stock Market, while it is extremely sick now generally, is
being kept healthy looking to the general public by means of the
Dow Jones industrial average, which is made up almost totally of
Rockefeller companies.  Until the other elements of their game
plan can be put back on the track, the dramatic crash of the Dow
is being held in abeyance.

   The biggest of these other elements, of course, is the coming
war; and it, too, is over a year late now having been delayed
first by Egyptian President Sadat and then thrown into a cocked
hat last summer by Indira Gandhi's crack-down on the CIA.

   Because of these things among others, the Rockefeller Brothers
are faced with a complex juggling act that must orchestrate our
economic collapse here in America, world-wide monetary chaos,
foreign intrigues, political maneuvering here at home, and
igniting the first stage of World War III in the Middle East.

   They planned all along to do all of these things but not on
such a tight schedule as they now face.  Now they almost have to
do these things all at once, or at least in very rapid sequence. 
If they succeed, the effect will be devastating; but if they trip
again now, as they can be made to do by awakening public
awareness and reaction, they will be in serious trouble.  What's
more, they can't turn back.  They have opened Pandora's box and
unleashed forces that are slipping out of their control.  Should
they be further delayed long enough, their whole house of cards
will begin to fall apart as they are overtaken by the Fort Knox
Plutonium Poison Scandal, the rapidly spreading exposure of their
dictatorial new Constitution among other things.

   More than ever now the one thing that can and will stop them
short of their dictatorship goal is the POWER OF THE TRUTH,
spread far and wide.  So it is crucial now that we keep our eyes
on the international scene as well as that here at home, because
the two are inseparably linked together in the Rockefeller plan
to enslave us all.  If they pull it off, it can happen at a time
you least expect it, so don't be caught off base.

   If the worst does happen, you have been warned; and if you
have been doing whatever you can to do to warn others, whether it
seems a lot or only a little to you, you will know you did your

   To point out the connection between developments here in
America and those around the world, I want to discuss the
following three topics today:




Topic #1--To the uninformed, the words "world government" or
"one-world order" often bring to mind the utopian picture of a
world at peace--relaxed, free, with an abundant life for all. 
This, after all, is exactly the image that Rockefeller propaganda
is designed to plant in our minds.

    Then, there are others who may vaguely realize that any
"world order" or "government" on the horizon today would be
rather authoritarian in nature but who do not feel personally
threatened by such a thing.  People in this category reason that
since, after all, they have no political ambitions anyway, all
they would need to do would be to keep their nose clean, do the
work they are assigned to do without kicking up a fuss, and
things could not be too bad.  They are the ones who sometimes
say: "Better red than dead."  But those who harbor such
comforting notions are wrong, dead wrong.  They are not
acquainted with the psychology of those who seek World Government
or One-World Order--a psychology that drives for control,
control, CONTROL!  Control on the grandest scale possible--the
entire world, and, control all the way down to the smallest
scale--YOUR HOME!

   In my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8 for January 1976, I revealed
that since at least 1954 there has been an official but
super-secret White House policy, quote:

  "...to so alter life in the United States so that it can be
comfortably merged with life in the Soviet Union."

This is why we see an unending stream of apparent mistakes,
concessions, and blunders by the modern outlaw band that
masquerades as "our Government."  These are not errors at all but
deliberate steps in the Rockefeller march toward dictatorial
world domination with their Soviet allies; and this includes the
Sovietization of family life, the last great bulwark against
total world domination.

   It is not hard to see, of course, that American family life is
under great pressure because the evidence is everywhere; it's
common knowledge.  The divorce rate is rising, the birth rate is
falling, and the Census Bureau claims that the average family
size is now at a record low level, and still dropping. 
Individuals are becoming more and more isolated.  But few people
know that we are seeing the fruits of a deliberate war on the
American family; and fewer still know that this is an integral
part of the Rockefeller drive for dictatorship.

   This attack on family life is well-organized, heavily funded,
and multifaceted; but the most important, most diabolical part of
it all is an intense but sugar-coated campaign now underway to
gain control of your children.  The objective: to break down your
control over your children and place them instead under the
supervision and control of the community--that is, the
government.  In other words, they are to be Sovietized.

   One aspect of this attack on your children is the subtle use
of familiar, already available avenues of communication in
EDUCATION.  Take, for example, that famous children's program
"Sesame Street."  Have you watched it lately?  Financed primarily
by Rockefeller-controlled foundations and the federal government,
Sesame Street has followed the standard Rockefeller philanthropic
formula that emerged over 70 years ago.  It established its halo
in the public eye by early programming, but has progressively
turned its efforts in more sinister directions under the
protection of that halo.  Arguments, bad temper, hurt feelings,
and even cartoons with an air of unreality are prominent today on
Sesame Street--and you will look in vain for any trace of an
identifiable family image.  Meanwhile the impressionable young
Sesame Street audience is treated with such things as a recent
episode showing all about how easy, painless, and perhaps even
fun, it is to use a tourniquet and syringe--all of it more
explicitly than you will see on nighttime adult programming! 
Harried young mothers trusting in the 'spotless reputation of
Sesame Street' often allow their children to watch with little or
no supervision, not realizing that concepts like this which pave
the way for early and easy drug addiction are being burned into
their children's minds.  Sesame Street is a product of the
"Children's Television Workshop", whose president is Joan Ganz
Cooney.  She is a Rockefeller insider who a year ago signed the
"Bicentennial Declaration" which I mentioned earlier, launching
the Rockefeller "Second American Revolution" to bring in their
secret new Constitution.

   Another example is seen in the big textbook controversy which
has made headlines because of the efforts of parents to prevent
their introduction into public schools.  Their objections, based
on the degrading and immoral material they see in the books, have
not succeeded in stopping these books, although the books have
been slowed down.

   The purpose of these books is to utilize the system of
compulsory education for a captive audience, supported by your
taxes but largely removed from your control nowadays, to shove
down your children's throats whatever the Rockefellers decide
they should learn.  The goal of these books is to make your child
think in terms of questioning your motives and challenging your
authority against a background of crumbling values.  The idea is
to subtly rob your child of everything he subconsciously clings
to for strength and security until suddenly he will find himself
totally lost, at sea and alone, and utterly dependent upon the
all-knowing, all-powerful federal government.

   But programs such as these, which use existing channels to
brainwash your child, are only half of the story.

   The other half is a gigantic effort to construct an entire new
apparatus nation-wide through which to take a giant leap toward
formalized and ultimately complete control of your child.  This
is the drive for what is euphemistically called "Comprehensive
Child Care."  This goes far, far beyond the mere establishment of
some handy Day Care Centers to help out working mothers, as you
may have been led to believe.

   Currently before Congress are two essentially identical
bills--Senate Bill 626 in the Senate, House Resolution 2966 in
the House of Representatives--called the "Child and Family
Services Act of 1975" in the Senate version.  It resurrects a
measure which would have become law late in 1971 except that
America's last elected President, Richard Nixon, vetoed it.  He
did so with a warning that it would commit the vast power of the
federal government, quote:

  "...to the side of communal approaches to child-rearing over
against the family-centered approach..."

adding that it would be, quote:

  "...truly a long leap into the dark for the United States
Government and the American people."

My friends, he was absolutely right.  I believe in giving credit
where credit is due, and Richard Nixon deserves nothing but
credit for that veto, which truly served the interest of the
American people in defiance of his Rockefeller bosses behind the

   Now the One-World-Order Rockefeller forces are trying once
again to push the same thing through with the aid of a new name
and a little face-lifting.  The connection between this so-called
Child Care Bill and the campaign for World Government is obvious
in many ways, right down to the personalities involved.

   For example, last month I mentioned that the
Rockefeller-sponsored "Declaration of Interdependence" was
introduced last October in Philadelphia exhorting us all to turn
our backs on America's right to continue as a free and
independent nation.  This was followed up in January 1976 with a
ceremonial signing of this Declaration by 126 United States
Senators and Congressmen, every one of whom thereby violated his
oath to preserve and defend our present United States
Constitution!  And if you examine the list of 27 sponsors of the
Senate "Child Care Bill", you will find that no fewer than 19 of
them also signed the treasonous "Declaration of Interdependence." 
These are the same forces at work!

   Today we no longer have an elected president to stand in the
way of the child-controllers in Congress--only alert, angry
citizens who so far have stymied the bill's progress through
sheer intimidation of both houses of Congress.  Those who are
focusing specifically on this bill have accurately identified its
key dangers.

   To begin with, the whole bill is built around the concept of
a, quote: "partnership" between the parent and government in
rearing and training the child.  But partners, my friends, are
co-owners of any enterprise for which the partnership is formed. 
Thus if you allow the federal government to become your partner
under this bill, you will be giving away a part interest in your
own child!  The ramifications of this partnership concept
ricochet all through the Child Control bill, and can hardly be

   But the real joker in this deck consists of just 14 brief
words buried clear back on page 56 of the Senate version, and
page 64 of the House version.  Title V, Section 501, Part 8 gives
the following important definition for the purposes of the bill,
and I quote:

  "Parent means any person who has primary day-to-day
responsibility for any child."

With this one key definition, which does not limit itself to
normal usage, the writers of the Child Control bill have thrown
the door wide open for ever expanding government control over
your child through endless interpretation, re-interpretation,
expansion, and elaboration under bureaucratic regulation.  It is
open-ended; it is an open invitation for the federal government
to maneuver into position to declare itself the parent of your
child, leaving you with no parental rights or powers at all!

   When and if that is allowed to happen, the FAMILY as we know
it will have been destroyed and the Rockefeller-Soviet world
empire will reign supreme for a brief moment over a broken and
ruined society before it crumbles and collapses into a repetition
of the "Dark Ages."

   Right now, as I said, this bill to pave the way for
dictatorial child control is temporarily stalled by citizen
alertness and protest; but if you think that is the end of the
matter, listen.

   The planned strategy of the child controllers is to lull the
bill's citizen opponents to sleep, if possible, by soft-pedaling
it.  Their plan is to put it in the closet and keep it there
until the very end of the current session of Congress if need be
and then, when the citizen protestors have evaporated in the
belief that they have won, the Child Control bill will suddenly
be whisked out of the closet and passed before we know what hit
us.  If this happens, the Rockefeller Brothers will be very close
to final success in achieving the objectives spelled out over 70
years ago for the Rockefeller program to take over education
under the guise of philanthropy.

   When John D. Rockefeller, Sr. set up the powerful "General
Education Board" in 1904, its purpose was spelled out clearly in
its very first publication called "Occasional Letter No. 1."  It
says, and I quote:

  "In our dreams we have limitless resources, and the people
yield themselves with perfect docility to our molding hands.  The
present educational conventions fade from our mind; and
unhampered by tradition, we work our own good will upon a
grateful and responsive rural folk."

And the punch line, my friends, a few sentences later is:

  "...so we will organize our children into a community, and
teach them to do in a perfect way the things their fathers and
mothers are doing in an imperfect way in the homes, in the shop,
and on the farm."

Topic #2--I have often commented that to get a glimpse of where
the United States economy is heading, one need only look at Great
Britain.  She is careening along down the road to disaster, and
we are not far behind.

   Early this month the British pound sterling crashed downward
through the $2.00 level of parity for the first time in history,
and it is still unstable.  Meanwhile, the United States dollar
also is in trouble in international currency markets, which are
becoming more jittery and unstable by the day.

   A full-blown international currency crisis is now erupting
exactly as planned by the Rockefeller Brothers when they forced
Europe to agree to a "floating" dollar with no fixed value on
March 16, 1973.  At a stroke, the Bretton Woods system of
fixed-exchange rates established in 1944 was wiped out, and now
we are back to the monetary anarchy and nationalism of the
1930's--pushed there by the Rockefellers.  This invites trade
wars, speculation, and rapid devaluations; and all of these
dangerous developments are beginning to materialize.  The
shocking 20% devaluation of the Italian lira a few days ago is
only a harbinger of things to come, and the key target in all of
this is still our own United States dollar.

   Soon the crescendo of events in Southern Africa will throw
more gasoline onto the fires of the world monetary instability as
the big prize, the Union of South Africa, faces a life-and-death
struggle after Rhodesia is disposed of by the
Rockefeller-Soviet-Cuban mercenaries fighting in that area.  Even
now, though you are hearing nothing about this through the kept
Rockefeller news media, panicky citizens of Rhodesia and South
Africa are trying to find some way to pull up their financial
stakes and leave, but they are trapped because of currency
controls in those countries.

   Soon, according to Rockefeller plans which I revealed as long
ago as February 1974, the gold mines of South Africa are to be
hit by strife, sabotage, civil war, warfare; and as the gold
supply from that source is substantially curtailed, gold prices
will be forced upward while our "floating" dollar sinks.  The
Rockefeller Brothers are bent on controlling the vast mineral
riches of South Africa, including especially the very large
uranium deposits there and the secret uranium enrichment process
South Africa has developed that is the most economical in the

   World Wars I and II were fought over oil.  World War III again
involves oil; but the emphasis this time is shifting to uranium,
since the Rockefellers are determined to make nuclear power the
energy wave of the future under their monopolistic control.

   The international monetary crisis will have its consequences
here at home in re-kindled inflation, credit crunch, and all the
other economic ills that it spawns.  The manipulated Dow Jones
industrial average hit 1000 a few days ago on March 11, 1976, at
a time when true unemployment, according to my own sources within
the Department of Labor, has now reached 19.1% nation-wide! 
Meanwhile the specter of threatened defaults--Lockheed in May,
New York in June, and others--is again coming into view.

   You also have been hearing about all kinds of banking problems
through the courtesy of the Rockefeller propaganda machine which
wants you to be aware of them in order to help undermine your
confidence.  But there are some aspects to the banking picture
right now that are far more major than anything you are being
told about through the Rockefeller media which involve real
mistakes and difficulties faced by the Rockefellers themselves.

   I am not referring here to those nerve-jangling front-page
stories about Chase Manhattan and First National City Bank which
were planted by the Rockefellers themselves for reasons I have
explained in another monthly Audio Letter recently.  I refer
instead to the situation which recently sent Henry Kissinger
packing off to Latin America.

   If you did not quite understand what our Secretary of State
was doing there, don't feel bad.  You weren't supposed to. 
Kissinger was sent there as a bill collector for David
Rockefeller who had suddenly discovered that his banking
interests, including the United States Export-Import Bank, have
about $25-billion in outstanding credits in Latin America that
are very shaky indeed.  The Four Brothers have been so busy
prying into everyone else's business that they have not been
minding their own store.  As presently scheduled, Kissinger's
trip is to be followed up in May by a trip by Secretary of the
Treasury William Simon before he resigns to continue working for
David Rockefeller in some other slot, perhaps at Chase Manhattan
Bank.  Simon can hardly wait to get out of the Treasury hot-seat
he has been ever since December 1975 when we caught him in an
outright lie in writing, no less, about the existence of the
Central Core Vault of the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox.

   The Rockefeller banking picture is in additional hot water
because for various reasons Arab-OPEC interests began pulling out
their funds in this country starting early this month, March
1976.  Around $20-billion in Arab money may be withdrawn; but
because of our dishonest fractional reserve banking system which
normally works to the advantage of the Rockefellers, the Arab
withdrawals could translate into a drop of over $100-billion in
total bank deposits.  That is enough to trigger some serious
economic repercussions prematurely before the Rockefellers are
ready to mesh them into their complex program, and that is why
the Federal Reserve Board surprised a lot of people last week by
starting to pump funds into the banking system.  And so it goes
as the Four Rockefeller Brothers continue to husband their own
cash resources to take advantage of cheap bargains while walking
the tight rope to Dictatorship.

   Meanwhile what is Congress doing for us?  Last month there was
a brief ray of hope when Congressman Wright Patman uncovered a
hornet's nest by exposing a network of interlocks between the
Federal Reserve System and the powerful Business Round Table
which helped defeat Patman's latest attempt to audit the Federal
Reserve.  This could have spelled real trouble for the
Rockefeller Brothers because both the Business Round Table and
the Federal Reserve are 24-karat Rockefeller.  But fortunately
for the Rockefellers, Patman just 'happened' to become seriously
ill before he could carry the matter any further, and he passed
away early this month!  And with him, died any hope that the
matter will be pursued an inch further.

   Now we are left with the likes of Congressman Otis Pike, who
made the terrible mistake of pointing his punches at the
Rockefeller CIA.  Had he followed through on the Fort Knox matter
after our discussions with him last September, he would be in the
driver's seat now; but as it is, the CIA has now vowed to finish
Otis Pike politically--and you can be sure they will try.

   And then there's Congressman John Conlan who several months
ago hurled a challenge at his constituents who dared to press him
for action about Fort Knox, saying that if they had evidence of
any wrongdoing he would put them in contact with the appropriate
authorities to carry out an investigation.  But when my colleague
Ed Durell who, with myself, does have access to such evidence
took up the Conlan challenge forwarded to us by those
constituents, Congressman Conlan apparently forgot all about his
pledge to help establish the proper contacts to get a true
investigation rolling.

   In my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8 for January 1976, I read Ed
Durell's "Open Letter" to Congressman Conlan of January 7, 1976,
in its entirety.

   Here, now, is Congressman Conlan's reply in its entirety,
dated February 26, 1976--seven weeks after the date of Mr. Ed
Durell's certified letter, and I quote:

  "Dear Mr. Durell,

   Following up receipt of your certified Open Letter to me, I
wanted to bring you up-to-date on my actions.  I have written to
the Chairman of the House Banking, Currency, and Housing
Committee Henry Reuss; Chairman of the House Domestic Monetary
Policy Committee Wright Patman; and Chairman of the House
Government Operations Committee, Jack Brooks.  I will let you
know when I receive their replies.

   Also, I am enclosing a copy of my letter to Secretary Simon in
which I request a complete inventory of United States gold
holdings.  I have asked him to let me know what action he plans
to take in this regard.

   It is unfortunate that there are not more Congressmen and
people in the Administration and the Attorney General's office
who are more interested in clarifying this matter.  I am just one
sincere Congressman, Mr. Durell; and much as you and I would like
to think, I cannot order official Washington to do yours and my
bidding.  If I could, Henry Kissinger and others would have been
replaced a long time ago.

                                            John B. Conlan
                                            Member of Congress"

And that, my friends, is apparently that as far as John Conlan is
concerned.  He continually professes to be concerned about Fort
Knox, yet here is not even the token of an attempt to open any
doors for a good investigation into the matter--no speeches on
the House floor, no press conference, no real follow-up to Mr.
Durell's letter in any way--just a very intimate letter to
William Simon, Treasury Secretary, who himself is party to the
cover-up.  Why doesn't John Conlan tell us what Bill Simon told
him on the night of January 5, 1975, in private?

   Conlan did not even bother to dignify his reply to Mr. Durell
with a personal signature, as he did to Simon--instead, a
signature duplicating machine was used.  Yes, this is the same
Congressman John B. Conlan you may have read about recently
leading the White House Prayer Breakfast.  This is the same
Congressman John B. Conlan whose name you will see as the author
of a religious tract exhorting citizens to 'get involved'; and
this is the same Congressman John B. Conlan who, as the member of
the House Banking Committee, has accepted money for his
re-election campaign from the Banking Lobby!  Apparently this is
Congressman Conlan's concept of what it means to be a
Representative--and in one respect at least he is completely
representative.  He may not represent you or me, but he does
accurately represent what the United States Congress stands for
today.  His behavior is a perfect example of why our Republic is
so close to extinction today.  This being the case, I for myself
shall now leave him alone with his own conscience.


Topic #3--Recently a CBS reporter asked Nelson Rockefeller if he
would still like to be President.  He shot back:

  "What do you think I've been doing for the past 16 years?"

He has actually been at it longer than that, my friends, and now
the prize he has kept his eyes focused on for so long is almost
within his grasp.  But because of the foreshortened time schedule
now remaining to him, we are now entering a period of tactical
maneuvering that is likely to be bewildering in its dodges and
reversals of apparent direction.

   This final phase has already begun, in fact, since I spoke
with you just last month; and already one major tactical shift
has occurred.  When I recorded monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 9 last
month, my information was that the plan was to make President
Ford stumble in the Primaries and force him to bow out before the
onslaught of Ronald Reagan.  The goal of forcing Ford out soon
has not changed one iota, but the tactics to achieve this have
been revised drastically for reasons directly related to former
President Nixon's trip to China late last month.  In other words,
to understand our domestic politics now, you also must look at
the international scene!

   Last November 1975 you will recall that Ford went to China. 
While he was there the Chinese leaders confronted him about the
huge Asian war that is now brewing, and I am told that Ford
turned pale and wobbly as he learned about these things for the
first time from the Red Chinese.  What they told him about the
grand strategy for the war was the same thing I told you that
same month in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6; about the Middle East
being the opening gun, about the role of the Helsinki Accord last
summer, about the strategy of the encirclement of Red China by
means of the Rockefeller-Soviet conquest of southeast Asia.  Even
now as I say these words, the domino theory is being dusted off
and revived to explain the planned toppling soon of the last
important domino in that area, Thailand.  The 5000 or so
Americans there include a Fifth Column contingent that is to pave
the way for Thailand to be handed over to the Communists under
Soviet control!

   When Ford returned, he began working as closely as possible
with Richard Nixon; and now the team of Nixon, Ford, and Connally
are engaged in a power struggle against Nelson Rockefeller and
his lackeys--Ronald Reagan and Hubert Humphrey.  As I have
revealed in previous AUDIO LETTERS, Richard Nixon is on the phone
just about daily to tell Ford to "hang in there", and so far Ford
has done so.

   Nixon's trip to China last month was not at the request of the
State Department but instead at the request of President Ford
himself.  Nixon's trip to China was an errand of peace in that he
is trying to maintain a link between the United States and China
to offset as much as possible the hard alliance between the
Rockefeller Brothers and the Soviets.  Nixon knows very well that
Nelson Rockefeller is still out to get him if possible.  That is
why Nixon was unwilling to make the trip on anything but a Red
Chinese airplane sent here for that purpose.

   Faced with this Nixon-Ford-Connally axis, Nelson Rockefeller
decided several weeks ago on tactics designed to give his
opponents a political judo throw--that is, to send them sprawling
by using their own strength and momentum.  First he re-programmed
his kept media to help, instead of hurt, Ford in the Primaries,
thus lulling Ford into false confidence over his own seemingly
growing strength.  Reagan is to be beaten for now, but not so
badly that he would look bad later on when Rockefeller is ready
to tap him as his Vice-President.  To make sure Reagan gets the
message not to drop out of the campaign, Rockefeller told Reagan
to remain a candidate against Ford, quote: "as long as the money
holds out."  And just to make sure, Rockefeller's comments in
this vein were echoed by his lackey, Barry Goldwater, who
ironically ran for President 12 years ago on the slogan: "A
choice, not an echo."

   To further build up the self-confidence of the
Nixon-Ford-Connally axis, and also to fool the Red Chinese if
possible into thinking that a favorable shift in American policy
is being achieved, other things are also being done.  For
example, Ford has now officially deleted the word "detente" from
his vocabulary and some harsher than usual words have been
permitted to emanate from Washington in the direction of the
Soviet Union.  After all, words are cheap for domestic

   Meanwhile the final touches are being put on the preparations
for war; and at the same time, several options are being prepared
to enable Ford to be suddenly and surprisingly cut down and swept
out of office.  One option would involve the exposure of a
fast-breaking financial scandal whose possible speed can be
guessed at by the devastating experience undergone by
Vice-President Spiro Agnew in 1973.  Other options, however, are
also being prepared because Nelson Rockefeller intends to take no
chances at this late date.  When war, shortages, and economic
catastrophe arrive, Nelson Rockefeller fully intends to be the
beneficiary of it all, easing himself into power as our President
and then Dictator.  The eagerness with which he awaits this turn
of events stands in stark contrast to the horrified reaction of
other world figures who have learned recently about the imminent

   For example, early last December, when I was in Europe and
England, I gave a copy of my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 detailing
the war plans to a person who played it for Prime Minister Harold
Wilson.  The result: On December 15 he secretly gave the Queen
three months notice of the fact that he intended to resign, and
three days ago he stunned England and the world by doing just

   It is sad indeed that Richard Nixon, who is now doing what he
can to fight for peace, was nonetheless used successfully by the
Rockefellers to do our nation grave injury in many areas while he
was President, just as they have done with every president since
Woodrow Wilson; and it is ironic that Nelson Rockefeller's plan
to declare an iron-fisted "National Emergency" soon will make use
of a tool left to him by none other than his present bitter
enemy--Richard Nixon.

   I refer to presidential Executive Order 11490 dealing with
emergency preparedness signed by Nixon October 28, 1969.  It is
33 pages long; it spells out vast powers and functions to be
exercised by 28 federal departments and agencies in the event of
a declared national emergency.  Under the terms of this Executive
Order, these emergency powers can be activated either by Congress
or by proclamation of the President.

   To the unwary, the idea may come across that this Executive
Order would only be used in time of war due to the frequent
references to, quote: "emergency, including an attack on the
United States."  But note well that "war" is actually just given
as an example of an emergency situation.  At the outset it is
stated to be applicable, quote:

  "in any national-emergency type situation that might
conceivably confront the nation."

No other criteria are given to govern the declaration of such an
emergency; therefore all that Nelson Rockefeller or another
president or Congress needs to do is to conceive of a situation
as fitting their concept of an "emergency", and Executive Order
11490 can be invoked!  It is to be done in the, quote: "national
interest", but that is never defined; but one section makes the
purpose of the Order explicitly clear in the words, and I quote:

  "assuring the continuity of the federal government in any
national-emergency type situation that might confront the

   The "federal government" is the focus here--not the nation,
not the people, not the Republic, but the federal government.  In
other words, it is designed for the benefit of our Rulers just as
in the secret new Rockefeller Constitution.

   Once invoked, Executive Order 11490 authorizes
unConstitutional and so illegal powers to be wielded by the
federal government.  Under the guise of bland-sounding words like
"emergency", "management", and "operation", the federal
government is authorized to completely take over business and
industry, or any parts thereof, without compensation.  Border
closing and control, censorship, and the registration and
continual monitoring of all citizens and their movements are also
provided for under Executive Order 11490 with the quasi private
United States Postal Service playing an important role in this,
as I revealed in my AUDIO LETTER last month.  Full powers over
transportation and communication are also granted, along with all
forms of energy right down to flashlight batteries.  Even your
pocket radio would be included because of the authority given to
control any device capable of emitting electromagnetic radiation,
which your radio and TV do in small amounts.

   The clandestine federal police structure now in place in the
United States, which I warned you about last month, would also be
activated under this Executive Order; so would special emergency
measures for custody and protection of prisoners.  These are
worded in such a way as to make their true meaning anything but
obvious unless the phrase, quote: "mass feeding and housing" is
noticed.  This refers, my friends, to the hush-hush CONCENTRATION
CAMPS which are now in a condition of operational readiness in
remote areas all around the United States!!

   Executive Order 11490 even places at the disposal of the
federal government that most cruel and most powerful of all tools
for mass political control--HUNGER.  Various provisions for
stockpiling of survival items, food and water included, are
worded in such a way that they could be initiated after the
"Declaration of Emergency" rather than being prepared ahead of
time to meet that emergency.  Thus the federal government could
artificially create terrible shortages at will under the guise of

   And if you think such a thing is too farfetched, just remember
back to the early days of World War II if you are old enough.  Do
you recall, for example, that you were required after war broke
out to turn in any extra tires you may have had, and thereafter
had a hard time getting any new ones?  The excuse given was the
rubber had to be stockpiled and recycled into the war effort--but
that was an outright lie.  I have been given eye-witness accounts
by people who saw these tires piled up, slashed, and burned after
they were turned in; and the CONGRESSIONAL RECORD in 1942
contains a great deal of material brought out by then Senator
Harry Truman showing that there was a deliberate larger plan to
deny many critical war materials both to the American public and
our military forces in the early days of the war.  And guess who
was implicated in all of this--you're right, the Rockefeller
Standard Oil interests.

   Given all of this, the possibility must not be overlooked that
there will be no election next November if Nelson Rockefeller and
his Brothers successfully orchestrate the various elements of
their do-or-die plan of conquest.

   Executive Order 11490 in the hands of a man who has shown
himself to be unhampered by scruples or conscience could be used,
in effect, to suspend our present UNITED STATES CONSTITUTION; and
next November we may be given no choice at the polls except a
"Yes" or "No" vote in a National Referendum on the proposed new
Rockefeller Constitution.  Voting on fixable voting machines
under the watchful eyes of the federal police, the outcome--if
that is permitted to happen--would be in very little doubt.  Just
as Cuba did last month on February 15, 1976, we could be counted
upon to ratify a new Constitution to replace our suspended older

   These things do not have to happen, my friends.  The
Rockefeller Brothers can be made to trip by the spreading
awareness of, and reaction to, the Truth, the absolute TRUTH. 
But in case there are any "doubting Thomases" listening to my
voice, I say to you now: If you sit back and watch as all this
comes to pass before your very eyes, do not look back a year from
now and say: "Why weren't we warned?"--because, my dear friend,
you were.

   Until next month, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you, and may God
bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 09

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


   This recording is a product of AUDIO BOOKS INC.  (1981 current
address: 1629 K Street NW, Suite 5092, Washington, D.C.  20006)

   Hello, everybody, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is February 16,
1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 9.

   According to federal government decree, this is the day that
we are to observe the birthday of George Washington, although, of
course, he was born on February 22.  This is just a tiny example
of the elaborate psychological warfare being waged on us by the
Four Rockefeller Brothers to subtly pry us loose from every
tradition, great and small, that tends to make us resistant to
their take-over plans.  Their goal, after all, is to twist the
Bicentennial celebration of our nation's independence and use it
to silence the Liberty Bell forever.  It is up to you and me, my
friends, to repair the crack in our Liberty Bell so that it can
once again ring out loud and strong.

   Our beautiful DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE was signed 200 years
ago on July 4, and ever since as a reminder of our nation's
birthday each year the federal fiscal year has always begun in
July--every year, that is, until now.

   Last fall on October 24, 1975, a chilling parody of our
nation's Founding Document was signed in Philadelphia, no less,
to enhance its historical image.  It is called the "Declaration
of Interdependence" for which our puppet President Ford served as
the advance publicity man in speeches last spring.  It calls on
all Americans to turn our backs on our precious independence and,
quote, "narrow notions of national sovereignty" in favor of what
is expressly called "a new world order."

   And, my friends, you may be shocked to know that when our
current fiscal year runs out on June 30, 1976, it will not be
followed as it always has in the past by a new fiscal year
beginning in July.  Instead, there is to be a nameless transition
period of three months, and all fiscal years thereafter are to
begin in October!  Why?  To commemorate the signing last October
of the new Rockefeller Declaration of Interdependence.  Thus July
4, like Washington's birthday, is to become just another date on
a calendar slipping quietly into oblivion, a relic of what our
Unelected Rulers tell us is our obsolete, outmoded past.

   As we say Good-bye to our Declaration of Independence and
everything it has stood for during the past 200 years, we ought
to ask at least:

  "What is it that our Rulers are so anxious to have us throw
away?  What kind of things does it remind us of that the
Rockefeller Brothers want so desperately to have us forget?"

   The DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE starts with the assumption
that all men are endowed by their Creator with certain
inalienable rights, including life, liberty and the pursuit of
happiness, and that the preservation of these is the entire
purpose of legitimate government--quote: "To secure these rights,
Governments are instituted among men, deriving their just powers
from the consent of the governed."  And this is so basic that,
quote: "...when a long train of abuses and usurpations, pursuing
invariably the same Object evinces a design to reduce them under
absolute Despotism, it is their right, it is their duty, to throw
off such Government, and to provide new Guards for their future

My friends, our real government today is not the one defined in
our CONSTITUTION which belongs to us.  We are ruled today by the
Rockefeller Brothers and their empire of modern outlaws pulling
the strings and manipulating the actions of the visible
governmental apparatus.

   So, what were some of the elements of that "design to reduce
them under Despotism" that led to the Declaration of
Independence?  Why do the Rockefellers fear to have us reminded
of it?  Just listen to a few examples of the grievances listed in
the DECLARATION OF INDEPENDENCE and think of any parallels you
can see today, and the answer will be obvious to you.  Quote:

  "He (the King) has erected multitudes of New Offices, and sent
swarms of Officers to harass our people, and eat out their

What about our mushrooming federal bureaucracy?

Another quote:

  "He has combined with others to subject us to a jurisdiction
foreign to our constitutions, and unacknowledged by our laws;
giving his consent to their Acts of pretended Legislation:"

What about the super secret White House Merge Policy Directive to
Sovietize America which I made public for the very first time
last month in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8?

What about the growing mountain of unConstitutional "Executive
Orders" and oppressive regulations which today constitute
pretended legislation?

Another complaint, quote:

  "...depriving us in many cases, of the benefits of Trial by

Our forefathers fought and died in a bloody revolution over this,
yet it is only one of the many safeguards which are specifically
eliminated as a right in the secret new Rockefeller Constitution
which we are expected to accept this coming November!

Perhaps most telling of all, quote:

  "He has abdicated Government here, by declaring us out of his
Protection and waging War on us."

   My friends, you and I have been declared out of the protection
of our own Government by the Rockefeller agents who control it! 
As I have documented for you in previous tapes, every remedy
provided by law for the redress of such grievances as the
terrible Fort Knox Twin Scandal and other such serious matters,
has been blocked by Rockefeller agents and fellow travelers
contrary to law.

   Most recently, for example, my associates and I took up a
Congressional challenge to state our specific charges about Fort
Knox so that a Grand Jury might be empaneled to investigate them. 
The challenge was leveled by Congressman John B. Conlan of
Arizona at certain of his constituents who dared to press him for
action, and was an act of gross hypocrisy because Congressman
Conlan knew full well that those individuals were in no position
to present such charges and evidence themselves.  But in an Open
Letter to Congressman Conlan dated December 7, 1976, my colleague
Edward Durell did exactly what had been asked, as reviewed in
complete detail in my AUDIO LETTER of last month.  The result? 
The same studious silence and inaction from Congressman Conlan
that has characterized his attitude toward Fort Knox for over a

   Whoever knows what is right to do and fails to do it, for him
it is a sin.

   The Rockefeller Brothers are truly waging undeclared war on
us.  Your survival may depend on your understanding this fact. 
My three topics today are, therefore:




Topic #1--Two days ago on February 14, 1976, Ford declared in a
Florida campaign speech that he has had it with terrorism, and he
proposed the death penalty for a range of terrorist offenses. 
Not long ago full-fledged terrorism was something most Americans
tended to associate only with other countries.  "That couldn't
happen here."  But lately it is happening here, more and more. 
First there was the spectacular SLA case involving Patty Hearst. 
More recently, hundreds of grocery stores, banks and whatnot have
been bombed.  On December 29, 1975, 11 people were killed and 75
injured when a bomb exploded in the passenger terminal at New
York City's La Guardia Airport; and you can rest assured that
this is only the beginning.

   On January 13, 1976, FBI Chief Clarence Kelly helped get our
Bicentennial Year rolling by predicting growing terrorism in
America and assuring us all that the FBI is bracing itself for
the worst.

   What you are not being told is that this new frightening
problem is a carefully orchestrated part of the undeclared war
being waged on you by the Rockefeller Brothers.  The terrorism
itself is flaring up, courtesy of your friendly CIA, which was
behind the SLA and La Guardia episodes as well as many others of
lesser note.  Of course after they have given enough examples for
people to copy, they fully expect a few unstable individuals here
and there to decide to do the same thing, and those amateurs will
be the ones who will be caught from time to time and prosecuted
with great fanfare.  As usual, the Rockefellers first create a
problem on one hand--in this case terrorism--and then stand ready
to solve this problem for us on the other hand--in this case by
way of a nation-wide law enforcement apparatus, which they are
subtly bringing under federal control.

                        POLICE SITUATIONS

   This same technique is being applied in the related area of
"civil disturbances."  Lodged within the so-called United States
Department of Justice is a relatively new and little known agency
called the "Law Enforcement Assistance Administration" or LEAA
for short.  In the few years of its existence, LEAA has turned
into very big business indeed, and is busily converting segments
of your local police all around the country into Regional
branches of our as yet unadmitted "Federal Police Force"--in
other words, our GESTAPO.  Of course "Gestapo" has an unpleasant
ring to it so don't expect them to name it that.  These "special
duty law enforcement teams" are for the most part not yet well
known by local citizens in each area.  Lately, though, a few of
them have received some unwanted publicity in scattered locations
around the country, so keep your eyes open.

   One favorite type of unit is often called a Metropolitan or
Metro Police Unit.  These are typically formed as a cooperative
arrangement among a group of communities.  Each community
contributes a few of its officers to the Metro Unit, which is
given jurisdiction throughout all the communities involved.

   The LEAA assists in getting these going by footing the bill,
or most of it, with your federal tax dollars for the first few
years.  Sounds nice, doesn't it?  But it is the first step toward
replacing your local policemen with Regional cops who may feel
much less attachment to you or your town.  Worse yet, LEAA takes
deliberate advantage of the natural tendency of most local Police
Chiefs not to give up their best men but to instead pawn off any
troublemakers or less reliable men onto the Metro Unit.

   It's no wonder that in one area I was recently told about,
such a Regional police unit has already acquired the nickname of
"The Storm Troopers."  The residents in that area have no idea
how appropriate that nickname really is.

   Most of this is tied in directly or indirectly with the secret
domestic "OPERATION GARDEN PLOT" about which I warned you seven
months ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 2.  Most of this huge
program, which has even involved domestic war games and maneuvers
for several years, is still well hidden.  One exception, although
its connection with "Operation Garden Plot" is not generally
known, is the new breed of police usually known as "Special
Weapon Attack Teams" or SWAT.  They are the Green Berets of the
police, and there is even a popular TV program to make them
appear as heroes rather than the menace that they really are. 
True, they are frequently used right now in situations where
their services may be beneficial, but this is little more than
"combat readiness training" to insure that they can be used for
more serious purposes when the time comes.

   But you may say: "These policemen are good Americans
themselves.  Surely they would not allow themselves to be used as
tools in setting up a Dictatorship!"  Of course they wouldn't IF
they saw the situation that way, but "Operation Garden Plot"
started nearly 10 years ago in the wake of riots which were
deliberately ignited in the mid-60's.  All the indoctrination
given to these Special Police Units is given the slant that
serious civil disturbances might rise again and that at all costs
they would have to be put down to save our country!  This is the
diabolically clever trap being laid for us by the Rockefeller
Brothers.  We must stop the secret new Rockefeller Constitution
before it is adopted, otherwise the streets of America will run
red as frantic Americans try too late to reverse the so-called
"Second Revolution" of the Rockefeller Brothers.


   Of course there may not yet be a Regional police set-up where
you live, but something else is bound to be closer to home, the
Post Office.  If there is one thing Americans probably don't fear
it is the Post Office.  We have been brought up to take for
granted the safety, dependability, and convenience of the United
States mails, and that is exactly what makes it such a valuable
tool for the Rockefeller Brothers now that it has fallen into
their clutches.

   On May 28, 1969, the "Postal Service Act of 1969" was
introduced in the House of Representatives by Congressman Morris
Udall of Arizona on behalf of the Rockefeller interests who had
been paving the way for it for two years.  More recently, by the
way, Udall has been leading the campaign to destroy your property
rights by means of national "LAND USE" legislation, and he has
also rendered other useful services to the Rockefellers.  Perhaps
you have wondered how good old "Mo Udall" has been able to come
from nowhere and receive such favorable publicity in his
presidential campaign.  Now you know.

   After an appropriate delay to suggest due deliberation, the
"Postal Service Act" was passed overwhelmingly by both houses of
Congress and signed into law by President Nixon late in 1970.  At
the stroke of a pen, the "United States Post Office Department"
was abolished and replaced by the quasi-private "U.S. Postal

   Just as the "Federal Reserve Act" in 1913 handed over control
of our money to the Rockefeller interests, the "Postal Service
Act" handed them the control of our most basic communication
system, the Mails.

   Like the Federal Reserve System, the Postal Service is now
privately owned, yet it retains the powers and privileges of the
federal government.  And not only was it obtained at no cost to
the present owners aside from lobbying and propaganda expenses
but their investment bankers have already reaped over $50,000,000
in brokerage fees for placing Postal Service Bonds in the private

   When the Act was passed, there was lots of hoopla telling us
that the new Postal Service would hold costs down by improving
service; but postal rates have almost doubled already under the
Postal Service, and just today the news was filled with
statements that the Postal Service will just have to raise rates
again due to its huge deficit--a billion dollars this year alone!

   And as for service, the real plans of the new Postal Service
Corporation when it was created were the exact opposite of the
Public Relations promises.  Plans contained in documents that are
virtually unknown to the American people spell out a well defined
process by which postal service is to be progressively cut to the
bone, not improved; and this process of Sovietization of our mail
service is even laid out in the favorite Soviet style--a
Five-Year Plan from July 1, 1971, to June 30, 1976.

   The mail service reduction plan involves nine separate
measures.  Briefly they are:

1. Elimination of a six-day mail delivery and manned window

2. Consolidation of mail processing centers;

3. Individual and group production standards;

4. New techniques for carrier office work;

5. Limiting mail delivery by requiring such things as "cluster
boxes" at trailer courts, and making only one attempt to deliver
a Parcel Post;

6. Cutting back on basic services such as smaller Post Offices
and the number of Mail Collection boxes, and no longer delivering
Parcel Post and Certified Mail to your home;

7. Requiring you, the customer, to do more and more of the Postal
Service's work, such as coding and sorting the mail;

8. Eliminating the use of Air Transportation for first-class mail
within 750 miles; and

9. Establishment of so-called Standardized Postal Facilities.

   So far these measures sound pretty harmless, don't they? 
Aside from a little inconvenience, they probably don't arouse
much concern on your part.  That is because they were
deliberately written to avoid arousing such concerns and
suspicions.  Each of these nine measures is described by the
Postal Service itself as a, quote "stratagem."  The word
"stratagem", my friend, means a trick in war for deceiving the
enemy.  We, you and I, are the enemy whom the Rockefeller
Brothers intend to deceive with these bland descriptions of very
important things.

   For example, consider Stratagem 2--Consolidation of Mail
Processing Centers.  This implies centralization of mail
processing which will help render the "Search and Seizure"
provisions I will tell you about in a moment more powerful.  It
is also tied in with Stratagem 6 under which more than 3000 Post
Offices have already been shut down, and more will be lopped off

   Most, if not all of the nine Stratagems for downgrading postal
service, imply severe cutbacks in Postal Service personnel.  The
dwindling personnel and lengthening lines in Post Offices these
days are only a foretaste of things to come.  Last year alone
over 15,000 Postal Service jobs were eliminated, and it is going
to get worse as postal jobs disappear right and left.  One might
have expected appropriate Labor spokesmen to put up a howl at
such a plan, but not so George Meany, the AFL-CIO president who
really works for the Rockefeller Brothers, not his Union members. 
He supported this so-called "Postal Reform", thanks to a virtual
yellow-dog contract which gave the AFL-CIO exclusive rights to
represent Postal Service employees without their consent.

   But the mere downgrading of postal service, swindling of
Postal Service employees, and the financial milking of Postal
Service assets and public cash by the Rockefeller Brothers take a
back seat to far more dangerous and little known provisions
quietly written into the "Postal Service Act."

   For example: Suppose you were to write a note or a letter to a
friend and then decide for some reason to take it to him yourself
or have another friend who is going that way drop it off for you. 
That, my friends, is a violation of federal law--the Postal
Service Act of 1969.  The Rockefeller Brothers will brook no such
competition with their postal monopoly.  The only way you can
legally take or send a letter by any means outside the Postal
Service is to treat it as if you had mailed it--seal it in an
envelope, address it for mailing, put the amount of postage on
that would have been required to mail it, then cancel the stamps
in ink and write the date on the envelope.  If you are willing to
go through all that, then you may send or take the letter by some
other means other than the Post Office--that is, unless and until
paragraph 1401-B of the Postal Service Act is invoked which
allows even this privilege to be suspended.

   The parallels between this situation and the "Stamp Act" which
helped bring on the American Revolution are interesting, aren't
they?  This virtual prohibition on carrying letters out of the
mail sounds petty and greedy, but it is far more than that.  It's
the key to a whole range of the Gestapo-style controls for
search, seizure, and censorship which can now be activated at any
moment.  The law already exists.  All that need be done is to
suddenly start enforcing it.

   Under paragraph 1403 of the Postal Service Act, Postal Service
officers can make searches for any such illegally transported
mailable items.  They can stop your car and completely search it,
or if they find your car parked anywhere they can search it.  If
you have any package with you--for example, a birthday gift for a
friend all wrapped up with a fancy bow--they can open that up to
see if you are smuggling a forbidden letter inside.  Should an
illegally transported letter be found in such a search, it may be
seized; and if it was concealed in the package or parcel, the
package is simply forfeited outright.  Within six months after
such a seizure, the Postal Service has the option of bringing
suit or other proceedings against you.  It need not return your
letter to you in event of a favorable ruling until two months
after those proceedings are completed.  In other words, that
seemingly petty little provision about not sending a letter
outside the mails, along with the other provisions dependent on
it, open the door for wholesale detainment and searching of
anyone and everyone traveling anywhere off his own property. 
They constitute an extremely dangerous trap ready to be used when
the occasion calls for it to restrict and control your movements
and activities.  Any time you may be suspected of engaging in any
activity the Government does not want, a postal inspection may be
imposed on you to look for damaging evidence.  It is only one
short step further, of course, for such evidence to be planted
during the search itself.  "UnConstitutional", you say?  Of
course it is.  After all, it is the product of the same people
who brought you Adolf Hitler and who now seek to destroy our

   And what I've said is not all, there's more.  For instance,
there are the provisions against what is called "Non-mailable
Matter."  Right now public acceptance of this concept is being
promoted by applying it only to pornographic material; but later
it's application can be expanded to include anything our Rulers
find objectionable, such as criticism of their policies!

   Furthermore, sanctions can now be imposed on anyone who uses a
fictitious name or address, and advanced fingerprint techniques
can be used by the Postal Service to track down those who have
handled an anonymous letter.  Should the President declare a
"National Emergency", such as he may do soon on account of the
war that's planned in the Middle East and as is mentioned 13
times in the secret new Rockefeller Constitution, everyone will
be required by Executive Orders now in effect to register at
their Post Office just as aliens do now.  You would then be on a
very short leash.

   The Postal Service also is given other dangerous powers, such
as the power of "eminent domain" by which this huge private
corporation can acquire your property if it so desires.  So the
Rockefeller Brothers are weaving their Postal Service web larger
and larger out of the public eye until the day they decide to put
it to use to entrap us all as a part of their "undeclared war"
against you and me.

Topic #2--When World War I ended, the Treaty of Versailles
required the defeated Germany to pay huge war reparations to the
victorious Allies.

   After World War II, Europe was again forced to pay
reparations, but you won't find them in any history book because
this time the reparations were paid not to any nation or group of
nations but to the Real Rulers of the Western world--the Four
Rockefeller Brothers.  And, as always, it was done at your

   Here is what happened.  As I explained in AUDIO BOOK No. 1
about the "...COMING DEPRESSION AND WAR...", World War II was
brought about by the international Rockefeller interests and
succeeded in its purpose--to smash the British Empire in order to
break the British boycott against the Rockefeller Standard Oil
Company in the immense Saudi Arabian oil concessions.  Europe was
devastated in the process, however; and after the war the
Rockefeller Brothers set about rebuilding Europe and Japan, and
their own major holdings there, using American taxpayer's money
as usual.  It was called Foreign Aid, The Marshall Plan, and the
Point Four Program among others, the Rockefellers themselves
profiting handsomely from all the so-called foreign aid
programs--and still do today through their multinational
corporations.  But, for the fraction of these programs that did
benefit Europe and Japan, they also laid plans to exact
reparations from Europe and Japan to go into their own coffers.

   Three years ago in my book "THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE
DOLLAR", I showed how the Rockefeller Brothers caused the United
States dollar to be divorced from its gold backing so that gold
could be phased out of the international monetary system and into
their own private pockets.

   Over two decades the Rockefeller Brothers had expanded their
multinational corporations into a formidable economic force using
proceeds from foreign aid as well as the tremendous profits from
Saudi Arabian oil, which they obtained at a net cost of only five
cents (5) a barrel for over 30 years!

   In the late 1960's foreign affiliates of the Rockefeller
multinationals, armed with $200-billion, started dumping these
dollars on the London Gold Market, forcing gold prices up there. 
European central bankers lost billions of dollars worth of gold
in an attempt to keep the gold price and their own currencies
stable, but to no avail.  The forces against them were just too
great, and by March 1968 they were forced to give up, causing the
establishment of the "two-tier" gold system.

   In mid-1971 these same multinationals launched another such
offensive dubbed "Campaign May" bombarding the same central
bankers of Europe with wave after wave of billions of dollars
until finally on March 1973 the central banks of Europe were
forced to purchase the stolen gold reserves of the United States
in Switzerland at $90 an ounce--2-1/2 times the then current
official price of $35.00 per ounce.  The Rockefeller interests
received $45-billion for their trouble.  What thus appeared to be
a soft dollar devaluation in early 1973 was actually reflecting a
huge behind-the-scenes reparation payment extorted from Europe by
the Rockefeller interests for their role in rebuilding Europe and
Japan after World War II--a war which the Rockefeller interests
themselves had caused.

   Since that initial sale of America's gold, the Rockefeller
Brothers have made windfall profits on that same gold several
times over by massaging the gold market up and down--buying low
and selling high.  Such international economic warfare, as well
as the undeclared domestic warfare being waged on you and me,
lies behind the theft of America's gold from Fort Knox and
elsewhere; and there have been hints, at least, about the Fort
Knox rip-off in the past.  In 1968, for example, one William
Ruckelshaus was running for the Senate from Indiana on the
Republican ticket and he took a poke at then President Johnson by
saying, and I quote:

  "I would that every one of our 200-million American citizens
could embark on a sacred pilgrimage to Fort Knox and walk the
silent passageways and view the empty vaults which were once
stacked with gold."

But Ruckelshaus is now one of the Rockefeller "inner circle" and
we hear no more from him about irregularities at Fort Knox!  Nor
do we hear about it through the major news media.  Most are
silent because they are under control one way or another.  The
remaining few who are aware of the Fort Knox situation have so
far knuckled under to pressure and a completely wrong public
interest argument--namely, that if the truth about Fort Knox
comes out, it could bring down the world's monetary system.  But,
my friends, the Rockefeller Brothers have already done that--it
is on the road to total collapse right now to suit their

   What exposure of the Fort Knox Scandal would do is to wrestle
it free from their control so that it could be rebuilt for the
benefit of everyone.

   The news has recently included big stories about other alleged
irregularities and corrupt practices within the United States
Treasury.  For example, Internal Revenue Service Commissioner
Donald Alexander is presently under a Grand Jury investigation
here in Washington, D.C. on corruption charges.

   But the biggest story of them all is Fort Knox; and though it
has been 22 months since I have made my initial charges in
Congressional testimony, there still is no Grand Jury and no
Congressional investigation about Fort Knox, and the story itself
remains blackballed and embargoed by the Rockefeller-controlled
major media!

   But the strain of covering up is taking its relentless toll. 
As I related last month, Treasury Secretary Simon has now
resorted to outright lies, saying the Central Core Vault at Fort
Knox does not exist--despite our evidence to the contrary from a
former Commanding General of Fort Knox and other sources.

   The Simon lie is now the new official line at the Treasury and
is being repeated verbatim by one official after another.  And
poor Mary Brooks!  Mrs. Brooks, of course, is the Director of the
United States Mint, ostensibly so.  In September 1974 she capped
off the Boy Scout picnic for visitors at Fort Knox with those
famous words: "See, its all here", but she later found out that
my charges are true and that she had been made a "fall guy" by
her bosses.  She tried months ago to resign as I mentioned in one
of my monthly AUDIO LETTERS, but was refused supposedly until all
blows over.  But the strain is becoming unbearable, and reports
have just surfaced to the effect that she has been under hospital
care since last November for nervous exhaustion caused by worry
and strain.  Officially what she is said to be worried about is
the ridiculous case of several missing experimental aluminum
pennies.  If you want to believe that one, go right ahead.  Poor
Mary Brooks is now in a very precarious situation.  She has
become unreliable for the conspirators and they now have her
right where they want her--in a hospital!  If she is lucky she
may be allowed to resign for "reasons of health", or she may be
about to follow the last footsteps of Mrs. Louise Boyer for
knowing too much.  The successful mass media blackout on the Fort
Knox Gold Scandal has now guaranteed that you will face very hard
economic times shortly.

   But still worse is the Fort Knox Plutonium Poison Scandal,
which is being covered up even more brutally.  It has now been
four months since I first revealed that a CIA super poison
processed from deadly radioactive plutonium-239 was stored in and
leaking from the Central Core Vault of the Fort Knox Bullion
Depository.  Cancer figures released shortly thereafter by the
Government revealed an appalling 18% upsurge in cancer downwind
of Fort Knox, but now the press is filled with efforts by the
Government to discredit its own figures as a fluke due to their
connection with the Fort Knox situation.

   A month ago they also began beating the drum about other
radioactive leakages allegedly discovered 'suddenly' in the
vicinity of Fort Knox, thereby camouflaging Fort Knox as a
radiation source itself.  Meanwhile an invisible deadly atomic
plague is seeping outward from Fort Knox.  The insane, inhuman
plans discussed in the White House on November 8, 1975 were
carried out.  The contents of the leaking casks of CIA super
poison stored in the Central Core Vault were dumped into the
underground streams beneath Fort Knox, and now the possibility of
containment of the poison is gone.

   It's no longer a question now, my friends, of doing what I
suggested four months ago.  That was to abandon the Fort Knox
Bullion Depository and seal it up in a tomb of rock and lead so
that its deadly contents could no longer escape.  But now, over
40-million people in the southeastern United States are living in
what should be declared a "National Disaster Area" by President

   The atomic plague now spreading throughout the southeast has
some similarities to the bubonic plague or Black Death that
decimated Europe hundreds of years ago.  Like bubonic plague
germs, the CIA super poison is invisible, tasteless, and
odorless.  When the bubonic plague struck Europe it advanced
relentlessly and largely out of control because modern medicine
had not yet come along to educate people to the nature of the
unseen danger.  And today the atomic plague from Fort Knox is
also advancing relentlessly and without warning, because this
time the plague is man-made; and the men who made it refuse to
issue the life-and-death warning that is needed.

   In the relatively low concentrations now building up in places
throughout the southeast, the time lag between exposure to the
plutonium poison and its deadly cancerous effect may be
considerable--months or even years, varying from one place to
another depending on local conditions.  So if nothing is done,
40-million Americans seeing nothing wrong, unable to taste or
smell the atomic plague and not being warned by the Government,
will be taking more and more poison into their bodies--men,
women, and children.  By the time people start dying in alarming
numbers from the cancerous effects of the poison, the Rockefeller
Brothers expect to have their dictatorship in place.  After all,
it is down to a matter of months for them now after decades of
work.  If we accept their diabolical new Constitution in 1976,
they will be home free and they won't let anything get in their
way if they can help it.

   Forty-million people?  Don't be silly, they've already caused
the sacrifice of many times that number of lives in the 20th
Century in order to advance their drive for world domination. 
And looked at from their perspective, 40-million people are
scarcely more than one per cent (1%) of the world's
population--hardly even a visible dip on their planning charts.

   President Ford knows about the hideous death threat to
40-million Americans and it has him petrified; but in his belated
efforts to break free of Nelson Rockefeller's iron grip, he is
afraid his own life would be in danger if he went too far. 
Perhaps when he realizes that the atomic plague is also being
carried toward Washington, D.C., he will conclude that he has no
choice but to act.

   Meanwhile the grim joke is on the Rockefeller Brothers and
their henchmen.  Contaminated gold from Fort Knox is now stored
in their hideaways in New York State and elsewhere in banks,
estates, and certain mountain caverns used as depositories by
major multinational corporations controlled by the Rockefeller
Brothers.  As I revealed two months ago in my monthly AUDIO
LETTER No. 7, both Nelson Rockefeller and Henry Kissinger among
others have inadvertently poisoned themselves by handling some of
this stolen gold.  That is why Nelson was described in a
Westchester newspaper two weeks ago as, and I quote: "hoarse,
somewhat pale and, according to persons who have known him for
years, lacking the old fire"; but we shall see.

   I should warn you that deteriorating health on the part of
these men is not likely to save us from their plans in the
slightest--just the opposite.  Any sense of desperation
Rockefeller may feel could cause him to try to speed up his own
timetable, especially since it is now considerably delayed.

   Meanwhile, war is imminent overseas; and there, too, you will
be the one to pay for it according to present Rockefeller plans. 
The overall strategy is still as I explained in detail three
months ago in monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6.  It is also still
targeted to begin this month or next, but two factors may cause
them a slight further delay.  One is the bungled CIA attack on
Arab OPEC oil ministers in December, which was linked to the
crisis in Lebanon.  The multinationals have left Lebanon and have
not returned, please note that.  The other factor is that when I
was in Europe early December 1975 I alerted European and OPEC
governments to these war plans hoping to throw a monkey wrench
into them.  Whether I succeeded at all remains to be seen, but at
least I am informed that Henry Kissinger is boiling mad at me

   The situation in Angola is only a small part of the overall
Rockefeller-Soviet plans for conquest in Asia and Africa, but the
Rockefeller media are putting a heavy spotlight on it to keep
your eyes off the bigger picture.  It doesn't matter whether the
CIA or the Soviet-backed forces win in Angola since they are both
in the Rockefeller orbit.  Angola is primarily a stepping-stone
toward the take-over of rich South Africa, which has about a year
to go on a three-year timetable that the Rockefeller Brothers
have been following.  Meanwhile the Cuban forces in Angola will
shortly be shifted over to Mozambique to put pressure on
Rhodesia.  And very soon Congress is to be forced to take action
tantamount to a declaration of war, and all sorts of emergency
measures will come into force including sedition laws which the
Rockefeller Brothers may try to use to silence people like
myself.  Now should that happen, I beg of you: Please don't
forget my warnings which are for your benefit.  Play this and any
of my other tapes you have over and over so that you will learn
all you can from them to protect yourself and your family.  The
more completely you know and understand the truth, the less
vulnerable you will be to lies and propaganda.

   After the war is so declared, anyone who has signed up for the
highly publicized Food Stamp Program may be in for a nasty shock. 
This program is now controlled by Laurance Rockefeller and has
ties to the less well known Federal Job Program which is to
provide masses of people to be sent to the Middle East to rebuild
the capped-off oil wells even while there is still residual
radioactivity there!  But perhaps you won't be among those
tricked into literally signing your life away like that, and
maybe you don't have to drive much so won't be very disturbed by
gas rationing.  Possibly you are even among the few who have
sufficient liquid assets to weather a severe depression and come
out on top.  And, of course, the odds are 4 out of 5 that you
don't live in the path of the atomic plague in the southeast
United States, so why should you worry.  Here's why: Once the
Arab OPEC oil wells are capped off by nuclear strikes, the next
step is the huge Asian war with the United States pressed into
all-out service as the factory for the Soviet Union.

   But that, my friends, will only be the first stage of World
War III.  The second stage will consist of a double-cross of the
Rockefeller Brothers by the Soviet Union itself.  As I warned in
AUDIO BOOK No. 1, an attack on the Panama Canal will set off that
war, and an attack on the Alaskan Oil Pipe Line, which will be
vital by then, will leave the United States virtually helpless to
defend itself against a vastly superior Soviet armed might, which
has been built up at your expense by the Rockefellers themselves. 
This is the final, catastrophic bottom line toward which
so-called detente is leading--nuclear war, ultimately on American
soil and Soviet domination of our land IF WE ALLOW IT TO HAPPEN. 
Only if you and I do our part--passing the word and waking up the
sleeping American people, can this unthinkable disaster be


Topic #3--Early last November Nelson Rockefeller publicly
announced that he was bowing out as a candidate for the
Vice-Presidency in 1976.  I warned then that his
Vice-Presidential withdrawal was only a trap for the unwary; and
on February 4, 1976, he himself said practically the same thing I
told you last November.  Rockefeller's words were, and I quote:

  "I withdrew as Vice-President.  My statement includes the
Vice-Presidency only."

And in just a few days, on February 19, 1976, Nelson Rockefeller
plans to burst into the presidential campaign arena, stealing the
spotlight from everyone else in coming weeks and focusing it on

   Since becoming Vice-President under the 25th Amendment, which
he himself engineered into the Constitution, Rockefeller has been
thwarted several times in his efforts to replace Gerald Ford in
the Oval Office.  Most recently, Ford was supposed to get out of
the way in time for Rockefeller to give the "State of the Union"
speech as president; but for some time now Richard Nixon has been
calling Ford almost daily to say "Hang in there, Jerry", while
Rockefeller keeps pressuring him to get out.  It is a question
right now of who has the worst blackmail material on Ford: Nixon
or Rockefeller.  So far, Nixon has been able to keep the upper
hand in this tug of war.  So it was back to the drawing boards
again for Nelson Rockefeller, and he is determined not to be
thwarted again.  Ford stammered and fumbled his way through an
insignificant "State of the Union" address as if reading it for
the first time, which he may have been since it was worked up
practically at the last minute.

   Meanwhile the electrifying State of the Union message
Rockefeller had planned to deliver will now be delivered a chunk
at a time in a little over 10 speeches.  He will be speaking
about things no other candidate does--fundamental matters that
look far beyond mere current issues.  Just as a Rockefeller
puppet named Franklin Delano Roosevelt called for a "New Deal" in
a time of national trial, Nelson Rockefeller will try to convince
us of the pressing need for a new balance between the public and
private sectors.  Rockefeller's ideas and proposals will be
controversial; but in the coming months you will be battered and
buffeted by escalating problems that are intended to make
Rockefeller's ideas look more and more attractive to you.  And to
help calm any residual fears you may have that Rockefeller's
proposals are too radical or dangerous, the instant Conservative
strategy which began last summer will be brought into play.

   Several months ago I explained the role that AFL-CIO president
George Meany is to play in this, and he can hardly wait for the
go-ahead to publicly endorse Rockefeller.  Just today, February
16, Meany announced that the AFL-CIO will not endorse a Democrat
prior to Convention time.

   A few days ago Rockefeller's instant Conservative strategy
shifted into high gear.  Senator Barry Goldwater, who is perhaps
the biggest Rockefeller Trojan horse of all, has now endorsed
Rockefeller for President saying he has 'changed' his liberal
ways.  Since last May I have tried first privately, then through
public appeals, to get Goldwater to release crucial Fort Knox
evidence in his possession which was obtained from the widow of a
man who died suddenly under very strange circumstances; but Mr.
Conservative refuses to cooperate, and is still sitting on that
evidence to this very day!  Now we have the public proof of the
reason, which I have known privately for some time.  Goldwater's
evidence would tend to implicate the Four Rockefeller Brothers;
and Goldwater, who has sometimes been called 'the conscience of
the Senate' by the increasingly generous Rockefeller media of
late, is himself a keystone of Nelson Rockefeller's instant
Conservative strategy to deceive you.  By the time Ronald Reagan
becomes Rockefeller's Vice-Presidential running mate, the plan is
for Rockefeller's magical transformation in the public eye to be

   Meanwhile, things will be going from bad to worse, crisis
heaped upon crisis.  On Jefferson's birthday April 13, 1976, the
new $2.00 bill is to be introduced, highlighting the inflation
that is sending the dollar into oblivion, or a moratorium. 
Simon's so-called "red-back dollars", described in my AUDIO BOOK
No. 1, are getting closer and closer.

   The risk of losing your job is also going up and up.  My
latest confidential information direct from within the Bureau of
Labor Statistics, is an unemployment level of 18.3%, up 3% in
only a month's time!  Meanwhile the papered-over financial
collapse of New York City and State is still progressing and will
shortly surface again in dramatic fashion.  The Stock Market
hangs high but it hangs by a thread; and confidence in the
nation's banks is being whittled away steadily because only today
another large bank failed, the Hamilton National Bank of
Chattanooga, Tennessee, with assets of half a billion dollars.

   With the Mideast war is to come gas rationing, and with it a
whole new ere of shortages.  The deep drought in the Great Plains
that is now developing was predicted for me two years ago by oil
experts who told me that deliberately excessive rates of domestic
oil production were gradually lowering the water table in that
part of the country and would soon bring back the dust-bowl
conditions of the 1930's.  Our huge grain surpluses of recent
years, of course, are now stored in the Soviet Union so you and
your family will be the ones affected by shortages.

   Nelson Rockefeller is determined to run as our incumbent
president next November.  After conspiring for over 20 years,
spending $25-million to get himself confirmed, and forcing
Congress to seal damaging testimony for 50 years, he does not
intend to be stopped again.  When the time is ripe this time,
Gerald Ford will depart from the scene one way or another.

   If our beloved land is to be saved, it is UP TO US, you and
me, to do it.  The only weapon we have is the TRUTH, made known
to everyone; and in AUDIO BOOK No. 6 on "WHAT WE CAN DO TO SAVE
AMERICA", I have tried to explain exactly how we can do it.  If
you have some better ideas, fine; please go to it, but we must,
each of us, do what we can whether it seems great or small, and
we must DO IT NOW.  We are in the last lap of a long, long race;
and the prize is our own FREEDOM.  Like an Olympic runner, we
must get our "second wind" now and run as if our lives were at
stake because, dear friends, they are!

   Until next month, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you, and may God
bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 08

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


   Hello, everybody, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is January 21,
1976, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 8.

   As we begin to celebrate the Bicentennial of our Independence,
let us reflect for a moment on our past.  Out of a vast
wilderness our people created a nation with astonishing speed. 
Our Forefathers brought forth a nation with the highest and most
stable form of self-government ever conceived by man.  It was
unique in the entire world, a prescription for freedom simple
enough for everyone to understand, yet truly a work of genius. 
It's no wonder that from our earliest days as an independent
nation the eyes of the entire world have been riveted on the

   What was initially called our noble experiment was spectacular
in its success, and America's banner of freedom became a symbol
of hope for oppressed peoples everywhere.

   Would any of this have happened without the clear patriotic
vision of our Founding Fathers?  Could it have come to pass
without the courage of George Washington who in 1776 led the
famous surprise attack on the far stronger British forces in
Trenton?  Would we have had our inspired and inspirational
CONSTITUTION if Benjamin Franklin's call for prayer had not
broken the impasse over representation at the Constitutional
Convention in Philadelphia in 1787?  Could we ever have had a
government sensitive to the wishes of the people if the humility
of our early leaders had been replaced with the arrogant boasting
practiced by our corrupt rulers of today?  And, would we have had
a nation such as ours if our Founding Fathers had believed in the
internationalism promoted today by the Rockefeller Brothers?

   What would our Founding Fathers say today if they could see us
meddling in the affairs of other countries?  How would they feel
about the tremendous sacrifices they endured if they could see
our rulers of today building up another nation to become our
slave master at our own expense?

   We would all do well to look back once again at the patriotic
words of George Washington in his Farewell Address as President. 
He advised his countrymen to extend commercial relations to
foreign nations with as little political connection as possible. 
He did not advise against such commercial relations in
themselves, nor did he object to temporary alliances with foreign
nations when needed in an emergency; but he did give us a clear,
strong warning that has an urgent relevance to us today, and I

  "to steer clear of permanent alliances with any portion of the
foreign world."

Is this rule being followed today by our Rockefeller Rulers and
their client followers?

   Since 1917 the Rockefeller empire has been allied with the
Soviet Union, with which we are to be merged against our will and
with the Soviets ultimately in the driver's seat!!  As I
explained last month, and have often discussed on other
occasions, we, the people are the victims of an alliance between
State Socialism in Russia and Corporate Socialism here under the
Rockefeller Brothers.  And, my friends, this is not an informal
arrangement.  Since at least the early days of the Eisenhower
Administration, which was actually run behind the scenes by
Nelson Rockefeller, there has been a White House Directive which
I am about to reveal to you for the very first time.  It is
short, but not sweet.  It establishes as a prime goal of federal
policy, and I quote here:

  "to so alter life in the United States that it can be
comfortably merged with life in the Soviet Union."

   My friends, I do not merely challenge, I dare President Ford
or anyone else in the White House to deny the existence of this
Directive under oath.  They won't do so unless they have become
so desperate that they are willing to gamble on any bluff,
because I have access to documentary evidence on this matter that
could immediately convict them for perjury and lead to
impeachment and/or prison.

   Yes, this short White House Directive, my friends, quote: "to
so alter life in the United States that it can be comfortably
merged with life in the Soviet Union"--that's the key to all of
our domestic and foreign policy today.  It explains why we have
become the factory for the Soviet Union.  It explains why so many
multinational corporations are being used to build up the Soviet
economy while depressing our own.  It explains why the many huge
Rockefeller-controlled, tax-exempt Foundations, which are all
working in this direction, are immune to prosecution for their
flagrant violation of their charters.  It explains why the
Rockefeller-controlled banks and financial institutions are so
single-mindedly financing the Soviet Juggernaut at American
taxpayer expense.

   It is little wonder that Nobel Prize-winning biologist George
Wald in an article a year ago about the runaway power of the
multinational corporations said, and I quote: "hence no nation so
closely resembles the United States as the Soviet Union."

   My fellow citizens, it is essential that we halt this horrible
slippage backward into tyranny.  If we are to survive as a free
people beyond this our Bicentennial Year, we, the people, must
rise up and make the Government that belongs to us turn its face
forward once again to the still new, still fresh ideals and
principles that launched our great nation.  I am absolutely
convinced that we can still do it IF WE WILL.

   Last month I recorded AUDIO BOOK No. 6 entitled "WHAT WE CAN
DO TO SAVE AMERICA" to explain the strategy which I believe can
and will do the job.  And already alert citizens all over America
are listening to this message, getting to work, and making
suggestions.  If YOU will join in the task, we can do it. 
Meanwhile I intend to keep informing you about what we are up
against, how events are progressing, and what plans are being
formed behind the scenes.  To this end, I want to talk to you
today about three topics that all reflect the drive to merge life
in America with that in the Soviet Union.




Topic #1--It is essential that I give special attention to the
first topic today, but I will deal with the remaining two topics
as fully as I can in the time that remains for them.

   Almost two years ago in April 1974 during Congressional
testimony before a subcommittee of the "House Banking and
Currency Committee" I first revealed that the Bullion Depository
at Fort Knox had been looted of its gold.  I stood ready to
present evidence to substantiate my charges, but nothing whatever
was done!  Having been failed by Congress, I then took my story
to the public through lectures, radio Talk Shows, and publication
of my charges in a national weekly newspaper.  Faced by this
public pressure, the Government responded by setting in motion a
well orchestrated cover-up, a cover-up far more massive and more
serious than that of the Watergate scandal which removed our last
elected President from office.

   The actual cover-up began on September 23, 1974, with the
carefully staged visit of Congressmen and newsmen to Fort Knox. 
I have detailed the ensuing cover-up, among other things, in my
TO YOU."  I have also given you continuing updates since June
1975 by means of my monthly AUDIO LETTER.  In October 1975 I
revealed what I had just learned at that time that makes a "twin"
super scandal of the Fort Knox situation--namely, the presence of
about 60 pounds of radioactive liquid super poison processed from
deadly plutonium-239 in the Central Core Vault of the Bullion
Depository at Fort Knox.  The canisters of poison put there in
1968 by the CIA are corroding and leaking faster and faster,
endangering the health and even the lives of millions of
Americans in the southeastern United States.

   The Government's response to this second, far more serious
half of the Fort Knox Scandal, has been the same as to the
first--COVER UP.  I've explained in recent months how first
Senator Frank Church and then Congressman Otis Pike, Chairmen
respectively of the Senate and House Intelligence Committees,
have become parties to the Fort Knox plutonium scandal cover-up;
and how bureaucratic gobbledygook is being used by Government
officials to avoid giving straight, honest answers about the

   But now, the Fort Knox Scandal cover-up is getting even worse. 
It has recently entered a new phase of outright lying and of
masking the evidence concerning my charges.  They are going for
broke, and they have long since passed the point of no return. 
The same tactics of lying and cheating by the Government that are
standard practice in the Soviet Union, into which we are to be
merged, are now being used here in the United States, and these
tactics are far more effective here than in Russia because
Americans, unlike Soviet citizens, have not yet learned to expect
their government to lie to them continuously.  Up 'till now the
main cover-up approach has been one of evasion, but now an
atmosphere of desperation on the part of the wrongdoers is
becoming increasingly apparent.  For the very first time Treasury
Secretary William Simon has made the fatal mistake of actually
lying, in writing no less, about a crucial matter--the existence
of the Central Core Vault of the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox. 
We have challenged the Government to either confirm or deny its
existence in the past; and we have identified it not only by this
name, "Central Core Vault", but also by describing it to avoid
any possibility of misunderstanding due to terminology.

   In a letter to a friend of mine dated December 10, 1975, Simon
said the following, and I quote:

  "The allegation that plutonium 239 is, or ever has been stored
at Fort Knox in a central core vault is false, and the Army has
just conducted an extensive test of the Bullion Depository and
has found no evidence of radioactivity.  I should add that there
is no such thing as the Central Core Vault."

Notice that Simon's denial of the presence of plutonium-239 at
the Depository is tied right in with his denial of the existence
of the Central Core Vault.  Obviously if there is no Central Core
Vault then it cannot contain plutonium-239!  But on the other
hand, to have any faith that his denial about the plutonium is
truthful, you must also believe his assertion that there exists
no Central Core Vault at the Depository.  If he would lie about
one, he would lie about the other.

   With that in mind, please listen now to an excerpt from
another letter--this one written to one of my associates by a
retired Lieutenant General, John L. Ryan, Jr., a former
Commanding General of Fort Knox.  General Ryan probably knows
more about the Depository than anyone else who ever commanded
Fort Knox.  He spent two tours of duty there before he returned a
third time as the Commanding General; and when the gold was moved
to Fort Knox to be stored there for the very first time in 1937,
it was he who was placed in charge of the actual physical
movement of the incoming gold into the Depository.  With regard
to the disputed Central Core Vault, he says, quote:

  "When I use the word 'vault' I am referring to the central core
of the Depository where the bullion was stored.  This vault was
below ground level and could be entered only through a specially
constructed bank-type door that opened onto a screw lift.  This
door was in the Receiving-Shipping area of the Depository. The
Receiving-Shipping room was above ground level.  The vault was
below ground level.  Around the vault proper, or central core,
below ground level was a passageway.  On this passageway were a
number of cell-like compartments.  There was no means of entering
the vault from this passageway."

   My friends, the passageway with its compartments are all that
the visitors saw in September 1974.  The existence of the Central
Core Vault, which is where the gold, if any, should have been, is
absolutely confirmed by General Ryan; and as his letter makes
clear, the 1974 visitors had no chance of finding out about it
while wandering around in the passageway and looking at the small
compartments you heard and read about in the news.

   Such bald-faced lying is bad enough, but the mounting
desperation of the Rockefeller Brothers and their lackeys over
Fort Knox now goes even beyond mere lying.  It is standard
practice whenever an extremely damaging secret is in danger of
exposure, to distract attention from it and confuse the issue by
deliberately exposing something else--something far less serious
and dangerous than the secret being hidden yet shocking enough to
satisfy the public's appetite for the truth.

   With our totally manipulated government of today, a good rule
of thumb is whenever something that looks really damaging is
revealed, ask yourself: "Why are they letting this out of the
bag?  What is it that is worse that they are trying to distract
my attention from?"  Thus, for example, Sen. Church's sensational
revelations last summer about deadly shellfish toxins and the
like fooled many into believing they had been given the whole
ugly truth about CIA misdeeds, but actually he was covering up
what he knew about the insane nuclear super poison at Fort
Knox--something a thousand times worse than anything he revealed.

   Now in the same way a cover-up campaign has been launched in
regard to the leakage of the plutonium-239 super poison from Fort
Knox, and it's horrible.  A few days ago on January 12, 1976, a
truck carrying radioactive waste just "happened" to have an
accident in eastern Kentucky, smack in the heart of the area now
most heavily affected by radioactive poison leakage from Fort
Knox.  Fourteen of the 32 drums of waste on the truck fell off,
and 8 of them broke open and leaked.  The newspaper stories
around there about it contained the usual assurances that there
was no danger, that it had been cleaned up, etc., but leakage had

   Just six days later on January 18 newspapers contained big
articles about still another alleged radioactive waste leakage
problem in Kentucky.

   The truck I mentioned a moment ago had been on its way to a
nuclear waste dumping ground at Maxey Flats, Kentucky, which had
been in use since 1963, and now we are suddenly told that the
leakage is occurring there too.  Federal investigators, those
wonderful watchdogs we are supposed to trust and admire, claimed
that radioactive waste in steel, wooden, and even cardboard drums
has been just dropped into trenches and covered up with dirt; and
after 12 years they have just now abruptly discovered that some
of it has gotten loose and is spreading through the ground,
through the water, and through the air.  And a study by the
General Accounting Office, while it gives the standard assurance
that there is no immediate danger, recommends a crash program to
correct the situation and develop systematic standards for safe
disposal of radioactive waste.

   Now, why all of this sudden concern about leakage of
radioactive contamination?  And why does the spotlight on actual
leakage cases just happen to be on Kentucky?  After all, there
are vastly more serious problems of this sort elsewhere in the
United States, for example, in New York State--but so why
Kentucky?  Two reasons, my friends.  For one thing, they are
using the opportunity to continue the nuclear "con game" that has
been pulled on you for years by assuring you even when there are
nuclear waste leakages that you don't really have to worry about
it.  But, more importantly, in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 7 last
month I posed a direct challenge to the federal government to
either prove or disprove my charges; and I spelled out a fair,
objective way to do it.  What is going on now is their answer to
my challenge by spreading stories about other kinds of
radioactive waste leakage in the general vicinity of Fort Knox,
and possibly by deliberately causing such releases--such as
occurred in the truck accident--they are feverishly tampering
with the evidence.

   The program I suggested to use offsite measurements to detect
leakage from the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox would, as they
can now argue, no longer prove anything conclusively about my
charges because of these other radioactive leakages which
allegedly have also suddenly been discovered in the same region. 
I, for one, would like to see the whole business about Fort Knox
laid to rest once and for all, and I know you would too.  I know
that my charges about the gold and about the plutonium poison are
true; but for the sake of argument IF I were wrong, I would
rather be honestly proven wrong about any or all of them and be
made a laughingstock than to have the American people's worry
over this matter dragged out endlessly like this.

   Whatever the truth is, I want you to know; but the Rockefeller
lackeys in the Government know only too well that the truth is
exactly what I have told you, and they don't want you to know. 
They will do anything and everything to try to save themselves
regardless of how many other human beings they may doom in the
process.  And so, my friends, this is the vicious reality behind
the smooth mask that our Rockefeller-controlled federal
government wears.  We, the people, must bring the pressure to
bear that will cause these things to be honestly investigated and

   The United States is under the thumb of modern outlaws; and if
we do not bring them to justice, they will bring us and our
children to total ruin.  So far the United States Congress has
not seen fit even to consider my charges about the gold, about
the plutonium, about anything!  The problem is not that I don't
have the evidence, but that I have too much of it.  The same
applies to the Justice Department, the General Accounting Office,
the White House, and so on, so on.

   But recently a Congressman who heard my testimony in Congress
about the missing Fort Knox gold in April 1974 and who went to
Fort Knox in September 1974, gave us a tiny opening, whether
wittingly or unwittingly.  His constituents have been pressing
him continuously for some answers about Fort Knox; and in recent
replies which were forwarded to me, he in effect challenged us to
do exactly what we have wanted to do for nearly two years--to
present our charges and evidence in a proper legal forum.  Our
response is a six-page "Open Letter" by my able co-patriot, Mr.
Edward Durell of Berryville, Virginia.  The letter is addressed
to Congressman John B. Conlan of Arizona--but it is open, because
based on past performance we have little reason for optimism that
he will take any constructive action unless he is forced to do so
by public pressure.

   The letter presents charges which parallel completely, even in
legal form, the impeachment charges leveled at President Nixon by
the House of Representatives.  It is a legal document, and YOU
are the nation-wide Grand Jury.  Under our CONSTITUTION, it is
ultimately we, the people, who constitute the highest human
authority in our land, and it is UP TO YOU to decide.  Do our
charges deserve an open, complete, honest investigation in a
proper legal forum or not?  If so, it is UP TO YOU to return a
"Citizens Indictment" by demanding that your elected
representatives provide a legal forum through Congressional
investigation or formal Grand Jury proceedings.

   Here now is Mr. Durell's letter to Congressman Conlan of
Arizona.  I will be quoting from the letter from here on all the
way to Mr. Durell's signature.  Mr. Durell's letter is dated
January 7, 1976:

  "Dear Mr. Conlan,

   Your letters of December 5, 1975, to Mrs. Mary Barrow and Mr.
Art Bentley both of Lake Havasu City, Arizona, have been sent to
me for comment.  To that end I write direct to you, with copies
to them and other interested parties.

   In your letter to Mrs. Barrow you state among other things
that, quote: 'Grand Juries are empaneled to investigate criminal
wrongdoing', and that if, quote: 'you personally have evidence of
crimes committed in connection with our nation's gold holdings,
please let me know so that I can put you directly in touch with
appropriate officials of the United States Justice Department who
would have jurisdiction in this matter.'

   In your letter to Mr. Bentley you state among other things
that while you have, quote: 'some misgivings' about the gold
situation, quote: 'I can assure you that exposure to any
radioactive poison would have caused me serious illness.  Neither
I nor anyone else who went to Fort Knox has suffered any such

   Please allow us firstly to answer your letter to Mr. Bentley. 
It is common knowledge in nuclear medicine that if one is exposed
to alpha particle radiation of plutonium, death due to cancer can
come in a matter of months or years.  It all depends upon dosage
level and duration of exposure.  In this respect we would suggest
that you contact Dr. John Gofman, former professor of Medical
Physics emeritus, University of California at Berkeley; or listen
to him by way of a one-hour tape cassette obtainable from AUDIO
BOOKS, INC., P. O. Box 16428, Fort Worth, Texas, 76133; special
tape No. 2 for $6.00 postpaid.

(Editor's note--1981 address is:

    The Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER
    Suite 5092, 1629 K Street, N.W.
    Washington, D.C.  20006.

Current price is: $7.50 postpaid.)

In this tape Dr. Gofman speaks on the effects of radioactive
poison, among other things.

   In addition, over 18% increase in cancer deaths in the first
seven (7) months this year over last year has taken place in the
central-eastern states, which has left medical authorities in the
dark as to the cause.  They felt they had made such tremendous
cancer advancements in the last few years, and then to have such
a high upsurge in the first seven months this year over last year
in that area alone, is baffling.

   One more thing about this radioactive poison in the United
States Bullion Depository at Fort Knox--hereinafter called 'Fort
Knox.'  We know from sources in the Intelligence industry that
this plutonium poison was part of the plutonium-239 stolen by
members of the Intelligence community in 1966 and that this most
deadly substance was processed in four plants--two in Kentucky,
one in North Dakota, and one in California--into radioactive
liquid poison.  It was then taken--60 pounds each--to Peru,
Panama, Bolivia, and Argentina under cover of a multinational
cement corporation by a CIA officer, Harold Leroy White, for the
sole purpose of threatening to contaminate the United
States-planned and built water aqueduct systems in those
countries for political and economic pressure.  Sixty pounds,
however, intended for use in Argentina, was brought back by Mr.
White and placed in the Central Core Vault at Fort Knox where it
has been stored ever since late 1968.  The casks are now
corroding, causing leakage and contamination over the entire
areas east and southeast of Kentucky, and as far away as Cuba. 
This contamination is endangering the lives of over 40-million
people in this country.  Can we afford to allow these people to
be expendable?

   The federal government has now publicly admitted our charges
that opium and morphine--150,000 pounds and 24,000 pounds
respectively-are stored at Fort Knox.  Why will it not admit the
existence of the plutonium?

   It is suggested that to do so might subject the Government to
thousands of legal actions involving hundreds of millions of
dollars under the Federal Tort Claims Act and/or the Price
Anderson Act, the 1954 Atomic Energy Act as amended, Title 42
Section 2011 and following for, quote: 'extraordinary nuclear
occurrence'--that is, quote: 'any event causing a discharge or
dispersal of source, special nuclear or by-product material from
its intended place of confinement in amounts off site or causing
radiation levels off site and which has resulted or will probably
result in substantial damages to persons off site or property off

   And why will it not admit the loss of our gold reserves?  For
the same reasons--legal actions including those criminal in
nature.  And in the latter connection, we would like here to
pursue your suggestion to Mrs. Barrow and list the charges of the
high crimes committed relative to disappearance of the people's
gold reserves.

   On behalf of the American people it is herein charged that the
United States Treasury Department--hereinafter called
'Treasury'--in violation of its Constitutional duty to protect
the people's gold and in violation of its Constitutional duty to
take care that the laws relative to the safeguarding and custody
of said gold be faithfully executed, has failed so to do in that
between January 1, 1961, and January 1, 1974, prior and
subsequent thereto, Treasury engaged itself through its
officers/agents and in concert with others in America's corridors
of financial power in a course of conduct or plan designed to
convert unto themselves the people's gold entrusted to it for
safekeeping for the avowed purpose of profiting unjust
enrichment; and in a course of conduct or plan designed to cover
up, conceal and protect those responsible and to conceal the
existence and scope of other unlawful covert activities.

   The means used to implement this conduct or plan have included
one or more of the following:

1.  Treasury has failed to render a true account of the amount of
gold shipped out from the United States Bullion Depositories from
1961 to 1968 under color of the 'London Gold Pool Agreement';

2.  Treasury has failed to reveal the true prices, if any,
received for the sale of said gold or reveal the names of the
ultimate purchasers of said gold;

3.  Treasury has failed to give a true account of the amount of
gold shipped out of the United States Bullion Depositories from
1968 to 1974 under color of an ad hoc committee composed of the
Chairman of the Federal Reserve Board, the Chairman of the
Council of Economic Advisers, the Chairman of the White House
Council on International Economic Policy, the Secretary of State,
and the Secretary of Treasury, among others;

4.  Treasury has issued a statement dated August 31, 1974,
purporting to list 24-million ounces of good delivery gold at
Fort Knox when in actual fact the Secretary of the Treasury
admitted December 3, 1974, that such listing is false or

5.  Treasury has taken, December 9, 1974, without lawful
authority, two-million ounces of gold from the Exchange
Stabilization Fund by a simple bookkeeping device and four days
later announced by way of the General Services Administration
that there would be an auction of two-million ounces of gold on
an 'as is' basis January 6, 1975.  In addition, a Dutch auction
was held June 30, 1975, with the remainder of said gold based on
a price not considered best for the taxpayers of America;

6.  Treasury has caused a statement to be issued April 11, 1975,
which is false or misleading in that it purports to list all of
the gold shipments out of Fort Knox when in actual fact such list
omitted among other things a shipment of gold consisting of four
(4) tractor-trailer loads on January 20, 1965, which shipment
consisted of 1.762-million ounces valued over sixty-one million
dollars ($61,000,000) at $35.00 per troy ounce--the par value for
official gold at that time;

7.  Treasury has in its immediate possession and control the
necessary keys, combination numbers, and time-control data for
the vaults, depositories, and their mechanisms.  It thus has the
highest duty to take care that its trust be faithfully executed,
but it has acted in a manner contrary to its trust and subversive
of responsible government to the great prejudice and to the
manifest injury of the people of the United States by acting in
concert with others to aid and abet, to surreptitiously remove
the gold under the cover of legal right;

8.  Treasury has made false or misleading statements for the
purpose of deceiving the people of the United States into
believing that a thorough and complete inspection and audit have
been conducted with respect to allegations that Fort Knox
contains no significant amounts of gold and not accounted for, in
that an inspection trip to Fort Knox September 23, 1974, revealed
one (1) cell-like compartment, No. 33, to contain only
copper-hued bars.  Mrs. Mary Brooks, the Director of the Mint,
Treasury, said, quote: 'It's all here.'  Her statement is
analogous to the so-called Audit of October 1974 of only three
(3) of the cell-like compartments at Fort Knox, which Audit calls
the Report to be submitted to Congress February 10, 1975--also
based on a belief that, quote: 'It's all here.'

   Further, the inference given by the inspection trip and the
Audit was that the gold at Fort Knox was of good delivery form
and the remaining ten (10) cell-like compartments were full of
good delivery gold;

9.  Treasury is withholding relevant and material evidence or
information from the American people in total disregard or
violation of the Constitutional right of the people to know what
has happened to its gold reserves and to its right of freedom of
information for purposes unrelated to national security, the
enforcement of laws, or any other lawful functions of Treasury in
that the Central Core Vault at Fort Knox was concealed from the
inspection group of over 100 news media people, six (6)
Representatives, and one (1) Senator of the United States

10.  Treasury has unlawfully utilized its authority to cause the
General Accounting Office to fail to take care that the laws be
faithfully executed in that the General Accounting Office, a
legislative entity, was forced to have only two (2) of its own
people on a settlement committee to audit the alleged gold at
Fort Knox, whereas Treasury had thirteen (13) of its own people
on said committee;

11.  Treasury has not caused to be made an annual physical
inventory of the people's gold since 1953.  Thus Treasury has
failed to take care that Title 31 USC be faithfully executed by
failing to make the required annual physical inventories.

   In all of this and more, Treasury has acted in a manner
contrary to its trust and subversive of Constitutional government
to the great prejudice of law and justice and to the manifest
injury of the people of the United States; wherefore, Treasury
through its officers, agents and others in concert with it, by
such conduct or plan, warrant such parties be brought before
appropriate legal authorities to answer these charges; and,
further, for the restitution of the people's gold except that
portion which is contaminated by radioactive poison in which case
said parties shall be ordered to pay the current market gold
price and for such other appropriate action as may be deemed just
and proper in the premises.

   In support of the charges, please be informed that former
Congressman Frank Chelf's AFFIDAVIT dated April 7, 1975, in which
he deposes and says among other things, and I quote: 'that the
United States government was moving quietly as a church mouse out
of Fort Knox' and that the gold was, quote: 'constantly and
surreptitiously on the move.'

   Fort Knox is located in former Congressman Chelf's
Congressional District.  He further deposes and says that, quote:
'In response to my previous requests for gold removal
information, Treasury officials had been courteous and most
friendly but always non-committal or evasive.'  Mr. Chelf had
earlier made the same charges on the floor of the House of
Representatives, but to no avail.  (See Congressional Record page
15522 - August 21, 1963.)

   Further, Lt. General John L. Ryan, Jr., US Army (Ret.), in his
statement of September 26, 1975 before Congressman Otis G. Pike
in his office, has proved the existence of the Central Core Vault
and in fact has drawn sketches of it.  In view of this, there is
no valid reason for the Secretary of Treasury to continue to deny
the existence of the Central Core Vault at Fort Knox unless there
is something deeply secret stored therein.  There admittedly may
have been the necessity for some secrecy in the 1960's when all
of the gold at Fort Knox was stored in the Central Core Vault. 
Why the secrecy now, since the Comptroller General has stated on
February 10, 1975, quote: 'As of June 30, 1974 about 55% of the
gold claimed by the Treasury was stored in thirteen (13) sealed
compartments at the United States Bullion Depository at Fort
Knox, Kentucky'?

   As further evidence, we call your attention to the balance
sheets of the 12 Federal Reserve Banks, which carry Gold
Certificate accounts as an asset to reflect a stated amount of
gold which, in turn, is reflected as a liability on Treasury
balance sheets; however it is submitted these Gold Certificate
accounts reflect assets--gold--which do not in fact exist in
Treasury vaults.  This same situation prevailed in 1943 relative
to silver when, quote: '14,000 tons of silver from the Treasury
reserve backing American paper money was secretly taken from
Treasury vaults although carried publicly on the Treasury balance
sheets', cited in "Tragedy and Hope" by Professor Carroll
Quigley, page 855, 1966/1974.

   We could go on, but suffice it to say that Treasury during our
18 months investigations has not moved to refute by evidence the
basic charges outlined above.  Meanwhile our economy is suffering
by those twin disasters, inflation and deflation--high prices
with high unemployment--initially caused by the disposing of our
gold reserves in secret and its attendant game plan.

   Mr. C. Gordon Tether in his December 11, 1975, article, quote:
'A NEW TWIST OF FORT KNOX SAGA' in the Financial Times of London
stated, quote:

  'But whatever the cost in terms of loss of face, might not the
United States authorities be well advised to do whatever is
necessary to demonstrate that there is no Fort Knox cover-up?  In
the light of what has happened in the United States during the
past few years, deeds inevitably now speak louder than words; and
the refusal to prove that they have nothing to hide, is
inevitably destined to go on fostering precisely the opposite

   Considering all of the above, would you please be so kind as
to put the undersigned and Dr. Peter Beter, as you offered to do
for Mrs. Barrow, quote: 'directly in touch with appropriate
officials of the United States Justice Department who would have
jurisdiction in this matter'?  I am authorized to state that Dr.
Beter concurs with the contents of this letter and is fully
prepared to give further evidence before a United States Grand
Jury and any Congressional investigating committee in
confirmation of the charges herein cited, among others.

   Further, I would suggest you personally bring this letter to
the attention of the Chairman of the House Banking Committee of
which you are a member, for appropriate action.  Failure on your
part to do so will lend credence to the fact you, yourself, have
become part and parcel of the cover-up on this vital matter; and
failure on the part of the Chairman of said Committee to take
such action will further lend credence to the fact that he
himself is in league with those underlying forces at work in
America's corridors of financial power.

                                              Most respectfully,
                                              EDWARD DURELL."

AND WHAT IT MEANS TO YOU", I warned you to watch for the Stock
Market crash signal, meaning general unemployment in the range of
20 to 25%.  This was originally targeted by the Rockefeller
Brothers for the fall of 1975, but their schedules have been
increasingly upset by their preoccupation with the Fort Knox
Scandal "cover-up" and by the anti-CIA actions of Indira Gandhi
last summer.  Even so, they are working frantically to get the
pieces of their plan together again.

   Here in America, the Government officially says that
unemployment in November 1975 was 8.3%; but my own confidential
information, direct from sources within the Bureau of Labor
Statistics, is that the true figure for November was over
15%--and still increasing!  Therefore the real unemployment
levels are now moving closer and closer to the Stock Market crash
signal levels I revealed nearly a year ago.

   Meanwhile the Dow Jones averages lately are streaking upward
artificially in a dream world of their own, totally divorced from
reality.  The stage is being set for a dramatic visible plunge
downward if the Rockefeller Brothers cut the cable on the Stock
Market elevator.

   And New York City, supposedly safe from outright bankruptcy by
federal loans, is already far behind in its schedule for raising
funds to stay afloat under that loan program.  At the same time,
the Nation's banks are again the subject of widespread concern,
and no wonder.  Recently front page stories have deliberately
been planted in major Rockefeller-controlled newspapers about the
alleged shakiness of the mammoth Chase Manhattan Bank and in even
larger First National City Bank of New York, both of them
Rockefeller controlled.  This is partly an attempt to lower the
Rockefeller profile by saying: "See, we have problems too."  But
more importantly, it is a deliberate effort to undermine
confidence in our whole banking system.  Banks and their
customers should therefore watch for trouble.  A publication
which is doing an outstanding job of keeping on top of the
banking situation as well as many other matters is the Daily News
Digest, Box 27496, Phoenix, Ariz.  85061

   This month's meeting of the International Monetary Fund in
Jamaica produced no communique, no general agreement, only
reflecting continued confusion there.

   Pressed by the smoldering Fort Knox Scandal on one hand and
the imminent war in the Middle East on the other, the primary
goal of the Rockefeller Brothers has now shifted to just one
thing--to abolish the official price of gold in America so that
the non-existent American gold hoard can be quietly dropped from
Treasury and Federal Reserve balance sheets.  Most of the IMF
gold is beyond their grasp for the time being.


                            Topic #3

   Last summer Indira Gandhi cracked down on the CIA to stop the
Rockefeller take-over of her country, India.  Existing war
preparations were immediately diverted to a new direction, and
since that time a major new Asian war has been brewing.  In my
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 two months ago, I spelled out the
basic strategy for this war, including the role to be played by
the Middle East conflict in paving the way for the Asian War. 
Plans are proceeding rapidly.

   A few days ago Japanese Prime Minister Miki fell into a Soviet
trap.  Reacting to brusk and uncooperative Soviet treatment, he
announced that Japan will sign a treaty with Red China that
includes the anti-Soviet hegemony clause desired by China.  At
the same time, as you may have noticed in news reports, American
business men are rapidly packing up and leaving Japan, supposedly
because their Japanese understudies are now ready to manage
things themselves--but actually because the Rockefeller Brother
interests are bailing out in advance of war, just as happened a
few months ago in Lebanon.

   To set the stage for the big Asian War, hostilities are first
to break out in the Middle East to provide an excuse for a
limited American nuclear strike to cap off Arab OPEC oil wells. 
This will result in cementing the Sino-Japanese alliance for war,
neutralizing Europe and producing real suffering there, and
causing gas rationing in a major body blow to our wobbly economy
here in the United States.

   The terrorist attack on OPEC oil ministers in Vienna last
month, engineered by our own CIA, was supposed to get the ball
rolling in all of this.  Two key oil ministers were supposed to
be killed, leading to escalating reprisals and war--but the job
was botched.  For bungling this top priority operation, the man
in charge, Richard Welch, the CIA station chief in Athens, was
judged unreliable and executed by the CIA itself.

   And now Lebanon, which was primarily a distraction earlier,
has now become the new springboard by which the broader Middle
East conflict is to be enlarged.  All of this, my friends, is
part and parcel of so-called "detente" with Soviet Russia on the
way to a world collectivist dictatorship.  Rockefeller Brothers
internationalism, which is always portrayed by them as the path
to peace, is actually a prescription for war, destruction, and
enslavement.  To them it is "progress."

   On December 31, 1975, President Ford said on the eve of our
Bicentennial Year, and I quote: "Liberty is the most precious
possession of our past."  But, fellow citizens, it is up to us to
restore liberty to our future as well.  Had we simply been
heeding George Washington's wise warning to avoid permanent
foreign alliances, the horrors I have been discussing would not
exist.  In his Farewell Address, he also left us with many other
equally wise observations that have direct application today. 
Washington's words and example helped launch the greatest nation
on earth, and they can help get it moving forward again IF WE
WILL ALLOW THEM TO.  In this, our Bicentennial Year, I plan to
return frequently to the forward-looking sage advice left to us
by our great first President.

   Until next month, this is Dr. Beter.  Thank you, and may God
bless each and every one of you.



Audio letter No. 07

mp3 part 01

mp3 part 02

Posted by Jon Volkoff, mail address eidetics@cerf.net

"AUDIO LETTER(R)" is a registered trademark of Audio Books,
Inc., a Texas corporation, which originally produced this tape
recording.  Reproduced under open license granted by Audio
Books, Inc.


   Hello, everybody, this is Dr. Beter.  Today is December 21,
1975, and this is my monthly AUDIO LETTER(R) No. 7.

   As I celebrate Christmas with my family a few days from now, I
will be thanking God for the precious gift He has given to all of
us this year--the gift of time; because, my friend, the year
1975, even as difficult and trying as it has been, was a year of
reprieve due to delays in the timetable of the Four Rockefeller
Brothers.  At this very moment, some important parts of their
plan are as much as one year behind schedule; and in the
meantime, more and more Americans have been awakening to the
truth of what is going on.  Yes, we have been granted a little
more time than we might have had to respond to the menace we all
face, but we dare not relax and waste whatever time we have left. 
The Four Rockefeller Brothers are working feverishly to make up
for lost time.

   Overseas, the way is being paved for war, including that
nightmare the world has feared for 30 years--NUCLEAR WAR.  Here
at home, our economic woes are getting worse while a corrupt
government, controlled by the Rockefeller Brothers, tells us
'Prosperity is just around the corner.'

   Preparations for the dictatorial new Rockefeller Constitution
keep marching on; and the man who has conspired for 20 years to
become our first Dictator, Nelson Aldrich Rockefeller, stands
poised at the threshold ready to seize the presidency.  That is
why it is so important that more and more alert Americans are now
asking just one question: "What can I do?"

   I am convinced that now, at last, there are enough of us to
launch a successful rescue of our great, free Republic. 
Therefore I have just unveiled a strategy for action which I
truly believe can and will save our country.  It is a strategy
which you, as an individual, can undertake starting right where
you are.  It uses the powers you are granted by the most basic
law of the land--our present United States CONSTITUTION; and if
you will faithfully do your part, you can rest assured others all
over America will be doing theirs too.  The result, IF WE WILL
EACH DO OUR OWN PART, is a plan of action which, in my opinion,
cannot be stopped.  This entire plan of action is presented in a
new AUDIO BOOK recorded December 15, 1975, and it's entitled:
"WHAT WE CAN DO TO SAVE AMERICA", and it is my answer to the
question, "What can I do?"

   The challenge before us, my friend, is to regain control of
the government that belongs to us, and we must act quickly before
that control, which is already in the hands of the Rockefeller
Brothers, slips forever beyond our reach.

   CONTROL--that is the word, more than any other, that sums up
the actions of the Four Rockefeller Brothers.  Control is both
the end toward which they work and the means by which they extend
their reach still further--control of money and of government,
control of industry and of Big Labor, control of natural
resources and of human resources.

   The incredible financial wealth of the Rockefellers is
actually nothing more than a result of this insatiable drive for
control; and it grows continuously due to their control over your
money, your resources, your labor, and your government.  They
believe they have a right to do all these things because they are
convinced that they have been divinely ordained to rule the
world.  So, for example, using the CIA for their own private
purposes is right and proper, according to their concept of
themselves as America's royal family.  It matters not what you
and I think, only they know best.  All of this and much more is
made clear in the book that was written for them as their Mein
Kampf in 1930, "THE AMERICAN RICH" by Hoffman Nickerson.

   Today I want to discuss three topics that point out some of
the fruits of such control by the Rockefeller Brothers:




Topic #1--In their drive for control, the Rockefellers are trying
to snare us all in their giant trap, catch us so that we cannot
wrestle free or fight back; but they know that if they move too
quickly we may notice what they are up to, and react to protect
ourselves.  So they have been moving with great patience and
determination over a period of several decades to get their trap
assembled and in place ready to spring it on all of us.  To
understand what is really happening, therefore, you should do as
they do: look at long spans of time, compress them in your mind,
and see where things are really headed.

   Gradualism is the tactic now being used--while TV, Sports, and
other distractions are being used to focus people's attention
away from what is really happening.  Thus, even while many people
find the idea of a new Constitution for America preposterous,
many of its provisions are already being put in place, ready for
ratification by a National Referendum in the near future.  The
federal government already regards the United States as divided
up into 10 REGIONS, the forerunners of the 10 so-called "New
States."  The Federal Election Commission, along with some other
activities, is the forerunner of the Electoral branch, and so on. 
So keep your eye on their objective--that is, the direction in
which they are moving events, so that you won't be fooled by
their shifts in timing to meet their various contingency plans.

   The secret new Constitution, which was developed over a
10-year period to fit the outline laid down personally by Nelson
Rockefeller himself, just as he did our present 25th
Amendment--this secret new Constitution is coming sooner or
later, unless we stop it once and for all!  As former Senator Sam
Ervin said so emphatically just a few days ago, and I quote:

  "We don't need a new Constitution.  Ours has weathered many
storms in the past 200 years.  It was written to last for the

   But, my friend, if we leave the Rockefeller machine in control
of our government, our communications media, and our economy, we
will have a dictatorial new Constitution!

   Senator Ervin is quoted as saying something else too, and it
is supremely ironic.  Concerning Richard Nixon he said, quote:

  "He had the most pronounced, aggravated notion about the powers
of the presidency.  He envisioned the President as being
something of an absolute monarch."

However well these words may have applied to Nixon, they apply
far better to the man who made, used, and then unmade Nixon--that
is, Nelson Rockefeller.

   Perhaps Senator Ervin himself now realizes how cleverly he was
used in the Watergate coup d'etat, since he said last spring, and
I quote:

  "If I had known then what I know now, I would never have voted
to confirm Nelson Rockefeller."

   Whenever possible the Rockefeller Brothers maneuver people
into doing what they want done without their puppets even being
aware of it--not, at least, until later.  But the Rockefeller
style also includes more solid avenues of control over all sides,
if possible, in every arena including that of politics.  Thus,
for example, the Rockefellers have their hooks equally deep into
both the Democratic and Republican Parties as well as fringe
political fronts, both left and right.  And while they have often
found it advantageous to maintain a so-called Liberal image with
their public relations they are not true Liberals, any more than
certain of their lackeys who wear the Conservative label are true
Conservatives.  As Nelson Rockefeller himself said in Dallas on
September 12, 1975, and I quote:

  "Conservative and Liberal to me are misleading as labels."

   These and other similar labels have completely lost any
utility they may once have had, thanks to their control by the
Rockefeller Brothers.  Their only true loyalty is to themselves,
and that transcends all of the conventional boundaries of
political affiliation.

   A perfect example of Rockefeller control of all sides of a
political situation is before us right now in the alleged
Presidential campaign.  I say "alleged" because there is no doubt
at all as to the outcome under the Rockefeller scenario. 
Instead, the game is being played for other reasons.  For the
moment the most prominent players on the stage are four:
Humphrey, Reagan, Ford, and his ventriloquist Rockefeller.

Hubert Humphrey wears a big label that reads "Liberal Democrat",
while the equally large label on Ronald Reagan reads
"Conservative Republican."  President Ford's label is a large
question mark.

Nelson Rockefeller's label which, by the way, is made of solid
gold, is rather large.  It reads: "Liberal New Deal Democrat
turned instant Conservative Republican."

It looks like quite a field, doesn't it?  But it so happens that
Nelson Rockefeller has the other three in the palm of his hand
and his own label is only for show.

   Hubert Humphrey is currently the beneficiary of the so-called
'Humphrey phenomenon'--an undeclared candidacy that is being made
to look impressive by the Rockefeller major media and by polls
which can easily be manipulated.  Humphrey's well concealed
control of a huge major multinational oil company for over 20
years has been very helpful to his Rockefeller supporters behind
the scenes.  Partly for this reason, a possible
multimillion-dollar tax case against him by the Internal Revenue
Service has been covered up under Presidential seal, and the
IRS-FBI agents who worked on the case are no longer around!

   Ronald Reagan, of course, is the polished actor who has been
rehearsing so-called Conservative lines ever since 1950.  That
was the year when, during Congressional hearings, he officially
admitted his previously ultra-Liberal activities but claimed that
he had seen the light and was turning over a new leaf.  Yet his
actions, as sharply distinguished from his words, have never
really changed.  He has maintained many active ties with
Rockefeller-dominated organizations, such as their complex of
governmental-controlled groups known collectively as "1313" in
Chicago.  The Reagan administration in California was heavily
populated with people from the Rockefeller stables and the Reagan
record in California parallels that of Rockefeller in New York in
many ways, but Reagan has consistently spoken as if his views and
policies were totally opposite to those of Rockefeller.  Reagan's
service on Rockefeller's CIA cover-up commission earlier this
year, therefore, helped to quiet the cover-up fears of some who
are not aware of Reagan's strong Rockefeller ties.

   President Ford is where he is because then-President Nixon
double-crossed his boss Nelson Rockefeller.  When Agnew was
forced to resign, Nixon was supposed to nominate Rockefeller; but
Nixon could see where that would lead, so instead he selected
Gerald Ford, whose political star had risen considerably after
his participation in the work and defense of the Warren
Commission.  Good old 'Jerry' was well known and well liked by
his colleagues, yet his confirmation hearings bogged down
unexpectedly.  Behind the scenes Nelson Rockefeller applied the
brakes until Ford agreed to nominate him (Rockefeller) upon
Nixon's departure from the presidency.  Once the agreement was
reached, Ford's confirmation hearings rapidly concluded
favorably.  And Nelson Rockefeller immediately resigned as
Governor of New York, surreptitiously moved into his Washington,
D.C. residence, and personally finished Watergating Nixon out of
the White House.  Nelson was so proud of his success in this
project that he wrote to a banker friend in Mexico afterward to
tell him all about it.  Can you imagine?

   Thus Rockefeller control denies us any real choice in national
politics.  Ultimately the Rockefellers choose all the
presidential candidates that count--and have ever since Woodrow
Wilson's time.  We, the voters, are then given the useless
privilege of choosing which of their hand-picked puppets we want,
just like they do in Soviet Russia.  Even in the election itself,
the deck is stacked in favor of their preferred choice.  But,
just in case, they control the other side too.  If this isn't

   In Congress, too, most of our politicians end up in the
Rockefeller pocket one way or another.  Some deliberately throw
in their lot with the Rockefellers and become active Rockefeller
agents.  Others become compromised by skeletons in their closets,
and are pawns in the Rockefeller game of blackmail and
double-cross here in Washington.  And still others just go along
to get along, not rocking the boat.  And so when government
abuses become so flagrant that they are detected, we are still
left without recourse because the Rockefellers control the
investigations in almost every case.

   As I speak to you, the ante has gone up due to the leakage of
radioactive plutonium-239 super poison from the Bullion
Depository at Fort Knox, and the government is doing nothing
whatsoever to stop it!  My previous information was that the
region which has been primarily affected by the leakage over the
past several years consists of a swath through Kentucky, my home
state of West Virginia, and Virginia with a combined population
of over 9-million people.  But on November 8, 1975, a secret
meeting was held in the White House to discuss alternative means
of disposing of the deadly poison.  The discussion included some
ideas that would be as insane as the poison itself--such as
dumping all 60 pounds of it into the underground streams that lie
under Fort Knox.  Not only might this allow the poison to spread
uncontrollably from there, but it could possibly also cause
contamination of any of the huge underground caverns under Fort
Knox which are used for natural gas storage.  Now if this were to
happen, natural gas could carry traces of the radioactive
plutonium poison straight into the industrial plants and homes of
thousands of people in that area.  The deadly plutonium radiation
would be unaffected by passing through gas flames, after which it
could be inhaled or set on to food.

   I received no further information concerning the action, if
any, taken at the November 8 White House meeting; but I have
received updated information to the effect that the poison is now
spreading throughout the entire Southeast of the United States
and even beginning to enter the Gulf of Mexico.  Thirty-six
million Americans are now at stake.  And what is our government
doing about it?  Nothing.  The White House meeting had only one
purpose: to save face for the wrongdoers, not to save 36-million

   And what about Congress?  And all those investigations we keep
hearing about?  Consider Senator Frank Church who is our newest
presidential candidate.  On November 20, 1975, he explained the
release of his Committee's report about assassination plots on
foreign leaders with the words, and I quote:  "The people were
entitled to know what went wrong, and why."  But when it comes to
an immediate deadly danger to all of us caused by the same
elements of the Intelligence community, apparently Senator Church
believes we are not entitled to know, since he has been covering
up this vital information now for four months while the situation
grows steadily worse.  And for over two months the same has been
true of his counterpart in the House--Congressman Otis Pike.

   Meanwhile what else is happening in the Executive Branch,
specifically the Treasury Department?  My friend, I believe it is
time to let you in on an example of the evasions, half truths,
and distortions which Rockefeller bureaucrats use to cover their
tracks.  I call it a lesson in bureaucratic gobbledygook, the
slippery language that some people also call double talk.

   For over three months now, all of our attempts even to
communicate directly with the government about the twin disasters
at Fort Knox have met with nothing but a very loud silence. 
Having deepened and confirmed their own guilt time and again
through various slips in the past, they apparently no longer have
the courage or the courtesy even to answer us!  Through an
indirect channel, however, we were able to extract a letter from
Mrs. Mary Brooks, the Director of the Mint, dated November 21,
1975.  This indirect channel is Congressman Kenneth Robinson of
Virginia who, while he does not choose to pursue the Fort Knox
matter on his own, has at least cooperated with us in ways such
as this.  In this regard, he is exceptional.  No one else in the
entire United States Congress has done even this much.

   As I read the letter try, if you can, to find any clear-cut
YES or NO type answer to anything.  You will only find one to the
effect that a certain statement, and I quote: "is simply not
true."  But the statement referred to is not our statement but a
carefully selected misstatement of our charges by someone else. 
Now here's the letter:

  "Dear Mr. Robinson:

   Thank you for your letter of November 10, 1975, concerning
allegations that plutonium-239 was stored in the so-called
Central Core Vault at the United States Bullion Depository, Fort
Knox, Kentucky.

   We do not store plutonium-239 or any other radioactive
substance at the Depository, and have no reason to believe that
it is stored there by other government agencies.  We authorized
the Military at Fort Knox to make radiation tests in the
Depository last week.  We were informed that the tests did not
disclose any evidence of radioactive material.

   The allegations relating to the so-called Central Core Vault
are carried in a Swiss Newsletter entitled 'Myers Finance and
Energy' that is currently being circulated by those who have
persisted with all the wild allegations about the Bullion
Depository at Fort Knox.  The Newsletter discusses Dr. Peter D.
Beter's allegations and states (and the letter quotes as

   'In 1942-43 Major Stanley Tatom designed and oversaw the
construction of a Central Core Vault below the Main Vault.  To
get to this ultrasafe vault, an elevator had to be installed and
it used up the space occupied by 12 of the former Vault
compartments.  This explains why the numbering in the Vault
compartments upstairs had a 12-digit gap.'"

And Mrs. Brooks' letter continues, and I quote:

  "This statement is simply not true.  There were no major
alterations to the Vault after construction of the Depository was
completed in 1936.  The elevator was installed at the time the
Depository was constructed.  We have no record of Major Stanley
Tatom designing or overseeing the construction of a Central Core
Vault.  In fact we do not, and find no record that we ever did,
refer to any part of the Depository by that name.

   The Visitors Log at the Depository does show the name of Major
Daniel F. Tatum as calling on the officer in charge on July 29,
1942.  We also have records which show that a steel door was
erected by the Champion Wire & Iron Works, Louisville, Kentucky,
at the entrance to the corridor that leads to Compartments
numbered 1 through 14 in the basement level of the Depository.
This work was completed on January 7, 1942, and the No. 15 was
assigned to the door.  After this work was completed, gold was
stored in the corridor for a time during which the door was
locked and sealed."

Still quoting from her letter:

  "The allegation that there is a 12-digit gap in the numbering
of compartments is also inaccurate.  Our records show that the
Depository had 28 compartments, 14 on the lower level and 14 on
the upper level at the time of construction.  The compartments on
the lower level were numbered 1 through 14, and the corridor door
was numbered 15 when it was added in 1942.  The compartments on
the upper level were numbered 21 through 34.  There is no record
of the numbers 16 through 20 ever being used on Vault
compartments of the Depository.

   If I could be of further assistance in this matter, please let
me know.


and there follows the signature of

                                          "Mary Brooks,
                                           Director of the Mint."

   My friend, letters like this one are the product of a year and
a half of continuous effort on their part to refine their story
and put their very best foot forward.  They are written with
great care, with careful choice of every word.  The letter I have
just read to you, in fact, was not even written by Mary Brooks
alone.  Much of it was written by an official in the General
Accounting Office who has ties to the Intelligence industry.  The
GAO itself is implicated in the Fort Knox cover-up through the
falsified Gold Audit done in the fall of 1974, so this letter is
important, and it deserves closer examination.

   First: Why does the Government deliberately go so far out of
its way, to Switzerland no less, to find someone else's
misstatement of the Bullion Depository modifications so that they
can attack that instead of refuting our own statements?  If they
can refute our actual charges, why don't they do it?  I invite
the Government to listen to my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for
July 1975 and respond to that, not someone else's secondhand
statements.  As I clearly stated then, the Central Core Vault was
built into the Depository at the start.  Major Tatom's job later
on was to build a rapid retrieval system into the Gold Vault, not
to build the Vault itself.  I also explained that there is a gap
of six digits, not 12, on each floor of Vault compartments.

   My friend, the Government is acutely aware of my real charges,
so why don't they answer them?  What do you think?

   Notice also, in trying to wave aside references to Major
Stanley Tatom, how cleverly it is done!  We can prove that he was
there and did oversee the work on the rapid retrieval system, and
apparently the Government knows we can.  Therefore the following
sentence is used to mislead without actually lying, and I quote:

  "We have no record of Major Stanley Tatom designing or
overseeing the construction of a Central Core Vault."

Of course they don't, because that is just not what he did.  He
built a rapid retrieval system to give access to the Central Core
Vault.  The writers of the letter included one other item which
was intended to help throw everyone off the track, but actually
does just the opposite.  According to our own sources, during the
work on the rapid retrieval system in 1942-43, the disruption was
so great that the gold was taken out of the Central Core Vault
and, quote: "piled around in the corridors."  Now we are told in
this letter about the strange corridor door, which was installed
for unstated reasons.  Listen again to these astonishing words
from Mrs. Brooks' letter, and I quote:

  "This work was completed on January 7, 1942, and the No. 15 was
assigned to the door.  After this work was completed, gold was
stored in the corridor for a time during which the door was
locked and sealed."

Mrs. Brooks does not tell us for how long a time, much less why! 
But thanks to our own information, she doesn't have to tell us.

   I suggest that you replay Mrs. Brooks' letter all the way
through and see for yourself what you will pick up.  For example,
listen to all the assertions and denials that are all couched in
the words, quote: "Our records show ..." or "We have no
record..."--this coming from the same office whose records are so
suspect in other ways.

   Records of the quality of gold stored in Fort Knox and
elsewhere, as I have revealed on other occasions, have disagreed
with one another in glaring ways.  The official Mint records omit
shipments we can prove from Fort Knox.  Even the case of the
missing experimental aluminum pennies that has erupted lately is
another example of the 'dependability' of United States Mint

   But notice also that the letter spends the least time on the
most important matter of all--the radioactive plutonium poison
stored in the Central Core Vault.  It is stated that the
radiation tests by the Military, quote: "...did not disclose any
evidence of radioactive material."  In much the same vein, and
with similar bureaucratic phrases like, quote: "We have no
evidence...", the Kentucky Department of Human Resources claims
that there is nothing to worry about.  But, my friend, plutonium
radiation is very hard to detect, yet very deadly if it gets
inside your body.  Experts sum it up with the phrase:

  "If there is enough plutonium to detect, it is already too

Therefore nothing less than a serious, comprehensive, honest
check by top experts with the best equipment available can be
considered satisfactory.  The stakes for over 36-million
Americans in the Southeast United States are too high to settle
for less.  The United States Government expects you to just take
their word for it regardless of what they may tell you.  No
proof, no criteria, just believe what they say.


   Well, my friend, I do not ask you to do that.  I am now going
to issue a challenge to the federal government either to confirm
or refute my charges about the plutonium poison leaking from the
Bullion Depository at Fort Knox--openly, fairly, and
conclusively.  Furthermore, I am going to state clearly what my
criteria are for a test of my charges that I believe the American
people could accept and believe in.

   Here specifically is what I propose:

First, formation of a truly blue-ribbon committee to test for
plutonium poison leakage from the Bullion Depository at Fort
Knox, this committee to consist of scientists, recognized
authorities fully qualified for such a task.  If my challenge is
accepted, the committee must include certain individuals whose
names I will reveal at that time.  The Government may nominate an
equal number of scientists to the committee.  However, my
nominees will be men who are not my employees or associates; and
likewise any members of the committee nominated by the Government
must not be federal employees unless my own information indicates
that they can be trusted.  In other words, the committee must be
independent and totally unbiased.

Second, this committee is to be given complete authority and
discretion over the conduct of the plutonium poison
investigation.  They are to be provided at federal government
expense with any and all technical assistance they may request as
well as the most up-to-date and effective instrumentation.  This
must include the 1026 multichannel analyzer and any other devices
they may specify.  They must also have the right by majority vote
of the committee to add other experts to their investigating
committee if they deem it necessary.  They are not to be
interfered with or limited in any way.  Should federal or other
authorities choose to impose limitations, the investigating
committee shall be empowered to immediately state any objections
they may have to these limitations over live nation-wide
television and radio so that their message cannot be edited out
or reinterpreted by anyone else.

Third: Upon completion of their investigation, the investigating
committee shall be granted up to one hour of live broadcast time
on nation-wide radio and television to present their findings,
and also their recommendations if my charges are confirmed.  I am
willing to accept their conclusion as final if it is unanimous,
and the federal government must agree to do the same.

                          - - - - - - -

   There is no time to be lost.  If you agree that my proposal is
reasonable, start passing the word and applying public opinion
pressure to make it happen.  Otherwise the ever-expanding control
exercised by the Rockefeller Brothers will prevent it.  It is UP
TO YOU, because the once free, once great major media in America
are being gobbled up ever more completely by the Rockefellers.

   Their latest victim is the mighty Hearst publishing empire,
whose publications reach a total audience of nearly 86-million
adults.  This take-over is the bottom line in the tragic Patty
Hearst case involving the CIA-financed SLA.  A stock transfer to
a tax-free Foundation controlled by the Rockefellers was the
objective, and it has now been accomplished.

   It's sad that we have to look overseas to see any meaningful
reporting about the Fort Knox plutonium disaster.  In the
Financial Times of London for Thursday December 11, 1975, the
story was broken by C. Gordon Tether whose financial column is
read the world over.  In his article titled "A NEW TWIST OF FORT
KNOX SAGA", he reviews the Fort Knox Gold Scandal cover-up and
then informs his readers of the latest charges concerning
plutonium.  He ends the article with words that no columnist of
his stature in America has yet dared to write, and I quote:

  "But whatever the cost in terms of loss of face, might not the
United States authorities be well advised to do whatever is
necessary to demonstrate that there is no Ft. Knox cover-up?  In
the light of what is happening in the United States during the
past few years, deeds inevitably now speak louder than words; and
the refusal to prove that they have nothing to hide is inevitably
destined to go on fostering precisely the opposite impression."

Topic #2--On December 11, 1975, New York City went into default. 
Hundreds of millions of dollars in City notes came due on that
day, and the City did not pay as promised.  A DEFAULT is nothing
more or less than a failure to pay, and that's exactly what
happened.  "But wait a minute", you may say.  "President Ford
announced that he would ask Congress to give New York City
2.3-billion dollars in loans because New York bailed itself out. 
What's going on here?"

   What is going on, my friend, is just another Rockefeller shell
game.  New York City has declared a three-year moratorium, so
called, on payment of 1.6-billion dollars of City notes.  Anyone
holding one of those notes cannot cash it in for three years, and
will also receive a lowered rate of interest during that time.

   New York noteholders do have another choice though.  Until
December 29, a few days from now, these noteholders may, if they
wish, trade their notes for bonds issued by the "Municipal
Assistance Corporation", or otherwise known as "MAC", on behalf
of New York City.  These bonds cannot be cashed in for 10 years
or more, but they carry a higher rate of interest.  And, oh yes,
there's one other little uncertainty: MAC is a so-called "moral
obligation agency", an idea given birth by Nelson Rockefeller and
his own lawyer John Mitchell, and its bonds are "moral obligation
bonds."  Its promise to pay the bonds when they come due is not
backed up by a legal obligation on the part of New York City, New
York State, or anyone else.  Either way, the person who simply
wants to cash in his City note as it comes due is now out of
luck, he can't do it; so New York City is in default.

   Don't be misled by the fact that the major media under
Rockefeller control are not using that word "default" for the
time being.  As I pointed out last month in my monthly AUDIO
LETTER No. 6, the dress rehearsal for default in New York some
weeks ago was used to give that word "default" a very apocalyptic
meaning.  The word is therefore being saved for the right moment.

   Meanwhile, the effect of this New York failure to pay is
already spreading through our economy.  Municipalities all over
America, and even abroad, are suddenly finding it hard to sell
the bonds.  As the municipal bond market dries up, so will funds
for public employees, projects, etc.  The domino effect has
already started, but our advance revelations have made it
dangerous for them to highlight this just yet.  But you can be
sure that the word "default" has not been so carefully given its
present frightening connotations without a purpose--and it may be
that we will all see that purpose within a matter of a few days. 
A court ruling is due soon concerning the Constitutionality of
the so-called moratorium imposed by New York.  Should it be ruled
unConstitutional, financial chaos will be the result in New York,
and that chaos will quickly be labeled "default."

   There are a whole string of other time bombs like that too,
all ticking away.  When the time is just right, the Rockefeller
Brothers can set off whichever one is the handiest.  When they
do, the results will be the same, regardless of the exact timing. 
Armed with this knowledge, I hope you have taken the necessary
steps to protect yourself, such as I described in my AUDIO BOOK

   Meanwhile, gradualism continues to be the word for the step by
step actions of the Rockefeller Brothers; so if you watch the
Stock Market, for example, don't fall into the trap of reading
great significance into the daily up-and-down wiggles.  What
counts is the month-to-month trend--and that is down.  The Stock
Market crash actually began in July 1975, as I said it would, but
it does not yet suit the purposes of the Rockefeller Brothers for
this to be obvious to all.  Instead, the overall market is
sinking downward in gradual, almost imperceptible phases.  It is
crashing in slow motion like a bad dream.

   Meanwhile most people--that is, those who do not specialize in
the Stock Market and financial matters--generally keep track of
little more than the Dow Jones industrial average.  There are
nearly 2,000 stocks traded on the New York Stock Exchange but the
Dow index is an average of just 30 of them.  They were chosen to
be representative of the whole Market, assuming no manipulation,
but that assumption is no longer correct.  Very special attention
is paid to the manipulation of prices of these 30 stocks.  As a
result, the real behavior of the Market can be completely hidden
from the general public.  Whenever man is involved, races will be

   Turning to the monetary picture, a development I first
revealed in April of this year has just happened.  At the 1975
"International Gold and Monetary Conference" here in Washington,
D.C.,  I revealed confidential information to the effect that the
Soviet Union would soon be issuing an international gold ruble,
and just a few days ago it happened.  The Soviet Union has
introduced their "chervonetz", or 10-ruble gold piece.  It bears
the date 1975, and only 250,000 have been minted, 50,000 of which
are already here in the United States out of 125,000 to be
consigned to the United States.  Under a 1923 Soviet law it is
legal tender, making it convertible.  This new gold coin is an
attempt by the Russians for the first time in 52 years to
penetrate the world gold-coin market and to compete directly with
the "krugerrand" issued by South Africa.  The chervonetz is about
one-quarter of the size and value of the krugerrand, which means
that South Africa will have to take measures to compete with it.

   The other major event, supposedly in the monetary sphere, is
the Monetary Conference, so called, at Rambouillet Castle near
Paris late last month.  It was a summit meeting of the Big
Six--the United States, France, Britain, West Germany, Italy, and
Japan, but please note that Canada was not there, and for very
good reasons.

   First, here's what happened, then I will explain why it
happened, which is far more important.

   Treasury Secretary Simon said on his way back from the meeting
which took place over the week-end of November 16, 1975, that a
compromise had been reached on exchange rates, among other
things.  France wanted fixed rates, while the United States had
been campaigning for a "free" float to continue.  The compromise
that was reached is just what I had told you it would be: stable
yet flexible rates of exchange, which they chose to call a
"managed float."  Simon also said he hoped that, quote: "the
agreement will be approved at an international meeting in
January, and that Congress will readily approve necessary changes
in the Articles governing the operation of the International
Monetary Fund."

   Now a "managed float" from a legal point of view does not
require any change in the Articles that govern the IMF unless it
changes the par value of gold.  So what is brewing now is a
system of so-called "stable yet flexible rates of exchange"
indirectly tied to a par value of gold.  I revealed in my monthly
AUDIO LETTER No. 5 for October 1975 that the plan is to repeg
gold at or about $195.00 per ounce, and this is still on track. 
This, in effect, will amount to still another devaluation of the
dollar, and the official price of gold ($42.22) will be abolished
beginning early next year.  Keep in mind that the private gold
markets will not be closed; and after this action, private gold
prices will go past the $195 mark.  A leapfrog condition will
have been set in motion that will jack the price of gold higher
and higher, and the process will be intensified by the coming war
and world-wide economic problems.  David Rockefeller's gold
skyrocket will be launched at last; but the 50-million ounces of
gold to be sold by the IMF will never reach the private market,
going instead to the central bankers by way of sale, auction, or
restitution.  Five-million ounces of this, returned to the United
States under the restitution provision, will be used in an
attempt to continue to cover up the Fort Knox Gold Scandal along
with gold now being smuggled into the United States by the CIA
for the private coffers of the Rockefeller Brothers.

   The biggest question about Rambouillet is: Why did the United
States compromise?  The answer is that a "free-floating" system
would be too uncontrollable during the upcoming limited nuclear
war against the Arab OPEC nations which is targeted to begin late
in February 1976, just two months from now.  So the United States
had to compromise to complete its preparations for this war.

   What I am telling you, my friend, is a military secret, or was
until I revealed it in detail in my monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6
last month.  The code name for this military attack, by the way,
is "OPERATION COBRA", and preparations for it are moving rapidly. 
Already the first detachment of crack United States Marines are
now in Germany ready for swift deployment into the Sinai, where
war will break out; and the build-up toward the staged
provocation to ignite the conflict--namely, an attack on the
so-called American advisers in the Sinai--is progressing
steadily.  Only today, December 21, 1975, the latest step was
taken in this plan when a CIA-supported group made a provocative
attack on OPEC Oil Ministers at their headquarters in Vienna,
Austria.  This is intended to lead, by stages, to reprisal
actions against the Americans stationed in the Sinai.


   Now I turn briefly to Topic #3.

Topic #3--As I explained last month, the limited nuclear war
which is scheduled to begin soon in the Middle East is only a
part of a much larger picture.  The Rockefeller Brothers have
designs on India, while the Soviet Union has its eyes on China. 
In resource-rich Africa, both the Rockefellers and their Soviet
allies have an interest.  So the real theater in the war now
brewing is Asia.  After the OPEC oil wells are capped by the
nuclear strike, Russia's western flank (Europe) will be crippled
and Africa will be more easily finished off by the guerrilla
warfare already going on there.  Oil-hungry Japan will be thrown
into the arms of Red China which, by the way, has just announced
it can now export oil; and the stage will be set for the big
Asian war that is to be the next round in the bloody game of
global monopoly.  The strategy of all this was spelled out in my
monthly AUDIO LETTER No. 6 last month.  My purpose now, however,
is simply to point out the basic nature of all this.

   It is, my friend, a DRIVE FOR CONTROL--control of people, of
resources, of the entire world.  Furthermore, it is a product of
unholy alliance between the State Socialists in the Soviet Union
and the Corporate Socialists in the United States, the
Rockefeller Brothers and their client followers.

   Many people mistake the Rockefeller Brothers for capitalists,
but that is not at all what they are.  David Rockefeller, for
example, has been quoted as saying, "I believe in the enterprise
system", but he does not say "free", much less "competitive
enterprise."  The entire Rockefeller empire is built on the exact
opposite of that--monopolies and trusts.  Their major
multinational corporations are an ingenious device for casting
off loyalties to any country, and they are already more powerful,
collectively, than most nations.  The Rockefellers, you see, are
Corporate Socialists.  Corporate Socialism and State Socialism
are nothing more than two sides of the same coin.  Both boil down
to the same thing--dictatorships or near-dictatorships--enabling
a very few people to control everyone else.  Once you grasp this
fact, the alliance between the Rockefellers and the Soviets will
no longer surprise you, nor will the fact that the Russian
Revolution in 1917 was financed by the Rockefeller interests.

   The State Socialism of Nazi Germany also falls into place
since it, too, was just another version of the same pattern.  In
all of these cases, as well as many others we see today, the
Corporate Socialist empire of the Rockefeller Brothers gains
handsomely--mineral riches, oil, and other rewards--in return for
cooperation with State Socialism.

   Thus it is that Secretary of State Henry Kissinger, a
Rockefeller agent for 20 years and more, defends the Soviet Union
against charges of cheating on the so-called SALT Arms Limitation
agreement, but allows his out-going Ambassador to Canada to
publicly accuse our closest neighbor of being "no longer reliable
or to be trusted."  Kissinger speaks not for you or me, but for
the Rockefeller Brothers; and to them, Russia is the ally, the
friend, while our close friends in Canada are the 'enemy', the
people not to be trusted, because Canada's government now knows
what is in the wind and they are taking all the necessary steps
to weather the storm.  The Canadian government wants no part of
the coming war, monetary chaos, and all the rest of it, and has
privately said so to Kissinger in no uncertain terms.  So Canada
has become 'unreliable', which means outside the circle of firm
Rockefeller control.  Bravo for Canada!  Long may she continue on
her independent course.

   Ultimately the greedy misdeeds of the Rockefeller Brothers and
their allies will be their eventual undoing.  Even now both
Nelson Rockefeller and Henry Kissinger have doomed themselves by
handling some of the gold that was taken out of Fort Knox.  That
gold was contaminated by the radioactive plutonium-239 super
poison, and now their bodies are contaminated with it.  Even
though they and the rest of the Rockefeller organization may well
succeed in destroying our Republic IF WE DO NOT ACT, they will
not live long to enjoy it.  What poetic justice!  Their dose is
even stronger than that received by the Congressmen and newsmen
who visited the Bullion Depository at Fort Knox in September
1974.  Yes, eventually, the huge empire of the Rockefeller
Brothers and their allies will tear itself apart, and perhaps
destroy the world in the process.  But meanwhile, IF WE DO NOT
ACT NOW, there will be untold suffering for millions--ourselves,
our children, and probably our children's children.  Can we
possibly sit by and let that happen?  Or do we act NOW, while we
still can, and take back our rightful control over our own
destinies?  For me, there can be only one choice, and I hope for
YOU as well.

   Until next month, this is Dr. Beter.  I wish all of you a
blessed Christmas and a healthy, happy, holy New Year.  May God
bless each and every one of you.